Microsoft
■■ m
t.
i&k-
upmi
Build exactly the skills you need,
Learn at the pace you want
Practice files
plus ebook
Microsoft
Microsoft* Windows' 8
Step by Step
Ciprian Adrian Rusen
Joli Ballew
Published with the authorization of Microsoft Corporation by:
O'Reilly Media, Inc.
1005 Gravenstein Highway North
Sebastopol, California 95472
Copyright © 2012 by Ciprian Rusen and Joli Ballew.
All rights reserved. No part of the contents of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or
by any means without the written permission of the publisher.
ISBN: 978-0-7356-6402-9
123456789 QG 765432
Printed and bound in the United States of America.
Microsoft Press books are available through booksellers and distributors worldwide. If you need support
related to this book, email Microsoft Press Book Support at mspinput@microsoft.com. Please tell us what
you think of this book at http://www.microsoft.com/learning/booksurvey.
Microsoft and the trademarks listed at http://www.microsoft.com/about/legal/en/us/lntellectualProperty/
Trademarks/EN-US.aspx are trademarks of the Microsoft group of companies. All other marks are property
of their respective owners.
The example companies, organizations, products, domain names, email addresses, logos, people, places,
and events depicted herein are fictitious. No association with any real company, organization, product,
domain name, email address, logo, person, place, or event is intended or should be inferred.
This book expresses the authors' views and opinions. The information contained in this book is provided
without any express, statutory, or implied warranties. Neither the authors, O'Reilly Media, Inc., Microsoft
Corporation, nor its resellers, or distributors will be held liable for any damages caused or alleged to be
caused either directly or indirectly by this book.
Acquisitions and Developmental Editor: Kenyon Brown
Production Editor: Melanie Yarbrough
Editorial Production: nSight, Inc.
Technical Reviewer: Todd Meister
Cover Composition: Girvin
Illustrator: Rebecca Demarest
Contents
Introducing Windows 8 xv
Windows 8 Features by Edition xv
Minimum System Requirements xvii
What's Different from Windows 7? xviii
Which Edition of Windows 8 Should I Buy? xx
Let's Get Started xx
Who This Book Is For xx
What This Book Is About xxi
Acknowledgments xxi
Modifying the Display of the Ribbon in File Explorer xxi
Dynamic Ribbon Elements xxiii
Changing the Width of the Ribbon xxiv
Adapting Exercise Steps xxv
Conventions and Features in This Book xxvii
Downloading and Using the Practice Files xxix
Getting Support and Giving Feedback xxx
Errata xxx
We Want to Hear from You xxxi
Stay in Touch xxxi
1 Introducing Windows 8 1
Setting Up Windows 8 2
Using the Lock Screen 3
Exploring the Start Screen 5
Moving Around in the Start Screen 7
Moving Tiles on the Start Screen 9
Customizing the Start Screen with Live Tiles 10
Using Charms 12
Searching for Data, Programs, Files, and Settings 16
Accessing the Traditional Desktop 19
Using the Taskbar and Start Button 20
Contents iii
Working with Multiple Windows and Apps 25
Working with PC Settings and Control Panel 35
Ending a Computing Session 43
Key Points 45
2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way
You Want 47
Personalizing the Start Screen 48
Personalizing the Lock Screen 52
Changing Your User Account Type 55
Customizing Your User Account Settings 57
Personalizing the Desktop 60
Changing How the Taskbar Looks 62
Changing the Sound Scheme 67
Accessing and Exploring Advanced Settings 68
Switching to a Different Power Plan 70
Key Points 72
3 Using Apps on the Start Screen 75^
Using the Photos App 76
Using the Music App 82
Using the Video App 89
Using the Maps App 90
Exploring the Other Apps 93
Managing Apps for the Long Term 98
Exploring Accessories and Tools 100
Key Points 104
iv Contents
4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and
Folders 107
Understanding Files, Folders, and Libraries 108
Explaining the Most Common File Types 112
Accessing Your User Folders 117
Understanding User Folders 120
Saving Files Effectively 122
Understanding Libraries 124
Navigating the File Explorer Ribbon Interface 126
Organizing Files and Folders 131
Renaming Files 134
Sharing Files with the Share Tab 136
Customizing File Explorer with the View Tab 137
Searching in File Explorer 141
Customizing Libraries 142
Working with Deleted Files and the
Recycle Bin 147
Key Points 149
5 Using Internet Explorer 10 151
What Is New about Internet Explorer 10 152
Launching Internet Explorer 154
Using the Internet Explorer App 155
Using the Internet Explorer Desktop Application 162
Pinning Websites to the Start Screen 164
Browsing the Web Using the InPrivate Mode 166
Downloading Files from the Internet 168
Setting the Default Internet Explorer Version 170
Key Points 174
Contents
6 Using SkyDrive 177
Using SkyDrive 178
Browsing SkyDrive from the SkyDrive App 179
Uploading a File with the SkyDrive App 183
Downloading a File with the SkyDrive App 186
Accessing SkyDrive from a Web Browser 188
Synchronizing Your Windows 8 Settings 190
Key Points 193
7 Using the Social Apps 195
Using the Mail App 196
Adding a Hotmail Account to the Mail App 198
Sending an Email with a SkyDrive Attachment 202
Using the People App 205
Connecting to Your Facebook Account Using the People App 207
Adding a New Contact to the People App 212
Using the Calendar App 214
Adding an Event to Your Calendar 217
Using the Messaging App 221
Starting a Conversation with the Messaging App 223
Using the Camera App 226
Key Points 228
8 Shopping in the Windows Store 231
Exploring the Landing Page 232
Browsing the Store by Category and Top Free 235
Searching the Store 236
Exploring an App's Listing Page 238
Obtaining and Installing an App 239
Using Apps 241
Updating Apps 242
vi Contents
Reacquiring Apps 243
Write a Review 243
Understanding Subscriptions and In-App Purchases 245
Key Points 245
9 Having Fun with Multimedia 247
Exploring the Windows Media Player Interface 248
Ripping Your CD Collection 253
Creating and Burning Playlists 255
Sharing Media with a Network 258
Obtaining Windows Media Center 259
Learn About Windows Media Center Features 261
Key Points 263
10 Playing Games 265
What's Required for Playing Games 265
Where to Find Games 266
Calculating Your Windows Experience Index 268
Connecting Windows 8 to Your Xbox 272
Key Points 275
11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet 277
Understanding the Jargon: Router, ISP, Network Adapter, and Other Terminology 278
Using the Networking and Sharing Center 279
Connecting to a Wireless Network 282
Connecting to a Hidden Wireless Network 290
Connecting to the Internet through a Mobile Modem 296
Changing the Network Profile of a Network 297
Key Points 300
Contents vii
12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer 303
What Is a User Account and How Many Do I Need? 304
Introducing the Microsoft Account (Windows Live ID) 306
Accessing the User Accounts Settings 307
Adding a New User Account 311
Switching between User Accounts 319
Changing the Password for Your User Account 321
Creating a Picture Password for Your User Account 325
Creating a PIN for Your User Account 331
Changing a User Account Picture 334
Changing a User Account Name 337
Changing a User Account Type 339
Deleting a User Account 342
Key Points 347
13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network 349
Understanding the Default Network Sharing Settings 350
Setting Up a Homegroup 355
Joining a Homegroup 361
Finding Your Homegroup Password 363
Changing the Password of a Homegroup 364
Accessing Homegroup Computers and Devices 367
Leaving a Homegroup 368
Using the Sharing Wizard to Share with the Homegroup 369
Using the Sharing Wizard to Share with Specific People 371
Sharing a Printer with Computers on Your Network 377
Sharing a Printer with Your Homegroup 382
Enabling the Sharing Wizard 385
Key Points 387
viii Contents
14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure 389
Understanding the User Account Control (UAC) 390
Changing the UAC Level 393
Using the Windows Firewall 396
Turning Windows Firewall Off or On 399
Customizing the List of Allowed Programs 402
Adding New Apps to the Allowed List 405
Removing Apps from the Allowed List 407
Restoring the Windows Firewall Default Settings 409
Using Windows Defender 410
Removing Quarantined Files 414
Improving Your Password Habits 419
Reasons to Consider Commercial Security Solutions 419
Key Points 421
15 Preventing Problems 423
Keeping Your System Up to Date with Windows Update 424
Checking for and Installing Available Updates 427
Using File History in Windows 8 429
Turning On File History 435
Restoring Files with File History 437
Using System Restore 440
Launching System Restore 441
Restoring to a Previous State with System Restore 443
Using the Action Center 447
Configuring the Messages Action Center Shows 450
Key Points 452
Contents ix
16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use 455
Turning on Family Safety 456
Setting Time Limits and Application Restrictions 459
Setting Restrictions for Games and Windows Store Apps 468
Setting Restrictions for Websites and Downloads 473
Understanding Messages Family Safety Shows 478
Managing Family Safety Settings and Viewing Activity Reports 479
Key Points 483
17 Making My Computer Accessible 485
Accessing the Ease of Access Center 486
Letting Windows Suggest Ease of Access Settings 489
Using the Magnifier 492
Using Narrator 496
Using the On-Screen Keyboard 498
Set Up and Use Windows Speech Recognition 502
Key Points 507
18 Using Windows 8 at Work 509
Using the Windows Mobility Center 510
Turning On Presentation Mode 512
Using BitLocker to Encrypt Drives 515
Encrypting the Operating System Drive with BitLocker 518
Encrypting Removable Data Drives with BitLocker 526
Accessing an Encrypted Removable Drive 529
Decrypting a BitLocker-Protected Drive 530
Key Points 531
Contents
19 Using Windows 8 on Touch-Compatible Devices 533
Setting Up Touch Hardware 534
Learning General Touch Gestures 537
Using Multi-Touch Gestures 541
Changing Touch-Input Settings 542
Using the Math Input Panel 546
Key Points 549
20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8
Computing Experience 551
Adding Shut Down, Restart, Sign Out, and Other Shortcuts to the Start Screen 552
Adding a Show Start Shortcut to the Desktop 554
Adding a Control Panel Shortcut to the Start Screen 554
Naming Groups of Shortcuts on the Start Screen 556
Adding Clocks and Time Zones to the Windows Taskbar 559
Adding the Recycle Bin to the Windows Taskbar 561
Using the Hidden System Menu 562
Logging On to Windows 8 Automatically, Without Entering Your Password Each Time. . 563
Running an Application as Administrator 565
Adding or Removing Windows Features 567
Turning Off Notifications for Windows 8 Apps 570
Defragmenting a Disk Drive Manually 573
Freeing Up Disk Space with Disk Cleanup 575
Changing the Location of the Downloads Folder and Other User Folders 578
Burning a Disc with File Explorer 581
Accessing SkyDrive from the Desktop and File Explorer 584
Using Shortened URLs When You Want to Share Files from SkyDrive 586
Five Ways to Launch Task Manager in Windows 8 589
Optimizing Startup Items with Task Manager 591
Changing the Defaults for Programs, File Extensions, and AutoPlay Dialog Boxes 595
Key Points 599
Contents xi
21 Troubleshooting Problems 601
Resolve Most Problems with Common Solutions 602
Letting Windows Fix Problems for You 605
Using Help and Support 608
Asking for Remote Assistance 610
Exploring Advanced Troubleshooting Tools 615
Refreshing Your PC 622
Resetting Your PC 623
Key Points 624
A Using Keyboard Shortcuts and Touch
Gestures in Windows 8 627
Learning Keyboard Shortcuts for Windows 8 627
Exploring Touch Keyboard Shortcuts 633
Using Touch Gestures in Windows 8 635
Key Points 638
B Enhancements for Using Multiple Displays in
Windows 8 641
Using Windows 8 with a Dual-Monitor Setup 642
C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8 647
Installing Windows 8 647
Dual-booting Windows 8 and Other Windows Versions 668
Upgrading to Windows 8 668
Key Points 685
xii Contents
D Moving Your Data and Settings to Windows 8 687
Transferring Your Data to Windows 8 with Windows Easy Transfer 687
Key Points 695
Glossary 697
Index 719
About the Authors 743
Contents xiii
Introducing Windows 8
Windows 8 is the latest operating system from Microsoft, launched three years after the
successful Windows 7. Unlike recent versions, Windows 8 brings many important changes to
the world of Windows operating systems.
If Windows 7 was made to run on more traditional computers such as laptops, desktops,
or netbooks, Windows 8 was made to run on a wider variety of devices. It can also be used
successfully on tablets, computers with touch screens, and hybrids that combine the versa-
tility of a laptop with the mobility of a tablet.
If Windows 7 was an incremental update to Windows Vista, Windows 8 is a re-imagination
of the Windows experience. It brings to the table many new features and improvements
and, most of all, a new user interface inspired by the work Microsoft did on the Windows
Phone platform. The new interface is designed with touch-compatible devices in mind, but
it also runs perfectly on computers with traditional mouse and keyboard input.
Windows 8 also adds support for ARM processors, used in today's smartphones and tablets.
It is the first time Windows can be used on processors other than those made by Intel or
AMD (x86 architecture).
If you have read about Windows 8 or you have seen it in action, you know that there are
many new things to learn, even if you are familiar with Windows 7. In this book, you'll learn
not only which are the most important changes Windows 8 introduces but also how to use
the most important tools and features so that you are productive and feel at ease as soon
as possible.
Windows 8 Features by Edition
There are three main editions of Windows 8: Windows 8, Windows 8 Pro, and Windows
RT. Consumers can purchase the first two from stores selling Windows 8. Windows RT is
available only pre-installed on PCs and tablets powered by ARM processors such as those
used in today's smartphones and tablets; as a consumer, you can't purchase Windows RT
separately and install it on your own computer or device. A Windows 8 Enterprise edition is
available only to large businesses.
Windows 8, Windows 8 Pro, and Windows 8 Enterprise are available in both 32-bit and
64-bit editions.
Introduction xv
The key features of each edition of Windows 8 are included in the following table.
Feature name
Windows 8
Windows 8
Pro
Windows
RT
Upgrades from Windows 7 Starter, Home Basic,
Home Premium
X
X
Upgrades from Windows 7 Professional, Ultimate
X
Start screen, Semantic Zoom,
live tiles
X
X
X
Windows Store
X
X
X
Apps (Mail, Calendar, People, Messaging, Photos,
SkyDrive, Reader, Music, Video, etc.)
X
X
X
Microsoft Office (Word, Excel
OneNote)
, PowerPoint,
X
Internet Explorer 10
X
X
X
Device encryption
X
Connected standby
X
X
X
Microsoft account
X
X
X
Desktop
X
X
X
Installation of x86/64 and des
iktop software
X
X
File Explorer
X
X
X
Windows Defender
X
X
X
SmartScreen
X
X
X
Windows Update
X
X
X
Enhanced Task Manager
X
X
X
Switch languages on the fly (Language Packs)
X
X
X
Better multiple monitor support
X
X
X
Storage Spaces
X
X
Windows Media Player
X
X
Exchange ActiveSync
X
X
X
File history
X
X
X
ISO /VHD mount
X
X
X
Mobile broadband features
X
X
X
Picture password
X
X
X
Play To
X
X
X
Remote Desktop (client)
X
X
X
Reset and refresh your computer or device
X
X
X
Snap
X
X
X
xvi Introduction
Touch and Thumb keyboard
X
X
X
Trusted boot
X
X
X
VPN client
X
X
X
BitLocker and BitLocker To Go
X
Boot from VHD
X
Client Hyper-V
X
Domain Join
X
Encrypting File System
X
Group Policy
X
Remote Desktop (host)
X
Windows 8 Enterprise provides all the features in Windows 8 Pro and additional features to
assist with IT organization (Windows To Go, AppLocker, App Deployment, and so on). This
edition is available only to Software Assurance customers.
Minimum System Requirements
To run Windows 8, Microsoft recommends using a computer or device that has at least:
■ 1 GHz or faster processor
■1GB RAM (32-bit) or 2 GB RAM (64-bit)
■ 16 GB available hard disk space (32-bit) or 20 GB (64-bit)
■ DirectX 9 graphics device with WDDM 10 or higher driver
However, this is the bare minimum required for Windows 8 to run, and there are a few
caveats you need to be aware of:
■ Windows 8 apps have a minimum 1024 x 768 screen resolution. If you attempt to run
the new Windows 8 apps with less than this resolution (e.g., 800 x 600, 1024 x 600),
you'll receive an error message.
■ To use the snap feature with the new Windows 8 apps, you must have a minimum
resolution of 1366 x 768. Therefore, it is best to use Windows 8 on a display that has
at least this level of resolution. The higher the maximum supported resolution, the
better.
■ Using Windows 8 on a single-core processor running at 1 GHz is possible but won't
be a great experience. Using at least a dual-core processor running at 1 GHz (proces-
sors that were sold from 2006 onward) is recommended. Windows 8 is optimized
Introduction xvii
to work better than Windows 7 with modern processors. Therefore, the newer the
processor, the smoother the experience.
■ Using the 32-bit version of Windows 8 on a system with 1 GB of RAM will work, but
the experience won't be great. For a smooth experience, using at least 2 GB of RAM,
regardless of the Windows 8 version you are using, is recommended.
■ The 16 GB or 20 GB (depending on the version) of space you must have available on
your hard disk is the bare minimum for installing and using Windows 8. If you plan
to install many apps and games, having at least 25 GB or more for the partition on
which Windows 8 is installed is recommended.
■ Using Windows 8 on solid state disks (SSDs) instead of traditional hard drives will
provide a huge performance increase. You will enjoy the fastest start procedure ever
experienced with a Windows operating system. Also, the apps and games will launch
much faster than with traditional hard disk drives.
If you plan to install Windows 8 by yourself, read Appendix C, "Installing and Upgrading
to Windows 8." It provides clear, step-by-step instructions for installing and upgrading to
Windows 8.
What's Different from Windows 7?
The list of differences is long and starts with many differences that are not visible at first.
First of all, Windows 8 was designed to be slimmer and lighter than Windows 7. Its aim is to
work on a multitude of devices, including desktops, laptops, hybrids such as the Microsoft
Surface (half-laptop and half-tablet), or tablets. That's why the core of Windows 8 is lighter
than that of Windows 7. This means faster start and shutdown times — incredibly fast when
using SSDs. A start in five seconds is very feasible with Windows 8 on a fast computer. A
shutdown in three seconds is also possible.
Windows 8 also runs better on newer hardware components. For example, it is able to
deliver better performance on newer processors than Windows 7 can.
It supports touch displays, implemented at a level never seen before on Windows operating
systems. Windows 8 can run on touch-compatible devices as small as 10.6 inches wide or on
huge 82-inch touch displays, and it provides better support for using multiple displays.
There are also many visible changes when compared to Windows 7. This book covers only
the ones the authors consider most important.
xviii Introduction
A NEW LOCK SCREEN AND NEW LOGON PROCEDURE Windows 8 can be set to
display useful data on the Lock screen, and you can log on using new methods (PIN
or picture password), not just with your user account password.
THE START MENU HAS BEEN REPLACED BY THE START SCREEN Unlike the Start
menu, the Start screen uses all the available screen space to display shortcuts to
installed apps. It can also be set to display live data from your most used apps. Search
works faster than from the Start menu, and it can be used very easily with touch-
compatible displays.
WINDOWS STORE This a new feature that provides a one-stop shop for finding,
purchasing, and installing apps and games.
NEW WINDOWS 8 APPS These are delivered only with Windows 8. They provide
easy access to your mail, calendar, social networks, photos, music, videos, and so on.
INTERNET EXPLORER 10 This version of Internet Explorer has received many
enhancements. It is the fastest, safest, and most standards-compliant version of
Internet Explorer ever made.
LOG ON WITH YOUR MICROSOFT ACCOUNT You can use Windows 8 with your
Microsoft account and synchronize your data and settings automatically across
Windows 8 computers and devices.
A NEW FILE EXPLORER This much improved version of Windows Explorer (as named
in Windows 7) includes a ribbon-based interface for easy access to all the important
functions, and file copying has been improved from Windows 7.
ENHANCED WINDOWS DEFENDER This version now provides complete antivirus
and antispyware protection.
A NEW TASK MANAGER Task Manager has been dramatically improved. It is not
only easier to use but provides more useful functions for managing your system,
apps, and available resources.
SWITCH LANGUAGES ON THE FLY Unlike Windows 7, with Windows 8 you don't
need to purchase a special version to install a new display language. You can switch
between them on the fly in all versions of Windows 8.
WINDOWS MEDIA CENTER It's been removed in Windows 8 and is available as an
additional purchase.
FILE HISTORY This is a new feature that provides an easy way to make automated
backups of your data.
Introduction xix
■ ENHANCED PARENTAL CONTROLS The parental controls in Windows 8 offer many
improvements from their Windows 7 counterparts.
This list is by no means complete. To discover all the new features in Windows 8, read this
book and experiment with all the new things Windows 8 has to offer.
Which Edition of Windows 8 Should I Buy?
The answer depends on how you plan to use Windows 8. If you are a casual user who needs
to browse the web, use productivity applications, play games, watch movies, and view pic-
tures, then the basic Windows 8 edition will work just fine.
If you are a more knowledgeable user who wants to use more advanced features such as
BitLocker encryption or make Remote Desktop connections to your computer, Windows 8
Pro is a good choice. For small businesses that don't need an expensive enterprise version,
the Windows 8 Pro edition is a very good choice.
The next question worth clarifying is: 32-bit or 64-bit? If you plan to use Windows 8 on an
older computer with less than 4 GB of RAM, the 32-bit edition works just fine.
However, on newer computers, you should always use the 64-bit edition. You get a bit more
performance and security, but most importantly, you get support for large amounts of
RAM. The 32-bit version cannot manage more than 34 GB of RAM memory. If you plan to
use more than that (such as for playing games), you should use the 64-bit edition.
Let's Get Started
Welcome to Windows 8 Step by Step. After reading this book, the authors hope you wil
agree that this book is the best guide for learning how to use Windows 8.
Who This Book Is For
This book is for people new to Windows 8 and Windows 8 apps as well as for those upgrad-
ing from previous versions of Windows to Windows 8.
It's assumed that this book's readers are familiar with earlier Windows operating systems.
Although the readers are new to Windows 8, they are not new computer users. They are
xx Introduction
familiar with the basics of using a computer, using a mouse and keyboard, opening, view-
ing, and saving files, switching between windows, finding content, and so forth.
What This Book Is About
This book is about Windows 8. It covers all the important things you need to learn about
this operating system so that you can be productive when using it.
It starts with setting up Windows 8 for the first time and exploring the new Start screen.
Each chapter covers more advanced information and considerations such as how to
purchase Windows 8 apps, use the new Windows 8 apps, browse the web with Internet
Explorer 10, connect to a network, share files and folders, and prevent problems with your
Windows 8 computer or device. This list is by no means complete; many other topics are
also covered.
The book ends with a list of 20 useful tips and tricks that will improve the experience of
Windows 8 and a few appendixes useful to people who like to do things by themselves such
as installing or upgrading to Windows 8.
Acknowledgments
We would both like to thank Kenyon Brown and the team at Microsoft Press for making this
book possible. It was a lengthy project with lots of work, but the result was worth it. We are
proud of this book, and we hope all our readers will enjoy it and find it useful.
Ciprian would like to thank his teammate at 7 Tutorials — Marte Brengle — for patiently double-
checking all his writing and pointing out mistakes he would not have noticed otherwise.
Joli would like to thank her agent, Neil Salkind, for all his hard work over the years, along
with her family, Jennifer, Andrew, Allison, Dad, and Cosmo.
Modifying the Display of the Ribbon in
File Explorer
The goal of the Windows 8 File Explorer environment, available on the desktop, is to make
finding, sharing, organizing, and working with Word documents, music files, pictures, vid-
eos, and other data as intuitive as possible. In addition, from File Explorer, you can easily
Introduction xxi
access data stored in your homegroup, data on other drives connected to or part of your
computer, and any data available to you on your network.
You access data in File Explorer by selecting the desired folder or location in the Navigation
pane, on the left side of the File Explorer window, and then selecting the desired file(s) in
the content area on the right. With a folder or file selected, you can then use the ribbon to
manage that data. The ribbon contains tabs and groups to help you perform tasks on the
data you select.
Ribbon Tabs
Ribbon Groups
1
1—
1
I^Ze^^T!
— p««> ,
View Manage Manage
- 6
...
...... ^ ,.„
' QtHTMHSf*
ffl Sliest ill
Select none
1
n
^-
-
...
h
Varrh P^rturn
*
@F.rmh„u
lil*«p
Tj Documents
*. KOUW
H Videos
*Jllnm«,mup
E£ Jeli Eil £.-.
Fl Mr t . WuhiinfUiii
:■ Computer
% Network
if GATEWAY
Navigation Pane
Commands are organized on task-specific tabs of the ribbon and in feature-specific groups
on each tab. Commands generally take the form of buttons and lists. Some appear in
galleries. Some groups have related dialog boxes or task panes that contain additional
commands.
Throughout this book, we discuss the commands and ribbon elements associated with the
program feature being discussed. In this topic, we discuss the general appearance of the
ribbon, things that affect its appearance, and ways of locating commands that aren't visible
on compact views of the ribbon.
XXII
Introduction
TIP Some older commands no longer appear on the ribbon but are still available in the
program. You can make these commands available by adding them to the Quick Access
toolbar, located just above the tabs on the ribbon by default, although it can be moved.
Dynamic Ribbon Elements
The ribbon is dynamic, meaning that the appearance of commands on the ribbon changes
as the width of the ribbon changes. A command might be displayed on the ribbon in the
form of a large button, a small button, a small labeled button, or a list entry. As the width of
the ribbon decreases, the size, shape, and presence of buttons on the ribbon adapt to the
available space.
For example, when sufficient horizontal space is available, the buttons on the View tab of
the File Explorer window are spread out, and you can see all the commands available in
each group.
Drop-down list
Small labeled button
Large button
pat [i llcroupmr-
If you decrease the width of the ribbon, small button labels disappear and entire groups of
buttons hide under one button that represents the group. Click the group button to display
a list of the commands available in that group. Depending on the content of the ribbon
you're working with, you might also see small unlabeled buttons or a scroll arrow.
Group button
Introduction
XXIII
Changing the Width of the Ribbon
The width of the ribbon depends on the horizontal space available to it, which depends on
these three factors.
THE WIDTH OF THE PROGRAM WINDOW Maximizing the program window
provides the most space for ribbon elements. You can resize the program window by
clicking the button in its upper-right corner or by dragging the border of a window
that isn't maximized.
TIP On a computer running Windows 8, you can maximize the program window by
dragging its title bar to the top of the screen.
YOUR SCREEN RESOLUTION Screen resolution is the size of your screen display
expressed as pixels wide by pixels high. The greater the screen resolution, the greater
the amount of information that will fit on one screen. Your screen resolution options
depend on your monitor. At the time of writing, the lowest possible screen resolution
was 800 x 600. The highest resolution depends on your monitor and your computer's
display capabilities. In the case of the ribbon, the greater the number of pixels wide
(the first number), the greater the number of buttons that can be shown on the rib-
bon and the larger those buttons can be.
On a computer running Windows 8, you can change your screen resolution from the
Screen Resolution window of Control Panel. You set the resolution by dragging the
pointer on the slider.
Screen Resolution
t
v O Wrh t nnhnl Pnivrl
Change the appearance of your display
Di^l.y:
Resolution:
t.AKHCO *
tHD* 1 DSD (Recommend td) <r\
Make text and aliie
Wut<fe|%Mt&l
High
1 <3,>D x 1 DBO | llrnimmrnilnl)
1024 x76S
AdvjinrrH irttinty.
OK i| C*«*l || W, j
XXIV
Introduction
THE DENSITY OF YOUR SCREEN DISPLAY You might not be aware that you can
change the magnification of everything that appears on your screen by changing the
screen magnification setting in Windows. Setting your screen magnification to 125
percent makes text and user interface elements larger on screen. This increases the
legibility of information, but less fits on each screen.
On a computer running Windows 8, you can change the screen magnification from
the Display window of Control Panel. You can choose one of the standard display
magnification options or create another by setting a custom text size.
(f) ' t W y C nntrnl Panrf i Appraiser nnrf Prnnnnlration I- [Suplny v O Srnrrh ( nnSml Pnm>l p
t'i
Change the size of all items
"V Calibrate color
cnUrq=]uil port ul Ux iLrneq, we LheMwrnim IdoL
OwtgtdfeeliyMtingf
SmjJItf - IMS (default)
^^ m ^^^^—
AdjuiL Umi f,pr LnL
•;§:< Medium - 125%
ri
O Larger *1S0%
H=l B
Luttum kUMH| ophwiv
(""HiKif \vi\y Ivp l«-"j<1 ii/K
Instead of (hanging the si:e of everything on the desktop, change c
mly the text me for & specrlk Item.
The screen magnification is directly related to the density of the text elements on
screen, which is expressed in dots per inch (dpi) or points per inch (ppi). (The terms
are interchangeable and, in fact, are both used in the Windows dialog box in which
you change the setting.) The greater the dpi, the larger the text and user interface
elements appear on screen. By default, Windows displays text and screen elements at
96 dpi. Choosing the Medium — 125 percent — display setting changes the dpi of text
and screen elements to 120. Likewise, choosing Larger increases the dpi even more.
Adapting Exercise Steps
The screen images shown in the exercises in this book were captured at a screen resolu-
tion of 1280 x 768, at 100 percent magnification, and in the default text size (96 dpi). If any
of your settings are different, the ribbon on your screen might not look the same as the
one shown in the book. For example, you might see more or fewer buttons in each of the
groups, the buttons you see might be represented by larger or smaller icons than those
Introduction xxv
shown, or the group might be represented by a button that you click to display the group's
commands.
Instructions to give a command from the ribbon in an exercise appear in this format:
■ On the View tab, in the Layout group, click the Large icons button.
If the command is in a list, the instruction appears in this format.
■ On the Home tab, in the Organize group, click the Copy to button and then, in the
list, click Choose location.
The first time you are instructed to click a specific button in each exercise, an image of the
button is displayed in the page margin to the left of the exercise step.
If differences between your display settings and the book's cause a button on your screen
to look different, you can easily adapt the steps to locate the command. First, click the spec-
ified tab. Then locate the specified group. If a group has been collapsed into a group list or
group button, click the list or button to display the group's commands. Finally, look for a
button that features the same icon in a larger or smaller size than that shown in the book. If
necessary, point to buttons in the group to display their names in ScreenTips.
If you prefer not to have to adapt the steps, set up your screen to match the one in the
book while you read and work through the exercises.
xxvi Introduction
Conventions and Features in
This Book
This book has been designed to lead you, step by step, through all the tasks you're most
likely to want to perform in Windows 8. If you start at the beginning and work your way
through all the exercises, you'll gain enough proficiency to use Windows. However, each
topic is self-contained. If you have worked with a previous version of Windows, or if you
completed all the exercises and later need help remembering how to perform a procedure,
the following features of this book will help you locate specific information.
■ Detailed table of contents Search the listing of the topics and sidebars within each
chapter.
■ Chapter thumb tabs Easily locate the beginning of the chapter you want.
■ Topic-specific running heads Within a chapter, quickly locate the topic you want by
looking at the running heads at the top of odd-numbered pages.
■ Glossary Look up the meaning of a word or the definition of a concept.
■ Keyboard shortcuts If you prefer to work from the keyboard rather than with a
mouse, find all the shortcuts in one place.
■ Detailed index Look up specific tasks and features in the index, which has been
carefully crafted with the reader in mind.
You can save time when reading this book by understanding how the Step by Step series
shows exercise instructions, keys to press, buttons to click, and other information.
Convention Meaning
Numbered steps guide you through hands-on exercises in each
topic.
The Set Up icon precedes a step-by-step exercise and indicates the
practice files that you will use when working through the exercise. It
also indicates any requirements you should attend to or actions you
should take before beginning the exercise.
The Clean Up icon follows a step-by-step exercise and provides
instructions for saving and closing open files or programs before
moving on to another topic. It also suggests ways to reverse any
changes you made to your computer while working through the
exercise.
Introduction xxvii
Convention
Meaning
TIP This section provides a helpful hint or shortcut that makes working
through a task easier.
IMPORTANT
This section points out information that you need to know to
complete the procedure.
TROUBLESHOOTING
This section shows you how to fix a common problem.
NOTE These paragraphs provide a helpful hint or shortcut that makes
working through a task easier.
Ctrl+C A plus sign (+) between two key names means that you must press
those keys at the same time. For example, "Press Alt+Tab" means
that you hold down the Alt key while you press Tab.
Boldface type
Program features that you click or press are shown in boldface type.
Blue italic type
Blue boldface type
Italic type
Terms that are explained in the glossary at the end of the book are
shown in italic type within the chapter.
Text that you are supposed to type appears in color and bold in the
procedures.
Folder paths, URLs, and emphasized words appear in italic type.
XXVIII
Introduction
Downloading and Using the
Practice Files
Before you can complete the exercises in this book, you need to copy the book's practice
files to your computer. These practice files, and other information, can be downloaded from
here:
http://go. microsoft. com/FWLink/?Linkid=263546
Display the detail page in your web browser and follow the instructions for downloading
the files.
IMPORTANT The Windows 8 software is not available from this website,
and install that software before using this book.
You should purchase
The following
I table lists the practice files for this
book.
Chapter
File
Chapter 1:
Introducing Windows 8
Notepad.txt
Chapter 2:
You Want
Making Windows Look and Sound the
Way
Sheep.jpg
Chapter 3: Using Apps on the Start Screen
Carriage.jpg
Farmhouse.jpg
Sheep.JPG
Trees.jpg
Flying over the Hoover Dam.3GP
Chapter 4: Saving, Browsing, and Organizing
Folders
Files and
Notepad Text Document.txt
Sheep.jpg
TakeOff.3GP
Chapter 5: Using Internet Explorer 10
None
Chapter 6: Using SkyDrive
Documentl.docx
Chapter 7: Using the Social Apps
None
Chapter 8: Shopping in the Windows Store
None
Chapter 9: Having Fun with Multimedia
None
Chapter 10: Playing Games
None
Chapter 11: Connecting to a Network and the Internet
None
Introduction
XXIX
Chapter
File
Chapter 12: Allowing Others to Use the Computer
PictureAjpg
PictureBjpg
Chapter 13: Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
None
Chapter 14: Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
None
Chapter 15: Preventing Problems
None
Chapter 16: Supervising a Child's Computer Use
None
Chapter 17: Making My Computer Accessible
None
Chapter 18: Using Windows 8 at Work
None
Chapter 19: Using Windows 8 on Touch-Compatible
Devices
None
Chapter 20: 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8
Computing Experience
Show Start.exe
Lock - Switch User
Recycle Bin
Restart
Shut Down
Sign out
Sleep
Stop Shut Down
Chapter 21: Troubleshooting Problems
None
Getting Support and Giving Feedback
The following sections provide information on errata, book support, feedback, and contact
information.
Errata
Every effort has been made to ensure the accuracy of this book and its companion content.
If you do find an error, please report it on the Microsoft Press site at oreilly.com.
1 Go to http://microsoftpress.oreilly.com.
2 In the Search box, enter the book's ISBN or title.
3 Select your book from the search results.
4 On your book's catalog page, under the cover image, you'll see a list of links.
XXX
Introduction
5 Click View/Submit Errata.
You'll find additional information and services for your book on its catalog page. If you
need additional support, please send an email to Microsoft Press Book Support at mspin-
put@microsoft.com. Please note that product support for Microsoft software is not offered
through the preceding addresses.
We Want to Hear from You
At Microsoft Press, your satisfaction is our top priority and your feedback is our most valu-
able asset. Please tell us what you think of this book at:
http://www. microsoft, com/learning/booksurvey
The survey is short, and we read every one of your comments and ideas. Thanks in advance
for your input!
Stay in Touch
Let's keep the conversation going! We're on Twitter at:
http://twitter. com/MicrosoftPress
Introduction xxxi
Explore
Explore the Start screen, page 5
Use
Use charms, page 13
View
View live thumbnails, page 10
Multitask
Multitask between open desktop windows,
page 26
of a "> i J - i Unlilled - Pa
microsoft now
AN UNOFFK3*l, MCROWFT ROC.
W Piiviite Cloud Rttadmup evefil, Qalur
□ ; i
I H Z f?
1-
^^^^^F
<
+
View Erf* He%.
WO* ® |
©
.-, - liberies
MC M. MS M. M.
rnmmnu
ft Q » »„„*. ^ g-
Cop* Piste g jitopjla- ^Btnimt ( Njj* r ' Properties
Cte&eirt OwiWe New Open
Introducing Windows 8
1
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
Set up Windows 8.
Explore and customize the Start screen.
Customize live tiles.
Access the traditional desktop.
Work with windows and apps.
Work with PC Settings and Control Panel.
End a computing session.
The first time you press the power button on a new computer, laptop, or tablet running
Windows 8, you are prompted to perform a few setup tasks. After those tasks are complete,
each time you press the power button or wake the computer from sleep, the Windows
8 Lock screen appears. Use this screen to unlock the computer and gain access to the
Windows 8 Start screen. The Start screen is the starting point for everything you do with
Windows 8, including accessing apps, the Internet, the desktop and shortcuts you've placed
there, and applications you've installed, such as Microsoft Office.
In this chapter, you'll learn how to work through the primary set up tasks, and then you'll
learn to use the Start screen, open windows on the traditional desktop, access Control
Panel, and safely end a computing session. Along the way, you'll begin to personalize the
computer so that it's uniquely yours.
TIP Do you need a quick refresher on the topics in a chapter? See the key points at the end
of each chapter.
PRACTICE FILES Before you can complete the exercises in this chapter, you need to copy the
book's practice files to your computer. The practice files you'll use to complete the exercises
in this chapter are in the ChapterOl practice files folder. A complete list of practice files is
provided in "Using the Practice Files" at the beginning of this book.
Setting Up Windows 8
The first time you turn on a new computer running Windows 8, you are prompted to per-
sonalize the background color of the Start screen, name your computer, and choose how
you sign in to your computer, among other things. If a network is available, you can opt to
connect to that, too. You might have already done this. However, if you have not, here is a
list of the options you will likely see.
TIP If you have already set up your computer running Windows 8, it is possible to make
changes to your choices using Control Panel and PC Settings if you aren't pleased. You'll
learn how to access Control Panel later in this chapter, and you'll learn about the PC
Settings hub throughout this book.
The Windows 8 setup process prompts you to configure or input the following information.
■ BACKGROUND COLOR You choose the background color by using a slider provided for
that purpose.
■ COMPUTER NAME Your computer must have a name that is unigue on your local area
network. You can't have spaces or special characters in the name, such as !, @, +, and so
on, but you are prompted if you try to input a character that is prohibited.
■ NETWORK If your computer running Windows 8 detects a network, you are prompted
to join it. If you want to join, and if it is a protected network, you must also input the pass-
code. You should connect to your local area network during setup. If you aren't prompted
to join a network during the setup process, but you know one is available, make sure after
setup completes that you've either connected an Ethernet cable or enabled the Wi-Fi
feature on your computer.
■ SETTINGS These settings relate to how and when the computer installs updates; how
Windows 8 protects the computer from unsafe content; whether apps can personalize the
information offered through them based on your location, name, and account picture;
how to share your data; and which keyboard settings to use. You can customize the
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
available settings or use Express Settings. Often Express Settings is fine; you can always
change the options later.
MICROSOFT ACCOUNT OR LOCAL USER ACCOUNT You choose how you want to
log on to your computer. If you have a Microsoft account and you want to access the data
already associated with it such as apps you've acquired from the Windows Store or pho-
tos you've saved to SkyDrive, or you want to sync settings (such as for Microsoft Internet
Explorer Favorites and desktop backgrounds) across other computers running Windows 8,
you should configure your Microsoft account during this step. You must have a Microsoft
account to access and make purchases from the Store. If you do not have an account or
do not want to sync with your existing Microsoft account choose a local account instead.
TIP If you configured a local user account during setup and now want to use a
Microsoft account, you can make the change in PC Settings, from the Users tab.
PASSWORD This is the password you enter to unlock your computer. If you input a
Microsoft account during setup, input the password already associated with that account.
If you created a local account during setup, you can create a password for that account
now. Although creating a password for a local user account is not mandatory you should
input one. Later, you can create other ways to unlock the computer, including using a
picture password or a four-digit PIN (personal identification number).
PASSWORD HINT This comprises a few words that you type to remind you of your
password if you ever forget it.
Using the Lock Screen
Windows 8 offers a new Lock screen, which is much more functional than any Lock screen
you might have encountered in previous Microsoft operating systems. It offers quite a bit
of information. It offers the time and date, and it shows whether you're connected to a
network. If you are using a laptop, it also shows the status of the battery. You can also add
thumbnails for your favorite apps here so you can see the status of those apps without leav-
ing the Lock screen, and some apps show information here by default. (As an example, you
might see a Mail glyph with a number by it, announcing that new, unread mail is available.)
Using the Lock Screen
The Lock screen offers different ways to unlock the computer. You can slide the picture
up and off the screen, click or tap it one time, or tap any key on the keyboard. Once you
bypass this screen, you input your password.
How you unlock the Lock screen depends on the type of computer you're using.
■ TRADITIONAL DESKTOP COMPUTER Tap any key on the keyboard or click with the
mouse anywhere on the screen, or click near the bottom of the screen and drag upward.
If applicable, type your password when prompted.
■ TRADITIONAL LAPTOP COMPUTER Hold down the left track pad button while mov-
ing the cursor upward, or perform a similar movement. Alternatively, tap any key on the
keyboard or click with the mouse (or appropriate track pad button) anywhere on the
screen. If applicable, type your password when prompted.
■ TOUCH-COMPATIBLE COMPUTER OR TABLET Place your finger anywhere near the
middle or bottom of the screen and flick upward. If applicable, type your password when
prompted.
SEE ALSO Chapter 13, "Sharing Files and Folders with My Network."
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
Exploring the Start Screen
After you've unlocked the computer, the Start screen appears; it holds tiles. If there are
more tiles than there is space on the screen, you'll see a scroll bar across the bottom of the
screen (which doesn't appear in the figure).
Start
w*%
^■^^^^H
Iniml
qi
E jM
%
Tiles can serve many purposes. Many of the tiles open apps such as Mail, People, and
Messaging. Some of these tiles also offer up-to-date information for the application they
represent and are considered live tiles. You do not need to open the app to view basic data
it offers. For example, the Weather app, after it is configured, can show up-to-date weather
information for your city, and the Calendar app can show upcoming appointments and
birthdays. This data appears on the Start screen so you have access to it without opening
the app. The information is dynamic and changes as the information it represents does.
If you need to see more than a preview of the information, you can click the tile, and the
app opens in a new screen from which you can access all its features. Messaging, People,
Calendar, Photos, Mail, and similar apps all do this. You can get more apps from the Store.
Exploring the Start Screen
SEE ALSO Chapter 8, "Shopping in the Windows Store."
Beyond offering access to the default apps that come with Windows 8 (and any you acquire
from the Store), the Start screen can also offer tiles for many of the programs and applica-
tions you install yourself. You might see tiles for Microsoft Word, Outlook, or PowerPoint,
Adobe Photoshop, or other programs. These are not apps. They're called desktop apps, and
they are the traditional applications with which you're familiar. Often you obtain these by
downloading them from a website or by installing them from a CD or DVD. (In contrast, you
can get apps only from the Windows Store.)
To open an application, whether it's an app or a desktop app, you click or touch the tile on
the Start screen. What you see after this depends on the type of app or application you've
opened. It's important to note that you can remove apps from the Start screen if you don't
plan on using them. Just right-click the unwanted tile and choose Unpin From Start. (If you
do not have a keyboard, mouse, or track pad and can use your finger only, tap, hold, and
drag downward to display the option to remove it. You'll know you've done this correctly
when a check mark appears on the selected app.) When you unpin an app from the Start
screen, note that this only removes the tile and does not uninstall the related app. As you'll
learn later, it's easy to access all your apps from a single screen if you want to use the app
again.
Beyond opening apps and desktop apps, some tiles offer access to familiar parts of the
computer such as the desktop. From the desktop, you can open File Explorer by clicking the
folder icon located on the taskbar.
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
If you leave the Start screen and want to go back, tap the Windows key on your keyboard.
Tablets often have a physical Windows button. Alternatively, you can position the cursor in
the bottom-left corner and click when the thumbnail of the Start screen appears.
Finally, you can add tiles. You can pin your favorite folder (perhaps My Documents or
Public Documents) to the Start screen, and you can do the same with your favorite web-
site (perhaps Facebook). You can pin almost anything. Pinning items to the Start screen
is a great way to personalize Windows 8 and makes the Start screen much more useful. If
you've already pinned a few items, you'll see them. If not, wait; you'll learn to pin items in
Chapter 2.
Moving Around in the Start Screen
If you have more tiles than can appear on the Start screen, and you know that other tiles
are available to the right or left of what you can see, you need to know some techniques
for getting to those tiles. To move around in the Start screen, you can use your mouse, key-
board, track pad, or appropriate touch gesture. The method you choose depends on what
kind of computer you have. Listed here are a few ways to move around in the Start screen
(and there are others not listed here).
■ SCROLL BAR Left-click, hold, and drag the scroll bar. On a laptop with a track pad, hold
down the left mouse button while you drag across the track pad. On a tablet you will see
the scroll bar across the bottom when you flick left and right, but you don't need to have
your finger on it to use it.
■ FLICK Place your finger on an empty area of the screen and flick from left to right or
right to left. You can also drag your finger slowly in lieu of flicking guickly. You must have
touch-compatible hardware for this to work.
■ AUTO SCROLL Use your mouse's scroll wheel (in an up-and-down motion) to move
through apps from left to right.
■ RIGHT-CLICK You can right-click an empty area of the Start screen and then click or
touch All Apps to access all the apps and programs on your computer. On a tablet, flick
upward from the bottom.
■ PINCH Using touch, position two or more fingers apart from each other on the screen.
Pinch inward to make all the tiles smaller, which will enable you to see more tiles on the
screen, as you can see here.
Moving Around in the Start Screen
TIP To make everything smaller on the Start screen without using the pinch technique,
position your mouse in the bottom-right corner and click the - sign that appears on the
right end of the scroll bar. Click anywhere to return the tiles to their original size.
As you might expect, if you click or touch any tile, the app, program, or window opens,
and the Start screen disappears. What you see when you move away from the Start screen
depends on what you've selected. If you open an app, it opens in its own screen and might
offer configuration options, often in the form of charms. You'll see an example of this later
in this chapter when you open and configure the Weather app. If you open a program (such
as Microsoft Word or Paint), a traditional window appears on the desktop. You'll experience
this later in the chapter when you open a file in Notepad. What you see with desktop appli-
cations will look familiar.
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
Moving Tiles on the Start Screen
You'll use some tiles more than others, so you might want to reposition the tiles on the Start
screen to make your most-used tiles easily accessible. For instance, if you use the Music app
often, you might put that app in the first position on the Start screen.
In this exercise, you'll move a tile from its current position on the Start screen to the first
position. Repeat with other tiles as desired to personalize your Start screen.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need access to the Start
screen.
TIP When an instruction requires you to click something with a mouse, note that you can
generally touch the item (if applicable) to achieve the same result.
1 From the Start screen, click (or touch) and hold Music.
2 Drag the Music tile to the first position in the far-left side of the screen and drop it
there.
Stai
t
*
■N/B
1 MINI 1
%J CLEAN UP The app is repositioned.
TIP If you move too many tiles now, what you see on your Start screen will be different
from what you see in this chapter.
Moving Tiles on the Start Screen
Customizing the Start Screen with Live Tiles
You know you can move tiles on the Start screen to another area of the screen to make those tiles
more accessible. You can also personalize a few select tiles independently so that the information
available from them suits your personal needs. For example, you can tell the Weather app where
you live (or give it permission to determine your location), and the app will supply current weather
information from the Start screen (provided it can get that information from the Internet). If you
want to know more about the weather, you just click the app to open it. These interactive and cus-
tomizable tiles are live tiles, which means that they are often updated with new information.
^^^^^_
68°
^^Bjfi^, Garland, IX
Cloudy, 70745*
Weather
Customizing any interactive tile generally only requires you to open the app, access the
customizable tools and features (called charms) that enable you to change the settings, and
input the desired information or make the desired choices.
In this exercise, you'll personalize the interactive Weather app located on the Start screen.
SET UP If you aren't on the Start screen, position your mouse in the bottom-left corner
of the screen and click the Start screen thumbnail that appears. On a tablet, press the
Windows button if available. You do not need any practice files to complete this exercise.
1 From the Start screen, click or touch Weather. If prompted, click Allow to let this app
learn your location.
2 Right-click the screen to access the available settings or use touch gestures to flick
from the bottom of the screen upward.
—a lr.l gM;<] I
TIP Charms often appear after right-clicking inside an app.
3 Click or touch Places.
10 Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
4 Click the + sign (not shown) and then type your city and state as applicable; if your
city appears in a list, click it. Otherwise, click Add. Repeat as desired.
Enter Location
London, England X
(o)
Add
Cancel
London, England, United Kingdom
Londonderry, New Hampshire, United States
London, Alabama, United States
London, Indiana, United States
London, Minnesota, United States
5 Click or tap any city to access full weather information for it.
Customizing the Start Screen with Live Tiles
11
CLEAN UP To leave this app and return to the Start screen, position your cursor in the
bottom-left corner of the screen and click Start.
TROUBLESHOOTING Live tiles and apps get their information from the Internet; thus, a
working Internet connection must be available to retrieve accurate information.
Using Charms
Charms appear when you position your mouse in a specific area of the screen. Charms can
also appear when you right-click inside an app or flick upward with your finger (such as for
the Weather app), or they might be part of the app itself, available from its interface all the
time. Charms can be customized by software and hardware manufacturers, so you won't
always see the same charms for every app. In the previous section, you saw the charms
available from the Weather app.
Windows 8 has some default charms that appear when you call on them, and they do not
change. To see these charms, position your mouse in the bottom-right corner of any screen.
This is called a hot corner. When you position your cursor here, the charms fly out from the
right side. Alternatively, you can use the Windows+C keyboard command. Charms include
Settings, Devices, Start, Share, and Search.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you are using a device without a physical keyboard or mouse,
swipe with your finger or thumb from the middle of the right side of the screen to the left
(inward) to see the default charms.
12 Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
After the charms appear, their titles appear next to them as you move your cursor toward
them. This technique works on the Start screen, on the desktop, in apps, and in other win-
dows and views. What you see when you click any charm depends on what is currently
open when you access the charms.
These aren't the only charms you'll see as you work with Windows 8. You'll see charms in
other places as you work through this book. Charms can appear on the side or across the
top or bottom of the screen. Often they appear when you position the cursor on a precon-
figured hotspot. Other times, a right-click or an upward flick makes hidden charms avail-
able. In still other instances, charms are available all the time without positioning the cursor
in a particular area of the screen or right-clicking anywhere.
After a charm is available, just click (or touch) it to use it. When you select a charm, a new
pane opens and configuration options (or search or share options) appear. What you see
depends on the charm you click.
Using Charms 13
The following list describes the five default charms available in Windows 8, from any screen,
from the bottom-right hot corner.
■ SETTINGS Use this charm from the Start screen to access the PC Settings hub, to get
information about your network, to change sound levels, to set screen brightness, to
turn notifications on or off, to choose a power option, and more. You click Settings to
power off your computer completely If you access this charm while in an app (perhaps
Calendar), you'll see additional options.
DEVICES Choose this charm to access settings related to the devices that are available
for use with the current app, screen, or window. For instance, you can use a second moni-
tor if such a device is available.
14
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
Devices
Canon 1P2700 series on WIND..
Send To One Note 2010
Microsoft XPS Document Writer
START Use this charm to access the Start screen.
SHARE Choose this charm to access share options applicable to the current activity or
open application. What you see here will differ depending on the application that's open.
Sharing photos with others is a common way to use the Share charm.
SEARCH Use this charm to open the Search pane and to access all the available tiles. You
can use this option to search for anything on your computer, including things you find in
Control Panel, but understand that there are other ways to search, too.
TIP Try to get used to using the Windows+C keyboard shortcut to access these
charms. Note that Windows+Q brings up a list of all the applications installed on
your computer. Put these two keyboard shortcuts into your long-term memory! They
make navigating Windows 8 much easier.
Using Charms
15
Apps
£j Bing g
phhi Calendar p*
m Camera \*
r^-| Desktop H
k Mall a? Sports
ijS Maps _-» Store
H Messaging .a. Travel
H Music pj-. Video
ff^^^^^^l
^c Settings
|j Files
TIP While in the Search window, you can type a few letters, a word, or a file or folder name
and then choose where to search by clicking one of the options under it (perhaps Apps,
Settings, or Files) to cull the results.
Searching for Data, Programs, Files, and
Settings
As you now know, Search is one of the default charms available when you position your
mouse in the bottom-right corner of the screen. To get to it you must first make the charms
accessible. After that, you have to click Search and type what you're looking for in the
Search window. You might even have to click an option underneath to find the results you
want. That's a lot of clicking and tapping. This is not generally the fastest or most effective
way to search.
In most cases, the Windows 8 Start screen is the best place to start a search. You just start
typing. You don't have to press a specific key on the keyboard, and you don't have to access
any charms or toolbars (unless you need to bring up the onscreen keyboard on a tablet).
You just type the file or folder name, app name or program name, or a few keywords that
detail what you're looking for, and Windows 8 does the rest. Results appear automatically
as you type, and the more information you provide, the shorter the list of results will be.
You might see what you're looking for right away, as is the case if you type the name of
an app, or you might have to make another choice to tell Windows the type of item you're
looking for.
16
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
If you don't see what you're looking for in the resulting list, select another category from
the Search pane. You can look under Files, for instance. If you see a number next to a cat-
egory, compatible information is there.
FileS v Results fc
>r Taint"
j=» How to Paintdocx
|| 3/8/2012 10:15 AM
12.2 KB
Files
[7777] AppS 1
+4+ Settings 1
■j Files 1
K Mail
TIP You can use keyboard shortcuts while searching. After typing your keywords,
click Windows+W to search Windows Settings. After typing the name of any file, click
Windows+F to access files.
In this exercise, you'll search for the Notepad.txt file you've already saved to the Documents
folder on your computer and open it, and you'll search directly from the Start screen.
SET UP You need to have copied the Notepad.txt file located in the ChapterOl practice
file folder to your computer's Documents library to complete this exercise.
1 Using any method, access the Start screen. One way is to click the Windows key on
the keyboard.
2 Type Note.
The Search screen appears, and Note is in the Search window.
Searching for Data, Programs, Files, and Settings 17
Search
Apps
Note X |
Settings 2
Files 4
3 Click or touch Files.
The Notepad.txt file appears.
4 From the results, click the notepad document.
The document opens on the desktop.
5 Click the red x in the top-right corner to close the Notepad file.
I si
kJ
CLEAN UP To leave the desktop and return to the Start screen, position your cursor
in the bottom-left corner of the screen and click the Start screen thumbnail or press the
Windows key on the keyboard.
TROUBLESHOOTING Files open in a specific program that you configure. Thus, the Notepad,
txt file in this exercise might open in Notepad, WordPad, Microsoft Office Word, or another
program you have installed.
18
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
Accessing the Traditional Desktop
If you've ever used a Windows-based computer, you are familiar with the traditional desk-
top. That's the screen where the Recycle Bin and the taskbar are, and it is where you've
always accessed your personal folders, opened and worked with files, and used Windows
Explorer, now renamed and referred to as File Explorer. The traditional desktop is still avail-
able, it's still called Desktop, and it's still where you'll do quite a bit of your work. You access
the desktop from the Start screen.
TIP The first difference you'll notice between the Windows 8 desktop and previous
desktops is that the Start button is missing. The desktop still has a taskbar, you can still
personalize the background, you can still right-click to create folders and shortcuts, and you
still open File Explorer from it.
You can open the desktop from the Start screen by clicking the Desktop tile. You can also
use the Windows+D shortcut. In addition, if you click a desktop application's icon or a
related shortcut on the Start screen (one you may have saved there), perhaps for Microsoft
Word or File Explorer, the desktop will open on its own to house the application and make
it available to you. After the desktop is open, you'll see familiar elements. Look for the task-
bar, the Notification area, the Recycle Bin, and other recognizable essentials.
TIP The three icons in the top-right corner of most windows enable you to manipulate the
window. The small - minimizes a window to the taskbar; the rectangle (or two rectangles if
applicable) enables you to resize the window; the red x closes a window.
Seeing the time-honored desktop is often a welcome relief to traditionalists!
Accessing the Traditional Desktop
19
IMPORTANT Try not to slip into old habits and use the desktop for everything just because
you're used to it. Give the Start screen a chance. For a couple of months, initiate your work from
the Start screen and always use apps instead of desktop apps when possible. If you do, you'll
be better positioned to quickly adopt future technology because apps will become the norm,
especially on phones and tablets, and you'll be able to use those devices seamlessly.
Using the Taskbar and Start Button
Yes, you still need the desktop; it hasn't gone away. Applications such as Paint, WordPad,
Notepad, Adobe Reader, and others still open there. These aren't apps; they are desktop
apps and thus need the desktop to work. These and other common applications might
become apps in the future, but that is another conversation.
When you find yourself at the desktop, by choice or necessity, you'll see features with which
you are likely already familiar. The taskbar is one of them. The taskbar is the blue bar that
runs across the bottom of the screen when the desktop is active. (Apps don't open on the
desktop and thus don't have a taskbar.) The taskbar is where you access running programs,
20
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
your open windows, and an available touch keyboard, among other things. As with previous
Windows editions, a Notification area on the far right offers access to various system set-
tings, including those that correspond with available networks, system sounds, the current
state of the system, and the time and date. The bottom-right corner is a hot corner that
brings up the five default charms when you require them.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you don't see the taskbar, make sure you're at the desktop and not
in an app. If you're sure you are on the desktop, position the cursor at the bottom of the
screen; it could be that the taskbar is hidden and will appear when you position your cursor
there.
You can personalize the taskbar by pinning icons for programs you access often to it. You'll
learn to do this in an exercise later in this chapter. You can also move the taskbar by drag-
ging it to another area of the screen (if it's unlocked), change the size of the icons that
appear on it, and rearrange the icons by dragging them to different positions. You can
right-click the taskbar to add or hide toolbars, too; the touch keyboard and the Address bar
might prove helpful. Toolbars appear next to the Notification center when added.
SEE ALSO The "Customizing the Taskbar" section in Chapter 2.
Address
Link:
^ Touch Keyboard
Toolbars
91
Cascade windows
Show windows stacked
Show windows side by side
Show the desktop
Desktop
New toolbar...
Task Manager
Lockthetaskbar
Properties
L=| p
The main purposes of the taskbar, beyond any of the personalization options, are to offer
immediate access to previously opened programs, files, folders, and windows; to make it
easy to minimize, restore, and switch between open programs; and to navigate quickly
to other areas of the computer through toolbars you add. You can click any icon on the
taskbar to access the program, file, or folder it represents. For example, you can click the
Internet Explorer icon to open the desktop version of Internet Explorer. You can click the
Folder icon to open File Explorer.
Using the Taskbar and Start Button 21
TIP Some applications offer both an app version and a desktop version. Internet Explorer is
one of these applications. When both options exist, use the app. If you decide later that app
doesn't offer what you need, try the desktop version. (The desktop version is the same app
but in a different skin, with a different graphical user interface and more features.)
Because you might not yet have much experience with files, folders, windows, and pro-
grams from which to draw, review some taskbar basics. The following list details what the
icons on the taskbar do.
■ TOUCH KEYBOARD You can show or hide the touch keyboard. Just right-click the task-
bar, point to Toolbars, and click Touch keyboard.
■ ACTION CENTER FLAG Click the Action Center icon (a flag) to see whether your com-
puter requires your attention.
NETWORK Click the Network icon to show the Network pane. Click anywhere outside
the pane to hide it. The Network icon sits to the right of the Action Center icon (a flag).
SOUND Click the sound icon and move the slider to raise or lower the volume.
22 Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
TIME AND DATE Click the time and date to show the calendar and to access the date
and time settings.
>
^
Su
Wednesday, August 29, 2012
August 2012 ► /^
Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa /^
29
5
12
19
26
2
30 31 1 2 3 4 ^sV
6 7 8 9 10 11
13 14 15 16 17 18 V> v y
20 21 22 23 24 25
27 28 [29] 30 31 1
3 4 5 6 7 3
9:50:05 AM
Change date and time settings.,.
|j Itt^fil £> P J dilD
You can reposition icons on the taskbar and click them to open folders and programs avail-
able on your computer.
■ REPOSITION AN ICON Click and drag any icon to a new position.
OPEN FILE EXPLORER Click or touch the folder icon to open File Explorer. From there,
you can navigate to any area of your computer's hard drive.
Using the Taskbar and Start Button 23
SEE ALSO Refer to "Browsing for Files and Folders" in Chapter 5, "Using Internet
Explorer 10."
As you know, you can personalize the taskbar. You'll learn quite a bit about that later in
Chapter 2, but you can sample a taste of what's to come here.
In this exercise, you'll pin the Calculator application to the taskbar to personalize it.
SET UP There is no setup for this exercise. You do not need any practice files to com-
plete this exercise. If you are not on the Start screen, click the Windows key or posi-
tion the cursor in the bottom-left corner of the screen and click or tap the Start screen
thumbnail.
1 While on the Start screen, type Calc. The results appear.
2
3
Right-click Calculator. The related touch gesture is to tap, hold, and drag downward
until a check mark appears on the Calculator entry.
Click Pin to taskbar.
TIP The option next to Pin To Taskbar is Pin To Start. If you choose this option, a tile
appears on the Start menu that offers access to the application.
24
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
CLEAN UP To return to the desktop, use the Windows+D shortcut. You can also use
the mouse to click in the top-left corner. Using touch gestures, position the cursor in the
top-left corner and touch there to return to the previous screen or flick inward from the
left side with your thumb. If you do not have a keyboard or mouse, flick inward from the
left side of the screen until the desktop appears.
TIP If you work at the desktop regularly, pin your favorite desktop apps to the taskbar. To
unpin something from the taskbar, right-click its icon on the taskbar and choose Unpin This
Program From Taskbar. You can also unpin an item from the Start screen. To do so, right-
click its tile and then click Unpin from taskbar.
Working with Multiple Windows and Apps
As you saw earlier, when you open a file such as a text document, the desktop appears,
and a program opens to make the file available. It might be Microsoft Word, WordPad,
Notepad, or something else. That program and the file are contained in a single window,
and the program's features and data are available from it. You'll often have more than one
window open at a time, though, and you need to know ways to move among the windows
effectively. You might have a document, a web browser, and File Explorer open, all of which
are available from the desktop.
Working with Multiple Windows and Apps 25
€>) |® http://www.micr... P - g g | ® microsoftNOW
J 1 y ^ ^ ~ [ Untitled - Pa
1 Hume View
a n ^
3
[5] =
■
Color
1
Colo
Z
Clipboard Image Tools
E'ushes
Shapes Size
microsoftnow
jadmap event Qatar
100%
^^^^H Home Share Viei
D i »—- *— 1 5; | T
Copy Paste j|copyto- 1^5 Rename N ™ Properties
HI ^ ^ folder - %
Clipboard Organize
^ ► Libraries
't-f Favorites
■ Desktop
jl Downloads
■
folder
New Open
v <J Search Libraries
*| Documents
Likewise, you might also have opened several apps from the Start screen. You might have
opened Maps, Mail, Weather, Music, and others. These apps aren't all available from
one area such as the desktop; instead, you must switch among them by using keyboard
and touch techniques. By default, only one app appears on the screen at any given time,
although a technique is available to show two.
26
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
In this section, you'll learn the traditional ways of managing multiple open windows on the
desktop and then how to manage multiple open desktop applications and apps.
Let's start with the desktop. One way to manage multiple open windows on the desktop
is to size them so that you can see all of them at one time. When positioned this way, you
need to click only once in the window you want to use. The window you choose appears in
the foreground and becomes the active window. This view isn't always effective, though,
and you'll often need to maximize a window so that it takes up the entire screen.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you can't access all the features in a window, maximize it.
The problem with maximizing a window so that it takes up the entire screen is that you no
longer have easy access to the other open windows. They are now behind the active win-
dow in which you're working. To get to those other windows requires knowing a few tricks.
Working with Multiple Windows and Apps 27
Here are the most common ways to manage multiple open windows:
■ MINIMIZE TO THE TASKBAR You can minimize any maximized window to the taskbar.
Doing so removes it from the desktop. After it is removed (minimized), you can see the
windows that were previously underneath it. One way to minimize a window is to click
the respective icon on the taskbar; a more familiar way is to click the dash in the top-right
corner of the window. To restore the window, click its icon on the taskbar.
■ SHAKE THE WINDOW TO KEEP To remove all but one window from the desktop and
minimize the others to the taskbar, click, hold, and then shake the top of the window
you'd like to keep. The other windows will fall to the taskbar.
■ RESIZE A WINDOW You can resize a maximized window by dragging the window
downward by the top-center part of the topmost toolbar. When it's in restore mode, you
can drag from the corners of the window to further manipulate its size.
TROUBLESHOOTING You can't drag from a window's corner if the window is
maximized. All desktop corners are hot corners, so when you position your cursor
there, charms, the Start thumbnail, the last-used app, and so on appear.
■ SNAP A WINDOW TO TAKE UP HALF THE SCREEN You can drag from the top part
of most windows to the left or right of the screen to snap it into place so that it takes up
half the screen. You can also double-click when you have the double arrow at the top of a
window to have the window fill to the height of the screen without changing the width.
28 Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
_ n
Q(<€>)|H W*«
A v.n,i™»... P ~ <J| S"Mk
1030ft Corporation...
1 Search Micros TT-com
B|
I Hume
Libraries
L
Clipboard Organize
v £ Search Libra
USE FLIP The Alt+Tab keyboard shortcut offers thumbnails of open applications in the
center of the screen. To use this shortcut keep the Alt key depressed and tap the Tab key
to flip through the available programs, which are represented as thumbnails. When the
desired thumbnail is displayed, let go to make that application active. As you'll see, you
can also flip to apps by using this method.
Working with Multiple Windows and Apps 29
USE PEEK While at the desktop, position your cursor in the bottom-right corner of the
taskbar. The open windows will become transparent enabling you to see the desktop
underneath. If nothing happens, right-click and click Peek at desktop. (You want Peek At
Desktop to have a check beside it.)
Show desktop
||~^1 Peek at desktop
These are all traditional ways to work with the desktop. Many are probably not new to you,
such as resizing a window or minimizing a window to the taskbar. You might have even
used Flip before. There are new, novel ways to move among apps and desktop applications,
though. These involve positioning your mouse in a specific area of the screen and using
touch gestures on compatible devices.
TIP It's okay to leave lots of apps open if you want. You don't have to open and close them
continually. After they are in the background (not in use), they become inactive and use
very few (if any) computer resources. They are designed so that you can leave them open
and available without worrying about using too many of your computer's resources.
One way to move among the multiple open apps and the desktop is to use the Switch list.
This list can be accessed by positioning the mouse cursor in the upper-left corner of your
computer screen and then slowly moving the cursor downward. You can also use the key-
board shortcut, Windows+Tab. After you have access to the list, you can left-click, right-
click, drag, touch, or navigate to the app you want to use (for example, by repeating the
Windows+Tab keyboard shortcut).
30 Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
If you simply click (or touch) a thumbnail in the Switch list, it opens in full-screen view (or,
in the case of desktop applications, the way you last left it). You have other options. With a
mouse, you can right-click to access options to close the app or to snap it to the left side or
right side of the screen. When you do this, you can show two things on the screen at one
time; one can be an app and the other a desktop app, for instance. You can also drag items
from the list to a specific area of the screen.
Working with Multiple Windows and Apps 31
TROUBLESHOOTING If you don't see the option to Snap Left or Snap Right when you right-
click an app thumbnail, or if you can't drag and drop an app to snap it to the side of the
screen when another app is open, change the resolution of your computer screen to 1366 *
768 or higher.
In this exercise, you'll open three apps from the Start screen and switch among them by
using various techniques involving a keyboard and mouse. You will then close one app and
position another to take up a third of the screen.
SET UP There is no setup for this exercise. You do not need any practice files to com-
plete this exercise.
1 Position your cursor in the bottom-left corner of the screen and, when the Start
screen thumbnail appears, click it.
2 Click Weather.
32 Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
4
5
7
Repeat to open Music and then Maps. If prompted to allow an app to use your loca-
tion, choose Allow.
With Maps active, on the keyboard, hold down the Windows key.
While holding down Windows, press Tab several times.
Different thumbnails are selected.
Let go of both keys when the Music thumbnail is selected.
The Music app opens.
Press and hold the Windows key, and tap the Tab key one time.
On the Switch list, right-click the Maps app. Click Close.
With the Music app still active and the Switch list open, drag the Weather app in-
ward from the right side.
It snaps into place.
Working with Multiple Windows and Apps 33
%J CLEAN UP To return to the Start screen, press the Windows key on the keyboard.
TIP After an app is snapped to one side of the screen, you can use the black bar that
separates from the rest of the screen to hide or move it. Just click and drag.
If you'd rather not use a keyboard shortcut, you can access the Switch list by using the
mouse only, but this is a little trickier. To access the Switch list by using only a mouse, you
first position the cursor in the top-left corner. You'll see the last app used. You can click that
to access it, or you can move the cursor down the left side, slowly, to show the entire Switch
list shown earlier.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you have so many windows and apps open that Flip is encumbered,
close windows and apps you don't use.
v xbox music
now playing
34
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
If you have the option to use touch gestures, all of this is a little more intuitive. You can just
swipe your finger to move from app to app. You'll learn more about using touch in Chapter
19, "Using Windows 8 on Touch-Compatible Devices."
Working with PC Settings and Control Panel
Control Panel is still part of Windows 8. It's where you make changes to how Windows 8
looks and functions; where you add, manage, and remove users; and where you man-
age networks, configure Internet options, and more. It looks like the Control Panel you're
already used to; it's virtually the same Control Panel as was included with Windows Vista
and Windows 7. Control Panel is a desktop application. You can open it by searching for it
from the Start screen.
There's a more user-friendly way to make changes to your system, which is by using PC
Settings. The most common settings that can be changed, such as your account picture or
Lock screen image, can be configured here. Although there are several ways to access PC
Settings, one way is to opt to change your account picture from the Start screen. In fact,
many options by which to make a personal change to the computer cause PC Settings to
open.
Working with PC Settings and Control Panel
35
From the PC Settings screen, you have access to two panes. The left pane offers a listing of
available categories, including but not limited to Personalize, Users, Notifications, General,
and HomeGroup. You see a scroll bar if the categories run off the screen, provided you
position your mouse between the two panes.
When you click a category in the left pane, the options for it appear in the right. You click
in the right pane to make changes. You apply many of these changes with a single click or
touch; you apply others by selecting from additional options that appear. For example, you
can apply a new Lock screen image with only two or three clicks, provided you select an
image from the options shown. If you click Browse instead, you must perform additional
tasks, including finding the picture to use.
36
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
PC settings
Users
Notifications
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
HomeGroup
U/ir^™^ I Ir^-la + o
Lock screen StarL screen Account picture
T
10:48 u ^ j
Wednesday, August 29^^«JPB
g
Lock screen apps
Choose apps to run in the background and show quick status and notifications, even when
vour <;rrpm i.i lacked
In this exercise, you'll open PC Settings from the Start screen and use the PC Settings hub to
change the picture on the Lock screen.
SET UP There is no setup for this exercise. You don't need any practice files to com-
plete this exercise.
1 Access the Start screen. Type Lock.
2 Click Settings in the right pane.
3 In the left pane, click Customize your lock screen and notifications.
Working with PC Settings and Control Panel 37
Settings
Results for "lock"
o
Lock screen
-4
o
Customize your lock screen and
notifications
s
4 Click one of the available pictures.
The picture on the Lock screen is changed.
%J CLEAN UP Leave this window open.
With a feel for how the panes work, you can now explore the categories on the left side of
the PC Settings hub. It's not important right now for you to understand every option; you'll
return to these settings many times as you work through this book. What's important now
is to explore PC Settings and get an idea of what's available.
Here are a few category options to explore. (This is not a complete list, but you are encour-
aged to explore all of them.)
■ PERSONALIZE Use this setting to change the Lock screen background and the picture
associated with your User tile and to choose apps that appear on the Lock screen with
detailed status information. You can change the color of the Start screen's background
and design here, too.
38
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
USERS Use this setting to apply a password to your user account or to change or
remove a password. This is where you switch from using a local account to using
your Microsoft account. You can also add new users here, if you are logged on as an
administrator.
Your account
Joli Ballew
Jali_bal I ew@hcrtmail.com
You can switch to a local account, but your settings won't sync between the PCs you use.
Switch to a local account
More account settings online
Sign-in options
Change your password
Create a picture password
Create a PIN
Any user who has a password must enter it when waking this PC.
Change
Other users
There are no other users on this PC.
Working with PC Settings and Control Panel 39
NOTIFICATIONS Use this setting to choose how and when to be notified of updated
information from apps such as Calendar, Mail, Messaging, and so on.
Notifications
Show app notifications
On |^Si
Show app notifications on the lock screen
Play notification sounds
On I^M
Show notifications from these apps
Calendar On
Gene? On
Internet Explorer On
Mail On
Messaging On
Music On
□
40 Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
HOMEGROUP Use this setting to set up and configure your network homegroup. A
homegroup makes it easy to share files and folders over a trusted home network.
Libraries and devices
When you share content, other homegroup members can see it, but only you can changi
it
Documents
Shared I
Music
Shared |
Pictures
Shared |
Videos
Shared |
Printers and devices
Shared I
Media devices
Allow devices such as TVs and game consoles to play my shared content
Membership
If someone else wants to join your homegroup, give them this password:
MNKJ9[J::-r4
If you leave the homegroup, you won't be able to get to shared libraries or devices.
Leave
TIP Click every category in the left pane of PC Settings now to see what's available, but
don't make any changes beyond personalizing the Lock screen, your User tile, and other
nonessential areas.
Working with PC Settings and Control Panel 41
If you need access to more configuration options than those available in PC Settings, you
can use Control Panel. Control Panel is just a different presentation of PC Settings with
more options. You use the same technique to open Control Panel as you used to open PC
Settings. From the Start screen, type Control Panel and then select it from the list of Apps
available.
Control Panel opens to the familiar Control Panel. To use Control Panel, you choose the
desired entry, access the areas you want to change, and make changes by selecting from
the choices offered. As with PC Settings, you'll access these options often throughout this
book when the required or desired options are necessary for instruction.
B
Control Pane
t IP ► Control Panel
I
Adjust your computer's settings
View by: Category T
^
System and Security
Review your computer's statu s
Save backup copies of your files with File History
Find and fix problems
Network and Internet
View network status and tasks
Cheese hemegrcup and sharing options
Hardware and Sound
View devices and printers
Add a device
Programs
Uninstall a program
-*j
User Accounts and Family Safety
^ Change account type
^' Set up Family Safety for any user
Appearance and Personalization
Changethetheme
Change desktop background
Adjust screen resolution
Clock, Language, and Region
Add a language
Change input methods
Change date, time, or number formats
Ease of Access
Let Windows suggest settings
Optimize visual display
TIP If time allows, explore the options in both PC Settings and Control Panel, but don't
make any major changes to the system yet.
42
Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
Ending a Computing Session
When you are ready to end a computing session, you should, at the very least, secure your
computer so that others can't access it. You can do this by locking the computer. You can
access the Lock option from the Start screen, or you can use the Windows+L combination.
If you use the Start screen, click your User tile in the top-right corner. When you lock your
computer, your open files, programs, apps, and windows remain open so that when you
unlock your computer you can continue working where you left off. Lock your computer
when you want to leave it unattended for a short period of time. You should lock your com-
puter when you go to lunch, run an errand, or go for coffee.
IMPORTANT If you lock your computer but don't have a password configured to unlock it,
locking it doesn't do much good. Anyone can flick the Lock screen upward and gain access.
You can also sign out of your computer. When you do this, you are closing your computing
session. When you return, you must sign back in and start a new computing session, which
means reopening apps, programs, and previously opened windows. Sign off to secure your
computer if you'll be away from it for a long period of time.
Your computer is likely configured to go to sleep after a specific period of time. While your
computer is sleeping, it uses very little electricity. The hard drive(s) and monitor(s) power
down and are quiet and dim. It's best to let your computer go to sleep when you can rather
than turning it off. It causes less wear and tear, and the computer can be awakened much
more quickly than it can be restarted. When a computer sleeps, your programs and win-
dows remain open and ready. Your computer will go to sleep after a specific period of inac-
tivity. In the default power scheme, Balanced, the monitor will sleep after 10 minutes and
the computer after 30.
Finally, you can completely shut down your computer. Because other options are encour-
aged, the option to turn off the computer is more difficult to access. The option to turn
off your computer is available from the Settings charm, from the Power options. Although
you can access that setting from there, it's much easier to use the Windows+I keyboard
shortcut.
Ending a Computing Session
43
TIP Shut down your computer when you want to move it, transport it, or know you won't
be using it for at least two days.
In this exercise, you'll shut down your computer.
GJ* SET UP There is no setup for this exercise. You do not need any practice files to com-
plete this exercise.
1 Position your cursor in the bottom-right corner of the screen and, when the charms
appear, click Settings.
2 Click Power.
3 Click Shut down.
Q CLEAN UP Leave the
computer turned off until you are ready to use it again.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you see other options that prompt you to install updates before
shutting down, choose that option.
44 Chapter 1 Introducing Windows 8
Key Points
When you set up Windows 8, you have to input some information, including your user
name, computer name, a password, and more.
You click or flick upward to bypass the Lock screen.
The Start screen contains tiles that represent apps and programs and offers access to
various parts of the computer, including the desktop and Control Panel.
Charms offer access to additional, embedded settings, features, and configuration
options.
Some tiles on the Start screen are configurable and will offer up-to-date information
obtained from the Internet.
The traditional desktop is available from the Start screen and is still where you will do
most of your work.
There are many ways to work with multiple open windows, including Flip, the Switch list,
and hot corners.
Control Panel offers access to configuration options you can apply, including adding users
and configuring networks.
You can end a computing session by locking the screen, logging off, letting the computer
go to sleep, or shutting it down.
Key Points 45
Pin
Pin apps to the Start screen, page 51
^& J
r «i
^^^■^EE
■S^ffl HCSH IB
Personalize
Personalize the taskbar, page 63
C
Use
Use a Microsoft account, page 56
Your account
p
Joli Ballew
BallewWin8@hotmail.com
You can switch to a local account but your settings won't sync
Switch to a local account
More account settings online
Switch
Switch between power plans, page 70
nel ► All Control Panel Items ► Power Options
Choose or customize a power plan
A power plan is a collection of hardware and system settings (like display brigh
how your computer uses power. Tell me more about power plans
Preferred plans
•:•:• Balanced (recommended}
Automatically balances performance with energy consumption on capal
O Power saver
Saves energy by reducing your computer's performance where possible.
Making Windows Look and
Sound the Way You Want
2
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Personalize your Start screen.
■ Personalize your Lock screen.
■ Personalize the desktop and taskbar.
■ Change the sound scheme.
■ Access and explore advanced settings.
■ Create your own power plan.
Now that you have Windows 8 set up and know your way around the Lock screen, Start
screen, and desktop, it's time to personalize the computer further so that it suits your exact
wants and needs. In this chapter, you'll learn how to configure the Start screen to hold only
tiles you use regularly and how to personalize the Lock screen with the desired live informa-
tion. You'll also learn to personalize the desktop and associated elements, change some of
the advanced settings for resolution and sound, and even switch to a new power plan. After
you've worked through this chapter, your computer will be distinctively yours.
PRACTICE FILES Before you can complete the exercises in this chapter, you need to copy the
book's practice files to your computer. The practice files you'll use to complete the exercises
in this chapter are in the Chapter02 practice files folder. A complete list of practice files is
provided in the "Using the Practice Files" section at the beginning of this book.
47
Personalizing the Start Screen
You learned quite a bit about the Start screen in Chapter 1, "Introducing Windows 8." You
learned how to move tiles around and configure the Weather app to show up-to-date infor-
mation. There's probably quite a bit you'd still like to change, though. You want to remove
tiles for apps you don't use and add tiles for those you do, configure how large or small a
tile appears on the screen, and change the background, to name a few. You might also want
to disable some of the live tiles.
TIP Before you start, think about the apps and desktop apps you use most often, the
websites you visit most often, and the configuration options you access the most often.
Start by adding those to your Start screen. Then consider removing tiles for apps you rarely
use.
In this exercise, you'll personalize the Start screen with a new background color.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need to have access to
the Start screen. You do not need any practice files for this exercise.
1 On the Start screen, type Start screen.
2 Under Settings, click or touch Settings and then choose Customize your start
screen.
48
Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
3 In the PC settings window:
Lock screen Start screen Account picture
3. Choose a background You choose the background for the Start screen by click-
ing or touching any thumbnail.
D. Choose a background color You choose the background color by using a slider
provided for that purpose.
TIP If you are using a local user account, you should switch to a Microsoft account if you
want the changes you make on the Start screen and throughout this chapter to follow you
from computer to computer. This is possible only if those other computers can access the
Internet to download your profile information, and only if you sign in on those computers
by using your Microsoft account.
C9 CLEAN UP Return to the Start screen when ready.
Personalizing the Start Screen
49
Now you can personalize your Start screen to hold only the tiles you use often. The com-
mand to remove a tile is Unpin From Start. You access this command by right-clicking the
unwanted app tile. This displays a toolbar that runs across the bottom of the screen and
holds the charms you need to perform this task and others. What you see when you right-
click an app depends on the tile. You might see Smaller, Larger, or Turn Live Tile Off. If you
right-click multiple tiles, you also see Clear Selection. (You can also tap, hold, and pull the
tile downward slightly to view this toolbar if you prefer to use touch gestures.)
TIP Uninstall is an option from the toolbar that appears when you right-click a tile. Don't
uninstall anything yet, though; you might decide later that you want to use the app.
A live tile has information that changes often. You might have noticed that the News app
scrolls through the latest headlines or that Mail scrolls through received emails. This infor-
mation is live; thus the name live tile. You might want to disable the live feature of some of
those tiles if the constant flipping bothers you or if you don't want to be distracted by new
information about Facebook updates, tweets, email, or other data every time you access
the Start screen. You might not want onlookers to see data you're acquiring, either. You
can disable a live tile by using the same technique you learned earlier to remove tiles you
don't want. Right-click the live tile to change it and then click Turn Live Tile Off. The tile will
remain, but updates won't appear.
TIP You might want to make a tile live, too. For instance, when Calendar is configured as
live, appointments and events appear there as the day and time draws near.
Finally, you'll want to add tiles for programs, features, and even web pages you visit often.
This requires a few more steps than removing a tile or repositioning one, but it's still easy.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you uninstall an app and decide you want it back, check the Store.
You just might find it there.
50 Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
In this exercise, you'll add a tile to the Start screen for Windows Media Player, Control Panel,
and your favorite Windows desktop application.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need to have access to
the Start screen. You do not need any practice files to complete this exercise.
TIP When an instruction requires you to click something with a mouse, note that you can
generally touch the item to achieve the same result. When a right-click is needed, try a long
touch and short drag downward or an upward swipe from the bottom of the screen. In
some instances, a simple, single, long touch will suffice.
1 Right-click an empty area of the Start screen; click All Apps.
2 Right-click Windows Media Player (located under Windows Accessories). Click Pin
to Start.
a 1 Certificate flW Microsoft gj** Character Map pi Windows Journal
GA Projects ■** PowerPoint 2010 *^
Dsoft Access j™ Microsoft Publisher wg^ Math '"P 1 ^ ^ ane ' ■||| Windows Media *f
™ 2010 ^ *H! player
® @ © ® ®
VH/ \-s xL^ \*Z/ O'
Pin to Start Pin to taskbar Open new Run as Open file
window administrator location
Right-click Control Panel (located under Windows System) and click Pin to Start.
3
4 If you've installed programs on your own, right-click your favorite desktop program
(located somewhere on the All Apps screen) and click Pin to Start.
CLEAN UP If applicable, return to the Start screen.
Personalizing the Start Screen
51
Personalizing the Lock Screen
You learned a little about the Lock screen in Chapter 1, including that it's more functional
than any Lock screen you might have encountered in previous Microsoft operating systems.
You learned in Chapter 1 how to choose a new background, and you learned that the Lock
screen offers the time and has tiles that represent apps on it. You probably know that you
can't click and engage those tiles, but you can get a quick glance at what's been updated
since you last used your computer. For example, after you've set up Mail, you'll see the
Mail tile there with a number beside it to notify you of how many new email messages
are unread. You might also see a Calendar tiles, a People or Messaging tile, and others,
depending on how Windows 8 is currently configured.
In this section, you'll learn how to customize the Lock screen. You'll learn how to personalize
it with a picture of your own, how to add and remove tiles for apps, and more.
In this exercise, you'll make changes to the Lock screen to personalize it.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need to have access to
the Start screen.
1 On the Start screen, type Lock.
2 In the results, click Settings.
3 Click Customize your lock screen and notifications.
The PC settings screen appears.
52 Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
Browse
Lock screen apps
3 back
+ + + +
Choose apps to run in the background and show quick status and notifications, even when
your screen is locked
Choose an app to display detailed status
4 Click one of the plus (+) signs.
5 Click the app you'd like to appear in the selected position.
Personalizing the Lock Screen 53
6 To view detailed information for an app on the Lock screen, click the icon under
Choose an app to display detailed status and select the desired app.
TIP If you select an app to appear that is already showing on the Lock screen, its
placement on the screen will be altered.
7 Press Windows key+L to access the Lock screen and review your changes.
CLEAN UP Unlock the computer and return to the Start screen.
In this exercise, you'll browse for a picture you've saved to your computer and use it as your
Lock screen picture.
SET UP You need to have copied the Sheep.jpg file located in the Chapter02 practice
file folder to your computer's My Pictures folder to complete this exercise. Using any
method, access the Start screen. One way is to press the Windows key on the keyboard.
1 Type Lock, click Settings, and click Customize your lock screen and notifications.
2 To the right of Change Your Picture, click Browse.
Browse
In the Pictures folder, which opens by default, click the image of the sheep. Click
Choose Picture.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you don't see this picture and you're sure you've copied it to
the Pictures folder, click or tap Go Up. You might not be in the proper folder.
54
Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
4 Press Windows+L to see your changes.
5 Unlock the computer and log on.
CLEAN UP Return to the PC Settings screen where you configured the Lock screen
changes and tap Users to segue nicely into the next section.
Changing Your User Account Type
A user account is what defines you when you log on to your computer and is associated
with your specific user profile. You have three options for your user account. You can use a
local user account, a domain account, or a global Microsoft account.
A local user account is an account that's available only from your own, personal computer.
The settings you configure for your applications, apps, desktop and taskbar, backgrounds,
Internet Explorer Favorites, app configuration on your Start screen, and other customiza-
tions are applied to and available from only your local computer. Your user profile is stored
on your local computer and available only from there. If you use only one computer, this
should be fine. However, if you use multiple Windows 8-based computers (one at work, one
at home, and perhaps a laptop when you're on the back porch) or use a Windows 8 tablet
or a Windows phone, you will want to consider using a Microsoft account instead.
Changing Your User Account Type 55
A Microsoft account is a roaming user account (as opposed to a local one). Your profile is
stored on the Internet in the cloud, and your user profile is accessible from the other com-
puters, tablets, and devices running Windows 8. This means that all your settings, prefer-
ences, and configurations are available from any computer to which you can log on by
using this account, provided that that computer is connected to the Internet and can access
that profile. The purpose of storing your user profile on the Internet is so you can move
from computer to computer or device to device and have the same experience on one as
you do on the other. In this scenario, any changes you make while logged on are saved to
your profile, too, so if you make a change to your laptop's Start screen, that change will be
applied when you log on to your desktop computer next time, provided you've logged on
to those devices with your Microsoft account. (You might notice a slight delay in loading
your profile after logging on to a computer with your Microsoft account.)
TROUBLESHOOTING A Microsoft account syncs only your personal settings and preferences.
It's a roaming user profile. You can't access programs you've installed on another
computer running Windows 8, print to a remote computer's local printer, or use your
home computer's webcam from another computer, for instance. You're not accessing your
computer remotely with this feature; you're accessing only your user profile, which is stored
on a server on the Internet.
You switch from a local account to a Microsoft account (or vice versa) on the PC Settings
screen from the Users category. (You saw this screen earlier.) A Microsoft account is an
email address such as your_name@hotmail.com or yourname@live.com, but it does not
have to be from either of these domains. You might already have a Microsoft account. A
Windows Live ID, a Live email address, or a Hotmail email address are Microsoft accounts. A
Microsoft account is preferred over a local user account in most instances. You can sign up
for an account at www.live.com if you don't have one.
Your account
E*w9_| joli_ballew@hotmail.com
You can switch to a local account but your settings won't sync between the PCs you use.
Switch to a local account
56 Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
Depending on how your computer is currently set up, click the appropriate switch option
and follow the prompts. What you see will depend on the account to which you are
switching and whether you have the required accounts in place. If you are already using a
Microsoft account, you don't need to do anything here unless you'd rather not use it.
TIP In PC settings, click Sync Your Settings in the left pane and turn on or off the sync
settings desired. You can sync colors, background, Lock screen, and account pictures, for
instance, but not themes, taskbar, and high-contrast settings. By default, your profile won't
sync over metered connections, which charge you based on your data usage, but you can
enable the feature if you'd like.
Customizing Your User Account Settings
After you've decided what type of account to use and applied the change if applicable, and
note that a Microsoft account is preferred in most instances, you can make other changes
to your user account to customize it further. The changes will be saved to your user profile.
One item to change is your user account picture.
TIP From Users in PC Settings, you can choose to trust your home or work PC. When you
do, sign-in information for some apps, websites, and networks syncs with your user profile.
In this exercise, you'll change the picture associated with your user account.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need to have access to
the Start screen.
1 From the Start screen, click your User name in the top-right corner.
2 Click Change account picture.
3 Click Browse.
Customizing Your User Account Settings 57
Lock screen Start screen Account picture
Browse
Create an account picture
1 Camera
4 If you don't see the picture you want to use, click the Files down arrow; choose
Pictures and the desired folder or subfolder.
58
Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
Fil6S v Pictures
Documents
Pictures
Music
Videos
Desktop
Downloads
Homegroup
Computer
Network
A
V
g| Camera
Inl Photos
5 Click the image to use and select Choose image.
CLEAN UP No clean up is required.
TIP Explore other PC Settings options now. You can, for instance, make changes to the
password you use to log on. You can create a PIN. This is a personal identification number,
and it can be used on your computer in place of the complex password you've been using
until now. (Click Users to get started.)
Customizing Your User Account Settings
59
Personalizing the Desktop
You learned about the desktop in Chapter 1. There you discovered that the desktop still
exists in a form very similar to what you're likely already used to if you've spent any time
with other Windows-based computers. You can personalize the desktop in the same ways,
too. You can apply a new background, personalize sounds, set a screen saver, and more.
You can have the background switch to show a slide show of pictures you select. You can
also choose a theme, a group of settings that, combined, provide a motif. One theme,
Nature, combines backgrounds, screensavers, window colors, and sounds and is available
from the Windows 8 Desktop Personalization options. You can just choose a new back-
ground; there are many beautiful pictures from which you can choose.
TIP Windows 8 offers desktop gadgets and the Desktop Gadget Gallery. Gadgets were, in
their day, a precursor to the apps to which you now have access.
60
Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
In this section, you won't learn how to personalize every aspect of the desktop; that could
fill an entire chapter if not more! You'll learn how to select a new background and apply a
theme, and from there you can surmise how to make additional changes.
In this exercise, you'll apply the Nature theme and customize which backgrounds you want
to appear.
SET UP Access the Desktop. If you are on the Start screen, use the Windows+D key-
board shortcut.
1 Right-click the desktop. Click Personalize. The Personalization window opens.
2
3
4
5
Personalization
■ Control Panel ► All Control Panel Hems t Personalization
.«
Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
Change desktop icons
Change mouse pointers
Change the visuals and sounds on your computer
Click a theme to change the desktop background, color, sounds, and screen saver all at once.
Unsaved Theme
Windows Default Themes (3}
Save theme ];: tic; :- , eme= online
High Contrast Themes (4)
High Contrast =1 High Contrast =1 High Contrast Slack High Contrast White
See also
Ci:pla\
Ta'ikhar
Ease of Access Center
Desktop tiec-::: cunc:
Harmony
Automatic
Sounds
-'. ir dcv: Default
Screen Saver
Click Earth. The theme is immediately applied, and new colors are associated with
windows and the taskbar.
Click Desktop Background.
Clear a few images.
Use Change picture every to select an option.
Personalizing the Desktop 61
Desktop Background
®
■ Control Panel ► All Control Panel Items t Personalization > Desktop Background
£ ■=: = i - . - 1 -i Control Panel
>
Choose your desktop background
Click a picture to make it your desktop background, or select more than one picture to create a slide show.
Picture location: Windows Desktop Backgrounds
- Earth (6)
• Flowers (6)
10 seconds
3U seconds
1 minute
10 minutes
15 minutes
10 minutes
30 minutes
Fill v
M
\Z Shuffle
Save changes | | Cancel |
6 Click Save Changes.
%J CLEAN UP If desired, explore Screen Saver and Window Color.
SEE ALSO "Change the Sound Scheme" and "Customize Advanced Settings" later in this
chapter.
Changing How the Taskbar Looks
The taskbar is the blue bar that runs across the bottom of the screen when you're using the
desktop. It might be a different color if you've applied a theme. By default, it's locked and
can't be moved. If you unlock it, you can drag it to a different area on the screen. You might
prefer the taskbar on the left side of the desktop, for instance (or across the top).
62
Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
Beyond unlocking and then dragging the Taskbar to a new place on the screen, you can:
■ REPOSITION BUTTONS Click and drag icons from one area of the taskbar to another.
■ PIN ICONS Pin things to the taskbar, including icons for desktop apps, documents,
folders, and more.
■ AUTO-HIDE THE TASKBAR Auto-hide the taskbar to keep it off the screen when it's
not needed.
■ CHANGE TASKBAR BUTTON SIZE AND GROUPING Use small or large taskbar but
tons and choose to group or not group like icons when the taskbar is full.
■ USE DIVIDERS Hide and show elements added to the taskbar, including a shortcut to
Libraries.
Changing How the Taskbar Looks 63
ENABLE PEEK Enable or disable Peek, a feature outlined in Chapter 1 that enables
you to look at the desktop by temporarily making all open windows transparent. You
use Peek by positioning your mouse in the bottom-right corner of the screen.
CUSTOMIZE THE NOTIFICATION AREA Select which icons and notifications appear
on the taskbar.
USE JUMP LISTS Enable or disable jump lists and configure how they work. Jump
lists can show recently opened programs or recent items you've opened in a program.
if] 664029c04 USE THIS ONE 3-12
IglJ MSPress_SBSIW
If] 6&4029c04JB
If] 6&4029c04
If] Windows S Step by Step - Joli Ma..,
If] &&4029c01_v2_DEJB
If] 664029c01_v2_DEJB
If] 664O29c01_v2_DEJB
If] notepad
If] How to Paint
[W] Microsoft Word 2010
tf Unpin this program from taskbar
SHOW OR HIDE TOOLBARS Show or hide toolbars, including the Address, Links,
Touch Keyboard, and Desktop toolbars.
64
Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
Try some of these features now. On the desktop at the taskbar:
■ REPOSITION THE TASKBAR Right-click the taskbar and, in the resulting menu, clear
the check by Lock The Taskbar if applicable. Drag the taskbar to the left side of the
screen.
■ SHOW HIDDEN BUTTONS Drag any slider, if possible, to view hidden taskbar
buttons.
■ TEST PEEK Open any window or multiple windows. Position your mouse in the
bottom-right corner of the screen. If the windows turn transparent, Peek is enabled. If
they do not, Peek is disabled.
Changing How the Taskbar Looks
65
In this exercise, you'll configure the taskbar by using the Taskbar Properties dialog box.
^^ SET UP Access the desktop. If you're on the Start screen, press Windows+D.
1 Right-click an empty area of the taskbar and click Properties. (To use gestures, use a
long touch, then tap Properties.)
Toolbars ►
Cascade windows
Sh ow wi n d ows sta c Iced
Show windows side by side
Show the desktop
Task Manager
Lockthetaskbar
Properties
2
In the Taskbar Properties dialog box, on the Taskbar tab, select or clear the desired
choices. Click Apply.
66 Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
Taskbar Properties
Taskbar |~Jump\ ists Toolbars
D Lock the taskbar
O Auto-hide the taskbar
fn Use small taskbar buttons
Taskbar location on screen:
Taskbar buttons:
Notification area :
Bottom
Always combine, hide labels ▼ |
Customize...
Use Peek to preview the desktop when you move your mouse to the
Show desktop button at the end of the taskbar
Apply
3
4
TIP From the Taskbar Properties Taskbar tab, next to the Notification area, click
Customize to change how you are notified of system events and to hide or show
icons there. Refer to Chapter 14, "Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure," to learn more
about this.
Click the Jump Lists tab and make the desired choices. Click Apply.
Click the Toolbars tab; make the desired choices. Click OK.
^M CLEAN UP No cleanup is required.
Changing the Sound Scheme
The sounds your computer makes when system events occur are part of the Windows
Default sound scheme. Some of the system sounds with which you might be familiar
include Critical Stop, New Mail Notification, and Windows Change Theme (if you changed
the theme earlier). You can change the Windows Default sound scheme to one of several
others, all with names that are representative of the sound scheme they offer. One of the
schemes is No Sounds.
Changing the Sound Scheme
67
You can change the sound scheme from the Personalization window you learned about ear-
lier. Click Sounds and, from the Sounds tab, select a new scheme. (Right-click an empty area
of the desktop and choose Personalize to access the Sounds option.)
•>
Sound
Playback Recording Sounds Communications
A sound theme is a set of sounds applied to events in Windows
and programs, You can select an existing scheme or save one you
have modified.
Sound Scheme:
Windows Default
Jent in the following list and
LUH S
sound scheme.
Program Events:
i save the changes as a new
Show Toolbar Band
^ System Notification
(] Windows Change Theme
^ Windows User Account Control
[il Windows Explorer
Blocked Pop- up Window
u
O Play Windows Startup sound
Sounds:
| (None)
►■Test
Apply
Accessing and Exploring Advanced Settings
There just isn't enough space in a single chapter to cover all the personalization options
available in Windows 8. However, you can access all the options from a single window,
Control Panel, and you can certainly explore and configure these settings to the extent
you'd like. You can't harm your computer by changing these options, but you might make it
look quite a bit different from what you'll see in this book.
In this exercise, you'll first view all the Appearance and Personalization options and then
change the screen resolution.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need to have access to
the Start screen.
1 From the Start screen, type Control.
2 In the results, click Control Panel.
68
Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
3 Verify that the view is Category and then choose Appearance and Personalization.
All the personalization options appear.
View by: Category w
4&
User Accounts and Family Safety
^ Add or remove user accounts
(ij^jp Set up parental controls for any user
Appearance and Personalization
Changethetheme
Change desktop background
Adjust screen resolution
4 Under Display, click Adjust screen resolution.
Appearance and F
\£) T 1 ^ ► Control Panel ► Appearance and Personalization
Control Panel Home
System and Security
Network and Internet
Hardware and Sound
Programs
User Accounts and Family
Safety
* Appearance and
Personalization
Clock, Language, and Region
Ease of Access
■*' Personalization
Changethetheme Change desktop background
Change the color of yourtaskbar and window borders Change sound effects Change screen saver
m
Display
? Make text and other items larger or smaller Adjust screen resolution
W\ Taskbar
^^H Customize icons on the taskbar
j^Qtej Ea s e of Acces s C enter
'^Ef Accommodate low vision Use screen reader Turn on easy access keys Turn High Contrast on or off
i[23 Folder Options
P ■ Specify single- or dcuble-clicktc open Show hidden files and folders
k Fonts
Preview, delete, or show and hide fonts Change Font Settings Adjust C lea rType text
5 Configure settings as desired and click Apply.
^3 CLEAN UP Continue to explore the options as time allows.
As you explore Control Panel, you'll see that clicking some options, such as Change The
Theme or Change Desktop Background, open windows that you've already explored in this
chapter. You'll also notice that you have access to the available fonts and to folder options
that enable you to view hidden files or state how you'd like to open icons. If you've used a
Windows operating system before, these will look familiar. You'll also see a Back arrow and
an Up arrow so you can return quickly to the previous screen as you explore.
TIP In the Appearance And Personalize window, tapping a heading such as Taskbar results
in a different dialog box than tapping an item under it, such as Customize icons, on the
taskbar.
Accessing and Exploring Advanced Settings
69
Switching to a Different Power Plan
A power plan is a group of settings that defines when your monitor goes to sleep and when
the computer goes to sleep. This occurs after a specific amount of idle time. In the case of
laptops and tablets, there are two sets of settings, one for when the computer is plugged in
and one for when it's running on battery power. You change the power plan from Control
Panel, under Hardware And Sound, in Power Options. To select a plan and apply it, select
the desired plan by clicking the option button beside the plan name.
Power Options
'■£) T T =§F ► Control Panel ► Hardware and Sound ► Power Option: v <i
Control Panel Home
Choose or customize a power plan
Require a password on wakeup A power plan is a collection of hardware and system settings (like display brightness, sleep, etc.] that manages
how your computer uses power. Tell me mere about power plans
Choose what the power
buttons do Preferred plans
Create a power plan ,j, Balanced (recommended] Change plan settings
^ Choose when to turn off the Automatically balances performance with energy consumption on capable hardware,
display
* Change when the computer O Power saver Change plan settings
sleeps Saves energy by reducing your computer's performance where possible.
Hide additional plans {*•)
O High performance Change plan settings
Favors performance, but may use more energy.
There are three power plans (but you can create your own). On a desktop computer, the
settings are as listed here. (Laptops have a second set of settings for when the laptop is run-
ning on battery power.)
■ BALANCED This is the default plan. The display turns off after 10 minutes; the com-
puter goes to sleep after 30 minutes.
■ POWER SAVER This plan is the best for minimizing power usage. The display turns
off after five minutes; the computer goes to sleep after 15 minutes.
■ HIGH PERFORMANCE This plan is best when you need all the computing power you
can obtain. The display turns off after 15 minutes; the computer never goes to sleep.
To access this plan, you must click the arrow by Show Additional Plans.
From this window, you can perform other power-related tasks. You can choose what the
power buttons do, for instance. If you have a laptop, you might want the computer to shut
down when you close its lid. You might just want it to sleep. Likewise, you might want to
press the Power button on a desktop computer to cause it to sleep, shut down, hibernate,
or, perhaps, do nothing.
70 Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
You can change aspects of a plan. For instance, if you like the Balanced plan but would
rather the display and computer go to sleep after 30 minutes, you can easily make the
change. You can restore the defaults for a plan with a single click, too. You can create your
own power plan from scratch. However, the three default plans will likely suffice with a little
tweaking.
t[
^ ► Control Panel ► Hardware and Sound ► Power Options ► Edit Plan Settings
Change settings for the plan: Balanced
Choose the sleep and display settings that you want your computer to use
J^ Turn off the display: 1 10 minutes
% Put the computer to sleep
1 minute
2 minutes
3 minutes
5 minutes
10 minutes
Change advanced power settings 15 minutes
20 minutes
Restore default settings for this pIe ^S minutes
45 minutes
1 hour
2 hours
3 hours
4 hours
5 hours
Never
-
In this exercise, you'll choose a power plan.
^3 SET UP No setup is required for this exercise.
1 Using any method, access the Start screen. One way is to press the Windows key on
the keyboard.
2 Type Power. Click Settings.
3 Click Change power-saving settings.
4 Select a plan to use.
5 Close the Power Options window.
CLEAN UP Close the Power Options window and return to the Start screen.
Switching to a Different Power Plan 71
Key Points
When you personalize the Start screen, you remove tiles you won't use, add tiles you
will use, and reposition them as desired.
You can personalize the Lock screen with a picture or PIN, and you can then unlock
your computer with either.
The Lock screen can offer up-to-date information about running apps.
You can use a local user account or a Microsoft account when you log on to your
Windows 8-based computer or tablet. A Microsoft account enables you to sync infor-
mation among your devices, including backgrounds, Internet Explorer Favorites, and
preferences.
You can personalize your user account with a picture.
Personalization options enable you to easily change the desktop, taskbar, and notifi-
cation areas when working on the desktop.
It's possible to pick a new sound scheme, set a new resolution, and perform other
personalization tasks from Control Panel.
Power plans are configurations that determine when your computer sleeps and when
the display dims.
72 Chapter 2 Making Windows Look and Sound the Way You Want
Explore
Explore the Photos app, page 76
Play
Play music, page 84
now playing
Point of Know Return I 3:i3
§) (8) ®
Easy Lover
Dream Police
Get
Get directions, page 90
Learn
Learn more about each app, page 93
Using Apps on the
Start Screen
3
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
View and manage photos with the Photos app.
View and manage music with the Music app.
View and manage video with the Video app.
Find a location with the Maps app.
Explore other default apps.
Uninstall, remove, and edit apps.
Explore accessories and tools.
You know about the apps available on the Start screen, and you've explored a few of them
already. You've moved them, hidden them, and changed their sizes, and you know how to
move among them when multiple apps are open. Now you're ready to learn a little about
what each of the most popular default apps offers.
In this chapter, you'll learn how to use the Photos, Music, Video, and Maps apps effectively
(because these are the ones you'll likely use the most from the start), and then you'll learn
what the other apps offer and where to learn more about them in this book.
PRACTICE FILES Before you can complete the exercises in this chapter, you need to copy the
book's practice files to your computer. The practice files you'll use to complete the exercises
in this chapter are in the Chapter03 practice files folder. Copy the entire Windows8Pictures
folder to the Pictures library. A complete list of practice files is provided in "Using the
Practice Files" section at the beginning of this book.
75
Using the Photos App
By using the Photos app, available from the Start screen, you can browse the Pictures library
on your computer and pictures you've stored on the Internet in places such as SkyDrive,
Facebook, and Flickr. You can also access pictures stored on connected devices.
When you open the Photos app, what you see depends on your presence on the Internet,
how you've previously set up the Photos app, and what online accounts you've already
associated with your Windows 8 computer. For example, if you've used SkyDrive and have
pictures stored there, you'll see and have access to your SkyDrive folder. If you've associated
your Windows 8-based computer with your Facebook account in any app, you'll see your
Facebook photos here, too. However, you might only see pictures from your Pictures library,
or you might be prompted to tell Windows where your pictures are stored.
When you're in the Photos app, you can use your mouse's wheel to scroll through the photo
folders (or the photos in a folder you've opened). Scrolling with a mouse wheel moves the
images and folders left and right. You can also use the scroll bar that appears at the bot-
tom of the Photos app, or you can use your finger to navigate photo folders by swiping and
flicking using touch gestures. You must click or tap a folder to manage your photos and to
view them. When you enter a folder, you're in Preview mode.
76
Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
After you've opened a folder, whether it's the Pictures library, SkyDrive, Facebook, or
another library, you can view and manage the photos available in it. For now, however,
click or tap any photo in any folder to view it in fullscreen mode. Note the back arrow that
appears to help you navigate the app. As you continue to use the app, you'll see more
back and forward options. Finally, position your mouse near the bottom-right corner of the
screen. There you'll find a + and - sign to enable you to zoom in and out.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you don't see any icons on the screen, move the mouse or tap the
screen one time. The icons disappear after a second or two when they aren't needed.
If you don't yet have any photos on your computer, you can copy the files provided in the
Practice Files folder for this book. If you'd like to add your own pictures, you can do so by
placing your pictures in the Pictures library. Although there are several ways to do this, the
easiest is to browse to the files to include (whether they are on a CD or DVD, on a network
drive, or on a USB key or Secure Digital [SD] card), select the desired files, copy those files,
and then paste them into the Pictures folder. If you're unsure how to browse to, copy, and
paste files, refer to Chapter 4, "Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders."
Using the Photos App 77
Me, Jennifer. Mom. Dad, Cosmo
Clipboard Organize New Open
© T t 1- « Joli Ballew ► GATEWAY ► Pictures ► Public Pictures ► Me, Jennifer, Mom, Dad, Cosmo
,-■' Favorites
■ Desktop
4 Downloads
]§ Recent places
j^ Libraries
_j Documents
Ji Music
^1 Pictures
□[] Sample Media Mix
■ Videos
*$l Homegroup
2 Joli Ballew
f^ Mrs. Washington
M Computer
^ Local Disk (C:]
G) DVD RW Drive [DO A
gB KODAK (E)
' i- Network
ff COMPAQ
JP GATEWAY
j"l WINDOWS7
DSC_0071e_342x48t
UbC_0131e_bWx48(
DSCN0303
DSCN0542
DSCN0549
DSCN0552
DSCM0553
DSCM0B40
DSC N 1026
DSC N 1027
DSC N 1031
IMG_0416
IMG001 27-201 0031
IMGO0153-201OO40
IMG00171-2M0040
Set as desktop background
bdrt
Print
Preview
Rotate right
Rotate left
Share with
& Snaglt
Cut
c »py
Create shortcut
Delete
Rename
Properties
S joli (2)
7 1 1/2012 7:33 AM
: : iZZlzyl
7 1 1/2012 7:29 AM
l*ll inli and n
12/1fi/?0117:^AM
BJoM
1/14/2012 8:04 AM
Bjoli
7/6/201011:41 AM
|Z]Land
5/7/2010 11:32 AM
I all Mom
5/5/2011 6:58 AM
|*L] star trek
10/22/2011 2:51 PM
kb &&&&&
kh istittftti
KB . i
KB UUUlSil
KB &&&&
KB &&&&&
KB &&&&
KB . ...'/ & £ if
KB &&&&&
KB tititi&tl
KB
KB ft£
KB
KB ftft&ft&
KB ■&<&&■&&
KB v? UW^SJ
KE
[Zjopen- ffl Select all
|2 Edit Ed Select none
i~) H i story ^ Invert selecti o n
sen Select
Search Me, Jennifer, Mom, Da... p
54 items 1 items sel ected 2.63 MB State: ,gt Sha red
Ji^
After you have photos in your Pictures library and can view them, you'll find that Photos
also offers charms, just like all other apps. Using touch gestures, you can swipe upward from
the bottom to view the charms; otherwise, right-click with the mouse. The charms you see
depend on which folder you're in or what picture you're viewing. For example, right-clicking
a photo in the Facebook folder while it's in full screen mode offers the option to view the
photo on Facebook, but right-clicking a photo in the Pictures library does not.
78
Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
In this exercise, you'll use the Photos app to browse to a folder that contains pictures and to
scroll through them. You'll also review the available options in both Preview and fullscreen
mode.
SET UP You need to have saved the Windows8Pictures folder to the My Pictures folder
on your computer to complete this exercise. This folder is located in the Chapter03 practice
file folder.
1 From the Start screen, click (or touch) Photos.
2 If you've used the Photos app before, it might open with a photo or folder already
selected. If so, click the Back arrow until you are at the main screen. (You might have
to click to see the Back arrow.)
3 Click Pictures library and then click or touch the Windows8Pictures folder.
Using the Photos App 79
4 Click or tap any picture in the folder to open it in fullscreen mode. Move the mouse
around to see the Back and any Forward arrows that appear and then click the
screen to access the applicable Back button.
80
Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
5 Click the top-most Back button to return to the Windows8Pictures folder. You may
have to click the screen to see it.
6 Right-click the Sheep picture to select it and view the available charms.
CLEAN UP Leave the Photos app open to this screen.
Now that you've seen some of the charms, at least those that specifically apply when you
are viewing pictures stored on your computer, you can see how you could easily delete a
single picture or view a slideshow of the images in a folder. You can also see that the picture
you right-clicked was automatically selected (which means you can quickly delete it). You
can select additional photos by right-clicking them, too. (If you're using touch, tap, hold,
and drag downward to select additional photos.)
The options you can access by right-clicking a photo while in the Pictures library include:
■ CLEAR SELECTION Click this to clear the files you've previously selected. You can
select files from only one folder at a time.
■ SELECTED View this to see how many photos are currently selected.
■ DELETE Click this to delete the selected photo(s).
■ SLIDE SHOW Click this to watch a slide show of the pictures in the selected folder.
Using the Photos App 81
SELECT ALL Click this to select all the pictures in a folder. It does not appear that you
can do anything with the selected files yet except delete them, but you might be able
to copy or cut those files in the future.
IMPORT Click to choose a device from which to import photos.
Using the Music App
The Music app offers access to your personal music collection and to music available from
the Xbox Music Store (which is often referred to simply as the marketplace). You can easily
view information about what's currently hot and trending in music, including a list of new
releases. From the marketplace, you can browse, preview, and purchase music and related
media.
SEE ALSO In Chapter 9, "Having Fun with Multimedia," learn how to burn your CD
collection.
82
Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
There are multiple areas in the Music app:
■ MY MUSIC To view music to which you have access from your computer. Click My
Music to access all your music files and to sort them by albums, artists, songs, and
playlists, and to sort what you see by the date you added them, alphabetically, and
other options.
@ my music
19 albums arranged by
date added v
albums
artists
songs
playlists
(►) P'a
Q
O
o
n
y all music
Gold - Greatest HltS Unknown Genre 1 song
Abba
Greatest Hits Pop 1 song
Queen
Third Stage Rock isong
Boston
The Byrds" Greatest Hits ro<* isong
The Byrds
Disraeli Gears Rock isong
Cream
TIP Like the Photos app, you right-click a song or album in any folder or category to
view the charms related to it (such as Add To Playlist, Play Selected, Shuffle, Repeat,
Previous, Play or Pause, and Next).
NOW PLAYING To see what's currently playing, access the playback controls, skip to
the next song in the playlist or on the album, restart the song, and more. Click and
right-click to access the options.
XBOX MUSIC STORE To browse, preview, and buy music. You can browse by genre,
featured, what's new, and what's popular.
MOST POPULAR To access the most popular music at the moment and to preview
that music. You can also make purchases from here.
TIP As with other apps, click the Back arrow to return to the previous screen.
Using the Music App 83
To view and play music you own and have saved to your computer, you choose the desired
music under the My Music area of the Music app. If what you want to play isn't on the
screen, click the My Music heading. After you select a song, album, or playlist and opt to
play it, you can obtain information about the music from the Now Playing area. Once on
that page, right-click to see the available charms. You can also right-click the details page
for the song or album to access playback controls.
84
Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
In this exercise, you'll play a song in your music library and view the track list for the album
and then pause the music.
SET UP From the Start screen, open the Music app. You do not need any practice files
for this exercise; instead, you will play music you own or the sample music provided with
Windows 8 (assuming there will be sample music).
1 From the Start screen, click or tap Music.
2 Under Music, click my music.
3 Click any album thumbnail and, from the resulting dialog box, select a song and click
Play.
4 Click the graphic located at the bottom of the screen that represents the album. (If
you don't see this, right-click.) A visualization screen opens and offers access to the
Track List view and various controls.
Using the Music App 85
5 Click the Track List icon located in the bottom-left corner under the artist name.
(Click the screen if you don't see this.)
Click the X to close the Track list; click the Back button to return to the previous
screen.
7 Right-click the screen and click Pause. (If you don't see the option to Pause, click or
touch the screen one time.)
^3 CLEAN UP Leave this screen open.
TIP While a song is playing, continue to browse your music and click Add To Now Playing
to play songs you'd like to hear next.
86 Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
As you would suspect, while playing a song or album you can use media controls to man-
age what's playing. You can shuffle the songs, too, which means playing the songs in the
playlist or on the album in random order. From the available charms, you can easily skip to
the previous and next songs, and you can pause and play songs. The Back arrow takes you
to the previous screen. To access the controls, right-click any music file.
TIP There are many features to explore in Music. You can sort the music in various ways,
you can play music on a networked Xbox, you can create playlists, and more. There isn't
enough room here to detail everything you can do, so spend some time exploring the
Music app before moving on.
If you don't have any music of your own and you'd like to acquire some, or if you're ready to
enhance your current music library, you can purchase music from the marketplace. To get
started, open the Music app and click Xbox Music Store access the store.
In this exercise, you'll access the music marketplace and preview a song.
SET UP From the Start screen, open the Music app. You do not need any practice files
for this exercise, but you will need access to the Internet.
1 From the Start screen, click (or touch) Music.
2 Scroll right and click Most Popular.
3 Click any genre in the left pane.
Using the Music App 87
4
5
@ most popular
all genres
Hip Hop
R&B / Soul
rtemporary Pop
Retrospective Pop & Lounge
Reggae / Dancehall
Click any subcategory, if applicable.
Browse to locate a song to preview; click the album or song. Click Preview.
Top songs
Triumphant (Get 'Em) (T)
Triumphant (Get 'Em) (Parental Advisory) Preview Buvsonci
6 Charms will appear that enable you to pause the song or wait for the preview to
finish.
CLEAN UP
Click the Back arrow as many times as required to access the main Music
screen.
TIP If you want to make a purchase, click the appropriate buy option. You'll be prompted to
buy Microsoft Points that you can use to make that purchase.
88 Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
Using the Video App
If you've become familiar with the Music app, the Video app will be very easy to use. You'll
see an area named My Videos that offers access to videos stored in the Videos library on
your computer. (Compare that to the Music app's My Music area.) Next to that is Spotlight,
where featured videos appear, and that is followed by the Movies Store and the Television
Store. As with the music marketplace, you can obtain media here and browse to media
using specific categories. Much of the time, you can either buy or rent the media, and you
can watch it on your Xbox if you have one.
m xbox video
movies stor
*^L
If you don't own any compatible home videos or have professionally made movies or TV
shows available, you can still browse and shop the marketplace, but the area under My
Videos won't have any entries. If you have these kinds of media, however, you can browse
to them and play them, just as you would with the music app. When you locate and play a
video, you have access to media controls that are already likely familiar to you.
TIP If you have a Windows 7-based computer, you can copy Wildlife In HD from the
Sample Videos folder there to your Windows 8-based computer to view it.
When playing a video, you have access to media controls that are similar to controls in
other apps. If you copied the practice files, and if you copied the "Flying over the Hoover
Dam" video to the Videos folder, you can play the "Flying over the Hoover Dam" video now.
Using the Video App
89
Using the Maps App
The last app you'll explore in depth is Maps. As with any other app, you click its tile on the
Start screen to open it. If you are prompted, make sure to enable location services so that
Maps can determine your location. When it's open, right-click the screen to see the avail-
able charms.
i—
\
^Ukcmfli
"*.
Springfield
Park
/
' • j'V.. V',1
DaJ
®
Show traffic
©
Map style
1 (
My location Dii
nections
The features available in Maps are:
■ SHOW TRAFFIC Click this to show the traffic in your area or on a route you've
mapped. Traffic is represented by red, yellow, and green. Traffic information won't be
available in all areas.
90
Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
MAP STYLE Click this to change the style of the map from Road View to Aerial View.
MY LOCATION Click this to pinpoint your location. The diamond represents your
location. Maps cannot detect your current location if you did not enable the required
location services when you first opened Maps or if you are not connected to the
Internet.
TIP Click the diamond that represents your location for more information about it.
DIRECTIONS Click this to get directions from one place to another. By default,
your current location will be used as one of the entries (provided location services is
enabled). Type an address and tap the right-facing arrow to get directions.
■ REVERSE ROUTE Click the two arrows located between the two points when
Directions is selected to reverse the route offered.
■ GO ARROW Click Go after inputting the required information to get directions to
a place.
In this exercise, you'll get directions from your current location to New York City.
SET UP From the Start screen, open Maps.
1 From Maps, right-click and then click Directions.
Using the Maps App 91
2
3
4
If you don't see My location in one of the boxes, type your current address.
In the empty box, type New York City and click the Go arrow.
The route appears with turn-by-turn directions.
A 1539.3mi,22hr9min
A mi
Depart E King abridge Dr toward
Naaman School Rd
-] *| 0.1 mi
Turn left onto Naaman School
2 f* 0-4mi 3 4
Take ramp right for President
George Bush Tpke
'
Philadelphia
Memph.wV^ MNESSEE Charlotte
^S/ \ K c r
Birmingham
\ Georgia \ Bay
Miss.
t>'JAi^in
Jackson
'Alabama \
Mobile —
Jacksonville
Click the + and - buttons to zoom in and out on the map. Position your mouse in the
middle of the left edge if you don't see the + and - buttons.
TIP You can zoom in and out by using the scroll wheel of your mouse or the icons on
the screen or by pinching in and out with your fingers if you have a compatible touch
screen.
5 To hide the directions or start over, right-click and then click Clear map.
^0 CLEAN UP Return to the Start screen.
92
Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
Exploring the Other Apps
There are many other apps on the Start screen besides Photos, Music, Video, and Maps, but
they all open similarly, most offer right-click options or upward swipe options, you can scroll
and touch when there's more data than will fit on the screen, and you can often click screen
elements to cause something to happen or a new app page to open. In this section, you'll
learn a little about those other apps and where to learn more about them in this book.
Additional apps available from the Home screen include:
■ MAIL To set up, obtain, and manage email. You'll learn about the Mail app in
Chapter 7, "Using the Social Apps."
■ PEOPLE To access information about your contacts. Here, you link the app to your
Microsoft account, Facebook, Twitter, and others. This enables you to see what your
contacts are up to from a single app. You'll learn about the People app in Chapter 7.
Exploring the Other Apps 93
People
Connect your accounts to automatically get info and
updates from your contacts.
^^1 Twitter contacts
lg|3 Exchange contacts
^^^ Linked In contacts
*^t Googie contacts
jfy View all in Settings
No, thanks
Social
Ve
6 unread
Notifications
What's new
Face book
MESSAGING To send messages to others by using the Internet. You'll learn about the
Messaging app in Chapter 7.
Messaging
(+) New message
3/19/2012, on Messenger
Windows
team
WEATHER To obtain up-to-date weather information from your current location
and other locations you configure. You learned about the Weather app in Chapter 1,
"Introducing Windows 8."
94 Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
NEWS To get the latest news from msnbc.com. News is an easy app to use; just scroll
through the headlines and click to read more.
DESKTOP To open the desktop from which you run desktop apps such as Paint and
use system tools such as Control Panel.
CALENDAR To access your calendar, on which you can input appointments, events,
birthdays, and other data. As with other apps, you can click to change the view, input
information, and more. You'll learn about Calendar in Chapter 7.
December 2012
Sunday Monday Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
25
2b
27
28
13
JO
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
V
13
14
15
16
1/
W
19
20
21
21
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
n
TRAVEL To open Bing Travel, where you can view featured destinations and panora-
mas, read articles, and more.
SPORTS To open Bing Sports, where you can read top sports stories, sports news,
schedules, and more.
GAMES To access, manage, and view your games and game activity. You can also
access the marketplace, where you can purchase new games. If you have an Xbox and
have configured an avatar, you'll see it here. You'll learn about games in Chapter 10,
"Playing Games."
Exploring the Other Apps
95
® xbox games
1 CrosscutHailS
j Joli
(if) Customize Avatar (i&) Edit Profile
(^) View Achievements \^s Share Profile
Motto
1 game!
Location
Bio
INTERNET EXPLORER To access the Internet by using Internet Explorer. You'll learn
about this app in Chapter 5, "Using Internet Explorer 10."
FINANCE To follow stock prices and access stock report information. You can person-
alize this app with your own information or just browse the latest financial news.
STORE To access the Windows store, where you can get apps (classified in many cat-
egories, including Travel, Productivity, Games, and the like), obtain music and video,
access books and reference materials, and more. You'll learn about the store in various
chapters, including Chapter 8, "Shopping in the Windows Store."
96
Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
Store
Spotlight
da-
'■■>■■ \
X * WlKIPEDlA
i^ '[ln"l ; rk-i'l-r.i'Vflii|ifilii;
__
SKYDRIVE To access your personal SkyDrive folders, where you can store pic-
tures, documents, music, and other data on Internet servers. You can then access
your SkyDrive data from anywhere. You'll learn about SkyDrive in Chapter 6, "Using
SkyDrive."
Joli's SkyDrive
v
3 items
Documents
CAMERA To access the camera available on your computer as applicable and to view
camera options. You'll use your camera, if you have one, to hold video chats.
Exploring the Other Apps 97
BING To access the Bing search engine. This is an easy way to find something on the
web quickly.
TIP There are other apps available from the All apps screen, including Reader and
apps you've obtained from the Store.
Managing Apps for the Long Term
You learned quite a bit about apps in Chapter 1 and Chapter 2, "Making Windows 8 Look
and Sound the Way You Want," including how to move apps, use live tiles, and customize
those tiles. You learned here how to use many of the apps, including Photos, Music, Video,
and Maps, and where to learn more about the rest of the apps on the Start screen. There
are a few more things to know, including how to manage apps for the long term.
Here are a few things you can do with apps to make the Start screen more user friendly, to
hide apps you won't use, to make app tiles larger or smaller on the Start screen, and more.
■ SHOW ALL APPS AND ACCESSORIES Right-click an empty area of the Start screen
and then click All Apps to see the apps and programs available from your computer.
From the resulting screen, you'll see categories that enable you to access the default
apps, apps you've installed, desktop apps, suites of applications such as Microsoft
Office, and programs such as QuickTime, Skype, and others. You'll also be able to
access all the Windows accessories, such as Calculator and Notepad.
98
Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
UNPIN AN APP FROM THE START SCREEN Right-click any app and click Unpin
From Start to remove it from the Start screen.
UNINSTALL AN APP Right-click any app and click Uninstall to remove it completely
from your computer.
TIP Remember, a tap, hold, and downward pull equals a right-click on the Start
screen.
MAKE AN APP TILE LARGER OR SMALLER Right-click a rectangular tile and click
Smaller to make the app appear smaller on the screen. Right-click again to access
Larger. You cannot make a natively square tile larger.
MAKE AN APP TILE STOP FLIPPING THROUGH INFORMATION OR SHOWING
PERSONAL INFORMATION ON THE START SCREEN (OR TO ALLOW IT TO DO
THIS) Right-click an app with a live tile and choose Turn Live Tile Off (or Turn Live
Tile On).
CLEAR MULTIPLE SELECTIONS Click Clear Selection. (You can select multiple apps
on the Start screen by right-clicking them.)
RUN AS AN ADMINISTRATOR Right-click any compatible desktop application to
run it with administrator privileges. You can also open the file location, uninstall the
application, and more.
Managing Apps for the Long Term
99
£
^ifl
Exploring Accessories and Tools
Finally, the Start screen offers access to the Windows 8 accessories and system tools. There
are quite a few of each and too many to detail here. However, most of the accessory names
are intuitive, as are the Windows system tools names. To access the available accessories
and system tools, right-click the Start screen, click All Apps, and scroll right. To open one of
these, just click it one time or tap it with your finger if applicable.
Task Manager
Windows System
Windows Defend e
Command Prompt
Windows Easy
Computer
Windows Easy
Transfer Reports
Default Programs
Help and Support
Windows
PowerShell
100
Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
Not every accessory or tool is covered in this book; there are too many. However, a few are
worth noting and exploring here.
■ PAINT Use to draw your own artwork by using paint brushes and tools such as the
Pencil, Paint Bucket, and Text. You can use this program to create a flyer, for example.
□ it cut j 1 V Crop J & A
VODQfiA ■ Cfoutimi
KOOOOOO - A mi*
I n ■■■■■■- .:■■■■
VT\ II II II II I
SNIPPING TOOL Use the snipping tool and drag the cursor (or your finger) around
an area of the screen to capture it.
Adjust your computer's settings
System and Security
I Review your computer's statu
Find and fix problems
Network and Internet
4
View devises and printers
%
V
View bvs Category' T
User AcrnunK and Family Safety
9 Change account type
Q Stt UP Famify Sa^y for Wtf Utt>
Appearance and Personalization
Change (ht theme
Champ dciALup kaclqruurid
Adjust screen resolution
Clock. Language, and Region
base of Access
Cci ir.i:e visual display
Exploring Accessories and Tools
101
CONTROL PANEL Use this to open Control Panel, which opens on the Desktop and
offers access to more personalization, networking, and security options.
©©
dows Help and Support
Help heme | firnww help. | rnnran <i'ipp"t
ti utanf; np« inslflilapp 1 . cr.rnf-r, yn..r
M ore to explore
Windows wptKit p
t hprk nut thp vidpo\ arTirtps,
and other content on the
Windows website.
Miautofl Amww t webbite
Provide feedback and get
drartLib lu uuL'iliurft frum
Mirrnwift <uippnft
Spf up a network, ct
.'■ ■ :• .'. ..
In this exercise, you'll access the Help and Support option from the Windows System cat-
egory when viewing All Apps on the Start screen.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need to have access to
the Start screen.
1 At the Start screen, type Help and Support.
2 Click Help and Support from the results.
102 Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
3 Maximize the window if applicable.
©<§>
Windows Help and Support
| Search
Help home | Browse help | Contact support
Learn what's new, install apps, connect your devices., and more.
More to explore
Windows website
Check out trie videos, articles,
and other content on the
Windows website.
Microsoft Answers website
Provide feedback and get
answers to questions from
Microsoft support
prnfp^innak and nttwr
Windows users.
Create strong passwords, run through our security checklist, protect your PC
from viruses, and more.
inline -sip T
e m E3
I©
4 Browse the Help And Support pages as you would any web page.
^3 CLEAN UP No cleanup is required.
A £
Q, 100% ^
Exploring Accessories and Tools 103
Key Points
Windows 8 comes with many default apps that are available from the Start screen.
You use the Photos app to manage and view photos stored on your hard drive,
shared networked drives, and social networking sites.
You use the Music app to access and play your own music and to buy music from the
music marketplace.
You use the Videos app to access movies, TV shows, and compatible videos that are
stored on your computer and shared networked drives and to buy movies and TV
shows from the video marketplace.
You use the Maps app to find places and businesses, to get directions, and to get
turn-by-turn directions to places you've mapped.
There are lots of other apps to explore, including People, Calendar, Messaging, and
others, many of which are outlined in this book in various chapters.
The All Apps screen offers access to apps that don't appear on the Start screen, acces-
sories, and system tools. You can also access third-party programs and apps you've
acquired from the marketplace.
104 Chapter 3 Using Apps on the Start Screen
Navigate
Navigate files, folders, and libraries, page 109
©
Home Share Viev
t 3 ► Libraries
* "iZ Favorites
=L*y| Documents.
■ Desktop
^.^^Jjji Library
£ Downloads
^ Recent places
1 Videos
Lei
* yj Libraries
3 Documents
Music
ta| Pkluiei
• ^§ Videos
Musk
* Library
*$ Homegroup
Rename
Rename files and folders, page 135
► Libraries. ► Videos
□
Helicopter Ride!
Understand
Understand the File Explorer ribbon,
page 113
I llHome Share View Manage
4=J l_l ecopypath Urn iJV r> ■ '-* lAl £
Copy Paste _ Move Copy Delete Rename New
Paste shortcut to T to T T folder
Clipboard Organize I
(V) ▼ t [H ► Libraries ► Documents ►
Create
Create your own library, page 143
T T [nil ► Libraries ► Sample Media Mix ►
* M Favorites
r_ Desktop
$ Downloads
.' Recent places
* ^ Libraries
t- |2| Documents
l> J> Music
i BP i LLu i LJ
Sample Media Mix is empty
No folders have been included in thi
Include a folder
[> gj\ Sample Media Mix |
Saving, Browsing, and
Organizing Files and Folders
4
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
Understand files, folders, and libraries.
Describe the most common file types.
Access your User folders and save files effectively.
Navigate the File Explorer ribbon interface.
Organize and share files and folders.
Customize and search File Explorer.
Customize libraries.
You acquire all kinds of data files, including but not limited to documents, spreadsheets,
pictures, presentations, videos, and executable programs. You save those files with recog-
nizable file names inside appropriate folders. For instance, you save the personal docu-
ments you create inside the My Documents folder and documents you want to share with
others inside the Public Documents folder. There are other folders beyond those related
to documents, including My Pictures and Public Pictures, My Music and Public Music, My
Videos and Public Videos, and so on. As you acquire more data, you can create subfolders
inside these to expand this built-in folder system.
TIP Always store data in related default folders, at least for now. When you run most
backup programs, the default folders and the subfolders in them will be included
automatically
Windows 8 also offers libraries. A library is a place to access data that's been saved to either
your personal folders or public ones. Like folders, libraries have names that represent what
you should save there: Documents, Pictures, Music, and Video. Libraries offer more flexibil-
ity than folders and simplify the process of grouping and accessing data.
107
Although there are multiple ways to access the data you acquire, File Explorer is the most
comprehensive, and you can add a tile for it on the Start screen if you find you use it often.
By using File Explorer, you can access your data, view it in various ways, search for files and
folders, and even burn files to CDs and DVDs, all from a single window.
IMPORTANT If you own a simple tablet that runs Windows 8 RT, you'll have access to only the
apps. You won't have access to anything related to the desktop, including File Explorer.
PRACTICE FILES Before you can complete the exercises in this chapter, you need to copy the
book's practice files to your computer. The practice files you'll use to complete the exercises
in this chapter are in the Chapter04 folder. A complete list of practice files is provided in
"Using the Practice Files" at the beginning of this book.
Understanding Files, Folders, and Libraries
The first step to understanding how best to save, browse to, and organize data is to learn
the differences among files, folders, and libraries. With that knowledge, you can save data
better and use File Explorer more effectively to locate and manage your data in the future.
TIP File Explorer offers a ribbon for performing common tasks and a Navigation page for
locating files, folders, and libraries.
The main differences among files, folders, and libraries are as follows.
■ FILE Any unique, stand-alone piece of data such as a single document, spreadsheet,
or presentation; an executable file; a picture or video; a screen shot of a map; or an
itinerary. You save files in folders.
■ FOLDER A mechanism for grouping data, generally data that is alike in some way.
Windows 8 has several preinstalled folders you can use, including My Documents,
Public Documents, My Pictures, Public Pictures, My Music, Public Music, and so on.
You can create your own folders, too.
108
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
LIBRARY A more flexible mechanism for accessing and grouping data.
The Documents library, for instance, offers access to two folders by default:
My Documents and Public Documents. This access is virtual. The files available here
aren't actually stored here; they are stored in their respective folders on the com-
puter's hard drive. You can configure access to other folders here, too. You can also
create your own libraries and configure which of your existing folders to make acces-
sible from them. Because libraries are indexed by Windows, searches for data stored
in libraries are very fast.
| Home Sh
aie
View
© ~ t a>
Libraries
* \Z Favorites
■ Desktop
s.
Documents
t Library
JL Downloads
fil Recent places
*
Videos
| * j^ Libraries
1
: jj Documents
> J^ Music
>E PkLuiei
B Videos
> *%/ Homegroup
;*" Computer
>% Netwurk
Musk
t Library
Search Libraries
^
Pictures
Libr:--,
In this exercise, you'll explore the files, folders, and libraries on your own computer by using
File Explorer. What you see when you click a library in the Navigation pane (the left pane in
the File Explorer window) includes two areas by default: the data that you've saved in your
personal folders and the data in the related Public folders. You might see only the practice
files that you've copied in these folders, or you might see those and data of your own, de-
pending on how you've used your computer thus far.
SET UP Copy the practice files that are located in the Chapter04 folder to your com-
puter as outlined in the "Using the Practice Files" section at the beginning of this book.
Specifically, copy Notepad Text Document.txt to the Documents library; Sheep.jpg to the
Pictures library; and Take Off.3GP to the Videos library.
SEE ALSO To learn how to install the practice files, refer to "Using the Practice Files" located
in the introduction of this book.
Understanding Files, Folders, and Libraries
109
1 From the Start screen, type Explorer. In the results, click File Explorer.
2
TIP Try the Windows key+E keyboard shortcut to open File Explorer from anywhere,
even from the Start screen.
Under Libraries in the Navigation pane, click Documents.
The list of documents saved in the Documents library appears.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you do not see the Navigation pane, click View, choose
Navigation Pane, and select Navigation Pane to show it.
(_] Notepad Text Document
Library Tools
Home Share View Manage
▼ | Q ► Libraries. ► Documents ►
...{ Favorites
W Desktop
4J, Downloads
I-j Recent places
Libraries
[j] Documents
.£ Music
@ Pictures
gj Videos
*$ Hoimegroup
"*■ Computer
*p Network
Docume
Type
5/3/201 23:56AM Text D o c u m ent
TIP The Documents library might contain only the practice files you copied from the
Chapter04 folder, or it might contain your personal documents and other data.
Under Documents, click Music.
The Music library appears.
110
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
4 Under Music, click Pictures.
The Pictures library appears.
TBBB I Library Tools Picture Tools
I Home Share View Manage Manage
T T fed ► Libraries ► Pictures ►
J ..j, r Favorites.
W Desktop
$ Downloads
J^l Recent places
^ Libraries
t- [jj Documents
l> J) Music
[>g Pictures
» g Videos
Windows??::, z
Sheep
TIP The Pictures Library might contain more data than the files you copied from the
Chapter04 folder; it might also contain your personal pictures, folders you've created,
and other data.
Under Pictures, click Videos.
The Videos library appears.
g | I Library Tools Video Tools I
I Home Share View Manage Play
© T T H ► Libraries ► Videos ►
J ;„T Favorites
E Desktop
|j. Downloads
^ Recent places
^ ^ Libraries
l> Q) Documents
Jl Music
[>g Pictures
» gj Videos
CLEAN UP Return to the Start screen by pressing the Windows key or by any other
method.
TIP Although you'll learn more about libraries later in this chapter, if you'd like to separate
the personal data from the public data available in a library before then, position the mouse
over the library name in the Navigation pane and click the arrow that appears. You can then
click one of the two folders that appear underneath.
Understanding Files, Folders, and Libraries
111
Explaining the Most Common File Types
You can open and view hundreds of kinds of files on your Windows 8-based computer. The
most common sorts of files are documents, spreadsheets, presentations, music, pictures,
videos, and executable files. You might occasionally work with recorded TV or specialized
files from third-party programs, but for the most part the types of files you encounter will
be common ones.
You save each of these files as a specific file type. You choose the file type during the save
process. (If you copy a file from another source, it already has a file type.) For example,
when you save a document you've created by using Microsoft Word, you name the file,
choose a place to save it, and select the desired file type from a list. The file type gives the
file a specific extension, generally three or four letters that appear at the end of the file
name (but don't generally appear in the list of options). The name, place, and file type you
select defines the file so that Windows 8 can distinguish it from other files, locate it, and
offer it for viewing.
t i > Libraries ► Documents ►
Organize » New folder
Templates
Fa vc rites
■ Desktop
J, Downloads
B Recent place;
j^ Libraries
3 Documents
<£ Music
fc Picture;
8j Videos
*$ Horn eg roup
;*» Computer
«P Network
Word Document
Word Macro- Enabled Document
Word 97-2003 Document
Word Template
Word Macro-Enabled Template
WnrH 97-7003 Tpmplatp
PDF
XPS Document
Single File Web Page
Web Page
Web Page, Filtered
i Text
Word XML Document
Word 2003 XML Document
OpenDuLurrieriL Te*l
Works 6 - 9 Document
Save as type: Word Document
O Search Documents
1- -
Date modified Type
3/22/201 2 &04 AM Microsoft Word D...
Authors: J Ballev^
□ Maintain
compatibility with
previous versions of
Word
Tags: Add a tag
□ Save Thumbnail
Title: Add a title
M Hide Folders
112
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
To save files effectively, you need to know a little about the choices available in programs
you'll use to create them. Here are the types of files you'll encounter most often and their
file name extensions.
TIP To show file extensions in File Explorer, click the View tab and select File Name
Extensions.
Microsoft Office files
■ Microsoft Word (.doc and .docx)
■ Microsoft Excel (.xls and .xlsx)
■ Microsoft PowerPoint (.ppt and .pptx)
■ Microsoft Publisher (.pub and .pubx)
^^^M-
Home Share
View
Manage
B
Navigatior
pane'
fm Preview pane
fn=l Details pane
Panes
Sort
by
[o] Group by '
[JJI Add columns T
l_j Size all column:
Current view
i to fit
BJ Extra
II Small
fi£ Tiles
arge icons ij Large icons
icons |$S List
fjjjj Medium icons
_||EE Details
Item checkboxes
@ File name extensions
|i Content
1 I Hidden items
Layout
Show/hide
(jj) T T 13 ► Libraries ► Documents
v <J Search Documents
-* Favorites
r_ Desktop
^, Downloads
J§1 Recent places
*£ Libraries
[> |3 Documents
t> Jl Music
[>S Pictures
R videos
l^]6&4029cO4,docx
j | Notepad Text Document.txt
Music files
■ Windows Media audio files (.asx, .wm, .wma, and .wmx)
■ Windows audio files (.wav)
■ MP3 audio files (.mp3 and .m3u)
■ AAC files (.aac)
Explaining the Most Common File Types
113
Picture files
■ JPEG files (jpg and jpeg)
■ TIFF files (.tif and .tiff)
■ RAW files (.raw)
■ GIF files (.gif)
■ Bitmap files (.bmp)
■ PNG files (.png)
D
or
New
Save as
m
PNG picture
Save a photo or drawing with high quality
Open
and use it on your computer or on the web.
si
JPEG picture
Save
fcfcl
Save a photo with good quality and use it
&
on your computer, in email,, or on the web,
BMP picture
Save any kind of picture with high quality
Save as
►
and use it on your computer.
GIF picture
Print
* m
Save a simple drawing with lower quality
and use it in email or on the web.
From scanner or camera
El
Other formats
Open the Save As dialog boKto select from
Send in email
all possible filetypes,
Video files
■ Windows Media files (.wm, .wmv, and .asf)
■ Apple QuickTime files (.mov and .qt)
■ AVI files (.avi)
■ Windows Recorded TV Show files (.wtv and .dvr-ms)
■ MPEG Movie files (.mp4, .mov, .m4v, .mpeg, .mpg, .mpe, .mlv, .mp2, .mpv2, .mod,
.vob, and .mlv)
■ Motion JPEG files (.avi and .mov)
114
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
Take off.3GP Properties
General Security Details
B
Takeoff.3GP
Type affile:
Opens with:
3GP Rle {.3GP}
■video Change...
Location:
Size:
Size on disk:
C:\Usera\JWideos
1.69 MB fl.773.610 bytes)
1.69 MB 0.777.664 bytes)
Created:
Modified:
.Accessed:
Today. August 16, 2012. 22 minutes ago
Saturday. January 9. 2010, 12:54:54 PM
Today, August 1 6, 2D12, 22 minutes ago
Attributes:
D Read-only □ Hidden | Advanced... |
Apply
1. 69 MB Library includes: I locations
TIP If you can't determine the file type from the file name, you can determine it from
the file's Properties page, as detailed in the next set of steps.
■ Miscellaneous
■ Executable files (.exe)
■ Microsoft Notepad (.txt)
■ Adobe Reader (.pdf)
■ OpenOffice and LibreOffice (.odt, .ott, .oth, and .odm)
File Explorer (about which you'll learn quite a bit in this chapter), in its default configura-
tion, offers the names of the files in the Open window but not the types of the files. If you
are interested in knowing the file type, you can do this by viewing the Properties page. The
Properties page for any file offers its file extension and other information. You can open the
Properties page by right-clicking the file and choosing Properties. The Properties page for
any file also offers the name of the program with which the file is configured to open, the
option to open the folder that contains the file, and other data and options.
Explaining the Most Common File Types
115
TIP The list of options you see when you right-click a file will depend on the type of file
you've chosen. For example, if you right-click a compatible image, the option to Set As
Desktop Background is available. This option is not available when you right-click a text
document or a video.
In this exercise you'll open the Properties page for a file on your own computer and learn its
file type.
SET UP You need to have the Notepad Text Document.txt file saved to the My
Documents folder to complete this exercise. This file is located in the Chapter04 folder.
1
2
3
Open the File Explorer window by using the Windows+E keyboard shortcut.
Under Libraries, click Documents.
Right-click Notepad Text Document.
A contextual menu appears.
T T Q ► Libraries ► Documents ►
F avc rite:
W Desktop
$ Downloads
2^1 Recent places
-j Libraries
13 Documents
,£• Music
|fa| Pictures
H Videos
*J Homegroup
;*■ Computer
*p Network
Z\ Name
SI 664029c04
Date modified Type
3/22/201 2 3: 04 AM Microsoft Word
|@ |_| Notepad Text Document
Open
Print
Edit
Open with ►
ocument
Share with ►
Send to ►
Cut
Copy
Create shortcut
Delete
Rename
Open file location
Properties
4
Click Properties.
The Properties dialog box appears.
TIP By default, extensions for files aren't shown.
116
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
otepad Text Document Properties
General Security Details
Notepad Text Document
Type of file: Text Document i.txt}
Opens with: £j Notepad
Change...
Location : C : '-.Users 'J'TJocuments
Size: 50 bytes (50 bytes)
Size on disk : 4.00 KB (4,085 bytes)
Created: Today, August 16. 2012. 19 minutes ago
Modified: Tuesday. May 3. 2012. 5:56:09 AM
Accessed: Today, August 16. 2012. 19 minutes ago
Attributes: □ Read-only □ Hidden
i
Apply
5 On the General tab, note what's listed beside Type of file.
In this example, Text Document (.txt) is the type.
TIP To change how a specific type of file will open by default, from the Properties
page and the General tab, click Change and select a new program.
CLEAN UP Click Cancel on the Properties page to close the dialog box. Close the
Documents window.
Accessing Your User Folders
Often, using File Explorer is all you need to access the data you want. In most cases, using
the available libraries suits your purposes. There are other personal folders, though, includ-
ing Downloads, Saved Games, and Searches, among others. Those user folders are a little
more difficult to find. In fact, if you never browse to them specifically, you might never
know where they are or that they even exist.
In this exercise, you'll explore your Windows 8 User folder and pin that folder to the Start
screen for easy access in the future.
Accessing Your User Folders 117
SET UP No setup is required.
1 Open File Explorer. You can use the Windows+E keyboard shortcut.
2
In the Navigation pane, click Computer and, in the Content pane, double-click Local
Disk.
This is likely drive C, but it could be something else.
Computer View
Drive Tools
Manage
oa^tf^ *
Properties Open Rename Access Map network Add a network Open Control — .
media- drive- location Panel 3" Manage
Location Network System
[ . Uninstall or change a program
■Bj System properties
^ t fli 1 ► Computer ►
^ "£? Favorites
W Desktop
jg. Downloads.
*H Recent places
A ^ Libraries
(Tj Documents
• ,J* Music
»g Pictures
> H Videos
> *& Homegroup
| ■* J*' Computer
\> £^ Local Disk (CO
c> gB KODAK [B]
•pit , , ■ , ■ , -.
J Hard Disk Drives (1)
Ek Local Disk [CO
^"*^ 910 GB free of 930 GB
J Devices with Removable Storage (2)
Eg DVD RW Drive [DO
SD ;■
KODAK [EO
932 MB free of 976 MB
Network Location (1)
&* Joli [windows7]
3 In the right pane, double-click Users.
► Computer ► Local Disk [CO ►
Name
*
j.
PerfLogs
Program Files
Program Files
l«86)
\T
Users
i>
Windows
118
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
4 Right-click your user name and choose Pin to Start.
Computer ► Local Disk [C:] ► Users ►
Name
J
Public
Open
Open in new window
TIP Notice that the Public folders are available under C:\Users. If you think you'll use
the Public folders often, pin them to the Start screen, too.
Double-click your User folder to see what's inside.
. ► Computer ► Local Dis-k [CO ► Users ► J
v Cf Search J
te * )♦ fc » >' » k
Contacts Desktop Downloads
Contacts Desktop Downloads Favorites Links My Documents My Music My Pictures
My video: Saved Games Searches
6 Click the X in the top-right corner of File Explorer to close it.
^3 CLEAN UP Return to the Start screen to see your new pinned folder. It will be listed in
the far-right position.
SEE ALSO "Understanding User Folders," next.
Beyond your libraries and your User folder, you'll find other areas of Windows 8 where you
can access data. For instance, from File Explorer you can click Network in the Navigation
pane and have access to shared User folders, including those that share data from media
devices. These types of shared media folders often contain playlists, pictures, videos, and
music, although you may use them to hold work-related data as well. You'll learn more
about networks in Chapter 11, "Connecting to a Network and the Internet"; Chapter 12,
"Allowing Others to Use the Computer"; and Chapter 13, "Sharing Files and Folders with My
Network"; and learn more about media in Chapter 9, "Having Fun with Multimedia."
Accessing Your User Folders 119
IMPORTANT A system folder is different from a user folder. System folders hold the files
Windows 8 needs to operate, program files for applications you've installed, fonts, temporary
files, and so on. For the most part, you'll want to avoid saving personal data to these types of
system folders. You can access system folders by using File Explorer by clicking Computer and
then LocalDisk. A system folder with which you might be familiar is C:\Windows.
Understanding User Folders
In the previous section, you pinned your User folder to the Start screen for easier access.
If you opened that folder, you saw that inside your User folder are subfolders for storing
and organizing your personal data, including but not limited to Contacts, Downloads, My
Documents, My Pictures, and Saved Games. If you share your computer with other people,
and they have their own user accounts on the computer, they have unique User folders, too.
TIP The items in the My Documents subfolder of your User folder are the same documents
available from the My Documents folder available from File Explorer (in the Documents
library).
In this exercise, you'll explore your personal User folder and its subfolders.
SET UP Verify that you have copied the files located in the Chapter04 folder to your
computer as outlined in the "Using the Practice Files" section at the beginning of this
book.
1 Click your User folder from the Start screen.
Earlier, you pinned it there. Your User folder opens.
TIP To change how the folders appear in your User folder, click the View tab. Then
click any layout. Try Small Icons or Large Icons.
2 In your User folder, double-click My Documents.
Your documents are available.
120
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
Home Share
Vie
"
)ocumei
[[□Preview pane H| Extra large icons t) Large icons fg| Medium icons
H Details pane g| Small icons }| List ||EE Details ~
Navigation ,=. H =
pane- ^ Tiles |= Content
Panes Layout
▼ T ► Computer ► Local Disk [CO ► Users ► J ► My Documents
Favorites
Name
Date modified
■ Desktop
l^J 6&4029c04
3/22/201 28:04 AM
£ Downloads
, Notepad Text Document
5/8/20123:56 AM
jhl Recent places
,,-j Libraries
3 Documents
.^' Music
S Pictures
B Videos
Click the Back button or the Up arrow.
The Back button is a gray, back-facing arrow that turns blue when you position your
mouse over it.
® ® - f k ► Cor
,./ Favorites
■ Desktop
|J, Downloads
'•j£l Recent places
Double-click Links.
Links appear, and you can create more if desired.
4 Click the Back button.
5 Repeat these steps to explore the other subfolders as time allows.
CLEAN UP Click the red X in the top-right corner of File Explorer to close it, or leave
it open for the next exercise.
Inside any folder, for the most part, you can double-click to open any file (or any sub-
folder that contains files). This is a common way to locate files you want to access; how-
ever, it's a little outdated. In fact, searching from the Start screen, as detailed in Chapter 1,
"Introducing Windows 8," might be better in most instances. You start typing while on the
screen, and results appear in a list. No matter which option you choose to open your files,
it's still important to understand how files and folders are organized on your computer.
Understanding User Folders 121
Another way to access data is to use the Start screen to navigate to and open the program
you use to work with a file and locate the file from the program interface. Microsoft Word,
like many other programs, offers a list of recent documents from the File tab. What you see
and have access to depends on the program you've used.
wj! V o"|l
Documentl - Microsoft Word
1 Home
nsert Page Layout References Mailings Review View
jj Save
Recent Documents
Recent Places
|^ Save As
£3? Open
fflji 664029c04 _^
J My Documents
~^? Documents
V—7 C:\Users\J\Documents
£f Close
Info
KjSjjJj Chapter 7 Brilliant Windows 3 Over 50s
1=^1 C:\Users\JVAppData\Local\Packages\microsoft/windowscommunicationsa.,,
» 2;::;:di
V—J C:\Users\J\AppData\Local\
New
Print
Save & Send
Saving Files Effectively
When you save a file, you name the file, choose a place to save it, and select a file type. It's
important to save files with descriptive names so that later, perhaps even a year from now,
you can tell what the file is without opening it. Additionally, at least at first, you should
strive to save data files in their respective default folders. Save personal documents to the
My Documents folder, personal pictures the My Pictures folder, personal audio files to the
My Music folder, and so on. Windows 8 makes it easy to do this.
Similarly, you should opt to save data you'd like to share with others or access from net-
worked devices (such as media centers) to their Public folder counterparts. For instance, you
should consider saving your music files to the Public Music folder, your vacation videos to
the Public Videos folder, and your favorite pictures to the Public Pictures folder because,
when you do, you make those files easily accessible from any device on your network. You
have to choose this option specifically, though; no data is saved to the Public folders by
default.
122 Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
TIP When you save a file by using a Save As dialog box, and when you click a library in
the Navigation pane (Documents, Pictures, Music, or Videos), the data will be saved to the
related personal folder. Data is never saved to the Public folders unless you specifically state
to do so.
In this exercise, you'll create a file in Notepad and save it to your personal Documents
folder.
SET UP Return to the Start screen. No other setup is required for this exercise.
1 At the Start screen, start typing Notepad.
2 Click or tap Notepad.
3 Type I will save this file as a Text Document.
File | Edit Format
View Help
New
Open.,.
Save
Ctrl + N
Ctrl* a
Ctrt+S
: a Text Document.
Save As,..
Page Setup..,
Print.,.
Ctrl+P
Exit
4 Click File and choose Save As.
5 In the File name window, type My Notepad Document.
6 Under Libraries, click Documents.
7 Click Save.
Saving Files Effectively 123
A (g3 Libraries
V
| i> (j Documents
V Jl Music
>(B| Pictures
> |g) Sample Media IV
> ■ Videos
File name: My Notepad Document
v
Save as type: Text Documents f*.txt)
V
Cancel
* Hide Folders
Encoding: ANSI
V
Save
TIP When you choose Documents under Libraries, the file is saved to your personal
My Documents folder. It is not saved to the Public Documents folder.
^J CLEAN UP Click the red X in Notepad to close it
SEE ALSO To learn how to save a file to the Public folders, refer to the next section,
"Understanding Libraries."
It is important to understand that the options you see in the Save As Type drop-down list
depend on the program you're using to save the file. In Notepad, if you click the arrow
by Save As Type: Text Documents (*txt), you can see that you have only one option, Text
Documents (*.txt). As you saw earlier, though, there are many more options in programs
such as Microsoft Word, including .doc and .docx. Likewise, art or photo-editing programs
offer many different file type options, including jpg, .bmp, and .gif. You'll see additional op-
tions as you gain experience with different software applications.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you have the option of saving a file as a type already called out in
this chapter (such as a .doc, jpeg, or .gif) versus something you've never heard of (such as
.ged), save the file by using the most universal format. That way you'll be able to open the
file in other programs, not just in the program in which you created or saved it.
Understanding Libraries
Libraries are organizational units that appear to be folders but are more flexible than fold-
ers. When you click a library name, you actually have access to two distinct folders: your
related personal folder and the related Public folder. While in a library, the data in both
folders appears to be in the same place on the computer, even though it is not. Windows
124
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
8 helps you get started with libraries by offering four: Documents, Music, Pictures, and
Videos.
For the most part, when using libraries to access data, you won't care where the data is
stored; you'll just be concerned about quickly getting to the data you want. Sometimes,
though, you might want to see what data is in your personal folder and what is in the Public
one, perhaps to see how your data is organized and to understand what you've already
made public. In this case, you can separate the data and view the content independently.
This separation technique is also necessary when you need to save data to a Public folder
because, as you know, by default data is saved to your personal folders. If you want to save
data to a Public folder, you have to select it specifically.
In this exercise, you'll view your personal folders in the default libraries separately.
SET UP No setup is required.
Open File Explorer.
In File Explorer, from the Navigation pane, under Libraries, click Documents.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you see only Libraries in the Navigation pane of File Explorer
and nothing underneath it, click Libraries and then click the right-facing arrow to
expand what's in that folder.
Click the right-facing arrow to the left of Documents.
It changes to a down-facing arrow.
2
* ^ Libraries
J _J Documents
l> |J My Documents
Public Documents
* <jl Music
[> fc[t My Music
Public Music
<S Pictures
• i My Pictures
Public Pictures
3 5 video:
[> £ My Videos
,, Public Videos
A library holds two folders by default.
4 Click My Documents and then click Public Documents.
Understanding Libraries 125
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4, accessing My Music, Public Music, My Pictures, Public
Pictures, My Videos, and Public Videos.
CLEAN UP Leave this window open for the next exercise.
SEE ALSO "Customizing Libraries," later in this chapter.
When you want to save a file to any of the Public folders, you use this process to separate
the library into its two distinct parts, and you choose the proper Public folder to which
to save.
Navigating the File Explorer Ribbon
Interface
File Explorer has a type of graphical user interface that is becoming more common. It has a
ribbon. The ribbon runs across the top of the window and offers tabs. You click any tab to
access the groups, options, and tools available from it. Each time you click a new tab, what's
shown on the ribbon changes. The names of the tabs are mostly intuitive and share attri-
butes with other ribbon-enabled windows and programs.
The ribbon is a highly contextual interface. The tabs and options on the ribbon change
depending on what you have selected in the Navigation pane. For example, if you click
Libraries in the Navigation pane, you see a specific set of tabs on the ribbon that includes
File, Home, Share, and View. Library Tools (Manage) also appears. You can see what's under
each tab by clicking the tab. If you click a specific item in a library, the tabs change again. If
you open a library, for instance the Videos library, you see File, Home, Share View, Library
Tools (Manage), and Video Tools (Play).
TIP If you click an option under Favorites you'll see only File, Home, Share, and View.
126 Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
Library Tools Video Tools
p| Xcut
*— ' (KD Copy path
Copy Paste
yy Paste shortcut
Clipboard Organize
T 1 s H ► Libraries. ► Videos ►
,,-; Favorites.
Q_ Desktop
|J, Downloads
|rl Recent places
,_,-3 Libraries.
I> [J Documents.
[> ^> Music
tg Pictures
To understand how to use the ribbon, you must know which tabs will appear most often
and what is available under these tabs. When working with libraries and folders, the follow-
ing are the most common tabs you'll encounter.
■ FILE Enables you to open a new File Explorer window or a command prompt, to clear
history, to get help, or to access your favorite places for storing data. For the most
part, what you see under the File menu is the same no matter what you have selected
in the Navigation pane.
□
Open new window
Open command cirompt
rM 1 p e n Wi n d o ws Po we rS h e 1 1
^
Delete history
Q-
F req u en t places
1 Replacements Images Chapter4
2 Chapter 3 After RTM
3 Chapter? Brilliant Windows S Over 50s
4 Chapter 2 After RTM
5 Replacement Shots for Chapter 17
6 Replacement Files for Chapter 21
7 Replacement Images for Chapters
S Chapter 4 After RTM
9 Chapter 17 with RTM from AU Review
Chapters After RTM
Navigating the File Explorer Ribbon Interface 127
HOME Enables you to cut, copy, and paste compatible data available in the window.
You can also copy the file path, move or copy data, delete data, rename data, create
a new folder, and select data, among other things. Options you see here will change
depending on what's selected in the folder window.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you don't see a ribbon, but instead see only menu titles, click
the arrow located to the left of the Help button and below the red X in the top-right
corner of the window.
SHARE Enables you to send files in an email message, compress (zip) files, burn
selected files to a CD or DVD, print, fax, and share with users in your homegroup,
among other things and as applicable. (You can't print a video you've selected, for
instance, so Print will be dimmed in that case.)
TIP Additional tabs might appear, such as Picture Tools, if you select an item in the
open folder or library.
Home Share
Library Tools Picture Tools
View Manage Manage
j (@ Burn to disc ^ Homegroup (view)
^ Print i/fy Homegroup (view and edit)
Email Zip
gpFax ^ Specific people...
Send Share with
T t S ► Libraries ► Pictures ►
Stop Advanced
sharing security
£ Favorites.
W_ Desktop
pg. Downloads
Recent places
j^ Libraries
Tj Documents
J) Music
[B] Pictures
■ Videos.
^1 ^5 El
Windows?? ::.. z
Use the Share tab to choose with whom to share the data, among other things.
VIEW Enables you to change how the files appear in the window (Extra Large Icons,
Large Icons, Medium Icons, and so on). You might also be able to hide or show the
Navigation pane, Preview pane, and Details pane, choose how to sort the data in the
window, and show or hide file name extensions, among other things.
128
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
TROUBLESHOOTING If you can't see all the tabs, or if the items on the tabs seem
condensed, maximize the File Explorer window. If you don't see the ribbon, but
instead see only tab names, click the arrow on the Quick Access toolbar at the top of
the window and clear Minimize Ribbon.
1 Home Share
^M Library Too Is Picture Tools
View Manage Manage
- ©
~] Preview pane
" — ' [U Details pane
Navigation
Panes
Iflfjt [Pj Group by -
[fl Add columns "
5ort l++l
hy - SI Size all columns to fit
Current view
|_| Item checkboxes
□ Filename extensions
□ Hidden items
Show/hide
Hide selected
31 Extra large icons ^J Large icons
jj]j| Small icons ijjj£ List
|jl Tiles |= Content
§HJ Medium icons
m
|1= Details
-
Layout
© " t S ► Libraries ► Pictures ► v ej Search Pictures p
MANAGE When you select a library in the Navigation pane, the Manage tab enables
you to manage your libraries and the data in them in various ways, including adding
access to additional folders.
Library Tools | Picture Tools I
Home Share View Manage Manage
G||] Optimize library for '
\£
'■W=W *** Lg Change icon
Manage Set save r^ -i Restore
library location ^ |HD Show in navigation pane | settings
Manage
T T B ► Libraries ► Pictures.
TIP Rarely, an unexpected tab will appear or a common tab will be missing. For instance, if
you click Computer in the Navigation pane, you'll see only three tabs: File, Computer, and
View.
In this exercise, you'll explore various tabs on the File Explorer ribbon and use the ribbon
to delete the Notepad Text Document file. Later, you'll learn how to use more of the com-
mands you see on these tabs.
SET UP You need the practice files located in the Chapter04 folder as outlined in the
"Using the Practice Files" section at the beginning of this book.
1 Open File Explorer by using any method desired.
2 In the Navigation pane, under Libraries, click Documents.
3 Click the Home tab (if applicable).
4 Click one time (do not double-click) the Notepad Text Document file.
Navigating the File Explorer Ribbon Interface 129
Library Tools j
View Manage
Home Share
pi ^ut
^L=J I— J |Tg copy path
Copy Paste
I?] Paste shortcut t T to „
Clipboard Organize
T t Q ► Libraries. ► Documents ►
n
664025d>4
w. w x ■* si s:
Move Copy Delete Rename New
folder
ew item T
Q Easy access '
"if Favorites
■ Desktop
JJ, Downloads
'^=vl Recent places
-j Libraries
| |] Documents
J) Music
Q Pictures
r~\ flopen- ffl Select all
'-*' Q Edit %° Select none
roperties , _
'^History n ^ Invert selection
Open Select
1
""^
"^K
34 My
Notepad
Notepad
Text
Document
Document
On the Home tab, click Delete.
SEE ALSO "Working with Deleted Files and the Recycle Bin," later in this chapter.
%J CLEAN UP Leave this window open.
When you select a library or folder from the Navigation pane, you'll have access to its con-
tents in the contents pane. As you saw in the previous exercise, you can select an item in
the folder and perform tasks on it such as deleting a selected file. Sometimes when you
select data in the contents pane additional tabs appear. Here, a picture is selected, and a
new tab, Picture Tools, is available. From this new tab, you can rotate the picture, set the
selected picture as the desktop background, and play a slide show.
SEE ALSO "Setting Up Media Libraries," in Chapter 12, "Having Fun with Multimedia."
Library Tools jj Picture Tools |
Home Share View Manage Manage
r , k
^
Rotate Rotate Slide Set as Play
left right
Rotate
show background To
© > - 1
" fe| ► Libraries ► Pictures
Here, a video is selected. The new tab, Video Tools, offers various Play options, includ-
ing the option to add the video to a playlist. You'll learn more about multimedia files in
Chapter 12.
130
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
■.'k-.\
Library Tools I Video Tools I
Manage Play
Play Play Play Add to
all To T playlist
fe) T T H ► Libraries ► Videos. ►
To summarize, the ribbon offers the tools you need to perform tasks when working with
files, folders, and libraries, and the tabs are named so that you can tell what should be avail-
able from them. For instance, if you want to share a file by printing it, emailing it, burning it
to a CD, or even faxing it, the Share tab offers this functionality. If you want to change how
you view files in File Explorer or if you'd like to sort your files, group them, or hide or view
specific parts of File Explorer, the View tab offers this functionality. Don't worry if this is all
new to you; it's pretty intuitive, and you'll catch on quickly.
TIP In the next few sections you'll learn how to use the tools available under other tabs,
including Share and View.
Organizing Files and Folders
There are many ways to organize your files and folders beyond saving them in their proper
folders and with recognizable names. One way to organize your files for the long term is to
create subfolders inside the existing default folders and move data into them. By using sub-
folders, you can easily expand the existing file system. This becomes necessary when you
have acquired enough data that a folder is difficult to navigate. Windows 8 makes it easy to
create a subfolder, and you'll learn how in the next exercise.
TIP The best way to keep your data organized is to create folders with descriptive names
and move corresponding data into them. Consider creating folders named Travel, Taxes,
Health, Pets, and so on.
Either before or after you create subfolders and begin to move data into them, you can give
those folders more recognizable names than they have now. Names such as Tax Summary
2012, Jennifer's Wedding, or My Las Vegas Vacation 2011 are certainly decipherable and
better than something less descriptive (such as Taxes, Pictures, or Vacation). You can delete
files you no longer need, too. Finally, if you decide to archive data you no longer want to
store on your computer, you can burn those files to a CD or DVD.
Organizing Files and Folders 131
In this exercise, you'll create a subfolder inside the My Pictures folder.
SET UP You do not need any practice files for this exercise.
1 Open File Explorer by using any method desired.
2 In the Navigation pane, under Libraries, click Pictures.
3 From the Home tab, click the New Folder icon.
A new folder appears, waiting to be renamed.
4 Type a name for the folder and press the Enter key.
Library Tools ! Picture Tools
View Manage Manage
X^
Copy Paste Move Copy Delete Rename
Qy Paste shortcut to * to '
[£j New item '
X^l Easv access *
►} T T |E] ► Libraries. ► Pictures ►
w" Favorites
r_ Desktop
$ Downloads.
.' Recent places
,,-j Libraries
|jy Documents
' My Documents
Name Date
M e, J en n if er, M o m, . . . 8/29/201 2 1 1 : 59 AM
j. Taxes 3/1 6/20123:28 AM
Wind owsSP i ctu res 8/1 6/201 2 7:30 AM
Q 1 0Q05S4 6/1 3/2008 9:19PM
Q J en n if er 001 9/23/201 1 :02 P M
Q J en n if er i n G I a sses 1 /1 4/201 1 7:42 AM
TROUBLESHOOTING If something happens and the folder gets named New Folder,
click it once and, from the ribbon, click Rename. Alternatively, you can right-click the
folder and click Rename.
%J CLEAN UP Leave File Explorer open for the next exercise.
After you create a subfolder, it's easy to move data there. You can just drag and drop files
from the window into the newly created folder. This works great if the new folder in which
you created it is in the same window as the data you'd like to move there. However, if drag-
ging and dropping isn't so straightforward, you can use the Move To command on the
Home tab of the ribbon.
TIP You can select multiple noncontiguous files by holding down the Ctrl key while you
select them. To select all the files in a window or contiguous files, hold down the Shift key
and click the first and then the last of the files to include.
132 Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
In this exercise, you'll move two files at one time from one folder to another by using the
Move To command in File Explorer.
SET UP You need the practice files located in the Chapter04 folder as outlined in the
"Using the Practice Files" section at the beginning of this book. Specifically, copy Sheep,
jpg and Farmhouse.jpg.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Open File Explorer by using any method desired.
In the Navigation pane, under Libraries, click Pictures.
Click the Farmhouse file one time (do not double-click).
Hold down Ctrl and click Sheep once.
TIP Remember, if you are using a tablet you'll have to tap, hold, and drag downward
until a check mark appears.
From the Home tab, click Move to.
Click Choose location.
Library Tools I Picture Tools
Manage Manage
Copy Delete Rename
Copy Paste
[U Paste shortcut
Replacements Images Chapter4 Organize
Miscellaneous re s ►
^ Desktop *
jjL Downloads
PI] Documents
sSPictL
(i Jl Music
js-e
fc. Pictures
i3i | Videos
L [Q Choose location..,
Date
S/16/2012S
3/16/2012 7
11/19/2007
6/1 3/2003 9
11/19/2007
TIP If you see the folder to which you'd like to move the files, you can select it. If you
do not see the folder, click Choose Folder and browse to it.
In the Move Items dialog box, expand Libraries and Pictures and then click Public
Pictures.
Organizing Files and Folders 133
Move Items
Select the place where you want to move these 2 items,
then click the Move button.
■ Desktop
* , j Libraries
> 11 Documents
> Ji Music
* b- Pictures
; My Pictures
Xi Public Pictures
[>■ Videos
I> #4 Homegroup
Kl Joli Ballew
Folder: Public Pictures
Click Move.
After you click Move, the dialog box closes, and the two files you selected are now
available from the Public Pictures folder.
%^B CLEAN UP Leave File Explorer open for the next exercise.
TIP Use Copy To if you want to copy the files instead of move them. The process is the
same.
Renaming Files
When you import pictures from a digital camera by using the built-in tools in Windows 8,
your camera software, or a photo-editing program, those imported pictures are given
names. Every file has to have its own name. The names given aren't very descriptive,
though. The file names applied might be a cryptic form of the date on which the photos
were imported, or they might be partial names created by using tags you applied during
the process, but usually they are not the names you'd apply to them, given the opportunity.
TIP You will learn how to import pictures from a digital camera in Chapter 12.
Other types of files are also often named inappropriately, generally because you're in a
hurry to save them. File names such as Dad, Summary, Presentation, Taxes, and so on don't
give much information about their contents. If you have to open the file to figure out what
it is, the name is not descriptive enough.
134
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
TIP The File Explorer ribbon, specifically the Home tab, offers the Rename icon, which
becomes available only after you select a file.
In this exercise, you'll rename a file by using the Rename command in File Explorer.
SET UP You need the practice files located in the Chapter04 folder as outlined in the
"Using the Practice Files" section at the beginning of this book. Specifically, copy the
Helicopter.3GP file to the Videos library.
1 Open File Explorer by using any method desired.
2 In the Navigation pane, under Libraries, click Videos.
3 Click the Take off file once (do not double-click).
I Home Share View Manage Play
S p| Xcut
-J Qu) Copy path
Copy Paste Move Copy Delete Rename New
oti. m x -* kb:
ew item T
f^\ Easy access *
[H Paste shortcut to
Clipboard Organize
T T H ► Libraries ► Videos ►
..j,' Favorites
E Desktop
$■ Downloads
M Recent places
,-j Libraries.
13 Documents
J\ Music
b= Pictures
fc| Videos
4 From the Home tab, click Rename.
5 Type Helicopter Ride.
► Libraries ► Videos
Helicopter Ridej
Press Enter.
Renaming Files 135
^^m CLEAN UP Leave File Explorer open for the next exercise.
SEE ALSO Learn how to download files safely in the "Exploring the SmartScreen Filter"
section in Chapter 5, "Using Internet Explorer 10."
Sharing Files with the Share Tab
Now that you have some experience with File Explorer, the ribbon, and working with files,
you can use that knowledge to explore other tools available on the ribbon and to use those
tools with less guidance. For instance, you can likely figure out how to burn the Helicopter
Ride.3GP file to a CD or DVD because Burn To Disc is a command from the Share tab.
Likewise, you can deduce how to print the Sheep.jpg photo by using the Print command
located from that same tab. In both instances, you select the desired file, click the desired
command, and follow any instructions provided. You might have to insert a disc or put
paper in the printer, for instance.
Some commands are less intuitive than, for example, Print. The Zip command is one of
those. When you zip something, you compress it. When you compress a group of files or
a single large file, it takes up less space on your hard drive. People often zip large files or
groups of files before they send them in email to reduce the amount of time it will take the
files to arrive at their destination. In the past, people zipped files because of a lack of hard
drive space. That is not often a problem with newer computers.
Fax is another intuitive but odd command. It's a little different from the others because you
need access to a fax server or telephone line to actually send a fax, and most home users
don't have that access. If you already have something in place that enables you to send fax-
es from your computer, though, the process is intuitive. If you'd like to be able to send faxes
from your computer, you'll have to perform the setup tasks that appear when you click the
Fax command.
There are some tools you can now explore on your own from the Share tab. (Remember
that not all options appear for all data.)
Library Tools Picture Tools
Manage Manage
) Burn to disc ^ Homegroup (view)
^ Print i/fy Homegroup (view and edit) ^
Email Zip n , , . „ ,, _ Stop Advanced
@lFax RjohBallew ^ sharing 5ecurity
fl
Send Share with
136 Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
■ EMAIL Select any file (or multiple files) in a File Explorer window to activate this
option. Click Email. If you've chosen a picture (or multiple pictures) to send in email,
you'll be prompted to choose a picture size first. After you click Email, your default
email program will open, and the file(s) will be attached.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you do not have a dedicated email client installed and
configured on your computer this command won't work and will be grayed out.
■ ZIP Select multiple files to compress them. After they are compressed, you can send
the compressed folder (which contains the files) in email. To decompress, double-click
the compressed files. You can tell a file is zipped because a zipper appears on it.
■ BURN TO DISC Select the file or files to burn (copy) to a CD or DVD. Click Burn To
Disc. Insert a disc when prompted and follow any prompts to complete the copy
process.
■ PRINT Select the file or files to print and click Print. You might be prompted to
choose a printer, set printer properties, or perform other tasks, depending on your
printer and current computer setup. The document might just begin to print with no
other input from you. The Print command will be dimmed if you have selected some-
thing, such as a song in the Music library, that can't be printed.
■ FAX Select a file to fax. Click the Fax command. Follow any prompts to complete the
fax process.
SEE ALSO To share data with others on your network, which can involve using the various
homegroup and share commands on the Share tab of File Explorer, refer to Chapter 13.
Customizing File Explorer with the View Tab
From the View tab in File Explorer, you can change how the window appears on the screen.
You can hide or show the Navigation pane, change how the files appear (for example, as a
detailed list or as icons), and hide files and folders you don't use very often. You can show
panes that do not currently appear, including the Preview pane and the Details pane. You
can also group files in various ways, show file name extensions, and more. The best way to
learn your way around these options is to show and hide these panes, show and hide files,
and change how the files and folders appear in the File Explorer window.
Customizing File Explorer with the View Tab 137
TIP You might not want to customize File Explorer too much right now, especially anything
having to do with hiding files, folders, or the Navigation pane. If you change it too much, it
won't look like what you see in the screen shots of this book.
Here are the options you can safely explore from the View tab.
■ NAVIGATION PANE The Navigation pane is the left pane that contains the folder
and libraries lists. To hide this pane, click Navigation Pane and, in the resulting drop-
down list, click Navigation Pane again. This hides the pane. Repeat to show the pane.
iWMM
1 Home Share View
[jl| Preview pane H| Extra
[□1 Details pane ^| Small
~§Z Tiles
Ne
vigati
pane 1
Dn
<S
1 Navigation pane
Expand to open folder rj s ^ pj
Show all folders
| V | Show favorites
PREVIEW PANE The Preview pane offers a preview of the selected file, so you don't
have to open it. Click Preview Pane to show this pane and click again to hide it.
I J] Preview pane Hj Extra large icons El Large icons
3 Details pane |j|jj Email icons §£§: List
^jl Tiles |= Content
Panes Layout
jjal Medium icons
JEE Details
(«-) " t h] ► Libraries It Pictures I
Vi" Favorites
r_ De=ktcp
4. Downloads
|| Recent places
j^ Libraries
jf| Documents
Jp Music
hj Pictures
t| Videos
w$ Homegroup
fli Cnmpiitpr
^ Local Disk (C:)
Stj KODAK m
P Joli (windows7)
Tsyes
1 . WindowsBPictures
B Farmhouse
Det;
3/16/2012 8:28 AM
3/16/2012 7:30 AM
11/19/2007 4:50 AM
S Sheep
6/1 S 2C.0SftigpM
|Z] Trees
11 •; 20074:50AM
' [o] Group by
[J] Add columns -
1=1 Size all columns to fit
Current view
Hating
□ Item check boxes
□ Filename extensions
nine sei
|_| Hidden items jt err
Show/hide
y <1 Search Pictures
v m
»
1,259 KB &&&&&
138
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
DETAILS PANE The Details pane offers detailed information about a file. The infor-
mation offered is similar to what you'd see if you viewed the file's Properties page.
Click Details Pane to show this pane and click again to hide it.
Library Tools I Picture Tools I
Manage Manage
H| Extra large ice
II List
iji Content
ilU Medium icon
s -
H Small icons
|lEE Details
h
|l Tiles
II
(f) T t 3 ► Libraries ► Pictures
K Favorites
■ Desktop
| Recent places
j^ Libraries
3 Documents
Jt Music
fai Pictures
Q Video'
*SJ Homegroup
;^t Computer
& Local Disk [C:)
S@ KODAK [EO
■P Jofi (window 5 7}
*(i Network
'•ien: =
Dst;
J Taxes 3/16/2012 3:28 AM
,. Windo.wi8Pictures 3/1 6/201 2 7:30 AM
E Farmhouse 11/19/20074:50 AM
(Z| Sheep
6/13/20039:19 PM
|Z] Trees
11 /1 9/2007 4:50 AM
l] Group by T
[2] Add columns -
=j Size all columns to fit
Rating
1,259 KB UWWUy
I I Item check boxes
I I File name extensioi
__. Hide 5 el
|_| Hidden items jt err
Show/hide
v <j Search Pictures
Sheep
JPG File
m
»
Date taken:
6/1 3/2003 9:19 PM
"acjs;
From Iris
Rating:
^tJW^t?
Dimensions:
2576x1932
Size:
125 MB
"itle:
Add a title
Authors
AHH En aitthnr
Comments:
Add comments
Camera maker:
EASTMAN KODAK CO
Camera model:
KODAK EASYSHAREC.
Subject
Specify the subject
F-stop:
f/4.6
Exposure time:
1/250 sec.
ISO speed:
ISO -SO
Exposure bias:
.} step
Focal length:
13 mm
Max aperture:
4.5
MeLeriny mode
CenLti WeiyhLedAv...
Flash mode:
No flash, auto
LAYOUT GROUP OPTIONS The options in the Layout group include Extra Large
Icons, Large Icons, Medium Icons, Small Icons, List, Details, Tiles, and Content. Click
each to view it.
Library Tools j Picture Tools
Manage Manage
View
Navigation
pane T
] Preview pane a) Extra large icons tj Large icons
J=j Details pane } : [ Small icons :;i; List
I Tik; |= Content
ijaj Medium icons
£= Details
«!=■
Layout
® ® T T B ► Libraries ► Pictures ►
GROUP BY Files and folders are listed alphabetically and in ascending order in File
Explorer by default, but you can change that with the Group By options. Click Group
By and select any option to group by that criterion.
Customizing File Explorer with the View Tab
139
View 1 Manage II Manage 1
B| Extra large icons ij Large icons
| [Hit |[D] Group by -
fjSj Medium icons |j
| Small icons
E Details
Name
m ust i=
Date
Layout
Tags
ries ► Pictures ►
Size
Rating
Type
Date created
Date modified
J, Vacations
QDad atChri
Q Sheep
Date taken
Folder path
Dimensions
Ascending
Descending
Choose columns..,
SORT BY You use the Sort By option to sort data by Date, Size, Rating, and other attri-
butes. Click Sort By and select an option, such as Date Taken, to group data differently.
ITEM CHECK BOXES Place a check by Item check boxes to show the check mark
when items are selected. Clear the check marks to hide these marks.
[□] Group by T
@ Item check boxes
O File name extensions
njl] Add columns '
Sort l++l
by gg Size all columns to fit | | Hidden items
Hide selected Options
items
FILE NAME EXTENSIONS Place a check by File Name Extensions to see the ex-
tension after the file name.
HIDDEN ITEMS Place a check beside this to show the data you've previously hid-
den. The data you'll see (that is currently hidden) will appear in grayscale, and you
can use Hide Selected Items to display the items.
HIDE SELECTED ITEMS With this option, you hide items you don't need to access
regularly while leaving those items available on your computer. To hide any item,
select it and then click Hide Selected Items. The items will be hidden. To reveal
them, check Hidden Items (detailed in the previous bullet), select the item to
reveal, and click Hide Selected Items to display the item.
140
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
Searching in File Explorer
You know how to share files by using File Explorer and how to change how you view files
there. As you acquire more data, however, it will become more difficult to sift through it to
find what you want. One way to deal with lots of data is to customize what's shown in a File
Explorer window by searching for the files you want. When you do this, only the files that
match criteria you set appear in the window. This is a good way to cull information when
you've stored a lot of data.
In this exercise, you'll search for a specific file in File Explorer.
SET UP You need the practice files located in the Chapter04 folder as outlined in the
"Using the Practice Files" section at the beginning of this book.
1 Open File Explorer by using any method desired.
2 In the Navigation pane, click Libraries.
3 In the Search Libraries window, type Farmhouse.
Share
View Search
iew pane
[■J Extra large icons ^J Large icons
|JU Medium icons
-
His pane
ijjjjj Small icons JJ List
&1 Details
-
fjjl Tiles |E Content
1
[o] Group by T
rjifl Add columns -
□ Item check boxes
l~l File name extensions
Layout
^P ► Search Results in Libraries ►
by T eIj Size a " columns to fit Q Hidden items
Current view Show/hide
v Cf Farmhousej
V.
Hide sel
item
%^ CLEAN UP Leave File Explorer open for the next exercise.
TIP If you have so many files that you have to use this method to find them, do some
housecleaning. Create subfolders and move data into them and delete files you no longer
need.
Searching in File Explorer
141
Customizing Libraries
You know quite a bit about libraries, including what kind of data is accessible from them.
You have learned that the Documents library, for instance, offers access to the data in both
the My Documents folder and the Public Documents folder. If you've done a good job of
saving, organizing, and managing your data as we've suggested so far, what you have in the
Documents library is only documents and perhaps a few related presentations, invoices, tax
summaries, or databases. Likewise, you have only pictures in the Pictures library, Music in
the Music library, and Videos in the Videos library.
Not all data can be grouped in such a way, though. Consider a scenario in which you're
trying to group data for a trip you're planning. You might have a scanned itinerary from
a travel agent; pictures, videos, and audio files for learning a new language; airplane tick-
ets received by email; and other travel documents such as immunization records you've
acquired from various sources. If you stored that data in folders in a traditional way, you'd
have the documents stored in the My Documents folder, the audio files in the My Music
folder, pictures of your destination in the My Pictures folder, and so on. This is certainly
unwieldy and inefficient. However, if you try to group all of this, for example, in a subfolder
of My Documents, it wouldn't really be organized properly. It would be much better to cre-
ate a new library named Travel and make all the data related to your trip available there.
In the following exercises, you'll create a new library, name it, and include access to some
of the existing folders stored in different places on your computer's hard drive. For this
to work on a personal level, you'll have to create your own folders, perhaps named Travel
Plans, Language Tutorials, Itineraries, and Health Records, and put related data into them.
Then, you'll follow the steps here to create a new library named Travel and include those
folders (and their data) in it.
In this exercise, you'll create a new library and name it Sample Media Mix, and then you'll
add access to three folders: My Pictures, My Music, and Public Videos.
142 Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
SET UP You do not need to perform any setup tasks for this exercise.
Open File Explorer by using any method desired.
In the Navigation pane, right-click Libraries.
Point to New and click Library.
6
7
Type Sample Media Mix and press Enter; click Sample Media Mix in the
Navigation pane.
(+5 T T (Ml ► Libraries ► Sample Media Mix :
* W Favorites
W Desktop
£. Downloads
'^i Recent places
* Libraries
t- [J Documents
■■■ J* Music
»B Pictures
Sample Media Mix is empty
No folders have been included in this library.
Include a folder
» lg|l Sample Media Mix |
> H Videos
Click Include a folder.
A new window opens.
TIP It's important to understand that libraries only point to, or make access available
to, data. Data is not moved to libraries. Thus, you can create, add, remove, and
personalize libraries however you like. You won't actually be moving any data.
Click My Pictures and choose Include folder.
Right-click Sample Media Mix in the Navigation pane and choose Properties.
Customizing Libraries
143
j ^ Burn to disc ^ Homegroup (view)
*^ Homegroup (view and edit) ^
Email Zip ■"■■.-..., - 5to P
ft Fax R Joh Balle ™ T sharing
Advanced
©
T T (Ml ^ Libraries. ► Sample
,, Favorites
W_ Desktop
£ Downloads
^ Recent places
.j-j Libraries
|j Documents
(□fl Grandchildren
J) Music
fa| Pictures
□fl Sample Media Mix
i My Pictures
iMl Travel
H Videos
*$ Homegroup
-■ Icli Ballew
, , Mrs. Washington
;*" Computer
# DVD RW Drive -Audio CD
§B KODAK
^ Local Disk
Sample Media Mix Properties
Library
Library locations:
Set save location Set public save location | Add...
J Remove
Optimize this library for:
General items
H
Size of files in library: 3S.2MB
Attributes: @ Shown in navigation pane
Shared
r>
Change Btxary icon... | M,
Restore Defaults
Apply
Click Add.
In the Navigation pane, expand the Music library, click My Music; choose Include
folder.
144
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
Sample Media Mix
[Pi Optimize library for T
* F .CH,n ge ic,n
Manage Set save r^ — -i Restore
librae Show in navigation pane
Sample Mledia Mix Properties
Library locations:
41 J! My Pictures (C:\Users\Joli)
5et save location : Add,,, I Remove
Optimize this library for:
T
Size of files in library: 1 .41 MB
Attributes: [7] Shown in navigation pane
□ Shared
| Change library icon... | Ljj^,
Include Folder in Sample Media Mix
Qj () ▼ ^ I J « Music ► My Music
Organize » New folder
t> 3 Windows Explorer
■* "K" Favorites
■ Desktop
0. Downloads
. Recent places
* 3 Libraries
- Documents
1 J> Musi
[> jfl My Music
Ji Public Music
[>|Bl Pictures
l> g Sample Media M
l> ■ Videos
Folder: My Music
My Music is added to the Sample Media Mix library.
Sample Media Mix Properties
Library locations:
t \^t\ Search My Music
It II
Wolfgang
Amadeus Mozart
Include folder
^ jj| My P i ctu res [C:\Users\J]
$ My Music (C:\Users\J)
10 Click Add and repeat step 9 to add the Public Videos folder.
11 Click OK.
CLEAN UP Leave File Explorer open for the next exercise.
TIP After you've created a library, you can add more folders to it from the library's Library
Tools, Manage tab. Click Manage Library to get started.
Customizing Libraries 145
After you have created a library, you can further personalize it. You can select the new
library and, from the Manage tab, add access to additional folders (click Manage Library),
for instance. You can also remove folders. You can delete a library, too. Although you might
be apprehensive about deleting a library, it's important to understand that a library only
points to data, making it accessible. Data isn't actually stored in a library, it is stored in fold-
ers, so when you delete a library, you delete only the library itself and not the data.
TIP To delete data from your computer, delete it from the folder in which it's saved (My
Documents, My Pictures, and so on).
To work with a library, you select it in the Navigation pane. From there you can:
■ Prevent a folder from being included in a library. From the Library Tools, Manage
tab, click Manage Library. Then select the folder to remove and click Remove (and
then OK).
I Home Share View Manage
l |f=1 Optimize library for '
^* [^Change icon
Manage Set save n==;
library location ^ |ED Show in navigation pane| settings
Manage
© T T In]] ► Libraries ► Sample Medic
Restore
,,■/" Favorites.
r_ Desktop
|Jr Downloads
Recent places
^j Libraries
jj Documents
J) Music
@ Pictures
lop Sample Media Mix
i. My Pictures
Jt My Music
Public Videos
■ Videos
#Jf Homegroup
Rjcli
|_j JoliBallew
| | Mrs. Washington
;*■ Computer
5^ Local Disk (CO
B
B
Sample Media Mix Library Locations
Change how this library gathers its contents
When you include a folder in a library,, thefiles appear in the library, but continueto be stored
in their original locations,
Library locations
l, My Pictures
C:\Users\J\Pictures
My Music
C:\Users\J\Music
Public Videos
C:\Users\Public\Videos
Learn more about libraries
Default and public sav...
Delete a library. Right-click the library in the Navigation pane and click Delete. (Don't
do this yet.)
146
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
* ^ Libraries
•> Q) Documents
Music
:- Picture:
Collapse
Open in new window
Pin to Start
Share with
Don't show in navigation pane
Send to
Copy
Delete
Rename
New
Properties
Set a save location. With a file or folder selected in a library, from the Manage tab,
click Set A Save Location. Then you can select the default save location. When you
add new files or folders to the library, Windows will store them in this location.
Optimize a library for a specific type of data. From the Manage tab, click Optimize
A Library. From this menu, select the type of content contained in the library. This
makes File Explorer show relevant tags and sorting fields to the content of the library.
It also changes the icon of the library to match its content.
Change the icon used to represent the library. To set an icon to represent the library,
from the Manage tab, click Change Icon. Select an icon and click OK.
Show or hide the library in the Navigation pane. Right-click the library to see options
to hide or show the library in the Navigation pane.
Working with Deleted Files and the
Recycle Bin
You learned earlier in this chapter how to delete a file (or other item) in File Explorer; you
just select the item and click Delete on the ribbon's Home tab. You can select multiple items
by holding down Shift or Ctrl. You might know other ways to delete a file, including right-
clicking the item and then choosing Delete from the resulting contextual menu or pressing
the Delete key. However you do it, files and folders you delete are sent to the Recycle Bin
and are removed from their current positions in the folder. The Recycle Bin holds deleted
files and data until you manually empty it.
Working with Deleted Files and the Recycle Bin
147
In this last exercise, you'll delete a file (if you haven't already deleted it) and restore it by
using the Recycle Bin.
SET UP You need to have copied the Chapter 04 Practice files to your computer as
outlined in the "Using Practice Files" section at the beginning of this book.
1 Open File Explorer by using any method desired.
2 In the Navigation pane, under Libraries, click Documents.
3 If you deleted Notepad Text Document earlier, skip to step 6. Otherwise, select
Notepad Text Document.
4 Click Delete from the Home tab.
Home Share View
Manage
n * cut
W-Oi *^
Copy path
Paste Move Copy Delete Rename
Qy Paste shortcut to - to T
Clipboard Organize
T t Q ^ Libraries ► Documents ►
5 Click the dash in the top-right corner of File Explorer to minimize it.
6 On the desktop, double-click the Recycle Bin.
7 Right-click Notepad Text Document.
8 Click Restore.
P ► Recycle Bin ►
aces
Farmhouse
JPG File
Hh
Notepad Text Document
1.23 MB
Restore
50 bytes
Cut
Delete
Properties
There are a few other things you can do while in the Recycle Bin, including emptying it. You
can also restore every item that's in there. You should make it a habit to empty the Recycle
Bin two or three times a year. You do this from the Manage tab. To access this screen, from
the desktop, double-click the Recycle Bin.
148
Chapter 4 Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders
Recycle Bin Tools
View I Manage
i w ^ tg
Empty Recycle Bin Restore Restore the
Recycle Bin properties all items selected items
Manage Restore
T £ ► Recycle Bin
The Recycle Bin has other tabs to explore, too. When you explore them, you'll find similar
tools under each. For instance, from the Recycle Bin Home tab, you can delete specific files
permanently, move files somewhere else, and even view the properties for a file. Likewise,
from the Share tab, you can send email and burn files to a disc. From the View tab, you can
change how items in the Recycle Bin appear in the window.
Key Points
You save data as files, save files in folders and subfolders, and access folders from libraries.
Windows 8 comes with its own file system that includes various default folders to
which you should save data, including but not limited to My Documents, Public
Documents, My Pictures, Public Pictures, My Music, Public Music, My Videos, Public
Videos, Contacts, Downloads, and others.
Libraries offer access to data stored in folders. Four libraries exist: Documents,
Pictures, Music, and Videos. Each offers access to two folders by default, the related
personal folder and the Public folder.
It's very important to save files to their respective folders and to create subfolders
when data starts to amass.
File Explorer is the best way to navigate to the data you keep and offers the ribbon to
help you navigate it.
The most-often-used tabs on the File Explore ribbon are Home, Share, and View. You
use these tabs to work with the data you collect, including renaming, deleting, send-
ing email, printing, moving, and so on.
It's possible to customize File Explorer by hiding and showing data or culling data by
searching for something specific.
You can create your own libraries to hold email that should be grouped together but
does not fit the limited standards of a single folder. After you create a library, you
choose which folders to make accessible from it.
Key Points 149
Learn
Learn about the new full-screen interface of
Internet Explorer, page 159
Pin
Pin websites to the Start screen, page 166
Active tab
Tabs opened in the backgro
1
^^^^!rj©|
^1
mju^LI
- =.»-- =i~kt :• - -1
- h y^ | B
t>ing
Browse
Browse the web privately, page 167
Choose
Choose the Internet Explorer version you
want as the default, page 171
Opening Internet Explorer
InPrivate is turned on
In Private Browsing helps prevent Internet hxplorer from storing c
your browsing session. This includes cookies, temporary Internet
and other data.
To turn off InPrivate Browsinq, close this brcv.s=:' :al:
Read the Internet Explorer privacy statement online
Using Internet Explorer 10
5
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Launch the different versions of Internet Explorer.
■ Use the new Internet Explorer 10 interface.
■ Pin websites to the Start screen.
■ Browse the web using the InPrivate mode.
■ Manage the files you download from the web.
■ Set the default Internet Explorer version you want to use regularly.
One of the major changes introduced in Windows 8 is the way you browse the web by
using Internet Explorer. This operating system includes the new Internet Explorer 10, which
has two incarnations that can be used to browse the web: a minimalistic full-screen version
and the desktop version you know from earlier Windows operating systems. The browsing
experiences are very different, and this chapter focuses on the new full-screen way of using
the browser.
You'll first learn the important changes brought by Internet Explorer 10. Then, you'll review
the new interface and learn how to use it to browse the web. Next, you'll see how to create
shortcuts or pins to websites on the Start screen, how to browse the web without leaving
any traces in your browser, and how to download files. You'll understand one of the most
important security features in Internet Explorer and Windows 8 — SmartScreen Filter — and
its role in securing your system. In addition, you'll learn how to set either of the two Internet
Explorer versions as the default.
PRACTICE FILES You don't need any practice files to complete the exercises in this chapter.
For more information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the
beginning of this book.
151
What Is New about Internet Explorer 10
Internet Explorer 10 in Windows 8 incorporates two important changes from Internet
Explorer 9 and Windows 7 or Windows Vista.
The first and most important change is that in Windows 8 there are two versions of Internet
Explorer 10. One is available directly from the Start screen, with which it shares the same
full-screen interface. It is referred to as the Internet Explorer Windows 8 app. The other ver-
sion is available from the desktop and uses the traditional desktop look to which you are
accustomed from Internet Explorer 9 and previous versions of Windows. It is referred to as
the desktop Internet Explorer.
They are the same application, and the same engine is used for browsing the web. However,
their looks are very different and so is the experience of browsing the web.
The Internet Explorer Windows 8 app runs in full-screen mode, giving all the screen space
you need for viewing webpages and browsing the web. Its interface elements are minimal-
istic and optimized for touch. This mode of browsing the web doesn't offer any support for
add-ons or plug-ins except Adobe Flash Player, which is built into the browser. According
to benchmarks published by different sources, the Internet Explorer app offers slightly less
performance than its desktop counterpart does. However, the performance differences are
very small (up to a maximum of five percent in some tests), and most people will not notice
the difference when browsing the web. It is great for people who are using tablets or com-
puters with touch and for those who want a web-browsing experience without clutter, tool-
bars, and add-ons. Even though it is optimized for touch, the Internet Explorer app can be
used just as easily with a mouse and keyboard. It might seem scary at first because it is new
and different, but if you read the rest of this chapter, you should have no problem getting
acquainted with it and using it comfortably.
152 Chapter 5 Using Internet Explorer 10
http: //www. bing.com/
© ® ®
The Internet Explorer desktop version uses an interface with which you are familiar, opti-
mized for use on desktop computers or laptops with a mouse and keyboard. The web-
browsing performance it offers is slightly better than the Internet Explorer app. It also offers
full support for add-ons and plug-ins.
What Is New about Internet Explorer 10 153
The second important change you will find in Internet Explorer 10 is its noticeably better
web-browsing performance. First, it has excellent support for open web standards such
HTML 5 or Cascading Style Sheet (CSS3), and the speed with which it loads websites has
improved considerably. This means that, compared with earlier versions of Internet Explorer,
you get a much better browsing experience. Also, you get longer battery life on a laptop or
tablet when browsing the web with the new Internet Explorer than with other browsers. This
is because it includes power-saving features that balance the resources used while browsing
the web and the amount of energy required for them. Last but not least, Internet Explorer
10 sends the Do Not Track signal to websites to help protect your privacy. Therefore, web-
sites that provide support for this signal will not track your visits and cannot store detailed
information about the pages you visited.
Launching Internet Explorer
You can launch Internet Explorer by using the default shortcuts Windows 8 provides.
However, which of the two versions you launch depends on where the shortcut is placed.
On the Start screen is a tile named Internet Explorer. If you click or tap it, it opens the
Internet Explorer app.
154
Chapter 5 Using Internet Explorer 10
If you want to start the Internet Explorer desktop application, you must go to the Desktop.
Click the Internet Explorer icon on the bottom-left side of the taskbar.
The Desktop
Internet Explorer
You can launch Internet Explorer by using the search function on the Start screen. Just type
the word Internet, and its shortcut appears instantly. This shortcut launches the version
of Internet Explorer that is set as default. If you have made no configuration changes to
Windows 8, it will open the Internet Explorer app.
Using the Internet Explorer App
The new Internet Explorer app, even though simple in structure, can be confusing at
first, especially to those who have not used mobile browsers such as the one found on
smartphones powered by Windows Phone.
When you open it, you see the homepage that is set (if not changed, the homepage is the
Microsoft Bing search engine) and a small toolbar at the bottom of the window with a few
buttons and options. The toolbar is minimized as soon as you click or tap where websites
are loaded.
Using the Internet Explorer App 155
http: //www. bing.com/
© ® ®
If you want to bring the toolbar back, swipe from the bottom edge of the window toward
the middle. You can also right-click with a mouse.
Let's look at the buttons one by one, from left to right, and see what they do:
■ The Back button takes you to the previous page you visited. The button is active after
you visit more than one web page. Click or tap it, and it will take you back. The same
effect can be achieved by flicking right if you are using a touch-enabled screen. A
transparent version of this button is shown if you move the mouse to the left side of
the browsing window.
■ Next to the Back button is an icon that always changes. It just loads the icon of the
website you are currently viewing. If no icon is detected for that website, the default
Internet Explorer icon appears.
■ The Address bar is where you type the address of the website you want to visit. This
bar can also be used as a search box. You can type a search term and press the Enter
key or click (tap) the Go button that appears near it. Internet Explorer displays the
search results relevant to your search term by using the default search engine you
have set. If you have not changed its default configuration, search results will be dis-
played by using Bing, the search engine owned by Microsoft.
156
Chapter 5 Using Internet Explorer 10
The button near the Address bar is called Refresh and can reload the web page you
are viewing so that you can see the updates that have been made to it, if any, since
the last time you viewed it.
The Pin To Start button can pin the web page you are viewing as a shortcut on your
Start screen.
The Page Tools button gives access to a small contextual menu that can be used to
search on the current web page, view the same page on the Internet Explorer desktop
application, or access the app for the loaded website when one is available.
The Forward button takes you to the next page if you used the Back button. Click or
tap it, and it will take you forward. The same effect can be achieved by flicking left if
you are using a touch-enabled screen. A transparent version of this button appears if
you move the mouse to the right side of the browsing window.
Previous
page
The icon of the
loaded web page
Address bar
Next
page
Pin website to Page tools
the Start screen
When using the Address bar, the Internet Explorer window changes to help you find what
you want as quickly as possible. First, it displays the websites you visit frequently and those
that you have pinned.
Using the Internet Explorer App 157
As you start typing (it doesn't matter whether it is the address of a website, the name of a
website, or a search term), Internet Explorer starts searching your most frequently visited
websites, the websites you pinned to the Start screen, and your browsing history. If it finds
entries that match what you have typed so far, it will display the appropriate results. Then
you can just click or tap the result that matches where you want to go.
Go button
If you want to search the web for something that you have not visited so far, finish typing
the search term and click or tap the Go button that appears near the Address bar. This trig-
gers a web search, using the search engine set as default.
If you right-click somewhere in the middle of the Internet Explorer window or swipe down
from the top of the window toward the middle, you will see an additional menu at the top.
Again, a right-click brings up the menu.
158
Chapter 5 Using Internet Explorer 10
This menu first shows the tabs you opened and the websites loaded in each tab. The active
tab has blue margins, whereas the tabs open in the background have no visible margins.
Each tab has an X button that closes that tab.
To switch between tabs, click or tap the one you want to view. If you want to create a new
tab, click or tap the + button found at the top right of the window.
Beneath the new tab button is a button with three dots. This button offers two options:
start a new InPrivate tab and clean up (close) the tabs that are not active.
Activ
stab
Tabs
opened in
the
1
background
i
i
*""?!
'} -■
°c\
:rfSP
- : z^~
d ; E\
j
■
ig
Wikipedia, the free encycl... 7 Tutorials | Help aiwJ Ho...
Tools for Create
managing tabs new tab
When browsing the web, notice that the Page Tools button on the bottom toolbar can have
a slightly different icon, depending on the websites you are visiting. On most websites, it
will show a wrench-like icon.
On some websites, however (Wikipedia, for example), it will also show a small plus sign.
[fjffjl No app available
available
Using the Internet Explorer App
159
When this sign is displayed, it means the website you are visiting has an Internet Explorer
app available in the Store. If you click or tap it, the Page Tools menu appears. This time, the
menu will have an option named Get App For This Site. A click or tap takes you to the Store,
from which you can install the app specific to that website.
Get app for this site
Find on page
View on the desktop
If you have copied a link to a web page, you can paste it into the Address bar to view that
page. Many users will appreciate the Paste And Go option, which automatically pastes
the link and loads it into the browser. To bring it up, right-click or press and hold in the
Address bar.
When used on web pages, the right-click menu enables you to copy content and links and
open links in a new tab or the same tab and to save pictures directly to your picture library.
160
Chapter 5 Using Internet Explorer 10
O'REILLT
5 p read i ng the kn ow ledg e of i nno vato rs.
Home Shop Radar: News & Commentary Answers Safari Books Online Conferences Training
Popular Topics: Programming JavaScript iPhone Android Python HTML5 & CSS Microsoft Java Perl Linux Data
Search
J>t Buy 2 Books or Videos
Special Offer to Celebrate
Programming Windows,
Sixth Edition
Programming legend Charles Petzold is rewriting his
classic Programming Windows — one of the most
popular programming books of all time — to show
developers how to use existing skills and tools to build
Windows 8 apps. Get the ebook now for just $20,
Copy
Copy link
Open link in new tab
Open link
Save to picture library
To make navigation easier for desktop users, the Internet Explorer app enables you to navi-
gate backward and forward without having to bring up the toolbar on the bottom of the
app window. Hovering the mouse on the left or right side of the window displays a trans-
parent Back or Forward button, depending on where you placed the button. Clicking it
takes you to the previous or next web page you visited in the active tab.
The Internet Explorer app includes a new Flip Ahead feature so you can navigate your favor-
ite sites like you read a magazine. It replaces the need to click or tap links with a more natu-
ral forward swipe gesture on touch-centric devices (and forward button with the mouse).
Using the Internet Explorer App
161
As you can see from this section, the new Internet Explorer app is not very difficult to use. If
you take some time to experiment, visit a few websites, and do searches on the web, you'll
become comfortable using it and start to enjoy this new way of browsing the web. That's
true both for readers who use a classic desktop computer and for those who use a com-
puter with touch or a tablet.
Using the Internet Explorer Desktop
Application
The Internet Explorer desktop application has a more complex interface than its Windows 8
full-screen counterpart. At the top of its window are several buttons and fields for manag-
ing the way you navigate the web. At the top right are three buttons that give you access to
different configuration menus.
On the bottom and right side are scroll bars that can be used to scroll through the content
of a web page that is bigger than your Internet Explorer window.
Buttons for navigating
to and between
different websites.
Buttons that give
access to different
configuation menus.
Scroll bars
162 Chapter 5 Using Internet Explorer 10
The middle of the window, taking up most of the space, is where websites are loaded and
viewed.
Let's see in more detail what each button does. Moving from left to right are the following
buttons:
■ The Back and Forward buttons. They become active as soon as you browse to more
than one page on the Internet. You can use them to navigate back and forth between
the different pages you opened.
■ The Address bar, where you type the address of the website you want to visit. This
bar can also be used as a search box. You can type a search term and press Enter or
click the Search button in the Address bar. Internet Explorer displays the search results
relevant to your search term by using the default search engine you have set. If you
have not changed its default configuration, search results will be displayed by using
Bing, the search engine owned by Microsoft.
■ A button in the Address bar that looks like a piece of paper torn in half. It reloads a
web page in compatibility mode and is useful when browsing dated web pages that
were created with earlier technologies. If a web page simply doesn't look right, click
this button, and the page reloads in compatibility mode. Chances are the webpage
will then be generated correctly.
■ The Refresh button. Use it to reload the web page you are viewing so that you can
see the updates that have been made to it, if any, since the last time you viewed it.
■ Next to the Address bar are the tabs you have opened. The tab that is active always
has a lighter color, whereas those in the background have a slightly darker tone.
When you open a web page, its name becomes the title of the tab. To change
between tabs, just click them. If you want to close the active tab, click the little X but-
ton near its name.
■ Next to the opened tabs is a square button with no name. Use this button to open a
new tab. Click it, type the address of the website you want to visit in the Address bar,
and press Enter. The website is now loaded in its own tab.
Address bar Search Refresh/reload
Previous page and search bar button web page
i
2 http://www.7tutorials.com/ P » P G | £ 7 Tutorials | Help and H
"
Next page
View website in
compatibility mode
Active Opens a
tab new tab
Using the Internet Explorer Desktop Application
163
On the top-right side of the Internet Explorer window are three buttons. Let's see what
they do:
■ The first, in the shape of a house, takes you to the homepage you have set for
Internet Explorer on the desktop. By default, this is the MSN.com website, and it can
be changed to something else.
■ The second button, in the shape of a star, opens a menu for managing your favorite
websites, the feeds to which you have subscribed, and the history of your browsing.
■ The third button, in the shape of a gear, opens the Tools menu that is used to config-
ure many aspects of how Internet Explorer works.
Opens the homepage you set Opens the
in the tab that is currently active. Tools menu.
P " § 6 | 7 /Tutorials | Help and How ..
" ,
Opens the menu for managing
your favorite websites, feeds,
and browsing history
If you are familiar with Internet Explorer 9, which was available in Windows 7 and Windows
Vista, you'll notice that not much has changed in terms of the interface. If you are comfort-
able using Internet Explorer 9, you will have no problems using the Internet Explorer 10
desktop application.
Pinning Websites to the Start Screen
In the Internet Explorer app, you won't find any menus and lists of Favorites, as you might
be used to seeing in previous versions of Internet Explorer. When you open a new tab,
you get a list of the websites you frequently visit and the websites you pinned to the Start
screen. In a way, pinned websites are the new Favorites.
Pinned Frequent Favorites
u H J, « . H
1 -firv rrirydpprdin
164
Chapter 5 Using Internet Explorer 10
Pinned websites appear as shortcuts on the Start screen. Each shortcut includes the icon of
the website (if any) plus the name of the website. Websites that provide specific support for
this feature can display custom icons, backgrounds, and the latest updates. When you click
or tap the shortcut, the website opens in Internet Explorer.
n
7 Tutorials | Help
and How ~c for...
In this exercise, you'll learn how to pin a website to the Start screen.
SET UP Go to the Start screen and start Internet Explorer. Navigate to the Facebook
website (www.facebook.com). If you don't use Facebook, you can go to any other web-
site you use frequently.
1 Click or tap the Pin to Start button to open the Pin To Start dialog box.
Iam: Select Sex: E
Birthday: Month: [v]
■ About ■ Create an Ad ■ Create a Page ■ Devek
®)® ®
Pinning Websites to the Start Screen
165
2 Type My Facebook Account in the available text field.
§> © ®
3 Click or tap the Pin to Start button.
CLEAN UP Close Internet Explorer.
Facebook is now pinned to the Start screen, and you can use the shortcut that was created
to quickly access this social network whenever you want.
Where Can I Set My Homepage
?
Internet Explorer 10 will open either the homepage you have set (the Bing search
engine is the default) or the tabs opened in the last browsing session. You can change
this behavior from the desktop Internet Explorer only, in the Internet Options menu.
Browsing the Web Using the InPrivate Mode
InPrivate mode is a way of browsing the web without leaving traces in the browser. When
you open an InPrivate tab, all the websites you visit in that tab, the passwords you enter, the
cookies that are created, and the temporary files that are downloaded are deleted as soon
as you close the tab or you close Internet Explorer. An InPrivate tab is marked by the blue
InPrivate icon. This icon does not appear on a normal tab.
166
Chapter 5 Using Internet Explorer 10
InPrivate is turned on
In Private: Brows inr] helps prevent Internet Explorer from storinci data about
your browsing session. This includes cookies, temporary Internet files, history,
and other data.
To turn off InPrivate Browsing, close this browser tab.
Read the Internet Explorer privacy statement online
© ® ®
This way of browsing is useful when you don't want to be tracked or when you're using
someone else's computer and you don't want to leave traces of what you visited. This
browsing mode is highly recommended when using public computers to browse the web.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to visit a website by using the InPrivate mode.
SET UP From the Start screen, start Internet Explorer.
1 Right-click somewhere in the middle of the Internet Explorer window or swipe down
from the top of the window toward the middle, to view the menu with options for
opening new tabs.
Binq
©
mn
1 New InPrivate lab
It
2 Click or tap the button with three dots on the top-right side of the window.
Browsing the Web Using the InPrivate Mode 167
3 Click or tap the New InPrivate tab so that a new tab is opened in the InPrivate mode.
InPrivate is turned on
InPrivate Browsing helps prevent Internet Explorer from storing data about
your browsing session. This includes cookies, temporary Internet files, history,
and other data.
Jo turn off InPrivate Browsinq, close this browser tab.
Read the Internet Explorer privacy statement online
4 Type the address of the website you want to visit and click or tap the Go button.
E|9 CLEAN UP Close Internet Explorer when you have finished browsing the web.
The website is now loaded in InPrivate mode. As soon as you close this tab, any traces of
your visit to this website are deleted.
Downloading Files from the Internet
The process for downloading files is similar to other browsers to which you are accustomed.
You are first asked whether you want to run or open the file you are about to download
(depending on its type) or to save it on your computer.
Doy
uu waril lu upen *
Ope
■ r
©
©
®
© ©
|0um
http://www.7tutorials.com/uncovering-artists-throL
igh-windows-;
f-theme!
;-and
When you click Save, the file is automatically downloaded to the Downloads folder. You are
not asked whether you want to save the file to another location.
168
Chapter 5 Using Internet Explorer 10
A progress bar appears. If you are downloading multiple files at the same time, the informa-
tion is aggregated, and you are shown how many downloads are in progress and how much
time remains until all of them are finished. You can close this notification or cancel the
download altogether.
II M
(*9 ^ lnPr " ate http:/
'wAw.softped ia.com/dyn-postdowr load. php?p=
6527&t=0&i=1 (6) (V) (/) (-*)
After a file is downloaded, you are given options relevant to its file type. You can run exe-
cutable files, whereas you can open other files.
© ® © ®
© @~
http:/Avww.7tutorials.com/u nco\
rering-artists-throug
h-windows-7-thK
i mes-and
Understanding SmartScreen Filter in Internet Explorer
Sometimes when you try to download files, Internet Explorer doesn't allow you to do
so and says that the file has been reported as unsafe by SmartScreen Filter and cannot
be downloaded. The same can happen when trying to view certain websites to which
your access is blocked, and you get a similar message.
SmartScreen Filter, mentioned in this message, is a security feature Microsoft intro-
duced after Internet Explorer 8. It tracks what Internet Explorer users visit and, when
an infected file or website has been detected, it blocks access to it to protect you. Files
that are reported and confirmed as malware won't download to your computer due
to this security feature. Also, websites that are reported and confirmed as distributing
malware or trying to steal personal information from their visitors are automatically
blocked. Therefore, don't worry! You just have avoided harm to you or to your system.
Downloading Files from the Internet
169
This website has been reported as unsafe
We re com mend that yo j do not continue to this website.
This website has been reported to Microsoft for containing threats to your computer that might reveal personal or financial information.
More information
SmartScreen Filter also looks at how commonly files are downloaded. If you are trying
to download a file that is rarely downloaded by other Internet Explorer users, you are
warned that the file "is not commonly downloaded and could harm your computer."
If you know what that file is supposed to do and you trust the source from which you
download it, you can go ahead and run it. If not, it is best either to delete it or to scan
it for malware by using Windows Defender or any other security solution before trying
to run it. This way, you make sure that you stay away from viruses and other forms of
malware.
File Explorer uses the same technology, and you are warned before running files that
are marked as infected by SmartScreen Filter.
Setting the Default Internet Explorer Version
In Windows 8, you can set one of two versions of Internet Explorer as your default. Having
both available and starting in different scenarios can be confusing. It is best to give both a
try, decide which you like best, and set that one as your default.
Set your default version on the Programs tab in the Internet Options window. There, you
are asked to choose how you open links. The default is to let Internet Explorer decide. If you
choose Always In Internet Explorer, the Internet Explorer app will always be used to open
links on your Start screen or in the applications you use.
170 Chapter 5 Using Internet Explorer 10
Opening Internet Explorer-
Choose how you open links,
However, the Internet Explorer shortcut on the Desktop will continue to open the Internet
Explorer desktop application. All the other shortcuts and links will open the Internet
Explorer app.
Setting the Internet Explorer desktop application as your default involves a bit more con-
figuration. That's why, in this exercise, you'll learn the steps for setting up this option.
SET UP Go to the Desktop and start Internet Explorer.
1 Click the Tools menu icon in the upper-right corner of the Internet Explorer window.
Tools Menu
2 In the Tools menu, click Internet options to open the Internet Options window.
Setting the Default Internet Explorer Version 171
General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced
To create home page tabs, type each address on its own line,
I.U mMLIIUME
Use current Use default Use new tab
O Start with tabs from the last session
(•) Start with home page
Change how webpages are displayed in tabs.
Browsing history —
Delete temporary files, history r cookies , saved passwords , and web
form information,
[~| Delete browsing history on exit
Settings
Accessibility
Apply
Click the Programs tab to find the options for configuring how Internet Explorer is
opened.
General Security Privacy Content Connections Programs Advanced
Opening Internet Explorer
Choose how you open links,
Let Internet Explorer decide
[~| Open Internet Explorer tiles on the desktop
Manage add-ons
Enable or disable browser add-ons
: | installed in your system.
HTML editing
Manage add-ons
®
Choose the program that you want Internet Explorer to use for
editing HTML files.
Internet programs
Choose the programs you want to use
for other Internet services, such as
e-mail.
Set programs
Choose the file types that you want
Internet Explorer to open by default.
Set rssociations
■
Apply
172 Chapter 5 Using Internet Explorer 10
4 In Opening Internet Explorer, in the Choose how you open links list, select Always
in Internet Explorer on the desktop.
Opening Internet Explorer —
<^\ Choose how you open links
Beneath the list box, select Open Internet Explorer tiles on the desktop.
Opening Internet Explorer —
\ Choose how you open links.
Always in Internet Explorer on the desktop
[Vl Open Internet Explorer tiles on the deskJtop
6 Click OK.
CLEAN UP Close Internet Explorer.
Now all the Internet Explorer shortcuts in Windows 8 will open only the desktop Internet
Explorer version. Also, when you click a link to a website in any application or on the Start
screen, it will be opened by using the same version.
TIP If you want the Internet Explorer app to be used as the default, follow the same
procedure but select Always In Internet Explorer at step 4 and clear the Open Internet
Explorer tiles on the desktop check box.
Setting the Default Internet Explorer Version
173
Key Points
The new Internet Explorer brings many changes and improvements to the browsing
experience.
Pinning websites is a way of storing your favorite websites on the Start screen and
accessing them from there.
When browsing the web from a public computer, it is best to browse by using the
InPrivate mode. This way, you leave no traces, and Internet Explorer does not store
your personal data.
SmartScreen Filter is a Microsoft technology that protects you from downloading and
running infected files and from accessing malicious websites.
After you decide which Internet Explorer version you like best, it is good to set it as
your default.
174 Chapter 5 Using Internet Explorer 10
Browse
Browse SkyDrive from the SkyDrive app,
page 179
Ciprian's SkyDrive
^ 26 iterr
Download
Download files from SkyDrive, page 187
i
mm
2
| SkyDrive camera roll V J
® ( ® ) ® ®
Clear selection >\ Download JJ Delete Open with
Upload
Upload files to SkyDrive, page 183
Synchronize
Synchronize your Windows 8 settings,
page 190
Sync your sellings
Syrif. wLlinys, on this, PC
Sellings lo sync
Personalize
Cnlnrs, hfiftgrrsund, lor If srmrn, .intl ynur nrrnunT pirtur
I hemes, taskbar, htgh contrast, and more
Vivv.vrMTl -
iign-in into tor some apps, websites, networks, and Homebroup
Using SkyDrive
6
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Work with SkyDrive and learn about its features and limitations.
■ Upload files to SkyDrive.
■ Download files from SkyDrive.
■ Synchronize your Windows 8 settings.
SkyDrive is a service by which you can store your files on the Microsoft servers. You can
upload documents, pictures, and other types of files and access them from anywhere: your
web browser (Internet Explorer 10, for instance), your Windows Phone, or Windows 8-
based computers and devices. By using SkyDrive, you can synchronize files among multiple
devices or share some of your stored files and folders with other people. It's useful for shar-
ing big files with friends and family and for doing collaborative work on Microsoft Office
documents. Further, synchronizing important files across devices frees you to use them
whenever you need them from almost any device or computer with an Internet connection.
Windows 8 can also use SkyDrive to synchronize your settings across the computers and
devices with which you log on to your Microsoft account, so you can configure your
Windows 8 settings on one computer and have them replicate automatically on all others
that use the same Microsoft account.
The basic SkyDrive service is free to all users with a Microsoft account and includes 7 GB of
space. However, paid plans are also available for people who want more storage space. The
features are the same in all plans, and so is the functionality.
In this chapter, you'll learn how to access SkyDrive, upload files to it, download files from
it, access it from a web browser, and synchronize your Windows 8 settings across multiple
computers and devices.
177
PRACTICE FILES The practice files you will use to complete the exercises in this chapter are
in the Chapter06 practice file folder. Before you can complete the exercises in this chapter,
you need to install the practice files specified in "Using the Practice Files" at the beginning
of this book to their default location.
Using SkyDrive
To use SkyDrive in Windows 8, you need a Microsoft account instead of a local account so
you can log on to Windows. If you try to access SkyDrive from a local account, Windows 8
will ask you to change your account settings.
Sign in to use SkyDrive
To access your SkyDrive, sign in with your Microsoft account.
SEE ALSO If you want to learn more about user accounts in Windows 8 and how to use a
Microsoft account, read Chapter 12, "Allowing Others to Use the Computer."
To access SkyDrive, upload, download, or sync files and settings, you must have a working
Internet connection.
We can't display the folder
Check your Internet connection, and then tap or click to refresh the page.
SEE ALSO If you want to learn more about connecting to a network and the Internet, read
Chapter 11, "Connecting to a Network and the Internet."
178 Chapter 6 Using SkyDrive
Browsing SkyDrive from the SkyDrive App
You open the SkyDrive app from the Start screen by clicking or tapping its icon.
You can also search for the word SkyDrive and click or tap the appropriate search result.
When you open SkyDrive, the application takes a few seconds to load information about
the folders and files you have uploaded. It will always show your last accessed folder. If you
haven't used it before, it will show your SkyDrive home location.
Ciprian's SkyDrive
v 26 items
For each folder, you see its name and the number of files found inside. For each file, you see
an icon representative of its type and the name of the file. For pictures, you see a preview
of the file.
Browsing SkyDrive from the SkyDrive App
179
If you right-click a file, a contextual menu opens at the bottom of the SkyDrive app window,
the file is selected, and a check mark appears on its icon's upper-right corner. The same
result can be achieved with a press and hold on the file and a slight downward movement
with your finger.
Ciprian's SkyDrive - 27 items
To open a folder or a file, click or tap it. When you open a file, SkyDrive opens it with the
application that is set as the default on your computer for opening that file type. For exam-
ple, PDF documents are opened by default with Reader.
If you want to browse through different areas of SkyDrive, click or tap the name of your
SkyDrive to open a menu with the standard locations defined for your SkyDrive: your
SkyDrive, Recent Documents, and Shared.
180
Chapter 6 Using SkyDrive
Ciprian's SkyDrive
Cipriani SkyDrive
Recent documents
Shared
■ v?m
practice files
The Recent Documents area displays the files you recently opened. If no files were accessed,
the list will be empty. The Shared area displays folders and files others have shared with
you. If none are shared, the list will be empty.
On the left side of the name of your SkyDrive is the Back button, which you use to go back
to the previous location. This button is visible only after you have opened folders found on
your SkyDrive. When accessing your SkyDrive start location, it is not visible.
practice files
on Ciprian's SkyDrive 3 items
Browsing SkyDrive from the SkyDrive App 181
The contextual menu shown at the bottom of the SkyDrive window displays useful buttons,
depending on where you are in SkyDrive and what was selected.
m
m
Let's look at each option:
■ CLEAR SELECTION Shown only if at least one file or folder was selected. Its purpose
is to clear the current selection of files or folders.
■ DOWNLOAD Displayed only when one or more files were selected. This button is
used to download the selected file(s) to your computer.
■ DELETE Shown only if at least one file or folder was selected. A click or tap deletes
the item(s) you have selected.
■ OPEN WITH Allows you to select the app with which to open the selected item.
■ REFRESH Refreshes the list of items displayed on your SkyDrive.
■ NEW FOLDER Allows you to create a new folder on the SkyDrive at the current
location.
■ UPLOAD Uploads new items to SkyDrive.
■ DETAILS (OR THUMBNAILS) Changes the way items are displayed. The default view
is Thumbnails. Clicking Details shows items using this view, and the button is changed
to Thumbnails.
■ SELECT ALL Selects all the items displayed in the current location.
Using your mouse or finger to point to an item from SkyDrive reveals more information
about it, including its name, the date when it was last modified, its size, and the people with
whom it is shared.
1
\a~ie practice Fes
Last modified 3/10/2012 U
Size 331 MB
Shared with Just ne
m U
1 practice files 3 1
182
Chapter 6 Using SkyDrive
You can see that SkyDrive is relatively easy to use. To be productive when using it, don't
hesitate to go through the next sections and exercises.
Uploading a File with the SkyDrive App
Uploading files to SkyDrive is a simple task. You can upload one or more files at one time.
With the SkyDrive app, you can browse through multiple folders and select only the ones
you want uploaded. When selected, the files are displayed on the bottom half of the win-
dow, in the SkyDrive list. To remove a file from that list, click or tap it.
After you select the files, click or tap Add To SkyDrive and wait for the upload to finish.
On SkyDrive, you can upload any type of files. However, official support is only provided for
the following file types.
■ Documents saved as Portable Document Format (PDF) files, text files, Microsoft Office
files of any kind, and files saved with the Open Document Format (ODF) such as those
created by using LibreOffice or OpenOffice
■ Photos saved as the JPG, JPEG, GIF, BMP, PNG, TIF, and TIFF file types
Uploading a File with the SkyDrive App
183
■ Videos saved as AVI or WMV file types
■ Audio files saved as WAV or MP3 file types
During the upload process, progress information is shown in the upper-right corner of the
SkyDrive app window.
2 items in progress...
If you click or tap it, more information about the process appears. When the upload is com-
plete, the word Done appears.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to upload a file to SkyDrive by using the SkyDrive app.
SET UP To complete this exercise, you need the Documentl.docx file in the Chapter06
folder in your practice files. When this file is available, open the SkyDrive app and browse
to the folder to which you want to upload the file.
1 Right-click somewhere in the empty space of the SkyDrive app window or swipe
from the bottom edge of the window to open the contextual menu.
2 Click or tap the Upload button to open the Files window.
Ciprian's SkyDrive - 26
"1
items
3 Click or tap Files and browse to where you saved the Documentl.docx practice file.
184 Chapter 6 Using SkyDrive
IIGS v Documents
Select all
Pictures
Music
Videos
Desktop
Downloads
Homegroup
Computer
Network
7tutorials
ALI213
Angajari stuff
BotaniculaSav
Corporate Ge
El camera
Rral Photos
4 Click or tap the Documentl.docx file to select it.
Uploading a File with the SkyDrive App 185
5 Click or tap the Add to SkyDrive button to start the upload procedure.
6 Wait for the upload procedure to end.
It should not take more than a few seconds.
CLEAN UP When the upload is complete, close the SkyDrive app.
The Docummentl.docx file is now uploaded to your SkyDrive.
Downloading a File with the SkyDrive App
Downloading files with the SkyDrive app is just as easy as uploading them. Browse to the
file you want to download, select it, and click the Download button. During the download
process, progress is shown on the upper-right side of the SkyDrive app window.
1 item in progress...
If you click or tap the progress line, more information about the process appears. When the
download is complete, the word Done appears.
Like the upload process, you can download one file at a time or select multiple files and
download them to the same location on your computer. However, folders cannot be
downloaded.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to download a file from SkyDrive by using the SkyDrive
app.
SET UP Open the SkyDrive app and browse to the folder that contains the file you
want to download.
1 Right-click the file you want to download or press and hold on it while moving slightly
downwards.
This opens the contextual menu at the bottom of the SkyDrive app window.
2 Click or tap Download to open the Files window.
186 Chapter 6 Using SkyDrive
Ciprian's SkyDrive - 27 items
3 Browse to where you want to save the file and click or tap the Choose this folder
button.
Downloading a File with the SkyDrive App 187
4
Make sure the location where you want to save the file is the one you selected and
click OK.
The location where the selected
file will be downloaded.
5 Wait for the download to finish.
CLEAN UP When the download is complete, close the SkyDrive app.
The file you selected is now saved on your computer at the location you specified.
Accessing SkyDrive from a Web Browser
You can access SkyDrive from a web browser at any time. Go to https://skydrive.live.com
and log on with your Microsoft account details. You now have complete access to all your
files and folders stored on SkyDrive. If you have logged on with your Microsoft account in
Windows 8, and you're using Internet Explorer as your browser, you won't need to log on to
the SkyDrive service. You are automatically logged on by Windows.
188
Chapter 6 Using SkyDrive
With the help of your web browser, you can download files from SkyDrive, organize them in
folders and subfolders, or add new files. You can also share files and folders with others.
Last, you can view the pictures uploaded to SkyDrive and edit Microsoft Office documents
by using the Microsoft Office Web apps. They are simplified versions of Microsoft Office
that allow document viewing and basic editing.
Word Web App Documentl on SkyDrive
H [fi] Open in Word ■JTEcJtin Browr j£ Share rffl find 1M%
Uprlan Russn Elgn oat
Paae 1 ofM f
Tevl Dihaj rrm i L usy d in Hit! Ejieitisy s fui Wiudutvs 8 Slyp by 5lv\t
Lorem ipsum dolor Sit a met, conscctcturadipiseingclit. MaeccnasfeliE lacus, adipisang eget
yencnatlsld, pcllentesquesednlbh. Donee faucl bus actumsan lacus, ct vestlbulum vcllt impcrrJiet
quls. Ut porttltorerat el It, quls tlncldunt aros. Nullamid filbhtsllus, vitas eulsmod dolor, eras
posuere allquet nulla, acLllamtorpersem placerat ut. Classaptenttaclti soclosquad lltora torquent
pel tunubia nuitra, pm intyplui hiinenaeus. Nullaulli kes yslporllilor diam pui Llilui vehitula.Cra:.
bibyndum, rnauris syd attumj.an Leinpuj, nisi nisi vy sti bu Itn n dolur, yu,y I Lempus artu sein nun urti.
P'uinul nisi auHuy, vtdl ia^i Uis Itdulus. Fuste ntdL yrv in id eius ale ileixJ u 1 y i nyii Lu m a i rs mauris.
PMdsyllujbuJa'yspuiusuLurLi itiliur ■ -m. dip jjiu'l 1 .".'■ .'. i'.u". I" .|L ; i = a -j\ y n ly I lui. N ain
vp npnnti y sp 11 a ,i *- r -■; n n <; . i p rp. r.u a"i.rp = :"::,--. ,:^lihprf>,PLimtriirrinpq<jptpli<;ptlprrfij<i. Apnpiari
elit nitm, molestie eget oondi mentum i n, bibe nd urn a j usto. Cura bitur I uctu 5 a I i quam pel lente sque.
El am a uil yuy . iLusp-iarylrad lLuii dl id urna. V va-nus tlud :.: -iuI a. E. diielyifeiid r ylilyu
h. ..;■ ;■■.■ u.udr.yl Lnislumary aukuy,vilayiijiJusyruselitvyneriaUb veliLlrwiiallit ad lsi '-y
lincidji".. N ! uin.pelly.'ilt!si)uedijifiivylilsyr - ipyr ma His. IriliatliabilasieplalyadiiluinsL. Quiscjut;
gravida pulvinarplacerat. Vestibulum eu adipiseing mi. Nullanhanoustineidunt dolor, wel ultricies
maun '^ d i rtu m at. Ftiam pstlpn,aliqupt vulpirtatp mngup ad i paring, prptiumid mauris. Phanpllun a
pom tor net us.
Murbi diam lyllus, sudaln vitatd pulvinar at, adipiitiriHiitdLesl. Inuudulm vebitula fylis vehitula
lynipus. Proinpuiujbtdin, rial I tuu iluljuil jvilay, ullamcuipur idudiu.rv uvji = 1 i. dunlipsuni. Ul
ipsum velit, lobortiset mattis vel, pellentesque non nunc. Doneciaculisadipiscing lectus, sed
mnlpitip-ipm vivprra sitampt. Mapopnai n«>lp ri>iqLip msuriu prnstnngup prptiumptutri^uv.
f u rahitur nrnarp al iquam ip^um i n ciiriLii. Ap npan id 1p fiu n w fl p nim p latprat vul putatp vitap
ipmpp r Inrp m. Flu^ppnriivip ipm pnim, mngup vpl vpstihulum ar, pnsuprp tringjllfltpli*;. Prapnpnt
malesuada ultnoes metus. a aliquarm neque blandit nee. I'raesent non lacus sed urna sodales vivcrra.
Acne an laaistellus, scniperfaelllslsEolllcltudlnscd.temporeL rlsus.
Vptfibulum npr.nna'i^a manrii. Mapfpnan vpl Ipnanpqup hpndrprrt vivpnra. In in ripqup vitap diam
SOdifeSCUnMlS. Nulla npr pnlvinardiam. Mnrhi ptplitpu turpi'ilnrKirtkmmmnnln pij sit ampt turpi*;.
Mnrhi nnmmnrinju'itn a ami ariipi'irtrigfinn'iprrrptijr. ITnnpf: mauri 1 ; ris-11% pnnuprppgptriirrrum vitap,
.-.- -i •"- r !-.•■; ■■ p ,": ■• •:•■■-. " =, = '?.■:.■? ■:-=,,-;-; -„i ■*; n ^qu »rl I itnra tnrqup nt pp r rnni jhia nnntra, pe r innp ptni
himenaeos. ProinmattisLltnaestoitorquisdignisaini. Aliquam venenata scelensquefelistempor
vulputate. Phase llus scelcrlsqueodlo at nlbh tmcldunt mollis. Duls intlncloXintlusto. Fustc vltaenlbh
Accessing SkyDrive from a Web Browser
189
Synchronizing Your Windows 8 Settings
One of the greatest features of SkyDrive is that Windows 8 can use it to synchronize your
user account settings across the computers on which your Microsoft account is used. If you
make a change on one computer, it will be reflected on other computers the next time you
log on.
However, not all Windows 8 settings are synchronized, even though most of them will be.
The settings that are synchronized, if you set them to be, are the following.
■ Your desktop background, desktop colors, the Lock screen, and your user account
picture
■ The active desktop theme, high contrast, and taskbar settings
■ Ease of access settings: the narrator and the magnifier
■ Your language preferences: keyboard, input methods, and the display language
■ User settings and purchases for apps that support the synchronization feature
■ Your mouse and mouse cursor settings and those of File Explorer
■ The sign-in information for the HomeGroup, network access, some of your apps, and
websites (if you are using Internet Explorer 10 as your browser)
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
HomeGroup
Windows Update
Sync your sellings
Synt. iwLlinys, on this, PC
On I—
Sellings lo sync
Personalise
Tolnri, hfirtrgrnunri, Irvrlf srrwn, ."lntlynur nrrnunt pirrurf
Desktop personalization
I hemes, taskbar, high contrast, and more
Vri-iwrirrM
Sign-in into tor some apps, websites, networks, and Homebroup
Taw of Arress
NdiidkH, Msgnifta, arid mure
Language preferences
Keyboards, older input methods, display lanyuaye, and n
App settinqs
Certain app settings and purchases made in an app
190
Chapter 6 Using SkyDrive
Another great aspect of the synchronization feature is that the SkyDrive space used for
storing your settings is not counted against your SkyDrive space allocation. That space is
reserved for uploading the files you want.
As with other SkyDrive features, you need a Microsoft account to sync your settings.
SkyDrive doesn't work on local user accounts.
Also, after you log on to your computer or device by using your Microsoft account, you
need to set it as trusted for your passwords to be synchronized. If you haven't done this,
you can do so from the Sync Your Settings area found in PC Settings. Just click or tap the
Trust This PC link and follow the instructions.
Settings to sync
Personalize
Colors, background, lock screen, and your account picture
On |^H
Desktop personalization
Themes., taskbar, high contrast and more
On ~
ones, and HomeGroup
In this exercise, you'll learn how to turn on the synchronization of your Windows 8 settings
and select what is being synced.
^^ SET UP Open PC Settings.
1 Click or tap the Sync your settings area to open the synchronization settings.
Synchronizing Your Windows 8 Settings
191
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
HomeGroup
Windows Update
Sync your sellings
SyriL swLlinys on this PC
On M
Sellings lo sync
Personalize
Colors, hnrkgrnurvd, \nck <;rmrn, .mrtynur nrrnunT pktufl
Desktop personalization
I hemes, taskbar, high contrast, and more
"■.TW/ynrrl-
bign-m into for someapps, websites, networks, and Hometjroup
Fase of Access
Ndiidloi r Magnifei, arid mure
Language preferences
Ktyuuards, utlier input methods display lanyuaye, and mure
App settinqs
Certain app settings and purchases made in an app
off mm
2 Change the position of the switch for Sync Settings On This PC from Off to On.
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
HomeGroup
Windows Update
Sync your sellings
SyriL swLlinys on this PC
Sellings Lo sync
Personalize
Colors, hnrkgrnurvd, Irvrk srrwn, .intlynur nrrnunrr plrrun
Desktop personalization
I hemes, taskbar, high contrast, and more
Vrvv.vnrrM
bign-in into tor some apps, websites, networks, and Homebroup
Fase of Access
NaiidUH r Magnifei, arid more
Language preterences
Keyboards, uLlier input methods* display lanyuaye, and m
App settinqs
Certain app settings and purchases made in an app
3 In the Settings To Sync area, change the switch for the things you want to sync from
Off to On.
%J CLEAN UP Close PC Settings and then repeat this procedure on all the computers
that use the same Microsoft account and on which you want settings to be synchronized.
192 Chapter 6 Using SkyDrive
From now on, each change you make in the Windows 8 settings will be synchronized on al
the computers on which sync was set up.
Key Points
Using SkyDrive requires a Microsoft account and an Internet connection.
Use the SkyDrive app to browse the content of your SkyDrive and to upload, down-
load, and view files.
You can upload or download multiple files at once to and from SkyDrive.
SkyDrive can also synchronize your settings across computers and devices with
Windows 8.
Key Points 193
Add
Add a Hotmail account to the Mail app,
page 200
Enter the information below to connect to your Hotmail accour
Email address
seventutorials@ijve.com
Password
Manage
Manage your schedule with the Calendar
app, page 215
August 2012
Sunday Monday Tuesday
Wednesday
^y io 31
1 3«
T^^^^IUM
5 S^wms 6 4«v« n es 7 .: e vent. 8
^B
12 13 ««*na 14
5 event? I i> 4 cv
B^QHH 1H
Connect
Connect to your Facebook account using the
People app, page 210
® Stay in touch with your Facebook
Chat with your Facebook friends and see their updates here, a
websites where you use this Microsoft account. Just connect F
What else happens when I connect? v
Chat
Chat with your friends, using the Messaging
app, page 222
People you are chatting with.
Messaging
(+) New message
■
Windows team
When yo u si g n i n to y ou r PC, y ou ' 1 1 ... aw nn
Joli Ballew
Using the Social Apps
7
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
Use the Mail app and send an email with a SkyDrive attachment.
Use the People app and add your Facebook account.
Use the Calendar app.
Use the Messaging app.
Use the Camera app.
Being social is a key component of anyone's computing life. Windows 8 tries to meet the need
for interaction with our friends, family, and coworkers by offering a few well-integrated apps:
Mail, Calendar, People, and Messaging. Their tiles on the Start screen are very visible, and they
are placed in the same group. When you start using the apps, their tiles automatically display
live data such as updates from your friend on Facebook whose birthday is today or the sched-
ule of your next meeting.
Calendar app
- Live tile
People app
- Live tile
These apps are integrated and, after you add an account on one of them, it can be accessed
from all the others. For example, you can add your Google mail account to the Mail app
195
and your Facebook account to the People app. Then, you can view your Google calendar in
the Calendar app, and you can chat with your Facebook friends by using the Messaging app.
In this chapter, you'll learn the basics about using all these apps, and you'll learn how to use
the Camera app.
PRACTICE FILES You don't need any practice files to complete the exercises in this chapter.
For more information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the
beginning of this book.
Using the Mail App
The Mail app runs in full-screen mode, just like all Windows 8 apps. Its interface is minimal-
istic and focuses on browsing and reading your email messages. Unfortunately for users
who are accustomed to the Desktop, it might not be easy to find your way at first, so learn-
ing the basics for navigating this app is the place to start. As you'll see in this section and
the ones that follow it, Mail is a simple app that is easy to learn.
When you open the Mail app for the first time and no email accounts have been added to
it, there's nothing to see. It's just an empty window with no displayed information.
As soon as you have added email accounts, things change. The application window is then
split into three columns.
■ On the left is the Mail column, where you can see the email accounts that have been
added so far. Listed above the list of accounts are the folders for the selected email
account. A click or tap on a folder reveals its content.
■ In the middle is the Inbox column, displaying the inbox folder for the selected email
account. The following summary information is displayed for each message: sender
name, when it was received and its subject. This column can also display messages
from folders other than those in your Inbox (Sent Items, for instance). On smaller
displays and lower resolutions (such as 1024 * 768 pixels), this column is merged with
the first column. For example, when you select an email account or folder, the Mail
column is replaced by the Inbox column. To get back to the Mail column, click or tap
the Back button at the top of the column.
■ On the right, the messages you select are displayed in their entirety.
196 Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
Gmall
Si RE: Windows 8 SbS RTM PDFs
-
■NB^^^M
3c2J0 PM
Drafts
1
CB References to practice Files in R...
!
4JT PM
"•"tHUM*
ft
Sent items
Re Wcbmlnds - post from co...
329 PM
OuLbux
mm in ii ii |i
.: S SbS RTM PDFs
J;29 PM
Deleted items
U Re- Need help with Windows ft
[Cmail]
4: SI? AM
Junk
ff» <Wi
■^ Re- Need help with Windows ft arfi
Tin-
All Mail
Mil ii Wif
starred
RF- gue«;t eontrihution PM guifle
Tue
7 Tutorials
Re- link exchange
Tnr-
Hiring
* "r- urmetioares tura rie artienie
Mofl
NeL Curn[> Dev
Joli Ballew
Windows 8 Mep...
Ma\\
M " N
Corporate Geek
Joli Ballew
RE ■ Windows 19 SBS - When to exp
Men
Guiail
Re: Windows SBS - When to exp.
hbr.
U*
Re: Windows U SBS - When to exp.
Mun
V
© ® ®
August 29, 20l2 fell PM
To- fiprian Rnsen
RE: Wg would like to review some of your books on 7 Tutorials
imngeOO^
} jpg 1.57 KB
Download
n
imngeflQI
.jpy 1.57 KB
Download
G izt thar ■ - f o; -'es, please just let me know which books you're interested in reviewing in the future and
I'll be happy lu send a tupy yuui way.
Thank*; again,
Chuntal
To display the menu with contextual options, right-click or swipe from the bottom edge.
This menu includes the following buttons:
■ SYNC Use this button to start the synchronization procedure that downloads any
new email messages you've received since the last time you checked the email
account and sends the messages that are in the send queue, if any.
■ PIN TO START Use this button to pin the selected inbox to the Start screen.
■ MOVE Use this button to move the selected email message to another folder.
■ MARK UNREAD Use this button to mark the email message that is currently open as
unread.
The three buttons on the top-right side of the window are for:
■ Creating a new email message.
■ Opening a small menu with options to reply to the message or forward it to other
people.
■ Deleting the email message.
Using the Mail App 197
Reply to or
forward the
Create a message you Delete the
new message. received. message.
Ciprian Rusen
August 29, 2012 7:26 PM
To: Ciprian Rusen
Hello!
Hi are you today?
Sent from Windows Mail
© © ®
Reply
Reply all
Forward
After you start using the Mail app, it remembers the last email account and folder you
accessed, so each time you start the app, it opens the last accessed folder for the last
accessed email account.
Adding a Hotmail Account to the Mail App
You can add any number of email accounts from different email services to the Mail app. By
default, it is well integrated with the popular Hotmail and Outlook services from Microsoft
and Google mail from Google. You can also add business email accounts, which use the
Microsoft Exchange email service.
Hotmail
Hotrnail.com, Live.com, MSN
SI
Outlook
Exchange, Office 365, Outlook.com
Google
Other Account
Connect
198
Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
The integration with Hotmail is very good, considering that both Windows 8 and Hotmail
are created by Microsoft. You can add multiple Hotmail email accounts to the Mail app.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to add a Hotmail account to the Mail app.
SET UP Make sure your Windows 8 device is connected to the Internet. Then, open the
Mail app and have your account details at hand: the correct email address and password.
If you have already added other email accounts, open the Accounts column, as shown in
the previous section.
1 Press Windows+C or swipe from the right side of the screen and select the Settings
charm.
2 Click or tap Accounts to open the list of accounts already added to the Mail app.
Accounts
%m Gmail
^k^| cipriannjsen@gmail.com
Add an account
3 Click or tap Add an account to open the list of types of accounts you can add.
account
Hotmail
Hotrnail.com, Live.com;, MSN
Outlook
Exchange, Office 365, Outlook.com
!■ Google
fiJ^I Connect
Other Account
4 Click or tap Hotmail to open the Add Your Hotmail Account window.
5 Type the email address and password in the appropriate fields.
Adding a Hotmail Account to the Mail App 199
Enter the information below to connect to your Hotmail account.
Email address
seventutorials@live.com
Password
Cancel
i
Click or tap Connect. Wait a few seconds for the Mail app to connect to your email
account and display the messages in your inbox.
^J CLEAN UP Close the Mail app.
The email account you specified is now added to the Mail app and can be accessed each
time you use the app. You can add other email accounts, including a Google account, by
following the same procedure. However, before you do so, it is best to read the next section
about adding a Google mail account.
Adding a Google mail Account to the Mail App
You add a Google mail email account to the Mail app the same way you add a
Hotmail account except that you click or tap Google instead of Hotmail.
Unlike Hotmail users, Google mail users can use a two-step verification process that
enhances the security of their email accounts and lowers the chances of unwanted
people gaining access to the accounts. If this process is enabled for your Google mail
account, you cannot use your standard Google mail password to add your account
to the Mail app. First, you need to generate a new application-specific password just
for the Mail app and use that instead of your password at step 5 in the preceding
exercise.
200
Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
You can generate application-specific passwords by going to your Google account,
choosing Security, and then selecting Authorizing Applications & Sites. Choose an
appropriate name for the new application-specific password and then click or tap
Generate Password.
,/) |£j https://accounts.google.eom/b/Q/lssu P - fl § tf| JM Gmail - Inbox (2) - c... >*| My Account
Application -specific passwords
I Bi | SS I
Some applications that work outside a browser aren't yet compatible with 2 -step verification and cannot ask for verification
codes, for example:
■ AdWords Editor
■ Android devices
■ Google Voice mobile application on iPhone
■ Chrome Sync
■ Mail clients such as Microsoft Outlook
■ Chat clients such as Google Talk or AIM
To use these applications, you first need to generate an application-specific password. Next enter that in the password
field of your application instead of your regular password. You can create a new application-specific password for each
application that needs one. Learn more
Watch the video on application-specific passwords
Step 1 of 2: Generate new application-specific password
Enter a name to help you remember what application this is for:
Name: | Windows S Mail]
x | Generate password
ex: "Bob's Android", "Gmail on my iPhone", "GnogleTalfc", "Outlook - home computer", "TTiunderbmi"
Your application-specific passwords Creation date Last used date
Android phone Oct 12, 2011 Apr 19, 2012 [Revoke]
Google Talk on Desktop Nov 7, 2011 Apr 20, 2012 [ Revoke ]
WindowsS-Desktop Mar S : 2012 Mar 14, 2012 [ Revoke ]
Windows 8 Virtual Machine Mar 8,2012 Apr 9, 2012 [Revoke]
WindowsS-Laptop Apr 20 : 2012 Apr 20, 2012 [ Revoke ]
Google generates a random password that you can type in the Mail app instead of
your Google mail password to access the messages in your Google mail inbox.
Application -specific passwords
Step 2 of 2: Enter the generated application -specific password
You may now enter your new application -specific password into your application.
Note that this password grants complete access to your Google Account. For security reasons, it will not
be displayed again:
Done
kohf wrpm jzig bslu
Mo need to memorize this password.
You should need to enter it only once. Spaces don't matter.
Adding a Hotmail Account to the Mail App 201
Sending an Email with a SkyDrive
Attachment
When sending files as email attachments, you use both inbox space and some bandwidth
when uploading the file. The recipient will also use space and bandwidth.
By using the SkyDrive app, you upload a file once to your SkyDrive and then share it by
email, using the Mail app, with as many people as you want. You don't need to upload the
file each time you want to send it to someone.
The people to whom you send the file can access it through a direct link that is automati-
cally included in the message. It doesn't fill up their inbox space, and they can download
the file if and when they want.
Files can be shared with anyone; it doesn't matter whether the person uses the SkyDrive
service. Also, you can type the email address of the people to whom you want to send it or
select them from your list of contacts stored in the People app.
Ciprian's SkyDrive
v 2 C
Kl Ciprian Rusen
Hfl upridniui.en@yiridil.:_u-ni
lo
@
[J nprian Ru<Len |
Document"!
Add a message
Sent from WinduwiMail
Documentl.docx
httnv/,M<ydrive !ive ranr^mdir'reskS-EBOBCFQfl&E
Store photos and docs online. Access them from
any PC, Mac or phone. Create and work together
on Word, Lxcel or PowerPoint documents.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to send an email message that shares a file uploaded to
your SkyDrive. For illustration purposes, use the same practice file that you used in Chapter
6. You can use the same file or any other file you have uploaded to your SkyDrive.
202
Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
SET UP Make sure your Windows 8 device is connected to the Internet. Open the Sky-
Drive app and browse to the folder that contains the file you want to share.
1 Right-click the file you want to share or press and hold until a check mark appears on
the top-right corner of its icon.
Ciprian's SkyDrive - 29
items
2 Press Windows+C or swipe from the right side of the screen and select Share.
Click or tap Mail to display the Mail app on the right side of the screen.
3
4 In the To field, type the email address of the person to whom you want to send the
message.
Sending an Email with a SkyDrive Attachment 203
©Mail
Ciprian Rusen
cipriarirusen@gmail.com
To
| Ciprian Rusen
Documentl
Add a message
Sent from Windows Mail
Documentl.docx
https://skydrive.live.com/redir?resid=EB0BCF088E..
Store photos and docs online. Access them from
any PC, Mac or phone. Create and work together
on Word, Excel or PowerPoint documents.
5 In the body of the message, type the message you want to send.
6 Click or tap the Send button on the top-right side of the Mail app window.
CLEAN UP Close the SkyDrive app.
The email message has been sent, and the recipient can access the SkyDrive file from the
direct link included in the message.
204
Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
Using the People App
The People app displays all the contacts you have for all the email accounts and services
you have added in the Mail app and, through your Microsoft account (also known as
Windows Live ID), it can access social networking services such as Facebook, Twitter, and
Linkedln after you authorize your Microsoft account to access these services. The People
app will download all your friends and contacts and share their latest updates.
When you open the People app, you are presented with a lot of information. A column on
the left is for accessing your own updates, viewing notifications, and accessing what is new.
On the right, your contacts are listed in alphabetical order. The top-right corner displays
Connected To, followed by a list of icons that represent the accounts to which the People
app is connected.
View your
own updates
Contacts listed in
alphabetical order
Services to which
you are connected
All
View what Go to
is new notifications
In the left column are three sections:
■ ME Shows your updates and notifications on the social networks to which you're
connected
Using the People App 205
©
Ciprian
Me
Rusen
What's new view an
Connected to E El r'l
Notifications view an
E
View profile
More details
i
Wl Face book
K v ^ na ll1 lll,nit rnd ''-"
Wlidt's, oil youi mind?
4H posted in Moi
■ppps
^B Tuieul ei.lt? un pit. dilkil, u \z
p^p^pj U hour; ego via hacebnok
BBB Ciprian Rusen
^^^| Tuesday
^M likr your phnto
ihflml you
M
_ <spa"
pj "ucidoj' vie Fci::ccs-:
^^ .uminenltfd or
P uesdtv via Faetfeeek
VIEW NOTIFICATIONS View the latest notifications available on the social networks
you are connected to
WHAT'S NEW Shows updates from all your contacts on all the social networks to
which you're connected
® What's new
I Microsoft
■ 20 minutes aqo
Added new photos to the album The Samsung ATIV S
Connected to E H *'§
=! Li minutes aqo
■55- lit.- W~ (Win
206 Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
Access a contact by clicking or tapping the name. The People app shows the contact details
that have been stored and, if available, any updates from that person on the social networks
to which you are connected.
To show the menu with contextual options, right-click or swipe from the bottom edge to
display the following buttons:
■ Home Returns you to the People area. It serves as a shortcut that takes you to the
home screen of the People app.
■ Online Only Filters the list of people to show only those who are listed as online at
that moment. Another click or tap reverts this setting and displays all your contacts.
■ New Enables you to create a new contact.
As you can see, using the People app is relatively easy. If you integrate it with the social
networks you are using, it can be a great tool for managing your connections with other
people.
Connecting to Your Facebook Account
Using the People App
The People app can be easily integrated with Facebook. After you add your Facebook
account, your Microsoft account is also connected to it, so your Hotmail contacts will be
synchronized with Facebook, and the Messaging app and Windows Live Messenger (if you
use it) will be integrated with your Facebook account.
If your Microsoft account (Windows Live ID) is already connected to your Facebook
account, your Facebook friends will show up in the People app, and you won't need to add
the Facebook account again.
When you connect the People app to your Facebook account, Facebook asks you to enter
a name for the device from which the connection is made. Make this name meaningful so
that you aren't confused when Facebook sends you the appropriate notifications through
email. This name will then be visible in your Facebook account settings.
Connecting to Your Facebook Account Using the People App 207
® Connecting to a service
Name New Device
Please give ttiis device a name. Because you have Login Notifications enabled, you wll receive a
notification that you logged in from this machine.
Device name: WindowsB-Laptopj x
mcwxrnvm
Facebook © 2012 ■ English (US)
Mobile ■ Find Friends ■ Badges ■ People ■ Pages
In this exercise, you'll learn how to add your Facebook account to the People app.
CJ) SET U P Make sure your Windows 8 device is connected to the Internet and then open
the People app.
1 Press Windows+C or swipe from the right side of the screen and select Settings.
Settings
People
By Microsoft Cc
Rate and review
208 Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
2 Click or tap Accounts.
3 Click or tap Add an account.
Accounts
c
Microsoft
cipriannisen@g mail, com
Face book
■ H Gmail
!&k^| ciprianmsenOg mail, corn
4 Click or tap Facebook and then wait for a few seconds.
The Stay In Touch With Your Facebook Friends window appears.
^3
va
Facebook
El
Connect
S3
Hotmail
Hotmail.com, Live.com, MSN
n
Twitter
□
Connect
rr5i
Outlook
L : J
Exchange, Office 365, Outlook.com
fr*
Linked In
tm
Connect
£1
Google
Connect
Click or tap Connect. At the prompt, type your Facebook login details.
Connecting to Your Facebook Account Using the People App
209
® Stay in touch with your Facebook friends f
Chat with your Facebook friends and see their updates here, and in other apps and
websites where you use this Microsoft account. Just connect Facebook to
What else happens when I connect? v
Cancel
6 Type your email address and your password and select Keep me logged in.
7 Click or tap Log in. When prompted, name the device from which you are connecting.
® Connecting to a service
f Facebook Login
Log in to use your Facebook account with Microsoft.
Email:
Password:
\V\ Keep me logged in
Forgot yo ur password?
Sign up for Facebook
Cancel
210 Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
Type an appropriate name for the device and click or tap Save Device.
After a few seconds, you receive the announcement that you're ready to go.
Name New Device
Please give tihis device a name. Because you nave Login Notifications enabled, you wil receive a
notification that you logged in from this machine.
Windov.'sS-Laptop) x
Facebook © 2012 ■ Fjiglish (US)
Mobile- ■ Find Friends ■ Badges ■ People ■ Pages
9 Click or tap Done and wait for the People app to sync with Facebook.
® You're ready to go
We r re setting things up now, so it might take a few minutes until you .see any
changes.
Add more accounts in settings
You can add more accounts or change these connection settings at
anytime in the settings for this app.
Q CLEAN UP Close the Peopl
eapp.
Connecting to Your Facebook Account Using the People App 211
The People app needs some time to sync with your Facebook account. Don't be surprised
if it takes minutes instead of seconds, especially if you have a slow Internet connection or
many friends and updates that need to be synchronized.
Adding a New Contact to the People App
You can add new contacts from the People app to all your email accounts. However, the
People app cannot add contacts to the social networks to which you are connected. You
have to do that by accessing the social networks themselves in a web browser such as
Internet Explorer.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to add a new contact to the People app.
SET UP Make sure your Windows 8 device is connected to the Internet. Then, open the
People app.
1 Right-click or swipe from the bottom edge to open a contextual menu at the bottom
of the window.
2 Click or tap New to open the New Contact window.
3 In the Account box, select the account in which you want to store this contact.
212 Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
4 Complete the contact details you want to store.
New contact
Account
(+} NdNW
En. ill
nmnnril v
Address
(T) Address
Othrr info
(+) Other infb
| Gmail
Z3
Name
First name
| seventutonals@live.com|
(+) Email
Phone
Mobiles
*l
EZ
1
Last name
| Tutorial!;
Company
1
1
1
1
1
(+) Phone
5 Click or tap Save.
CLEAN UP Close the People app.
The contact you created is saved and automatically synchronized with the account you
selected.
Adding a New Contact to the People App 213
Editing or Deleting a Contact from the People App
When you access a contact in the People app, you can edit it, add to it, remove infor-
mation from it, or delete the contact, all from a contextual menu that you open at the
bottom of the People app window by right-clicking or swiping from the bottom edge.
©
7 Tutorials
Email
seventutorials@live com
Ft
Gmail
Delete this con Lac L?
You'll delete this person trum your People
ujriLdU li^L
■Jl 7 Tutorials
1 Limail
You can delete only contacts that are stored with your email accounts. Contacts from
the social networks to which you are connected can be deleted only by accessing
those social networks in a web browser.
Using the Calendar App
The Calendar app is very simple. It automatically takes your calendar data from all the email
accounts you added in the Mail app and shows all events from all accounts. The events are
shown in different colors, depending on the account to which they were added.
214
Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
August 2012
Sunday Munddy Tutdsddy Wednesddy Thuisddy Fiiddy Sdlurday
^4 iO il
3 even:.
2 3 event, 3 4
^^^^^B5
- 1 5 ever*; D -1 events / A event;
8
9 10 11
jjj
To change how you view the calendar, right-click or swipe from the bottom edge. A contex-
tual menu appears with a few options. On the left are buttons for changing how you view
your calendar: by day, by week, or by month. The Today button shows only today's events
in your calendar. The New button adds events to your calendar.
©
M
You can add new accounts or edit the permissions and different options for the Calendar
app by using the Settings charm.
Using the Calendar App 215
Settings
Calendar
By Microsoft Cor
^oration
Accounts
Options
Help
About
rcf n Hill Ui lit
Rate and review
To open an event, just click or tap it. When you open a recurring event, you are asked
whether you want to Open One or Open Series. If you click or tap Open One, only the cur-
rent event opens, and any changes you make will be saved to it. If you click or tap Open
Series, you open the series of recurring events, and any changes you make will be saved for
the whole series.
31
This is a recurring event.
Open one Open series
When you open the event, you can add details to or remove details from it. To save your
changes, press the Save button in the top-right corner. To close the event without saving
the changes you made, press the button with an X in the middle, near the Save button.
To delete an event, click or tap the Delete button.
216
Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
Details
When
September v 01 Saturday
v | | 2012 v |
Starr
I \i v I I oo v I I pm v I
How lonq
| 30 minutes
Z3
Wlwrn
I I
Calendar
■ Lipriarirusen@griiail.cum
Shnw mnrr
Update E-Mail Newsletters ® ® ®
The Calendar app is not very complex, and you should easily become familiar with the way
it works.
Adding an Event to Your Calendar
Adding an event to any of your calendars is an easy task, too. However, you need to com-
plete some information for the event to be created and saved. The Calendar app asks you
to complete the following fields:
■ WHEN You must fill in when the event is taking place.
■ START You must fill in when the event starts.
■ HOW LONG Fill in the duration of the event. The default value is one hour, but if
your event doesn't last for an hour, it is best to change the duration to the length of
time you expect it to last.
■ WHERE In this field, you specify information about where the event takes place, but
you do not have to fill in this field.
■ CALENDAR Select the calendar on which you want this event to be saved.
■ HOW OFTEN You can set the frequency of the event. It can be set to once, every
day, every weekday, every week, every month, or every year.
Adding an Event to Your Calendar 217
REMINDER Set this for when you want to receive a reminder and for how long in
advance of the event you want to be reminded. You can choose one of the following
values: none, 5 minutes, 15 minutes, 30 minutes, 1 hour, 1 day, 18 hours, or 1 week.
STATUS This field is for setting your status during the event and is shown to others
who have access to your calendar data or in the Messaging app during the duration
of the event. The default value is Busy. Other possible choices include Free, Tentative,
Out of Office, or Working Elsewhere.
WHO Use this field to invite others to the event and share the event details. You can
type the email addresses of the people you want to invite.
PRIVATE This option is useful when your calendar is shared with others. If you set the
event as private, other people can't view the details of this event.
ADD A TITLE This field is for adding a name for the event. This field is at the top of
the empty white space on the right side of the app window.
ADD A MESSAGE Use this field to add a message to share with the people you
will invite or to add any information that is useful to you or others. This field is just
beneath the title.
Details
WlHJM
| August v | 29 Wednesday v | | 2012 v |
Start
| 10 V | | 30 V | | PM V |
How long
1 hour v
Wtwrn
Calendar
■ cipriannjsen@gmail.com v
How nfrrn
| Once v |
Rernindei
15 minutes v
Status
I Uusy V I
Who
| Invite people | ©
Add a title
® ®
218
Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
To save the event, click the Save button on the top-right side of the window.
® ®
If you have invited other people to the event, the Save button will change to a Send Invite
button. Clicking it saves the event in your calendar and sends invitations to the people you
specified in the Who field.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to add a new event to your calendar.
^3 SET UP Open the Calendar app.
1 Right-click or swipe from the bottom edge to open a contextual menu at the bottom
of the window.
2 Click or tap the New button to open the event Details window.
Adding an Event to Your Calendar 219
Details
When
August v
29 Wednesday v
2012 v
Start
9 v
30 v
PM v
How long
1 hour v
Where
School of Fine Art
Calendar
■ Gprian's calendar — ciprianrusen@gmail.com v
How often
Once v
Reminder
15 minutes v
Status
Busy v
[] Private
In the Details column, complete all the important fields with the relevant information:
Where, When, Start, How Long, and then click or tap Show More to reveal the fields
with other additional details to complete.
220
Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
Details
When
| Auyusl v | J 29 Wednesday v | | 2012 v |
Marr
I 9 vMjo vIIpm vl
How lonq
1 huur v
Wlwrn
School ot 1 me Art
Calendar
■ Cipiian's talendar — (.ipridriiuseii@ynidil.cuin v
How nfrrn
1 Once V 1
Reminder
15 rriinutjes v
STatu*;
I Uusy V I
| | Privale
Business Meeting
Let's meet and discuss yo ur proposal|
® ®
4 Select the calendar on which the event is added and invite the people who need to
attend (if any).
5 On the right side of the window, type a name for the event and any other important
details.
6 Click or tap the Save or Send invite button, depending on whether you invited
people to the event.
Q CLEAN UP Close the Calendar
app.
The event you have created is added to your calendar and you will be reminded about it,
depending on how you set the reminder.
Using the Messaging App
The Messaging app acts as a complement to the People app. In the People app, you can
manage your list of contacts and add your friends from social networks such as Facebook.
From the Mail app, you can send them email messages, and from the Messaging app, you
can chat with them. Use the Messaging app to chat with your Facebook friends and those
who are using the Messenger service.
Using the Messaging App 221
When you open the app, you see the discussion threads that were previously started. If you
added your Facebook account to the People app, you can also view the latest messages you
received.
At the top right of the window is the Connected To notice, followed by some icons that rep-
resent the messaging services to which you are connected.
People you are chatting with.
Messaging
(+) New message
Windows team
When you sign in to your PC r you'll... M* cm
To add or manage an account, goto Settings and
choose Accounts.
Ok
Services you are connected to
today, on Facebook
J Ol i Ball eW fui uur book Lugelhe
c. ^ebook
u
Ciprian
Rusen
S>
If you want to change your status or delete a messaging thread, right-click or swipe from
the bottom edge. A menu appears with these options:
■ STATUS Change your status on the messaging services to which you're connected. It
can be set to Online or Invisible.
■ INVITE Invite your friends to use the Messaging app or view invitations you received
to chat through the Microsoft service.
■ DELETE Delete the active messaging thread.
222 Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
By using the Settings charm, you can change the accounts you're using and the options and
permissions for the Messaging app. If you want to use a webcam and a microphone during
chat sessions, you must change the Webcam and Microphone permissions from Off to On.
Settings
Messaging
By Microsoft Corporation
Accounts
Options
Help
About
Feedback
Permissions
Rate and review
As you can see, the Messaging app is very similar to the other apps covered in this chapter.
Starting a Conversation with the Messaging
App
It's easy to start conversations with the Messaging app. After you select the people with
whom you want to talk, you can view the conversation thread on the left-side column. On
the right, you see the picture of the person with whom you're talking, his or her status, your
picture, your status, and the messages exchanged so far. To send a message, type it in the
text box at the bottom of the window and press Enter. Type your replies in the same text
box and press Enter to send them to the other person.
Starting a Conversation with the Messaging App 223
The status of the
person with whom
you are talking
Messaging
(+) New message
Windows Team
When you sign in to your PC, you'll
Joli BalleW for our book together
Your status,
as visible
to others
Ciprian
Rusen
To add or manage an account, go to Settings and
choose Accounts.
Type a messaqe
S>
Here you type your
message and replies
You can start conversations on Facebook only with your online friends; you can't leave them
offline messages from the Messaging app. However, you can leave offline messages to peo-
ple by using the Microsoft Messaging service (Windows Live Messenger).
In this exercise, you'll learn how to start a conversation by using the Messaging app.
SET UP Make sure your Windows 8 device is connected to the Internet and then open
the Messaging app.
1 Click or tap the New message option, found in the column on the left.
224 Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
.Messaging
Ciprian
Rusen
To add or manage an account, go to Settings and
chaos* Accounts.
You can't reply to this message.
2 Wait for the People app to load and display all your contacts.
3 Click or tap Online only to view the people with whom you can start a conversation
at this moment.
People
Lor ncctcd " .** E
r *
M
P
i
Starting a Conversation with the Messaging App 225
4 Browse through the list of people and select the person with whom you want to start
the conversation.
5 Click or tap Choose to display the Messaging window.
6 Type your message and press Enter in the chat window to start the conversation.
CLEAN UP Afteryour chat, close the Messaging app.
The Messaging app saves the conversation you just started. You can delete it later if you
don't want to save it.
Use the same procedure to leave an offline message.
Using the Camera App
You can use the Camera app if you have a webcam installed on your Windows 8-based
computer or device. Record videos, take quick pictures, or use it in your messaging sessions.
When you launch it for the first time, you are asked whether you want to allow this app to
use your webcam and microphone. If you click or tap Allow, you can use the Camera app.
The app offers very few customization options. To display them, right-click or swipe from
the bottom edge.
226 Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
The three buttons that appear offer the following options:
■ CAMERA OPTIONS Use this button to set the webcam resolution, whether you want
to use its built-in microphone, and so forth.
■ TIMER Use this button to set a time when you want to take a picture or make a
recording.
■ VIDEO MODE Use this button if you want to set the camera to take pictures or make
video recordings.
Using the Camera App 227
Camera options
Photo rrmlijtion
| 0.3 MP (A3) v |
Audio device
| Inleyidled Miuuphune Anay (1... v |
Muie
Bs
■Ml'
As you can see, this app is straightforward.
Key Points
The Mail, Calendar, People, and Messaging apps are well integrated and easy to use,
even with a mouse and keyboard.
When you add an account in the Mail app, you can access it from the other apps.
You can lower your inbox space usage by using SkyDrive to share email attachments.
You can access the latest updates from your Facebook friends by using the People app.
By using the Messaging app, you can chat with your Facebook friends or with people
using the Windows Live Messenger service from Microsoft.
228
Chapter 7 Using the Social Apps
Access
Access the Top Free apps, page 235
®
Top
free
99 apps
sice
b a
i
Install
Install apps, page 238
© Fresh Paint
Overview L
AWi
ftepi
Search
Search for an app by name, page 236
Use
Use apps, page 241
Shopping in the
Windows Store
8
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Search and browse the Windows Store.
■ Explore an app's listing page.
■ Obtain, install, and use an app.
■ Update and reacquire apps.
■ Write a review for an app you own.
■ Understand subscriptions and in-app purchases.
You know about apps. You've explored the apps on the Start screen, including Music,
People, Internet Explorer, and others. You can easily obtain more apps from the Windows
Store.
In this chapter, you'll learn how to access the Store, browse and install apps, update the
apps you obtain, and more. Note that as the Store evolves, more categories, apps, and
other items will likely be added. What you see here is what was available very early, when
the Store was in its infancy.
TIP Microsoft has complete control over the apps that are available in the Store and
approves and tests all apps before they appear there. This helps ensure that they are safe
and functional and do not contain adware or spyware, among other things.
PRACTICE FILES You do not need any practice files to complete this chapter. For more
information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the beginning
of this book.
231
Exploring the Landing Page
To enter the Store, you just click or touch the Store icon on the Start screen. If you're con-
nected to the Internet and have logged on with a Microsoft account, you'll be taken to the
landing page of the Store.
TIP Any time you see a number on a tile on the Start screen, it means new data that affects
you is available. A number on the Store tile means updates for apps you own are available.
After you enter the Store, you can explore the landing page, which includes categories such
as Spotlight, Games, Social, and more. If you have compatible hardware, you can use touch
techniques to navigate the Store. Otherwise, you'll need to use your mouse and the scroll
bar that appears across the bottom of the screen to navigate.
Store
Spotlight
JlfeNBCNEWS.com
nbcnews.com
Free*****
Top free
New
releases
Explore. Discover.
Amazing apps for Windows S
232 Chapter 8 Shopping in the Windows Store
As you explore the Store's landing page, use the scroll wheel on your mouse or flick with
your finger to explore the categories. Some of the categories are listed here.
■ SPOTLIGHT This category holds apps deemed "great" by the Windows Store team.
You'll find subcategories here, too, including Top free and New releases.
■ GAMES This category offers games for kids (and adults) of all ages.
Store
Games >
TROUBLESHOOTING Although you will see tiles for some apps on the landing page,
you won't see all the apps in a category until you click the category name.
SOCIAL This category holds apps for social networking websites.
ENTERTAINMENT This category holds apps that are meant to entertain (such as
Xbox SmartGlass) or that pertain to entertainment.
PHOTO This category offers apps for photo-sharing sites, apps that work with a
built-in webcam, and apps that enable you to fix your photos by removing red-eye,
cropping, and so on.
MUSIC & VIDEO This category offers apps for listening to Internet radio, learning
song lyrics, listening to podcasts, and more.
SPORTS This category offers apps for keeping up with your favorite sports teams
and learning more about the sports you play or watch.
Exploring the Landing Page 233
BOOKS & REFERENCE This category offers apps such as third-party e-readers and
dictionaries, bibles, and similar reference books.
NEWS & WEATHER This category offers apps that involve news and weather, often
from well-known national entities.
HEALTH & FITNESS This category offers apps that can help you stay or get fit, lose
weight, keep track of diet and exercise, and so on.
FOOD & DINING This category offers apps for cookbooks and finding restaurants,
reading restaurant reviews, and more.
LIFESTYLE This category offers apps that help you sell a car, keep a journal, partici-
pate in an auction, and so on.
SHOPPING This category offers apps that make it easy to shop by using an app.
Look for apps from popular auction sites, phone directories, and shopping sites.
TRAVEL This category offers apps about travel, including hotel locations, maps, and
more.
FINANCE This category offers apps to help you manage your finances, review stock
prices, and so on.
PRODUCTIVITY This category offers apps to help you be more productive. Here
you'll find online storage solutions, note-taking apps, and so on.
TOOLS This category holds apps that are tools with which you can compress files,
connect your cell phone, manage computer resources, and more.
SECURITY This category holds apps that will help you protect your computer or
device and keep your data secure.
BUSINESS This category holds business apps, including apps that help you look for a
job, create presentations, and so on.
EDUCATION This category holds apps that are related to education, including those
to help you learn about planets, learn to spell words, and so on.
GOVERNMENT This category holds apps related to governing and government
entities.
At the landing page, if you see an available app that you like, you can click it to learn more.
If you do this, the app's listing page appears. You'll learn more about listing pages later, but
know that a Back button appears on the screen to take you back to the landing page if you
want to explore now.
234 Chapter 8 Shopping in the Windows Store
Browsing the Store by Category and Top
Free
As you know, the landing page of the Store is the starting point. It offers some apps directly
from the page, but usually you'll need to click a category name or Top free or perform
some kind of search to find the apps you want. For example, if you click Games from the
landing page, a new screen appears on which you can view all the available games or set
search criteria for culling the list.
©
Games 76 apps
All subcategories v All prices v
Sort by noteworthy
Sort by newest
Sort by highest rating
Sort by lowest price
Sort by highest price
_ - a, ARMED!
w% *••*
&&- Free
•— Microsoft Minesweeper
~ ~ Free
If, instead of clicking Games, you click Top free in any category, the top free apps appear in
a similar listing. If you're unsure where to start, click Top free in any category that appeals to
you. If you see an app you like, click it to learn more.
©
Top free 99a PP s
^ m ^m News
1 .4 if * if it * News & Weather
"™" Free
Bing
£") if if it ^ Books & Reference
Free
<f
K Sports
^ + k k ^k k Sports
Free
_| Reader
|J| if if if - Books & Reference
^ Free
SM *** 1 Tools
w * m Free
h
Sky Drive
fc if if if it Productivity
Free
Browsing the Store by Category and Top Free 235
Searching the Store
Browsing the Store might work fine for you, at least for now, but as more apps become
available, browsing by Top free or by category will become cumbersome. A time might
come when there are hundreds of thousands of apps! With this in mind, note that there are
two ways to search the store for a specific app or to sort the available apps. You can use
the built-in Search charm in Windows 8, or you can use the sorting options in the Windows
Store.
To use the Search charm, from any Store screen, position your cursor in the bottom-right
corner to access the Search charm. Click or touch the charm and type the name of the app
or app manufacturer you're looking for.
TIP See the section titled "Using Charms," in Chapter 1, "Introducing Windows 8."
If you see an app you want, click it. If you aren't sure of the name of the app, sorting the
apps from inside the Store is another option.
In this exercise, you'll use the search features that are built into the Windows Store.
236 Chapter 8 Shopping in the Windows Store
SET UP If you are not on the Start screen, position your mouse in the bottom-left cor-
ner of the screen and click the Start screen thumbnail that appears. You do not need any
practice files to complete this exercise.
1 From the Start screen, click or touch Store.
2 If necessary, click any Back buttons to return to the landing page.
3 Click any title name that appeals to you (except Spotlight). Click Entertainment or
Games, for example.
Search options appear.
Store
Entertainment
TROUBLESHOOTING If you don't see the built-in search options, make sure you
clicked the category name and not a specific app or Top free. Click Back to try again
if necessary.
4 From the available drop-down lists, set your options.
® Entertainment 6i apf
Searching the Store 237
Click or tap the desired app to access its listing page.
© Fresh Paint
D
Overview Details Reviews
23'! idlings
Free
When yuu iribLall an app, you ayretd lo Ilia
Terms of Usr.
This app has permission to use:
Your pictures, library
You i webcam
Your Internet connection
Categ u i y .Entei tainmen t
Site: 252 MR
Aqe ratinq: 12+-
Publisher: Microsoft Corporation
(0 WCTMOft CO*J-M»tiO*
Description
Mem Frenh P.iint ,i delightfully real .inrf fun painting ,ipp for you, .inri your friends and family
Because, you are creative. We all are. We were born that way.
= r GTi ; iy. jam-slathered fingerprints to the earliest scrawls of a crayon self-expression is a
Read more
Features
Discover delightfully real paint that behaves like real paint where it should and better than real where
yuu nee J il. B end and mix colors. !o yet iusl Lhe look you wdiit
%J CLEAN UP Leave this screen open until you've read the next section.
TROUBLESHOOTING Many of the apps you'll acquire get their information from the Internet
(such as those that give you up-to-date weather and news); thus, a working Internet
connection must be available to retrieve accurate information.
Exploring an App's Listing Page
Because Microsoft requires all new apps to pass its certification process successfully before
they can be listed in the store, you probably won't run across apps that don't work or that
cause your Windows 8-based computer or tablet to freeze or fail. However, it never hurts to
read the reviews of apps, just in case. You might find that the app is only mediocre, or that
to access all features of an app you have to purchase the full version of it.
There are many other types of information on an app's listing page beyond reviews. You
can also get an overview and details about the app and learn what permissions the app
needs to work properly. For example, an app that offers the weather will certainly need
permission to access your location. Of course, you'll be able to access an app's Terms of Use
information, too. You can use all this information to decide whether the app is right for you.
238
Chapter 8 Shopping in the Windows Store
You can access this information and more on every listing page. Here's some of what you
will find from each of the available tabs on an app's listing page.
■ OVERVIEW From the Overview tab, you can access a full description of the app, a list
of features, and the developer's website.
■ DETAILS From the Details tab, you can view the release notes, supported processors
(x86, x64, ARM), supported languages, and more.
■ REVIEWS From the Reviews tab, you can access user reviews and ratings and sort
those reviews by Newest, Oldest, Highest rated, Lowest rated, and Most helpful.
© Fresh Paint
I
p
134 rdtinyi.
Free
When yuu ins La
Terms of Use.
n app, you ayree lo Hie
This app has permission to use:
Your pictures library
Yuur webc-diN
Your Internet connection
Caleuury.Enteitainment
Sfzr25.2 Mrs
Aqe ratinq: 12+
Publisher: Microsoft Corporation
(<■) Mirrnsrrft fVirpnriitinn
Overview Details Reviews
Awesome!
k k kk it Friday, June 15. 2012
Can't wait to use this on a Windows S tablet!!
U out ot people round this review helptul
Wdi llns, leview helpful? Y*s Nu
Repnrt this nsview
I love this app!
k k kk -k FmLy, b« n. 2012
Thi) app K so easy To use, yet it has rirh features
1 out of 1 people found this review helpful
Was this review helpful Ves No
Report Ih'is levie 1 .'-,-
H
n
Sort by Newest
hresh.. really fresh
k k k k it Friday. June 15. 2012
The trueneis, of the Fieih Paint i
and gives, the real culur ir
TIP The developers who read the reviews will take note of your suggestions. If you get an
app and have a suggestion, write a review and then add your suggestion to the end of it.
Obtaining and Installing an App
Many of the apps from the Windows Store are free. However, paid apps start at $1.49 and
run to $999.99. Apps can also have a trial window of anywhere from 24 hours to 30 days.
In this exercise, you'll obtain a free app.
Obtaining and Installing an App 239
SET UP If you are not on the Start screen, position your mouse in the bottom-left cor-
ner of the screen and click the Start screen thumbnail that appears. You do not need any
practice files to complete this exercise.
1 From the Start screen, click or touch Store.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you leave the Store app and return to it, you'll be in the Store
at the position you left. Therefore, if you left the app while in the Music & Video
section, you'll return there. To get back to the main screen, click the appropriate Back
button.
2 Locate an app to install by using any method introduced so far. Click the app name
to access its listing page.
3 From the listing page, click Install. You can follow the progress in the top-right corner
of the screen.
4 When the installation completes, access the Start screen to view it.
TIP Newly installed apps appear on the far right of the Start screen, after other
installed apps. You'll probably have to scroll to locate your new apps, but you can
reposition them on the Start screen if desired.
Click or tap the app to open it.
TROUBLESHOOTING An app must complete the installation process before you can
use it.
240
Chapter 8 Shopping in the Windows Store
%J CLEAN UP Leave the app open and available while you read through the next section.
Using Apps
The first time you open an app from the Start screen, you might be prompted to do some-
thing. You might need to log on with an existing user name and password or be instructed
to click Play or view the various options. You might only see the various charms that offer
access to the features.
© o <§>
Gallery Tools Surface
.,
I
# ©
1*1 '!??
You might be prompted to allow permissions, too. If you want the weather for your current
location, you'll need to let the app know your location. Your location is also necessary if you
want a news app to offer local information. At times, though, you might encounter an app
that asks for permissions you feel are unnecessary, and you might want to block permis-
sions for such an app.
After you've worked past any logon screens, granted permissions, or otherwise reviewed
information about an app, you're ready to use it. It's up to you to learn how to use a specific
app, and many come with instructions. If you don't see what you need, try right-clicking the
app's landing page and any subsequent pages, or use your finger to flick upward from the
bottom of the app's interface.
In other instances, if you click Options, Settings, or something similar, a familiar Windows
sidebar might appear. These options enable you to view settings, learn about the app, and
Using Apps 241
rate and review it. Again, try right-clicking various screens, tapping and holding, and per-
forming similar techniques.
TIP To remove an app from the Start screen, right-click it and choose Unpin From Start. To
uninstall it from your computer, choose Uninstall.
Updating Apps
App developers are constantly creating apps and updating the apps they've already
released. App updates might fix bugs, add new features, and offer additional data or
options. You can tell that updates are available from the right corner of the Store. If you see
that updates are available, you should install them for the apps you use. (You should unin-
stall apps you don't use.)
In this exercise, you'll check for updates and install them if necessary.
SET UP If you are not on the Start screen, position your mouse in the bottom-left cor-
ner of the screen and click the Start screen thumbnail that appears. You do not need any
practice files to complete this exercise.
1 From the Start screen, click or touch Store.
2 Click any Back buttons to return to the Store's landing page.
3 Click Update or Updates if it is available in the top-right corner of the page.
The App updates page appears.
4 If there's an app you do not use, click it to clear the check mark.
5 Click Install.
242 Chapter 8 Shopping in the Windows Store
^^P CLEAN UP No cleanup is required for this exercise.
Reacquiring Apps
You can uninstall apps that come with Windows 8 and apps you acquire from the Windows
Store directly from the Start screen. You just right-click the app and choose Uninstall. You
can also unpin the app, which is a better choice if you think you'll use the app again at a
later date. By using this option, you can pin it again if desired. However, if you've actually
uninstalled apps and now decide you want them back, you can reacquire them from the
Store.
To reacquire an app, use any search method to locate it in the Store. From the app's listing
page, choose Install. If you think you uninstalled an app but really didn't, you'll see that you
already own the app when you access the app's listing page.
© Camera
Home > Photos
Write a Review
You can write reviews for apps you own. You'll see the option from the app's listing page.
Some apps offer an option to write a review from inside the app through Options or
Settings. However, one sure way to locate the Write A Review option is to locate the app in
the Store.
In this exercise, you'll write a review for an app you own.
Write a Review
243
SET UP From the Start screen, look at your installed apps. Choose an app for which to
write a review.
1 From the Start screen, click or touch Store.
2 Click any Back button to return to the landing page of the Store.
3 Use any method to locate the app's listing page; click Write a review.
TROUBLESHOOTING You won't see Write A Review if you don't own the app.
© Travel
III
Write a review
*****
14 ratings
Free
You own this app.
4 Click the applicable number of stars to apply a rating, write a title, and then write
your review. Click Submit.
Write a review for Travel
Your rating (required)
Ite
Review (0/500 characters)
Submit
Cancel
244 Chapter 8 Shopping in the Windows Store
TIP After you click Submit, you'll have to wait for your review to become available.
^^P CLEAN UP No cleanup is required.
Understanding Subscriptions and In-App
Purchases
Some apps will include apps that offer in-app purchasing and subscriptions. In-app pur-
chases are those you make while using an app. For instance, in the case of a game, you
might need to purchase "bombs" or farm animals to reach the next level or to beat an
opponent. You can also subscribe to a particular app; for example, a newspaper or maga-
zine. We'll have to wait to see what the future holds!
Key Points
The Windows Store offers apps that are sorted by category, such as Games and Music
& Videos.
You can browse for apps in the Store through their categories or by the top free apps,
or you can search for an app by name.
You can sort apps in a category in many ways, including by ratings and release date.
The listilaylist to burn to a CD, detailed later in this section; read that
section if you aren't sure how to drag the files to the new playlist.
Organize ▼ Stream t Create playlist t
Title
^f) JoliBallew
|B Playlists I
ti> J3 Music
§ Videos
There are no playlists in this library,
Click here
[Q] Pictures
to create
3 playlist,
Click here to create
your first playlist
If you already have playlists, the option to Click Here to create one will no longer be avail-
able. In that case, you can either add songs to an existing playlist or create a new one.
To add songs to an existing playlist, locate the song to add, drag it on top of the playlist's
name, and drop it there. Note that songs you drag to playlists aren't moved there; only
the titles are added to the list. The music remains in its current position in folders on the
hard disk.
TIP If you aren't sure how to drag songs to create a playlist, work through the upcoming
exercise to burn songs to a CD. The process is similar.
Creating and Burning Playlists 255
lTSt J ► Library ► Music ► Genre ►
Organize
k
Genre
E|P Jo
I
1_
JIIJLJ
Workouts |
J J3 Music |+ A
<S Artist
Album
dd to Workouts |
,Q) Genre
g Videos
H Pictures
L
TIP To select multiple songs at one time, hold down the CTRL key while selecting.
If you want to create a new playlist, click Playlists in the left pane and notice the option to
drag songs to create the list in the right pane. Drag the songs and then click Save List. You'll
be prompted to name it, and it's done!
TROUBLESHOOTING If there are already songs in the Playlist area in the right pane, click
Clear List.
You can also create another kind of playlist — an auto playlist. When you create an auto
playlist, you name it and then set criteria. Criteria can be almost anything, and Windows
Media Player will use the criteria you set to create a playlist automatically. For instance, you
can create an auto playlist that contains only songs added to your library before or after
a specific date or songs that you've played the most in the past year. After criteria are set,
your playlist will be created and automatically managed. You start an auto playlist from
Create Playlist | Auto Playlist.
S
New Auto Playlist
Select the criteria that you want to change in the auto playlist,
The auto playlist is updated automatically each time you open it,
Auto Playlist name:
Recent Favorites
Create an auto playlist that includes the following:
J^Music in my library
u Play count : Total overall Is GreaterThan 20
YDate added To Libraiy Is After 1 year
TtClick here to add criteria]
You can burn any playlist you create to a CD, provided it will fit and you have the required
rights to copy the music. Common CDs hold about 80 minutes of music. If your playlist
won't fit on one CD, you'll be prompted to span it over several (which is often the case with
256 Chapter 9 Having Fun with Multimedia
audio books and auto playlists). If you don't already have a playlist created that you want to
copy to a CD, you can create one on the go during the CD creation process.
In this exercise, you'll burn a CD that contains music you like in the form of a playlist.
SET UP You will need a computer that includes a CD-recordable drive, a blank CD, and
music that you own available in Windows Media Player.
1 Open Media Player.
2 Insert a blank, recordable CD into the recordable CD/DVD drive.
3 Click the Burn tab.
4 Browse to the songs to add and drag them to the Burn list.
TROUBLESHOOTING If you drag a song to the Burn list and see a red circle with a line
through it, you can't add that song to the burn list. There are many reasons this can
happen, but it is usually because you don't have the proper permissions or haven't
purchased the song.
Play
Sync
@ Start burn Clear list
0-
tt
CD Drive (Efl
Audio CD
69:55 free of BO mi ns
Disc 1 [10:02]
Levon
l AWord in Spanish
5:21
4:39
5 When the list is complete, click Start burn.
CLEAN UP Remove the CD from the CD/DVD drive and test it in a CD player.
Now that you understand the interface, how to navigate to various music tracks, and how
to create playlists, spend some time playing the music you have on your computer. Playing
music here is the same as playing music in the Music app you've already explored; you just
select the song to play and use the controls to manage playback.
Creating and Burning Playlists 257
Sharing Media with a Network
You can share the media you've acquired on your Windows 8-based computer with
compatible computers and devices on your network. Devices can include tablets, media
centers, smart phones, and Xbox sets. For these other devices to gain access, however, you
must enable streaming options in Windows Media Player. You do this from the Stream
button.
Stream ▼ Create playlist ▼
Allow Internet access to home media...
Allow remote control of my Player..,
Automatically allow devices to play my media..,
More streaming options,..
There are four options from the Stream button, and you must click them to access their fea-
tures and settings.
■ ALLOW INTERNET ACCESS TO HOME MEDIA Select this option to stream music,
pictures, and videos from your home computer to a computer outside your home
(such as one at a vacation home). You can configure this computer to send your
media over the Internet. After you configure this option on your home computer, you
must configure the same option on the outside computer so that it can receive the
media.
■ ALLOW REMOTE CONTROL OF MY PLAYER Select this option to allow other
computers and devices on your home network to push music, pictures, and videos to
Windows Media Player and to remotely control Windows Media Player.
■ AUTOMATICALLY ALLOW DEVICES TO PLAY MY MEDIA Select this option to
enable other computers and devices on your home network to access the media you
store on this computer. This is most likely the first option you'll want to choose.
■ MORE STREAMING OPTIONS Select this option to choose media-streaming options
for specific computers and devices on your network. You might allow access to your
Xbox 360 while preventing access from your child's computer.
258 Chapter 9 Having Fun with Multimedia
Choose media streaming options for computers and devices
:•
Nameyour media library: Joli
Cheese default settings...
Show devices on: Local network
I (Q) Media programs on this PC and remote connections..,
access using default settings.
J
Compaq
Device access is blocked.
Joli (WINDOWS? : Windows Media Player]
Allowed access using default settings.
Xbox 360
Attowed access using default settings.
Customize.., [7] Allowed
D Allowed
12] Allowed
HZl Allowed
Home group computers are automatically allowed access.
Choose homegroup and sharing options
Choose power options
Tell me more about media streaming
Read the privacy statement online
After it is configured, your media library will appear on allowed network devices.
Obtaining Windows Media Center
So far, you've learned about Windows Media Player. As you learned in the introduction,
Windows Media Center is another media option that offers access to, management of,
and ability to play and watch any media that are available to you. It offers more features
than Media Player, including the ability to record live TV and watch Internet TV, provided
your computer is equipped with the proper hardware. You can use Windows Media Center
instead of your current DVR if you decide you like it.
You have to get Windows Media Center yourself; it's an available add-on feature. It's not
included with Windows 8 by default.
1 At the Start screen, type add features and then, from the results in Settings, tap or
click Add features to Windows 8.
Obtaining Windows Media Center 259
2
Tap or click I want to buy a product key online or I already have a product key as
applicable.
Add features to Windows 8
How do you want to get started?
Your PC is currently running Windows 8 Pro
In a few easy steps, you can add features to your PC to get a different edition of Windows 3, Your apps, files, and
settings will stay right where they are.
•fr I want to buy a product key online
•fr I already have a product key
3 Work through the resulting process, which might involve purchasing the add-on and/
or inputting a product key.
4 Wait while the add-on installs.
When you start Windows Media Center, the setup process begins. You can choose Express
or Custom. Because there are so many choices, it's generally best to choose Custom. When
you choose Custom, you'll set up Windows Media Center by walking through each step of
the configuration process.
260
Chapter 9 Having Fun with Multimedia
During setup, you might be prompted to:
■ Connect to the Internet.
■ Allow Media Center to download album cover art, music and movie information, and
TV Program Guide listings automatically and periodically.
■ Optimize how Windows Media Center looks on your specific display.
■ Set up or configure speakers.
■ Set up or configure media libraries.
■ Configure advanced settings for your specific setup.
■ Configure your live TV signal.
Learn About Windows Media Center
Features
You can navigate the Windows Media Center interface by using touch (if you have a com-
patible monitor), by using the arrow keys, by using a mouse, and even by using a com-
patible remote. At the main landing page, move up and down and left and right to see
everything that's offered. You'll see various categories that enable you to view and manage
all of your media libraries.
■ With Windows Media Center you can:
■ Access all the pictures available to you, including shared pictures; add libraries; and
create slideshows, tag and rate pictures, and sort pictures in various ways.
■ Access and watch videos available to you, including shared videos. You can add
video libraries and sort videos in various ways, too.
■ Access your music library, sort music, create playlists, add libraries, and view album
art, among other things.
■ Automatically play music that you've configured as your favorite music. You can
right-click here to go to a specific artist or genre or to configure your favorite
music. You can also access various settings and options, including the ability to
buy music.
Learn About Windows Media Center Features 261
■ Listen to FM radio and configure presets. You must have the proper hardware con-
figured for this to work.
■ Search for specific music.
■ Access movies in your library. You can sort movies by genre, year, parental ratings,
and more.
■ Access the movie guide. If a TV tuner is configured and Live TV has been set up,
you'll see the movies that are currently playing.
■ Play a DVD you place in the CD/DVD drive.
■ Access the TV guide and schedule recordings. One way to record TV is to right-
click the show you want to record. You'll have myriad settings to explore.
■ View TV programs you've recorded. You can sort by date recorded, title, and origi-
nal air date, and you can access shared recordings.
■ Watch Live TV and access playback controls, record what's on, and browse the
guide. You can also pause Live TV. If you haven't set up Live TV, the option will be
named Live TV Setup.
TROUBLESHOOTING If, after setting up your TV tuner, Live TV doesn't appear, restart
your computer. Often this resolves the problem.
■ View sports events, see scores, follow players, and more.
Perform tasks such as shut down Windows Media Center, shut down the computer,
restart the computer, and so on.
■ Access all Windows Media Center settings. If you want to change something about
Windows Media Center, you do it here.
■ Sync Windows Media Center content to a compatible portable device.
■ Add a media extender so you can view your media on other devices on your home
network.
262 Chapter 9 Having Fun with Multimedia
Key Points
Windows Media Player is most often used for playing music but can also be used to
view pictures, videos, and other compatible media.
You can rip and burn CDs by using Windows Media Player.
With Windows Media Player, you can share media across your home network and
access media shared by other computers on the network.
Windows Media Center is most often used for watching and recording television,
although it's also used to view and listen to other media, including pictures, videos,
and music.
Windows Media Center takes longer to set up, start, and find media than Windows
Media Player does, but it offers more features than Windows Media Player.
With Windows Media Center, you can watch, pause, and record Live TV; and play
back those recordings.
Key Points 263
Find
Find games in the Windows Store, page 267
© Wordament
Calculate
Calculate your Windows Experience Index,
page 269
Rate and improve your computer's performance
The Windows Experience Index assesses key system components on
Component
Processor:
Memory (RAM):
Graphics:
Gaming graphics:
What is rated
Calculations per second
Memory operations per second
Desktop graphics performance
3D business and gaming
graphics performance
Explore
Explore Xbox games from Windows 8,
page 267
Connect
Connect Windows 8 to your Xbox, page 273
Playing Games
10
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Determine whether you can play a specific game on your Windows 8 PC or device.
■ Find and purchase, download, and install games with Windows 8.
■ Calculate your Windows Experience Index.
■ Connect Windows 8 to your Xbox console.
We use computers, gadgets, and devices to be productive and do our work but also to have
fun. Playing games can be an entertaining activity, and with Windows 8 you can play more
games than ever. You can play not only desktop games but also touch-enabled games that
use the new interface of Windows 8.
Windows 8 also enables you to connect to your Xbox console so that you can find, pur-
chase, and download games to your console more quickly than when using your Xbox
controller.
In this chapter, you'll first learn how to evaluate whether you can play a specific game on
your computer or device. Then, you'll learn how to find games with Windows 8, how to cal-
culate your Windows Experience Index, and how to connect to your Xbox console.
PRACTICE FILES You don't need any practice files to complete the exercises in this chapter.
For more information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the
beginning of this book.
What's Required for Playing Games
Gaming just got richer with Windows 8: you can play the Desktop games you know and
love but also new types of games designed for the new interface or for touch devices (for
instance, tablets) with Windows 8.
What's Required for Playing Games 265
Just like operating systems that have a very clear set of system requirements that must be
met for them to work, games have individual system requirements depending on their size,
complexity, and other criteria. If your computer or device can run Windows 8, it doesn't
mean it can run all games that work on Windows 8. That's why before purchasing and in-
stalling a game you need to be aware of its system requirements. If your system doesn't
meet at least the minimum requirements, you won't be able to play the game without
problems.
Those requirements are always shared by the developers of each game. If you bought a
game from a shop, the requirements will be on the back or side of its cover. If you purchase
a game online, the requirements are listed with the description of the game on its dedi-
cated page.
Unlike other types of software, gaming performance is closely related to having the lat-
est drivers installed for your system's most important hardware components. If you want
to play three-dimensional games with advanced graphics, it is important to update your
video card's drivers regularly. In such scenarios, using the latest video card driver offered
through Windows Update is not enough to ensure smooth game performance in all games.
Therefore, you must download the latest drivers from the website of your video card's man-
ufacturer for your specific video card model.
Where to Find Games
With the introduction of the Windows Store and the Games app for Windows 8 you now
have even more platforms and ways to find and purchase games, both for your computer
and for your Xbox console.
The Windows Store has a section dedicated to games where you can find diverse titles
for computers and devices running Windows 8. For each game, you are shown important
information about its size, rating, and publisher. A brief description and some screenshots
are provided that give you an idea of what the game is about. In the Details section you can
view the system requirements of the game, and in the Reviews section you can view what
others had to say about the game.
266 Chapter 10 Playing Games
© Wordament
Overview Details Reviews
Entertainment Software Rating Board: Everyone 10 •
| Mild lanquaqe
What ii this,?
With the help of the Games app, you can find, purchase, and install Xbox games from your
Windows 8 PC or device. This app works with the Xbox SmartGlass app so you can connect
your Windows 8 PC or device to your Xbox. After Xbox SmartGlass is set up and working,
you can start browsing the list of available Xbox games.
$ xbox games
spotlight
game activity
Where to Find Games 267
TIP To learn how to set up the Xbox SmartGlass app, read the "Connecting Windows 8 to
Your Xbox" section later in this chapter.
When you open the page of a game, you are shown information about the game and given
options to buy the game for your Xbox (if the game is not free), view more details about the
game, play it on your Xbox, play its trailer, or get the demo for your Xbox. (Some titles offer
a demo or trailer, but others do not.)
tfjxeox360
(wj Buy game for Xbox 360
\=j Explore game
(T) Play on Xbox 360
(V) Playl
f trailer
Kinect Sports
2010, Microsoft Games Studios, Family
Xbox 360
Set Beacon
(Online Interactions Not Rated by the ESRB) The
Games on Demand version supports English r French,
Italian, German, Spanish, Potuguese, Russian,
Japanese, Korean, Chinese. Kinect Sports sends you,
your friends and family into the stadium to bring out
your potential as sporting legends. Experience all the
thrills of six major events: Soccer, Bowling, Track &
Field, Boxing, Beach Volleyball and Table Tennis. No
controller required - your body is all you need. From
delivering a supreme serve to vaulting the final hurdle,
the Kinect sensor tracks all your movements. Play solo
to boost your personal best, tackle computer-
controlled opponents, send challenges across the
globe via Xbox LIVE or gather around the TV for lively
living room competition. There's even a mascot-
Calculating Your Windows Experience Index
The Windows Experience Index is the Microsoft measurement of how well a computer can
run Windows. To calculate a computer's Windows Experience Index score, Windows rates
certain components and gives them a subscore. Those components are defined by the
following areas.
■ Processor Calculations per second
■ Memory Memory operations per second
■ Graphics Desktop performance in Windows
268
Chapter 10 Playing Games
Gaming graphics 3D business and gaming graphics performance
Primary hard disk Disk data transfer rate for your primary hard disk
Performance Information and Tools
Control Panel Home
1 Adjust visual effects
Adjust indexing options
Adjust power settings
Open disk cleanup
-:: anceci :cc ;
« All Control Panel Ite... ► Performance iformation and Tools
Search Control Panel
See also
Action Center
Rate and improve your computer's performance
The Vv in dews Experience Index assesses key system components on a scale of 1.0 to S.S.
Component
What is rated
Subscore
Base score
Processor:
Calculations per second
5.3
^^^_
Memory (RAM}:
Memory operations per second
6.3
FSI
Graphics:
Desktop graphics performance
5.7
zjJ
Gaming graphics:
3D business and gaming
graphics performance
5.6
Determined by
Primary hard disk:
Disk data transfer rate
5.9
lowest subscore
Your scores are current
Last update: 8/1 0/201 Z 3:47:14 PM
j/ View and print detailed performance
*?&& and system information
^ Re- run the assessment
These components are examined and given a score that ranges between 1.0 and 9.9. The
key part of the Windows Experience Index definition, which can be confusing, is the base
score. The Windows Experience Index isn't an average of the subscores; it's only the lowest
subscore your computer earns.
Microsoft defines a computer with a base score of 2.0 as one that can run general comput-
ing tasks, but it would not be powerful enough to run advanced multimedia features in
Windows. A computer with a base score of 3.0 can run many Windows features at a basic
level, but it might have issues running higher-level functions such as playing high-definition
content or displaying themes at higher resolutions.
Computers sold with Windows 8 should have a score of 4.5 and higher. At this level, they
are guaranteed to run all features of Windows. Scores of 6.0 and higher are generally given
to higher-end computers.
Calculating Your Windows Experience Index 269
For the best performance in games, the most important indicator is the Gaming Graphics
subscore. The higher it is, the better your computer will perform. If you want to build a
computer on which to play games with advanced graphics, it is highly recommended that
you purchase or build a system that has scores of at least 6.0 for all components.
If your Windows 8 PC or device has not been evaluated, each subscore will be marked as
(unrated). A message will be displayed saying that, "Your Windows Experience Index has not
yet been established."
Performance Information and Tools
I « All Control Panel Ite... ► Performance Information and Tools.
Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
1 Adjust visual effects
Adjust indexing options
Adjust power settings
Open disk cleanup
-■:■ anceci :cc ■:
Rate and improve your computer's performance
The .'-indc.',; Experience Index: as^esies key system components en a scale cf 1.0 tc S.S.
Your Wind ows Exp en en c e
ndex has not yet been established.
a p Rate this computer
Component
What is rated
Processor:
Calculations per second
[unrated]
Memory (RAM]:
Memory operations per second
[unrated]
Graphics:
Desktop graphics performance
[unrated]
Gaming graphics:
3D business and gaming graphics performance
[unrated]
Primary hard disk:
Disk data transfer rate
[unrated]
See also
Action Center
It is best to run the assessment when no other applications and processes are running so
that they don't affect the evaluation and lower your scores. After you have assessed your
system, you don't need to reassess it unless you change some of its hardware components,
install new drivers, or improve some of its performance-related settings.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to assess (or reassess) your Windows Experience Index.
Q^ SET UP Open Control Panel.
270
Chapter 10 Playing Games
1 Click or tap System and Security and then click or tap System to view the System
window, where your overall system rating is displayed.
2 Click or tap the link in the Rating row of the System area.
The link will be named Windows Experience Index if your system has been rated
previously or System rating is not available if it hasn't. The Performance Information
And Tools window opens.
System
(V) t f ]|> Control Panel ► System and Security ► System
Control Panel Home
Search Control Panel
*
$*$ Device Manager
j^ 1 Remote settings
j^ 1 System protection
'$' Advanced system settings
View basic information about your computer
Windows edition
Windows 3 Pro ^■■1
© 2012 Microsoft Corporation,
All rights reserved.
Get more features with a new
edition of Windows
Windows 8
System rating is not available
Processor: InSSjrtK"-:™''" OsssS^U Q9Q0Q @ 2.00GHz 2.00GHz
Installed memory (RAM]: 6.00 GB
System type: 64-bit Operating System, x64-based processor
Pen and Touch: No Pen orTouch Input is available for this Display
See also
Action Center
Windows Update
Performance Information and
~: : ;
Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings
Computer name: WinSPro-Laptop
Full computer name: Win&Pro-Laptop
Computer description:
Workgroup: WORKGROUP
Windows activation
Wi n d o ws i s a ctivated Vi ew d eta i I s i n Wi n d owe Activati on
Product ID: 001 73-70000-0001 1-AA447
^'Change settings
Click or tap Re-run the assessment if the system was previously assessed or Rate this
computer if it hasn't.
Calculating Your Windows Experience Index 271
Performance Information and T<
,« All Control Panel Its... ► Performance nformation and Tools
Control Panel Home
Adjust visual effects
adjust indexing options
Adjust power settings
Open disk cleanup
Advanced tools
Rate and improve your computer's performance
The Windows Experience Index assesses key system components on a scale of 1.0 to 9.9,
Your Windows Experience Index has not yet been established.
Component
What is rated
Processor:
Calculations per second
(unrated]
Memory (RAM):
Memory operations per second
[unrated]
Graphics:
Desktop graphics performance
[unrated]
Gaming graphics:
3D business and gaming graphics
performance
[unrated]
Primary hard disk:
Disk data transfer rate
[unrated]
See also
Action Center
4 Wait for the assessment to finish.
The overall base score and each individual subscore are displayed in the appropriate
fields.
^3 CLEAN UP Close the Performance Information And Tools window.
Connecting Windows 8 to Your Xbox
It was mentioned in a previous section that you can connect to your Xbox console from
any Windows 8 PC or device connected to the same network and using the same Microsoft
account. You do this with the help of the Xbox SmartGlass app, which needs to be down-
loaded and installed from the Windows Store.
TIP To learn more about the Windows Store and how to download and install apps, read
Chapter 8, "Shopping in the Windows Store."
In this exercise, you'll learn how to connect your Xbox to your Windows 8 PC or device
through the Xbox SmartGlass app.
272 Chapter 10 Playing Games
SET UP First, install the Xbox SmartGlass app from the Windows Store if you don't
have it installed yet. Start your Xbox console and log on with your Microsoft account.
The Xbox LIVE gamer tag must use the same Microsoft account as the Windows 8 PC or
device to which you want to connect it.
1 On your Xbox, click Settings and then choose System.
2 Click Console Settings and then choose Xbox Companion.
3 Select Available.
4 On your Windows 8 PC or device, launch the Xbox SmartGlass app while your Xbox
console is still turned on.
5 Click or tap Get started.
Read the instructions displayed and click or tap Next.
Connecting Windows 8 to Your Xbox 273
Here we go.
Make sure that you're signed in to Xbox on your console.
Also, set your console's Xbox Companion setting to Available. Go to Settings, System,
Console Settings, Xbox Companion.
Xbox SmartGlass automatically connects to your console. A confirmation of the con-
nection will be displayed both in the Xbox SmartGlass app and on your Xbox console.
$ xbox smartglass
recent
search xbox feu music... fi 1
popular nm*
Halo
Hrirry Poller
On your Xbox console now
i
M
Xbox 360
Dashboard
.HIH 1 ^HH
The 01 lice
Rihanna
XBOX LIVE
Zune
1 Zune
<
274 Chapter 10 Playing Games
Now you can start using the Games app and purchase games, download demos, custom-
ize your Xbox profile, and so on. You won't need to reconnect the app each time you use
it. After you have set it up, each time you run Xbox SmartGlass it searches for your Xbox
console. If it finds it online, you can start using the Xbox SmartGlass and Games apps. If it
doesn't find the console, you are informed and given advice on how to fix the problem.
Key Points
Prior to purchasing and installing a game, check its system requirements to learn
whether you can play it on your Windows 8 PC or device.
You can find games in the Windows Store or with the Games app.
The Windows Experience Index is the Microsoft measurement of how well a computer
can run Windows. It gives a good perspective on the overall performance of your
Windows 8 PC or device.
You can connect your Windows 8 PC or device to your Xbox console through the
Xbox SmartGlass app.
Key Points 275
Use
Use the Network and Sharing Center,
page 282
Connect
Connect to a wireless network, page 289
i Interne-
NetWOrk and Sharing Center
► Network and Sharing Center
v Cf Search Conti
View your basic network information and set up connections
View your active networks
Clprlan
Private network
Changeyour networking settings
Access type: Intern
HcmeGroup: Availa
Connections: .i«S! Wi-Fi
KJCi Set up a new connection or network
Set up a broadband, dial-up, or VPN connection; or set up a router or i
Enter the network security key
1 ^B 1 ^ ou can a ' so cornect
^^^^™^ by pushing the button
^E^ on the router.
Work
Work with a hidden wireless network,
page 292
Change
Change the profile of a network, page 290
1 Manually connect to a wireless network
| Clprlan
WPA2- Persona I
iter information for the wireless network you want to c
Network name:
Security type:
Encryption type:
Security Key: | QHide
"■• -
Do you want to turn on sharing
between PCs and connect to devices
on this network?
No, don't turn on sharing or
connect to devices
For networks in public places
Yes, turn on sharing and connect to
devices
For home or work networks
Connecting to a Network
and the Internet
11
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Open the Network and Sharing Center.
■ Connect to a wireless network.
■ Connect to a hidden wireless network.
■ Update the profile of your active network connection.
In this chapter, you'll first learn the jargon used when working with network connections.
As you will see, it isn't as scary as it sounds, and the basic concepts can be understood
by anyone with a little computing experience. Then, you'll learn about the Network and
Sharing Center and its importance in managing network connections and settings. Finally,
you'll learn how to access different configuration panels that you'll find in the Network and
Sharing Center and how to change the active network profile depending on the type of the
network to which you are connected.
You'll also learn how to connect to wireless networks, including those that are hidden and
cannot be detected automatically by Windows 8.
PRACTICE FILES You don't need any practice files to complete the exercises in this chapter.
For more information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the
beginning of this book.
277
Understanding the Jargon: Router, ISP,
Network Adapter, and Other Terminology
Before connecting to the Internet and your home network, you need to learn a little bit of
computer networking jargon. Don't worry! It isn't as difficult as it might seem when you
hear it the first time.
First and foremost, you need a working Internet connection provided by an Internet Service
Provider (ISP). The ISP will connect its Internet service either to a single computer in a home
or to a home networking device, such as a router, that shares the Internet connection with
computers and devices in your home.
The router is a device that handles the data being sent between the computers in your net-
work and between those computers and the Internet. You will need a router if you want to
create your own home wireless network even if you have only one computer. If you have a
router, you need to be sure it's correctly configured so your computers can connect with
each other and with the Internet. Instructions for doing this are provided in the router's
manual and by your ISP.
For a computer to connect to the network and the Internet it needs a network adapter or
network card. In tech-talk, this is also called a Network Interface Card (NIC). Desktop com-
puters generally have a network card that is connected to the router through a standard
network cable, which can be bought at any computer shop. You plug one end into your
computer and the other end into the router. The router does all the settings, and you are
connected.
However, mobile computers such as laptops, netbooks, or tablets need a wireless network
adapter (wireless network card) that detects and works with wireless network signals.
The trouble with network adapters (both wired and wireless) is that they need appropriate
Windows 8 drivers installed. A driver is a computer program that enables other programs to
interact with the device for which it was created. For example, the driver for your comput-
er's video card allows games to interact with it and generate the advanced graphics shown
on your screen. Drivers for your network card enable Windows 8 to interact with the card
and use it to connect to a network and the Internet.
278 Chapter 11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet
If you have bought your computer with Windows 8 preinstalled, you won't need to worry
about drivers. They are already installed and working. However, if that is not the case, you
need to use another computer that is connected to the Internet and search for the latest
network drivers developed for the specific computer model and network card you own.
When you find them, download and install them on your Windows 8-based computer. Only
then can you connect to your home network and the Internet.
One last item you should learn about is the security of wireless networks. Wireless networks
can be either secured or unsecured. A secured network transmits data by using advanced
encryption algorithms and, to connect to it, you need to know its security key or password.
There are many types of wireless network security, each with a gibberish name such as
WPA2-PSK, WPA-PSK, or WEP. If you know the appropriate password, you should be able
to connect to it no matter the type of security it uses. Unsecured networks don't have any
encryption and do not require passwords to connect to them. However, you should be wary
about connecting to such networks, especially those found in public places. They might be
used to access data on your computer.
Now that you know the basics, it is time to get practical and learn how to get connected to
the Internet in Windows 8.
TIP If you want to know more about creating and securing home networks, read Network
Your Computers & Devices Step by Step.
Using the Networking and Sharing Center
All the important network and sharing configuration settings are done from a panel called
the Network and Sharing Center. It was first introduced in Windows Vista, and it has been
fine-tuned in both Windows 7 and Windows 8.
The Network and Sharing Center panel is split in two areas: a central area and an area on
the left.
Using the Networking and Sharing Center 279
Network and Sharing Center
© - t
Control Panel Home
Change adapter settings
Change advanced sharing
settings
« Network and Internet ► Network and Sharing Center v (j Search Control Panel
View your basic network information and set up connections
View your active networks
See also
HomeGroup
Internet Options
Windows Firewall
C 1 p r 1 a n
Private network
Change your networking settings
Access type: Internet
HomeGroup: Available tc join
C o n n ecti o n s: ..;^ Wi - Fi (C 1 p r1 a n]
"tJC* Set up a new connection or network
Set up a broadband, dial-up, or VPN connection; or set up a router or access point.
I^"'] Troubleshcct problems
Diagnose and repair network problems, or get troubleshooting information.
Left area
Main area
In the main area, you can see information about your active network connection (if any):
the name of the network to which you are connected, the network profile (Private or Public)
assigned to it, and the access type (Internet access, limited access, and so on). You can
also learn whether a HomeGroup is available in your network and whether your computer
has joined it. Below that, there are shortcuts for setting up a new connection or another
network and for starting troubleshooting wizards, which help fix all kinds of networking
problems.
In the area on the left side, you have shortcuts for changing the settings of your network
adapter or network card, changing your network sharing settings, and accessing the con-
figuration of HomeGroup, Internet Options, and Windows Firewall.
In this exercise, you'll learn the fastest way to open the Network and Sharing Center.
280
Chapter 11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet
Q^ SET UP Open the Start screen.
1 Type network sharing so that Windows displays the appropriate search results.
Search
Settings
network sharing] X
m
Apps
o
i
Files 2
2 Click or tap Settings.
Windows displays only shortcuts to Windows panels and settings.
3 Click or tap the Network and Sharing Center search result.
Using the Networking and Sharing Center 281
The Network and Sharing Center is now open and can be used to configure different net-
working aspects.
Control Panel Home
Change adapter settings
Change advanced sharing
settings
Network and Internet ► Network and Sharing Center v (j Search Control Panel
View your basic network information and set up connections
View your active networks
See also
HomeGroup
Internet Options
Windows Firewall
CIpMan
Private network
Access type: Internet
HomeGroup: Availabletc join
C o n n ecti o n s: .■!.■! Wi - Fi (C 1 pr1 a n]
Changeyour networking settings
"yj^i Set up a new connection or network
Set up a broadband, dial-up, or VPN connection; or set up a router or access point.
|^*| Troubleshoot problems
Diagnose and repair network problems, or get troubleshooting information.
CLEAN UP Close the Network and Sharing Center by clicking the little red X button
on the top right after you finish working with it.
TIP You can open the Network and Sharing Center in many other ways. If you prefer to
use the mouse instead of the keyboard, first open the Control Panel, select Network and
Internet, and then choose Network and Sharing Center.
Connecting to a Wireless Network
In today's world, a growing number of people use laptops, netbooks, or tablets instead of
desktop computers. As a result of this trend — plus the growing number of devices such as
smart phones — more people use wireless networks on a regular basis. Windows 8 offers all
you need to connect to wireless networks as easily as possible.
282
Chapter 11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet
Viewing and accessing available wireless networks is done from the Networks panel. For
each network, the panel shows its name, the strength of its signal, and whether it is secured.
All unsecured wireless networks have an exclamation mark on top of the icon that indicates
their signal strength.
Left area
Signal strength
Symbol used for
unsecured networks
If you hover over the name of a network, a small box appears with details about the type of
security that wireless network uses.
Connecting to a Wireless Network
283
Before you try to connect, be aware that you can connect only to networks for which you
have the appropriate connection details: the name of the network and the security key if
the network is secured against unauthorized access. This means that you can connect only
to the following types of wireless networks.
■ Your home's wireless network, if you have one set up correctly, for which you should
know the connection details
■ The wireless networks of friends and neighbors who have shared their network con-
nection details with you
■ The wireless network of your workplace, for which the connection details are available
from the network administrator or the IT support department
■ Public wireless networks (that are generally unprotected) found in places such as
airports, libraries, bars, cafes, and so on
After you are connected to a network for the first time, you are asked whether you want to
enable sharing and connect to devices on that network. If you are connecting to a public,
unsecured network, you should always be cautious and choose No, Don't Turn On Sharing
Or Connect To Devices when the Network Connection Wizard asks.
® Networks
C1pr1an .illl
Do you want to turn an sharing
between PCs and connect to devices
on this network?
No, don't turn on sharing or
connect to devices
For networks in public places
Yes, turn on snaring and connect to
devices
For home or work networks
Furthermore, you must have a security solution active and running on your system to make
sure your computer is protected from attacks and unauthorized access. Windows Defender
and Windows Firewall, included with Windows 8, should provide a good level of protection.
Make sure to keep them turned on if you have not installed security solutions provided by
companies other than Microsoft.
284
Chapter 11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet
TROUBLESHOOTING If Windows 8 has not detected any connections, and you know that
there is at least one wireless network available in your area, you should check whether your
wireless network card has the appropriate drivers installed and whether the network card is
enabled.
When connecting to a wireless network, a check box appears that says Connect
Automatically. If you select it, the next time you log on to Windows and the same network
is detected, Windows automatically connects to it by using the same details you provided
the first time you connected.
If the connection is successful, Connected appears near the icon of the network in the
Networks panel. Available networks to which you have not connected don't display status.
Networks to which you connected but for which Windows 8 identifies issues will display
Limited near their icons.
On the Desktop, similar icons appear in the taskbar. If network connectivity issues are
found, they are signified by a yellow exclamation mark.
Connecting to a Wireless Network
285
Not connected
Connected
Connectivity problems
If you cannot connect to a wireless network from your Windows 8-based computer, but all
your computers with earlier operating systems can connect, you might need to upgrade
the firmware on your wireless router. Consult the webpage of your router's model to see
whether any upgrades are available. If they are, download and install the latest version of
firmware. Unfortunately, some older router models do not work very well with computers
that use newer versions of Windows unless you perform a firmware upgrade.
Another useful resource is the Windows 8 Compatibility Center, found at http://bit.ly
/xol5fr. There you can check the compatibility with Windows 8 for many applications and
hardware devices.
The Networks panel can be launched by using several methods. If you are using a desktop
computer, the simplest way is to click the network icon from the taskbar on the Desktop. If
you're using a tablet or a computer with touch, use the Settings charm accessible from the
Start screen.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to open the Networks panel, view all the available wireless
networks in your area, and connect to one of them.
SET UP First, make sure a wireless network is available for which you know the connec-
tion details (network name and security password) and then go to the Start screen.
1 Swipe from the right side of the screen or press Windows+C to open the charms.
2 Click or tap Settings to open the contextual settings for the Start screen.
286 Chapter 11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet
Click or tap the wireless network icon (the first of the six icons at the bottom of the
Settings charm).
The Networks panel opens.
Click or tap the network to which you want to connect.
Connecting to a Wireless Network 287
5 Select Connect automatically.
6 Click or tap Connect.
You are prompted to type the security key.
288
Chapter 11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet
7
TIP If the network to which you are connecting is not secured, you are not asked for
a password. If this is the case, skip the next step.
Type the security key and then click or tap Next.
You are asked whether you want to turn on sharing.
TIP If you typed an incorrect password, Windows 8 informs you that it cannot
connect to the network. If this happens, repeat the procedure, starting with step 1,
retyping the password.
Connecting to a Wireless Network
289
Click or tap Yes, turn on sharing and connect to devices.
Windows takes a few seconds to connect to the network you selected.
® Networks
Clprlan ..ill
Do you want to turn on sharing
between PCs and connect to devices
on this network?
No, don't turn on sharing or
connect to devices
For networks in public places
Yes, turn on sharing and connect to
devices
For home or work networks
CLEAN UP If the Networks panel doesn't disappear, click or tap anywhere in the
empty space on the Start screen.
Connecting to a Hidden Wireless Network
Hidden wireless networks are networks that do not broadcast their names, called Network
ID or Service Set Identifier (SSID) in tech-talk. Although few people use such networks,
some people feel a bit more secure if they have their home wireless network hidden from
unwanted guests.
If you've set your wireless network this way, be aware that, according to the Microsoft
TechNet community and other reputable websites, hidden wireless networks are not actu-
ally undetectable or more secure. On the contrary, computers and devices configured to
connect to such networks are constantly disclosing the Network ID of those networks, even
when they are not in range. As a result, using such a network actually compromises the
privacy of the computers connected to it. If you still want to use and connect to such net-
works, this section shows how it is done, but you should know where to get the important
technical details.
290
Chapter 11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet
First and foremost, you need to know all the identification and connection details of the
hidden wireless network to which you want to connect. To do this, open your router's
configuration page and open the Wireless Configuration menu. Write down the values
for the Network ID (SSID) and Security fields. Routers love to use intimidating tech talk, so
prepare to encounter some weird-sounding acronyms. Routers have very different inter-
faces, depending on their model and manufacturer. There is no standard way to access this
information. If you don't know how to find it, check the manual of your router for help and
instructions.
Depending on what type of security your wireless network has, you need to write down the
value of the following important fields.
■ For WEP security, note the value of the WEP Key field.
■ For WPA-PSK, WPA2-PSK(AES) security, note the value of the Preshare Key field.
These key fields store the password for connecting to the wireless network.
If your wireless network has no security enabled, you need to know only the network name
(the value of the Network ID (SSID) field).
When completing all the required details to connect to the hidden wireless network, con-
sider the following aspects.
■ When asked about the security type of the network, you must make the correct selec-
tion; otherwise the connection won't work. You must select WEP for WEP security,
WPA-Personal for WPA-PSK security, or WPA2-Personal for WPA2-PSK(AES) security. If
the hidden network has no security enabled, select No authentication (Open).
Connecting to a Hidden Wireless Network 291
n |
•:>) (£p Manually connect to a wireless network
Enter information for the wireless network you want to add
Network name:
C1pr1an
Security type:
Encryption type:
Security Key:
l~l Start this, connection ai
[Choose an option] v
I I Hide characters
No authentication (Open)
WEP
WPA-Personal
WPA2- Enterprise
WPA-Enterprise
302.1m
l~l Connect even if the network is not broadcasting
Warning: If you select this option, your computer's priva
cy might be at risk.
Next | Cancel |
For networks that have security enabled, select the encryption type. If this informa-
tion is not shared by your router, leave the default value given by Windows for the
selected security type. In most cases, this works well.
1 Manually connect to a wireless network
Enter information for the wireless network you want to add
Net/.crk name:
C1pr1an
Security type:
Encryption type:
Security Key:
WPA2- Personal
I I Hide characters
Start this connection automatically
l~l Connect even if the network is not broadcasting
Warning: If you select this option, your computer's privacy might be at risk.
Because Windows 8 cannot detect hidden networks, select Start This Connection
Automatically and Connect Even If The Network Is Not Broadcasting. Windows can-
not detect a hidden network to connect to it.
292 Chapter 11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet
Start this connection automatically
@ Connect even if the network is not broadcasting
Warning: If you select this option, your computer's privacy might be at risk.
TIP WPA2-Enterprise, WPA-Enterprise, and 802. lx are not covered in this book
because they are specific to business networks. If you need to connect to a hidden
business network, contact the network administrator or the IT help desk team for
guidance.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to connect to hidden wireless networks.
SET UP Make sure you have a hidden wireless network available for which you know
the connection details (network name, security password, and so on). Open the Network
and Sharing Center.
1
2
Click or tap Set up a new connection or network.
The Set Up A Connection Or Network window opens.
Select Manually connect to a wireless network and then click or tap Next.
¥ Set Up a Connection or Network
Choose a connection option
«
Connect to the Internet
Set up a broadband or dial-up connection to the Internet,
C^T g Set up a new network
^5^, Set up a new router or access point.
fc~ Manually connect to a wireless network
■ Connect to a hidden network or create a new wireless profile.
i~lL Connect to a workplace
Set up a dial-up or VPN connection to your workplace.
Next Cancel
3 In the Network name field, type the name of the wireless network to which you want
to connect.
4 In the Security type field, choose the type of security your wireless network uses.
Connecting to a Hidden Wireless Network 293
n |
•:>) (£p Manually connect to a wireless network
Enter information for the wireless network you want to add
Network name:
C1pr1an
Security type:
Encryption type:
Security Key:
l~l Start this, connection ai
[Choose an option] v
I I Hide characters
No authentication (Open)
WEP
WPA-Personal
WPA2- Enterprise
WPA-Enterprise
302.1m
l~l Connect even if the network is not broadcasting
Warning: If you select this option, your computer's priva
cy might be at risk.
Next | Cancel |
In the Encryption type field, choose the type of encryption used by the network to
which you are connecting.
■:,*-.' ^ Manually connect to a wireless network
Enter information for the wireless network you want to add
Network name: C1pr1an
Security type: | WPA2- Personal v
Encryption type: l^pj v
I I Hide characters
|tkip
Security Key:
Start this connection automatically
l~l Connect even if the network is not broadcasting
Warning: If you select this option, your computer's privi
cy might be at risk.
Next | Cancel |
6 In the Security Key field, type the password used to connect to the wireless network.
7 Select Start this connection automatically.
294 Chapter 11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet
Select Connect even if the network is not broadcasting.
Click or tap Next.
@ jj* Manually connect to a wireless network
Enter information for the wireless network you want to add
Net.'-.crk name:
Security type:
Encryption type:
Security Key:
C1pr1an
WPA2- Pergonal
I I Hide characters
Start this connection automatically
@ Connect even if the network is not broadcasting
Warning: If you select this option, your computer's privacy might be at risk.
Next Cancel
A message appears, indicating that you have successfully added the wireless network
to your computer.
10 Click Close.
<fi* Manually connect to a wireless network
Successfully added C1 pr1 an
*> Change connection settings
Open the connection properties so that I can changethe settings.
Connecting to a Hidden Wireless Network 295
^0 CLEAN UP Close the Network and Sharing Center.
If the network is in range, Windows 8 will automatically connect to it.
Connecting to the Internet through a
Mobile Modem
Another option for connecting to the Internet, for example, when you are on a trip, is to
use a mobile Internet modem that you plug into your laptop or netbook. If you are using a
tablet with Windows 8, connecting is even easier because the operating system offers sup-
port for inserting a SIM card from your mobile operator, so you can use it to stay connected
through its network. Although most tablets can use SIM cards, some models don't offer
hardware support for them and can only connect to the Internet through wireless networks.
Make sure you are aware of the connectivity options offered by the tablet you purchase.
Even though the steps for connecting to the Internet through a mobile modem are differ-
ent, depending on the modem model and your mobile operator, the principles are always
the same.
■ You need a mobile Internet modem that you can plug into your computer.
■ After it's plugged in, you need to install the drivers for the modem and the software
that will connect to the Internet. They are always provided by your mobile operator in
the package with the modem itself or on the manufacturer's website.
■ Major mobile operators, such as AT&T, Verizon, and Vodafone, are likely to offer a
Windows 8 app through the Windows Store, so check for such an app.
296 Chapter 11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet
© AT&T Communication Manager
Overview Details Reviews
Overview
;9G6 oul of KB
No1ilirfl1inn<.
^j: attf
A
Need help'
^^^^^^^^^Q
Description
On your Samsung Developer Preview Slate PC manage your real-time mobile broadband data usage
and hill ryrle u<iing the AT&T fommunirflTion Manager app Vipw free linage notifications from AT&T
and activate i«rvim plans that btssL lit yuui mobile biuddband needs.
Read more
■ To connect to the Internet, you need to use the application provided by your mobile
operator, which is specifically designed for this task. The application will ask for the
PIN of the SIM card used with your modem and then connect to the Internet.
■ The quality and speed of the connection will vary depending on where you are and
the quality of the infrastructure your mobile operator has in that area.
If a Windows 8 app is not available, don't worry. Your mobile operator probably offers a
desktop application that you can use to connect to the Internet.
Changing the Network Profile of a Network
A network profile in Windows 8 is just a collection of network and sharing settings that are
applied to your active network. Setting this correctly is important to protect you when con-
necting to public networks and using network-sharing features when connected to trusted
home or work networks.
When you connect for the first time to a network, you are asked whether you want to
enable sharing and connect to other devices.
Changing the Network Profile of a Network 297
® Networks
Clprlan -alii
Do you want to turn on sharing
between PCs and connect to devices
on this network?
No, don't turn on sharing or
connect to devices
For networks in public places
Yes, turn on sharing and connect to
devices
For home or work networks
Depending on your answer, one of the two available network profiles is assigned to that
network connection.
■ PRIVATE NETWORK This profile is assigned if you select Yes, Turn On Sharing And
Connect To Devices. You should set a network as private if it is your home or work
network used by people and devices you trust. By default, network discovery will be
turned on, and you will be able to see other computers and devices that are part of
the network. This allows other computers from the network to access your computer,
and you will be able to create or join a HomeGroup.
■ PUBLIC NETWORK This profile is perfect when you are in public places such as air-
ports, bars, libraries, and so on. Network discovery and sharing are turned off. Other
computers from the network will not be able to see your computer. This setting is also
useful when your computer is directly connected to the Internet (direct cable/modem
connection, mobile Internet, and so on). To assign this profile, select No, Don't Turn
On Sharing Or Connect To Devices when connecting for the first time to the network.
TIP There is a third network location profile, called Domain Network, which cannot be
set by a normal user. It is available for enterprise workplaces and can be set only by the
network administrator. Under this profile, the network and sharing settings applied are the
setttings set by your workplace, and you cannot change them.
The default settings can be changed for both profiles. To learn how to do this, check the
instructions detailed in Chapter 13, "Sharing Files and Folders with My Network."
298
Chapter 11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet
These network profiles are useful to people who are very mobile and connect their com-
puters to many networks. For example, you could use your work laptop to connect to your
company network, take it home at the end of the day and connect to your home network,
or connect to a few public networks at the airport and in a hotel while on a business trip.
Each time you connect to a new network, Windows 8 asks about assigning the correct
profile. With one choice, you get the entire set of network settings correctly updated; you
won't compromise your security, and you have enabled only the network features that you
need for each network connection.
If you made a mistake when setting the network profile for the network to which you are
connected, you can change it later. In this exercise, you'll learn how.
SET UP Open the Networks panel. It doesn't matter whether you open it from the Start
screen or the Desktop.
1 Right-click or press and hold (if you have a device with touch) the name of the net-
work to which you are connected to access the contextual menu.
2 Click or tap Turn sharing on or off.
Networks
Airplane mode
Off ^B]
Wi-Fi
Show estimated data usage
Set as metered connection
Forget this network
Turn sharing on or off
jcrea ,,|||
flu
..hi
..hi
.■mi
View connection properties
3 Choose the option you prefer.
Changing the Network Profile of a Network 299
® Networks
Clprtan ..ill
Do you want to turn on sharing
between PCs and connect to devices
on this network?
No, don't turn on sharing or
connect to devices
For networks in public places
Yes, turn on sharing and connect to
devices
For home or work networks
CLEAN UP If the Networks panel doesn't disappear, just click or tap somewhere in the
empty space on the Start screen or the Desktop.
The network profile is updated along with the relevant network and sharing settings based
on the choice you made.
Key Points
Before working with network connections, it's best to understand the basic jargon so
that you know what each term means when you encounter it.
The Network and Sharing Center is the panel from which most network configuration
settings can be accessed.
Most wireless networks require a password (also called a security key) to connect to
them successfully.
Before connecting to a hidden wireless network, make sure you know all the impor-
tant connection details.
The network profile contains a collection of network and sharing settings that are
applied to the network to which you are connected, depending on how you set it.
300
Chapter 11 Connecting to a Network and the Internet
Find
Find the settings related to your user
account in the new Users panel, page 308
PC settings
Personalize
Notifications
Search
Share
General
Your
■>'cj :y
Swftc
More a<
Sign
Chan;
Great
Create
Create a picture password to use instead of
your normal password, page 328
Use
Use your Microsoft account to access
your Windows 8-based computer and all
Microsoft services, page 314
Delete
Delete a user account, page 344
% Change an Ace
(£■) (^) T T % w User Accounts ► Manage Accounts ► Change an
Make changes to My 7 Tutorials's account
Manage another account
Allowing Others to Use
the Computer
12
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Access the panels for managing user accounts.
■ Create a new user account.
■ Switch between user accounts.
■ Create picture passwords and PINs.
■ Change a user account password, picture, name, and type.
■ Delete a user account.
In a typical family, there might be only one person who uses one or more computers. For
these computers, you need only the user account you created when you first started using
them. However, you might have a computer that more than one person uses; it can be a
computer your children, your parents, or the whole family uses. If that's the case in your
house, it is best to create a user account for each person so that settings, files, and folders
don't get mixed up, which can be frustrating for everyone.
In this chapter, you'll learn what user accounts are, understand how many you need to have
on a computer, and learn how to manage user accounts and configure them.
PRACTICE FILES Before you can complete the exercises in this chapter, you need to copy the
book's practice files to your computer. The practice files you'll use to complete the exercises
in this chapter are in the Chapterl2 practice file folder. A complete list of practice files is
provided in "Using the Practice Files" at the beginning of this book.
303
What Is a User Account and How Many Do I
Need?
User accounts enable multiple people to share a computer, with each person having his or
her own private Documents folder, email inbox, Windows settings, and so on. When you
have your own account, you can do all the customization you want to your Windows 8 envi-
ronment without affecting other user accounts. Other users will have their own visual cus-
tomization, their own application settings, and so forth.
Multiple types of user accounts can be used in Windows 8. The Microsoft account (also
known as a Windows Live ID) can be used across multiple computers with Windows 8 and a
local account, defined only on your computer. These accounts can then have administrator
permissions, and Administrator is specified near their name. A user account that is not an
Administrator account is considered a standard user account and has limited permissions. A
third type of user account is the Guest account.
Manage Accounts
J^ « User Accounts. ► Manage Accounts.
Choose the user you would like to change
v <i Search Control Panel
Ciprian Rusen
ciprianruE.en@gmail.com
Administrator
Password protected
■ Local Account
Password protected
Add a new user in PC settings
!j Set up Family Safety
7 Tutorials
Local Account
Password protected
R
Guest
Guest account is off
304
Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
The administrator has full access to all user accounts. He or she can create and delete user
accounts and change the name, password, and account types for other accounts. The
administrator can also install software and hardware and configure every aspect of the
operating system. As a rule, every computer must have at least one administrator.
A user with standard rights has access to programs that have already been installed on the
computer and cannot install other software without the administrator password. A standard
user can change his or her password but cannot change the account name or type without
the administrator password.
The Guest account is a special type of limited user account that has the following
restrictions:
■ It does not require a password.
■ The user can't install software or hardware.
■ The user can't change the account type.
■ The user can't create a password for the account.
When you install Windows 8 or when you use it for the first time (as is the case with devices
that have Windows 8 installed already), you are prompted to create a default user account.
That user account always has administrator permissions. A new account should be created
when another person needs to work on the same computer.
For example, if you are a parent sharing the computer with your child, it is best to have two
user accounts: one for you with administrator permissions and one for your child with stan-
dard user permissions. By doing this, you make sure that your child can use the computer
but cannot change important configuration aspects.
TIP If children use a computer, consider using Family Safety. If you want to know more
about Family Safety, read Chapter 16, "Supervising a Child's Computer Use."
If you have temporary guests who need to use one of your computers to browse the
Internet, check their email, and perform other light computing activities, it is best to enable
the Guest account for them to use.
What Is a User Account and How Many Do I Need? 305
Introducing the Microsoft Account
(Windows Live ID)
A major change in Windows 8 from earlier versions of Windows is the introduction of the
Microsoft account and its mandatory use for working with features such as synchronizing of
your settings across the many computers you use or accessing the Windows Store to pur-
chase applications. In addition, each time you create a user account, Windows 8 first asks
for a Microsoft account.
Add a user
What email address would this person like to use to sign in to Windows? (If you know the email
address they use to sign in to Microsoft services, enter it here.)
seventutorials@live.com
When you sign in to Windows with a Microsoft account, you can:
■ Download apps from Windows Store.
« Get your online content in Microsoft apps automatically.
* Sync settings online to make PCs look and feel the same-this ir
ides settings like browser
Privacy statement
Sign up for a new email address
Siqn in without a Microsoft account
306
Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
The Microsoft account, formerly known as Windows Live ID, is an ID composed of an email
address and password, which you can use to log on to most Microsoft websites, services,
and properties such as Hotmail, Outlook.com, Xbox Live, and all Microsoft services (includ-
ing SkyDrive and Messenger). It is also used in Windows 8 for synchronizing your PC set-
tings, using the Windows Store to purchase applications, and other activities.
How do you know whether you have a Microsoft account? If you are already using any
of these services — Hotmail, Windows Live Messenger, or Xbox Live — you already have a
Microsoft account. Use the same email address and password in Windows 8.
If you don't have a Microsoft account, you can easily create one in Windows 8 or on the
Microsoft websites.
Using such an account in Windows 8 is highly recommended if you want to access with-
out problems or limitations all the features it has to offer. In addition, a Microsoft account
gives you access to almost all Microsoft products, services, properties, and websites. The
Microsoft account will be useful also when:
■ You want to use any of the tools included in the Windows Live Essentials suite.
■ You want to use devices such as Xbox consoles, Zune media players, or Windows
Phones.
■ You need a free email account from Microsoft on Hotmail, Outlook.com, or Live.com.
Accessing the User Accounts Settings
Windows 8 offers two places from which you can manage user accounts on your computer.
In PC Settings, in the Users section, you can manage settings related only to your user
account (password, picture password, and PIN) and add new user accounts.
Accessing the User Accounts Settings 307
PC settings
Personalize
Notifications
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
Your account
■ Ciprian Rusen
ripriflnru^pn@gmflil mm
You can switch to 3 local account but your settings won't sync between the PCs you use.
Switch to a local account
More account settings online
Sign-in options
Change your password
Create a picture password
Change PIN Remove
Any user who has a password must enter it when waking this PC.
Change
OLher users
i Add a user
In Control Panel, you can manage other existing user accounts, change your account type,
or configure the settings for User Account Control (UAC).
T T % « User Accounts, and Family Safety ► User Accounts
Control Panel Home
Manageyour credentials.
Manageyourfile encryption
certificates
Configure advanced user
profile properties
Change my environment
variables
See also
Family Safety
Make changes to your user account
Make changes to my account in PC settings
% Change your account type
^ Manage another account
^ Change User Account Control settings
Search Control Panel
Ciprian Rusen
ciprianrusen©gmail,com
Administrator
Password protected
308 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
TIP If you want to know more about the User Account Control (UAC) and how it works,
read the dedicated section in Chapter 14, "Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure."
In this exercise, you'll learn how to access both panels for managing user accounts, starting
with the one found in Control Panel and ending with the one found in PC Settings.
^^ SET UP Open Control Panel.
1
2
Click or tap User Accounts and Family Safety.
Click or tap User Accounts.
The User Accounts panel, with settings related to your user account, opens.
Network and Internet
Hardware and Sound
Programs
• User Ac c o li nts and Family
Safety
Appearance and
Personalization
Clock, Language, and Region
Ease of Access
|S| Credential Manager
Manage Web Credentials Manage Windows Credentials
Mail (Microsoft Outlook 15) (32-bit)
3 Click or tap Make changes to my account in PC settings.
Accessing the User Accounts Settings 309
UserAccourrl
T T % « User Accounts and Family Safety ► User Accounts
Control Panel Home
Manageyour credentials
Manageyourfile encryption
certificates
'^j 1 Configure advanced user
profile properties
Change my environment
variables
See also
($' Family Safety
Make changes to your user account
f^! C h a n g e y o u r a ccou nt type
5gj) Manage another account
(^ Change User Account Control settings
Ciprian Rusen
ciprianru sen@gmail.com
Administrator
Password protected
The Users section in PC settings opens.
PC settings
Personalize
Notifications
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
Your account
Ciprian Rusen
riprianru^endigmail mm
■c. ::v ■,:. t:h :c i :■::< :<;c„n: cu: ve^.r settings won't sync between the PCs you use.
Switch to a local account
More account settings online
Siqn-in options
Change your password
Create a picture password
Charge PIN Remove
Any user who has a password must enter it when waking this PC.
Change
OLher users
■ Add a user
310 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
Q CLEAN UP Close PC Settings.
The Users section in PC Settings can be opened directly, without going first to Control Panel
and following the steps in the preceding procedure. This exercise was meant to familiarize
you with each panel and its location before you learn how to manage the user accounts
defined on your computer.
Adding a New User Account
Anyone with administrator permissions can add a user account from PC Settings. When a
user is added, Windows 8 first asks for a Microsoft account. If one is provided, the user is
immediately given access to the computer and can log on by using the password associated
with that Microsoft account.
Add a user
What email address would this person like to use to sign in to Windows? (If you know the email
address they use to sign in to Microsoft services, enter it here.)
seventutorials@live.com
fhen you sign in to Windows with a Microsoft account, you can:
Download apps from Windows Store.
Get your online content in Microsoft apps automatically.
Sync settings online to make PCs look and feel the same-this it
favorites and history.
eludes settings like browser
Privacy statement
Sign up for a new email address
Sign in without a Microsoft account
Adding a New User Account
311
When adding a user, however, your computer must have an active Internet connection
when the user is added and when he or she logs on for the first time.
If you are not interested in using a Microsoft account, you can create a local account, which
will be created on your computer and can log on and use Windows 8. However, it won't be
able to use any synchronization features provided by Microsoft for Windows 8 and won't be
able to make purchases in the Windows Store unless a Microsoft account is associated with
it later. Another important difference is that a local account can have a blank (empty) pass-
word, whereas a Microsoft account does not allow blank passwords. Further, a local account
does not need an active Internet connection to log on for the first time or for subsequent
logons.
© Add a user
There are two options for signing in:
Microsoft account
Signing in to PCs with your email address lets you:
■ Down I oad apps f rum Wi nd o ws Store.
- Get you r o nl i ne co ntent i n Microsoft apps automatica lly.
* Sync settings online to make PCs look and feel the same — like your browser history, account
picture, and color.
Local account
You have to create a user name and account for each PC you use.
You'll need a Microsoft account to download apps, but you can set it up later.
Your settings won't be synced across the PCs thai you use.
Microsoft account
Local account
312 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
After the user account is created, a new folder with the new account name is created in
the C:\Users folder, where all the personal files of the new user are kept. No users except
administrator(s) and the newly added user have access to this folder.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to create a new local user account on your computer.
SET UP Log on as a user who has administrator permissions and then open PC Settings.
1 Click or tap Users.
2 Click or tap the Add a user button from the Other users section.
PC settings
Personalize
Notifications
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
The Add A User Wizard opens.
Your account
Ciprian Rusen
ripriflnru^pn@gmflil mm
You can switch to a local account but your settings won't sync between the PCs you use.
Switch to a local account
More account settings online
Sign-in options
Change your password
Create a picture password
Change PIN Remove
Any user who has a password must enter it when waking this PC.
Other users
Add a user
Adding a New User Account 313
Click or tap the Sign in without a Microsoft account link.
You are shown more information about the options for adding a user.
Add a user
What email address would this person like to use to sign in to Windows? (If you know the email
address they use to sign in to Microsoft sen/ices, enter it here.)
When you sign in to Windows with a Microsoft account yoi
■ Down I oad apps f rom Wi nd a ws Sto re.
* Get your online content in Microsoft apps automatically.
Sync settings online to make I
favorites and history.
Dkand feel the:
des settings like browser
Privacy statement
314 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
4 Click or tap Local account.
You are asked to type the user name, password, and password hint.
© Add a user
There are two options for signing in:
Microsoft account
Signing in to PCs with your email address lets you:
• Download apps from Windows Store.
* Get your online content in Microsoft apps automatically.
* Sync settings online to make PCs look and feel the same — like yoi
picture, and color.
Local account
Signing in with a local account means:
■ You have to create a user name and account for each PC you use.
■ You'll need a Microsoft account to download apps, but you can se
* Your settings won't be synced across the PCs thai you use.
ne — like your browser history, account
Microsoft account
X\ -
Local account
)) Cancel
\yy\
"^=====^^
Adding a New User Account
315
5 Complete all the fields and click or tap Next.
© Add a user
Choose a password that will be easy for you to remember but hard for others to guess. If you
forget, we'll show the hint.
Reenter password
Password hint
Next
Cancel
6 Click or tap Finish.
Windows 8 returns you to the Users panel.
316 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
Q CLEAN UP Close PC Settings.
The user account has been created using the password you have set.
Adding a New User Account 317
Creating a Microsoft Account
You can create a Microsoft account in several ways. One way is to do it from Windows
8 during the Add A User procedure.
Add a user
What email address would this person like to use to sign in to Windows? (If you know the email
address they use to sign in to Microsoft sen/ices, enter rt here.)
When you sign in to Windows with a Microsoft account you can:
• Download apps from Windows Store.
• Get youronlineco ntent i n Microsoft a p ps automatica lly.
as online to make PCs I
ak and feel the same
eludes settings like browser
Privacy statement
(^Sign up for \ I address^)
Next
Cancel
If Windows 8 has a connection to the Internet, it will ask for all the required details for
creating such an account, send them to Microsoft to confirm your details, and allow
the newly created account to log on to your computer.
318
Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
® Sign up for a new email address
) u can use your Microsoft account to sign in to Xbox LIVE, Windows Phone, and other Microsoft
hotmail.com v
New password
Re-enter password
United States
As an alternative, by using any web browser, visit https://signup.live.com, and enter all
the details requested. If you use this method, you can create a Microsoft account with-
out creating a Live.com or Hotmail.com email address. You can use your current email
service and associate it with your Microsoft account. However, you can't do this if you
create a Microsoft account by using the Add A User Wizard in Windows 8.
Switching between User Accounts
When you switch between user accounts, you leave the current user account logged on
(with all running applications) and log on to a separate user account. You can switch back
and forth between user accounts whenever you want. The user account from which you
switched remains active with all applications running, and you can switch back to it any time
without having to log off and log on again. This can be useful if you need to work on mul-
tiple accounts at once.
Switching between User Accounts
319
In this exercise, you'll learn how to switch between two user accounts. This is possible only if
you have two or more user accounts defined on your computer.
SET UP Log on using one of the user accounts defined on your computer and open
the Start screen.
1 Click or tap the icon on the top right of the screen representing your user account.
A contextual menu with several options opens.
2
3
Ciprian |S1
Rusen
Change account picture
Lock
Sign out
P
7 Tutorials
Child
Click or tap the user account to which you want to switch.
You are asked to complete login details for the selected user.
Type the password for the selected user account and click or tap the Submit arrow.
You are now logged on to the selected user account.
TIP Depending on how the user account you selected is set up, you'll need to type
one of the login details, such as password, PIN, or picture password, at step 3. For
example, if you have set up a PIN, you will be requested to type the PIN instead of
the password.
320
Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
^^P CLEAN UP When you finish working with this user account, sign out.
Changing the Password for Your User
Account
Every user account except Guest can change its password. Making the change doesn't
require any administrator permissions as long as you do not want to change the password
of a user account other than your own.
If you are using a user account associated with a Microsoft account, the password change
is applied to both your Windows 8-based computer and all Microsoft services that account
uses. If you are using a local user account, the password change applies only to the user
account defined on your computer.
TIP To keep your account safe, it is recommended that you use strong passwords:
passwords that contain a combination of letters, numbers, and special characters (such as
@, #, or &). Ideally, the password should be something that is easy for you to remember but
difficult for anyone else to figure out.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to change the password of a local user account.
^J SET UP Open PC Settings.
1 Click or tap Users.
2 Click or tap Change your password.
The Change Your Password Wizard opens.
Changing the Password for Your User Account 321
PC settings
Personalize
Notifications
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
Your account
R
7 Tutorials
Local Account
You f-dn uie youi email dddreu di d Miuruion accuunl lo iign in Lcj Windows, Yuu'll be dble
to jccc55 flies and pnotoi anywhere, sync settings, and more.
Switch to a Microsoft account
Change your password X
Create a pkluit: password
You need tn enter a password when waking your Pi Sign in as an flrtminiitrritnr To change
U lis, setting.
Other users
sign in as an administrator to r idd u
m a*
|^H Local Account
3 Type your current password and click or tap Next.
322 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
4
5
6
Type the new password in the New Password and Reenter Password fields.
Type a password hint, if you want to use one, in the Password Hint field.
Click or tap Next.
You are informed that the password has been changed successfully.
7 Click or tap Finish.
Changing the Password for Your User Account 323
Q CLEAN UP Close PC Settings.
TIP If you are changing the password for a Microsoft account, the data requested at
steps 3, 4, and 5 is requested in one window instead of in separate windows.
Removing the Password for a User Account
Unlike in earlier versions of Windows, in Windows 8 you cannot remove the password
of a user account if a Microsoft account is associated with it. Having a password is crit-
ical to a Microsoft account and secures it from unauthorized access to your computer
and all Microsoft services you are using. However, you can create local user accounts,
which have no password, or change their existing password to a blank (empty) one.
324 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
Creating a Picture Password for Your User
Account
One of the great features introduced in Windows 8 is the use of picture passwords. This
concept entails using a specific picture on which you draw gestures. These gestures can be
simple taps or clicks, circles, or lines. If your user account is using a Microsoft account with
a complicated password, creating a picture password to be used as a complement can be a
great way to make it easy to log on to your Windows 8-based devices.
Even though this feature is recommended for use on touch-enabled devices such as tablets,
it can be used on a desktop computer by using a mouse.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to create a picture password for your user account. To make
things fast and easy, the exercise will use only taps or clicks.
^3 SET UP To complete this exercise, you need the PictureA.jpg file, found in the
Chapterl2 folder in your practice files. When you have this file available, open PC
Settings.
1 Click or tap Users.
2 Click or tap Create a picture password.
PC settings
Personalize
Notifications
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
LJ r\ i-T-i rt n r j-i i i r»
Your account
■ Ciprian Rusen
riprianru<;en[§)gmflil mm
You can switch to a local account, but your settings won't sync between the PCs you use.
Switch to a local account
More account settings online
Sign-in options
Change your password
Create a picture password y
Changs PIN Remove
Any user who has a password must enter it when waking this PC.
Change
OLher users
i Add a user
Creating a Picture Password for Your User Account 325
The Create A Picture Password Wizard opens.
3 Type your user account password and click or tap OK.
4
You are informed about picture passwords.
Click or tap Choose picture.
The Files browsing window opens.
326 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
Click or tap Files and navigate to where you stored the PictureA.jpg practice file.
Creating a Picture Password for Your User Account 327
~M6S v Pictures
Documents
Pictures
Music
Videos
Desktop
Downloads
Homegroup
Computer
Network
El can,era
IrSI Photos
6 Select PictureA.jpg and click or tap Open.
328
Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
You are asked whether to use the picture as is.
7 Click or tap Use this picture.
You are asked to set up the three gestures that will serve as your picture password.
Click or tap the picture as highlighted in the preceding screenshot, on the head of
each figure, one by one.
Creating a Picture Password for Your User Account 329
You are immediately asked to confirm your gestures.
9 Click or tap the picture again as you did before on the head of each figure, one by
one.
10
You are informed that the picture password has been created successfully.
Click or tap Finish.
330 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
CLEAN UP Close PC Settings.
The picture password is now set and can be used instead of your normal user account pass-
word each time you log on to your computer.
Creating a PIN for Your User Account
To further simplify the way you log on to your computer, especially if you are using a
Microsoft account with a long password, Windows 8 allows the creation of a four-digit PIN
associated with your user account. After you create a PIN, you can use it to log on quickly
to your user account.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to create a PIN for your user account.
Creating a PIN for Your User Account 331
SET UP Open PC Settings.
1 Click or tap Users.
2 Click or tap Create a PIN.
The Create A PIN Wizard opens.
PC settings
Personalize
Notifications
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
u,-,i-,-»,->r:r-^i h-,
Your accounl
I Ciprian Rusen
I ciprmnru5cn Pgmail.com
You (.an swilth to a ta(_al d(.f_ounL but your ieLLings, won't vyrn. between the. PCs, you u^e.
Switch to a local account
More account settings online
Sign-in options
Change your passwoid
Chiinnr- »iff urc p.iMum rd Romovt*
Create a PIN
ifa (jdL.iwu'd muit enter it wln;n waking this PC.
Other users
■ Add a ui,er
Type the password for your user account and click or tap OK.
You are asked to type the four-digit PIN you want to use.
332 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
4 Type the same PIN in the Enter PIN and Confirm PIN fields.
5 Click or tap Finish.
Create a PIN
A PIN is a quick, convenier
it way to !
sign in to tr
lis PC by usini
g a 4-digit code.
Enter PIN
1 ****
^
Q CLEAN UP Close PC Settings.
The PIN you just set can now be used instead of your password to log on to your user
account.
Creating a PIN for Your User Account 333
Changing the Picture Password or the PIN
You can change both your picture password and PIN if you decide to use these fea-
tures. The change process is always started from the Users panel.
PC settings
Personalize
Notifications
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
Your account
I Ciprian Rusen
ciprij nruscnPgmail.com
Yuu (.an s,wit(_h lu a total actum L but yuur setlinys wun'L vynt between Ihe PCi you uie.
SwiLch lu a local account
More account settings, online
Any usei who has a uasMYOfd muil enter il wIwjm waking this. PC.
Other users
i Add a um
Windows 8 first asks you to type the current password associated with the user
account and then allows you to change the picture password and the PIN. From here
on, the procedures for changing them are the same as for creating them.
Changing a User Account Picture
As with any earlier version of Windows, you can change the picture for your user account at
any time. The procedure involved is not complicated.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to change a user account picture.
SET UP To complete this exercise, you need the PictureB.jpg file in the Chapterl2
folder in your practice files. When this file is available, open the Start screen.
334 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
1
2
Click or tap the icon representing your user account on the top right of the screen.
A contextual menu with several options opens.
Click or tap Change account picture.
The Personalize section in PC Settings opens.
Change account picture
Lock
Sign out
| Ciprian Rusen
Signed in
WJS child
3 Click or tap Browse.
The Files browsing window opens.
PC settings
Users
Notifications
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
Lock screen Sta rt screen Ac co u nt p ictu re
Create an account picture
L2J
4 Click or tap Files and navigate to where you stored the PictureB.jpg practice file.
Changing a User Account Picture 335
5 Select PictureB.jpg and click or tap Choose image.
You return to PC Settings.
Q CLEAN UP Close PC Settings.
Your user account picture has been changed.
336 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
Changing a User Account Name
In Windows 8, changing the name of a user account is possible only for local accounts. User
account names associated with a Microsoft account cannot change without administrator
permissions. It is best to make the change from another user account with administrator
permissions.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to change the name of a local user account.
SET UP Log on with a user account that has administrator permissions. In Control
Panel, open the User Accounts window by clicking User Accounts, Family Safety, and then
User Accounts.
1
Click or tap Manage another account.
A list of all the existing user accounts opens.
% Manage Accounts
T T % M User Account* ► Manage Accounts.
v & Search Control Panel
f
Choose the user you would like to change
^^*\ Ciprian Rusen
■ ■
7 Tutorials
m ciprianrusen©gmail,com
CjV Administrator
Password protected
Local Account
Password protected
SHE Child
n
Guest
£«■ Local Account
r"^
.4s Jmmk P a : : w c rd p rctected
i i
Add a new user in PC settings
(§£' Set up Family Safety
2
Click or tap the user account whose name you want changed.
The Change An Account window opens.
Changing a User Account Name 337
Click or tap Change the account name.
The Rename Account window opens.
:£, Change an Account
t f $fa « User Accounts ► Manage Accounts. ► Change an Account
Make changes to 7 Tutorials's account
v C Search Control Panel p
C h a n g e th e p a ssvvc rcf
Set up Family Safety
Changethe account type
Delete the account
Manage another account
7 Tutorials
Local Account
Password protected
4 Type the new name you want to use for that user account.
5 Click or tap Change Name.
You return to the Change An Account window.
338
Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
3^ « Change an Account ► Rename Account
Rename Account
Type a new account name for 7 Tutorial's account
7 Tutorials
Local Account
Password protected
My 7 Tutorials
^3 CLEAN UP Close the Change An Account window.
The name of the selected user account is now changed.
Changing a User Account Type
Every user except Guest can change his or her user account type. However, making the
change requires administrator permissions. If you are trying to change the type for a user
account with standard permissions, you need to know the password of the Administrator
account or have someone log on with the Administrator account and change the account
type.
You must have at least one user account with administrator permissions on your
Windows 8-based computer. If you have only one such user account, you can't change its
type to standard user. However, you can change any number of standard user accounts to
Administrator.
Changing a User Account Type
339
In this exercise, you'll learn how to change the type of a user account from standard to
Administrator.
^3 SET UP Log on with a user account that has administrator permissions. In Control
Panel, open User Accounts.
1 Click or tap Manage another account.
A list of all the existing user accounts opens.
2
©
Manage Accounts
T T % M User Accounts ► Manage Accounts
Choose the user you would like to change
v & Search Control Panel
Ciprian Rusen
ciprianrusen©grnail,com
Administrator
Password protected
Child
Local Account
Password protected
My 7 Tutorials
Local Account
Password protected
R
Guest
Guest account is off
Add a new user in PC settings
!§! Set up Family Safety
Click or tap the user account whose type you want to change.
The Change An Account window opens.
Click or tap Change the account type.
The Change Account Type window opens.
340
Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
% Change an Account
S& « User Accounts. ► Manage Accounts ► Change an Account
v ^ Search Control Panel
Make changes to My 7 Tutorials's account
Changethe account name
Changethe password
Delete the a
Manage another account
My 7 Tutorials
Local Account
Password protected
4 Select the new account type you want to use, in this case, Administrator.
5 Click or tap Change Account Type.
You return to the Change An Account window.
Changing a User Account Type 341
3& Change Account Type
V*0 T T -$L M Change an Account ► Change Account Type v (J Search Control Panel
Choose a new account type for My 7 Tutorials
I My 7 Tutorials
■ Local Account
^*^W Password protected
O Standard
Standard accounts can use most software and change system settings that don't affect other users or the
security of this PC.
(§) Administrator
Administrators have complete control over the PC. They can change any settings and access all of thefiles
and programs stored on the PC.
Why is a standard account recommended?
Change Account Type | Cancel
^3 CLEAN UP Close the Change An Account window.
The type of the selected user account is now changed.
Deleting a User Account
Deleting user accounts is a task that administrators only can do. When an account is
deleted, all the settings and files belonging to that user account are also deleted. This activ-
ity is best done by logging on to another user account and making the deletion from there.
Make sure that the user account you are about to delete is not logged on when executing
the deletion.
Before you delete a user account, make sure you back up all the important files created in
its user files and folders so they can be used later.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to delete a user account.
342 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
SET UP Log on with a user account that has administrator permissions. In Control
Panel, open the User Accounts window.
1 Click or tap Manage another account.
A list of all the existing user accounts opens.
Manage Accounts
T T % M User Accounts ► Manage Accounts.
Choose the user you would like to change
v Ci Search Control Panel
Ciprian Rusen
ciprianrusen©gmail,com
Administrator
Password protected
Child
Local Account
Password protected
My 7 Tutorials
Local Account
Password protected
R
Guest
Guest account is off
Add a new user in PC settings
§ Setup Family Safety
2
Click or tap the user account you want to delete.
The Change An Account window opens.
Click or tap the Delete the account link.
The Delete Account window opens.
Deleting a User Account 343
3& Change an Account
S& « User Accounts. ► Manage Accounts ► Change an Account
v ^ Search Control Panel
Make changes to My 7 Tutorials's account
Changethe account name
Changethe password
Set up Family Safety
rh 3> -,r.^4-u^ 31-i-pii n t typ e
Delete the account
Manage another account
My 7 Tutorials
Local Account
Password protected
4 Click or tap Delete Files.
You are asked to confirm the deletion.
344
Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
3& Delete Account
S& « User Accounts. ► Manage Accounts ► Delete Account
* 6
Search Control Panel
Do you want to keep My 7 Tutorial's files?
Before you delete My 7 Tutorial's account, Windows can automatically save the contents of My 7 Tutorial's
desktop and Documents,. Favorites, Music, Pictures and Videos folders to a new folder called 'My 7 Tutorials'
on your desktop, However, Windows cannot save My 7 Tutorial's e-mail messages and other settings,
Keep Files
5 Click or tap Delete Account.
You return to the Manage Accounts window.
Deleting a User Account 345
Confirm Deletion
(*■) T T fl& w Manage Accounts ► Delete Account ► Confirm Deletion v ^ Search Control Panel
Are you sure you want to delete My 7 Tutorials's account?
Windows will delete all of My 7 Tutorials's files, and then delete My 7 Tutorials's account.
^
Delete Account
%J CLEAN UP Close the Manage Accounts window.
The selected user account is now deleted.
TIP If you decide to keep the user's files, they will be saved in a folder on the Desktop of
the user account from which you are making the deletion. The folder name will be the
name of the deleted user account.
346 Chapter 12 Allowing Others to Use the Computer
Key Points
If more than one person is using a computer, it is best to create a separate user
account for each person.
Windows 8 allows you to use Microsoft accounts as user accounts on your device.
With a Microsoft account, you can use all the features included in Windows 8, includ-
ing the Windows Store.
Any user can create picture passwords or PINs for quicker logon procedures.
To create a user account, change user account names or types, and delete user
accounts, you need administrator permissions.
The deletion of a user account is best done from another user account and only after
you have backed up all the important files created by that user.
Key Points 347
Find
Find the Advanced Sharing Settings window
that contains all your network-sharing
settings, page 353
Adv anced sharing settings |
T T *% w Network and Sharing Center ► Advanced sharing netting:
Change sharing options for different network profiles
Windows creates a separate network profile for each network you use. You ca
each profile.
Private (current profile]
Network discovery
When network discovery is on, this computer can see other network
visible to other network computers.
(••Turn on network discovery
0Turn on automatic setup of network connected devices
0Turn off network discovery
Use
Use the Sharing Wizard for quick file sharing,
page 374
Choose people to share with
Type a name and then click Add, or clickthe arrow to find someone.
^Administrators
*. Ciprian Rusen (ciprianrusen©gmail,corrO
Pern
Own
Reac
Create
Create a homegroup to easily share libraries,
folders, and devices, page 359
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Home 1
Create a hi
With a hun
You cart al;
Your home
you share.
Share
Share all printers and devices with one
setting, page 383
Pictures
Shared
1
Media devices
Allow devices such as TVs and game consoles to play my shared content
Sharing Files and Folders
with My Network
13
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO:
Find the network sharing settings.
Set up a homegroup.
Join other computers and devices to the homegroup.
Share files and folders.
Share printers.
Stop sharing files, folders, or printers.
Enable the Sharing Wizard.
In Windows 8, Microsoft continued its efforts to simplify the network sharing experience.
Features such as HomeGroup have been further improved, and network sharing settings
and wizards have been simplified so that they require a smaller number of steps.
In this chapter, you'll learn about the default network sharing settings and how they affect
your network sharing experience. You'll learn everything about the HomeGroup feature:
how to create one, join other computers to it, find and change the current password, and
leave an existing homegroup. Finally, you'll learn about sharing your libraries, folders, and
devices such as printers, including how to stop sharing them when necessary.
PRACTICE FILES You do not need any practice files to complete the exercises in this chapter.
For more information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the
beginning of this book.
349
Understanding the Default Network Sharing
Settings
Windows 8 organizes your network sharing settings in the Advanced Sharing Settings win-
dow in the the Network And Sharing Center, covered in detail in Chapter 11, "Connecting to
a Network and the Internet."
Control Panel Home
Network and Sharing Center
1 s ^ « Network and Internet ► Network and Sharing Center v (J Search Control Panel
View your basic network information and set up connections
View your active networks
See also
HomeGroup
Internet Options
Windows Firewall
C1pr1an
Private network
Changeyour networking settings
Access type: Internet
HomeGroup: Joined
Connections: ,;;^ Wi-Fi (C1pr1an)
*4£i Set up a new connection or network
Set up a broadband, dial-up, or VPN connection; or set up a router or access point.
I J*1 Troubleshcct problems
Diagnose and repair network problems, or get troubleshooting information.
To access it, just click or tap the Change Advanced Sharing Settings link in the left sidebar of
the Network And Sharing Center.
350
Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
Advanced sharing settings
Search Control Panel
t f *$ « Network and Sharing Center ► Advanced sharing settings v
Change sharing options for different network profiles
Windows creates a separate network profile for each network you use, You can choose specific options for
each profile,
Private (current profile]
Network discovery
When network discovery is on, this computer can see other network computers and devices and is
visible to other network computers.
(•i'Turn on network discovery
Turn on automatic setup of network connected devices,
OTum off network discovery
File and printer sharing
When file and printer sharing is on, files and printers that you have shared from this computer can
be accessed by people on the network,
■:•:■ Turn on file and printer sharing
QTurn off file and printer sharing
HomeGroup connections
Typically, Windows manages the connectionsto other homegroup computers. But if you have the
same user accounts and passwords on all of your computers, you can have HomeGroup use your
account instead.
(•J Allow Windows to manage homegroup connections (recommended]
O Use user accounts and passwords to connect to other computers
r Save changes
In Windows 8, the network sharing settings are split by network profile. Each network pro-
file has different settings, and a combination of settings is applied to all networks to which
you connect. The profile assigned to your current network connection is indicated by the
Current Profile statement beside the name of one of the two profiles. If you want to access
the settings for only one of the network locations, use the arrows to the right of each pro-
file. Clicking or tapping the arrow once minimizes the list of settings for that network loca-
tion. Clicking or tapping it again maximizes the list.
Understanding the Default Network Sharing Settings 351
©
The profile assigned to the
active network connection
▼ f «$ « is
twork and Sharing Center ► Advanced sharing netting:
Change
Minimize/Maximize
list of settings
need sharing settings
v ^ Search Control P
ha ring options for different network profiles
reates a separate network profile for each network you use. You can choose specific options, for
Guest or Public
All Networks
©
©
©
| Cancel
TIP To learn more about network profiles and assigning them to a network connection, see
the "Setting the Network Profile" section in Chapter 11.
The Private profile has, by default, the following settings.
■ NETWORK DISCOVERY IS TURNED ON When this setting is applied, Windows 8
can search for other devices on the network to which it is connected, and it allows
other computers and devices on the same network to find your Windows 8-based
computer or device.
■ FILE AND PRINTER SHARING IS TURNED ON When this setting is applied, you can
share content and printers with other computers and devices on your network.
■ WINDOWS IS ALLOWED TO MANAGE HOMEGROUP CONNECTIONS After you
join or create a homegroup, Windows 8 automatically manages homegroup connec-
tions. If you choose the other available option, you must manually type a user name
and password when you connect to other computers.
352 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
The default settings for the Private profile are very effective and do not need changing
unless you don't want to or don't need to use the available network sharing features on the
network to which you are connected. If this is the case, it is best to switch the network pro-
file to Guest or Public instead of changing the default settings of the Private profile.
©
Advanced sharing settings
T T *<8p « Network and Sharing Center ► Advanced sharing settings v O Search Control Panel
Change sharing options for different network profiles
Windows creates a separate network profile for each network you use. You can choose specific options for
each profile.
Private (current profile]
Guest or Public
©
©
Network discovery
When network discovery is on, this computer can see other network computers and devices and is
visible to other network computers,
■:*:'Turn on network discovery
( )Turn off network discovery
File and printer sharing
When file and printer sharing is on, files and printers that you have shared from this computer can
be accessed by people on the network.
■:•:■ Turn on file and printer sharing
QTurn off file and printer sharing
©
Cancel
The Guest or Public profile has, by default, the following settings.
■ NETWORK DISCOVERY IS TURNED OFF When this setting is applied, other com-
puters and devices on the network can't discover your Windows 8-based computer or
device unless they know its direct network address.
■ FILE AND PRINTER SHARING IS TURNED OFF When this setting is applied, all
network sharing features are disabled and can't be used on this network. If your
computer is accessed by others, they cannot view any files, folders, or devices being
shared.
These default settings are great when connecting to networks you don't trust and with
which you do not want to share any folders, libraries, or devices.
Understanding the Default Network Sharing Settings 353
Advanced sharing settings
T *4 « Network and Sharing Center ► Advanced sharing settings
All Networks
Public folder sharing
Search Control Panel
When Public folder sharing is on, people on the network, including homegroup members, can
access files in the Public folders.
(•jTurn on sharing so anyone with network access can read and write files in the Public folders
OTurn off Public folder sharing (people logged on to this computer can still access these
~ folders]
Media streaming
When media streaming is on, people and devices on the network can access pictures, music, and
videos on this computer. This computer can also find media on the network.
Cheese media streaming options...
File sharing connections
Windows uses 123-bit encryption to help protect file sharing connections. Some devices don't
support 123-bit encryption and must use 40- or 55-bit encryption.
ifij Use 128-bit encryption to help protect file sharing connections (recommended]
O Enable file sharing for devices that use 40- or 56-bit encryption
Password protected sharing
When password protected sharing is on, only people who have a user account and password on this
computer can access shared files, printers attached to this computer, and the Public folders. To give
other people access, you must turn off password protected sharing.
? Save changes
Last, a combination of settings is applied to all network connections. They are found in the
All Networks section and can be customized. The available settings are the following.
■ PUBLIC FOLDER SHARING When this setting is turned on, the C:\Users\Public\
folder is shared with all the computers and devices on the network. This folder con-
tains the following subfolders: Public Documents, Public Downloads, Public Music,
Public Pictures, and Public Videos. Other folders are also contained here, but they
are not displayed to users. Users on the same computer or from other computers
and devices can read the contents of the Public folder and write files inside it and its
subfolders. When this setting is turned off, this folder is not shared with your network.
Turning off Public folder sharing is recommended unless using this folder for sharing
is useful to you. Depending on your personal preference, you might choose to share
files and folders directly with others instead of copying them to the Public folder.
■ MEDIA STREAMING With this setting, you can stream multimedia files (pictures,
video, and music) by using Windows Media Player. When this setting is turned on,
you can stream your media with the network and the Internet. When it's turned off,
no media streaming is possible by using Windows Media Player. You should only turn
on this feature if you plan to use it.
354 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
■ FILE SHARING CONNECTIONS This setting determines the type of encryption used
for file sharing connections. By default, it's set to 128-bit encryption. You can also set
it to the less secure 40-bit or 56-bit encryption. However, it is best to leave this set at
128-bit encryption unless you have issues with older devices or computers that can-
not properly access your shared files and folders.
■ PASSWORD PROTECTED SHARING With this setting, people can only access your
shared files and folders if they have a user account and password set on your com-
puter. If they don't have these details, they cannot connect to your shared folders and
devices unless the shared folders and devices are shared with everyone. Turning off
this feature is useful only when connecting to trusted home or work networks with
diverse operating systems that have trouble connecting to your Windows 8 shared
folders and devices. However, this setting should be used only as a last resort.
If you make any changes to the default network sharing settings, don't forget to press the
Save Changes button so that they are applied. Also, keep in mind that making changes to
these settings requires administrator permissions. User accounts with no administrator per-
missions cannot modify them in any way.
Setting Up a Homegroup
HomeGroup is a network feature introduced first in Windows 7 and further improved in
Windows 8. It aims to simplify the process of sharing content and devices on trusted small
networks. In earlier versions of Windows, sharing content was a tedious and sometimes
painful process.
By using the HomeGroup feature, you can access all shared files and devices in your net-
work with very few clicks and without typing user names and passwords. The homegroup
manages all security and authentication for you and makes sure that computers and devices
outside the homegroup cannot access what you are sharing. This feature is designed pri-
marily for computers and devices connected to a small home or work network.
Each time you connect the computer to a new network, Windows 8 asks you to set network
sharing. If you turn on sharing and connect to devices, you are in a trusted and private
network of computers and devices. In this scenario, Windows 8 enables you to use the
HomeGroup feature. If you do not turn on sharing, this feature will not be available.
Setting Up a Homegroup 355
® Networks
Clprlan -alii
Do you want to turn on sharing
between PCs and connect to devices
on this network?
No, don't turn on sharing or
connect to devices
For networks in public places
Yes, turn on sharing and connect to
devices
For home or work networks
TIP To learn more about network profiles and assigning them to a network connection, see
the "Changing the Network Profile of a Network" section in Chapter 11.
Even though this feature is useful and easy to use, it has an important limitation: It is avail-
able only for computers and devices running Windows 7 and Windows 8. Only these
operating systems can join a homegroup and take advantage of it without any special
configuration.
After you have connected to your network and customized the network sharing settings,
you can create the homegroup for your network computers to join and exchange libraries,
files, folders, and devices.
You can create the homegroup from either Control Panel or PC Settings. However, the cre-
ation process is slightly faster when done from PC Settings.
356 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
HomeGroup
Create a homegroup
Willi a hornei|iuup yju L-an iliaie libiaiies antl devkei. v.'ilh uLliei fjeuple on lliis; iielwuik.
You can also stream media to devices.
Your MuineijruuiJ is, piuletted willi a password, and you'll always be able Lu chouse what
you share.
Windows Updale
When you create a homegroup, Windows automatically generates a random and secure
password that will be used by all computers and devices to join the homegroup and share
items among them. You can't set this password when creating the homegroup, but you can
change it after you create the homegroup.
Membership
If someone else wants to join your homegroup, give them this password:
e3w5Pe1bl8
If you leave the homegroup, you won't be able to get to shared libraries or devices.
Leave
After the homegroup is created, you can select from a standard list of items to share with
others. A limited list of libraries is available for sharing: Documents, Music, Pictures, and
Videos. You can also share installed printers and devices (scanners, multifunctional printers,
and so on) and allow devices such as TVs and game consoles to play the content you have
shared with the homegroup.
Setting Up a Homegroup 357
Libraries and devices
When you share content other homegroup members can see it but only you can change ft.
Documents
Not shared
Music
Not shared
Pictures
Not shared
Videos
Not shared
Printers and devices
Not shared I
Media devices
Allow all devices on the network such as TVs and game consoles to play my shared content
TIP To learn more about libraries in Windows 8, read the "Understanding Files, Folders, and
Libraries" section in Chapter 4, "Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders."
Sharing other libraries, folders, or devices can be set up after you create the homegroup.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to create a homegroup.
358 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
QJ) SET UP Open PC Settings.
1 Click or tap HomeGroup at the bottom of the PC Settings window.
TROUBLESHOOTING If, when you click the HomeGroup link, you do not see a
window similar to the one shown here, but something with the settings of an existing
homegroup, the computer is already part of a homegroup. In this scenario, you either
keep the computer as part of that homegroup or leave that homegroup and create
a new one. To learn how to leave a homegroup, read the "Leaving a Homegroup"
section later in this chapter.
2 Click or tap Create.
Windows 8 takes a few seconds to create the homegroup.
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
HomeGroup
Create a homegroup
Willi d tiomegiuup you can stidie libidos diiJ devices with oLhei people on Lhii> network.
You can also stream media to devices.
Your huineojouu is uiulected willi a pdssword, dud you'll alwdy^ be dble Lu chouse what
you share.
Windows Update
Set the permissions to Shared by changing the positions of the switches for the items
you want shared with the homegroup.
Setting Up a Homegroup 359
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
Windows Update
Libraries and devices
When you ihdie cuntent, ulhei hunmyiuup i Member sh
n see it, but only yuu can change il_
DoLuinertLi
Not shared
V'U: C
Not shared
■: .•■.-•
Not shared
Not shared
Printers and devices,
Not shared |
Media devices
Allow all devices on the network such as TVs and game consoles to play my shared content
Membership
4 Scroll down to the Membership section to learn the password generated for your
homegroup.
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
Windows Update
"" :::■'■:■:
Shaied
Videus
Shared
-ir.ii s-rj ;.e. :?:
Not shared |
Media devices
Allow all devices on the network such as TVs and game consoles to play my shared content
Off ^Sl
Membership
>e able Lu yef Lu shaied libtaritfi ur devices.
5 Write down the password.
Q CLEAN UP Close PC Settings
360 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
The homegroup is now created, and other computers and devices with Windows 7 or
Windows 8 can join it by using the same password.
Joining a Homegroup
After the homegroup is created, you can join others so that you can exchange files, folders,
and devices. Any computer on the network can be part of a homegroup, but it can be in
only one homegroup at a time.
When you open the HomeGroup section in PC Settings, Windows 8 tells you whether it
detects a homegroup created by another computer. If it does, it mentions the name of the
user account and the computer that created the homegroup.
HomeGroup
A homegroup is available
Ciprian on CIPRIAN-PC has created a homegroup. Join the homegroup to share files and
devices with other people on this network.
Enter homegroup password
Join
When joining a homegroup, you are asked to type the password that was generated during
its creation. If you remember the password from the previous section, use that one. If not,
ask the person who created the homegroup for the password.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to join a computer running Windows 8 to a previously cre-
ated homegroup.
SET UP Open PC Settings.
1 Click or tap HomeGroup at the bottom of the PC Settings window.
2 Type the homegroup password and click or tap Join.
Windows 8 takes a few seconds to join you to the homegroup.
Joining a Homegroup 361
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
HomeGroup
A homegroup is available
■Ciprian on CIPRIAN-PC has created a homeqroup. Join the homeqroup to share files and
Windows Update
3 Set the permissions to Shared for the items you want shared with the homegroup.
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
Libraries and devices
When ynu share rnntenT, nther homegroup mem hers ran see ii, bur only you ran change
iL
LloiiLiments
Pictures
Shared
Videos
Shaied
Printers anrt rtevfre?;
Not shared
Media devices
Allow devices such as TVs and qan? cgosc es to play my shared content
CLEAN UP Close PC Settings. Repeat this procedure for all the computers and devices
on your network that you want in the homegroup.
The computer is now part of the homegroup and has shared the items you selected.
362 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
Finding Your Homegroup Password
If you want to add another computer or device to the homegroup and you forgot the pass-
word, you can access it easily on the computers that are part of the homegroup.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to find the password for your homegroup so that you can
share it with the people who need to know it.
SET UP Open PC Settings.
1 Click or tap the HomeGroup section at the bottom of the PC Settings window.
2 Scroll down to the Membership section where the homegroup password is displayed.
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
Windows Update
"' ::..■■:■:
Shuied
Videus
Printers and devices
Mat shared |
Media devices
Allow all devices on the network such as TVs and game consoles to play my shared content
Off |
Membership
you won 1 ' be able lt> yel Lo shdied li
[jritfs ur device's.
3 Write down the password.
Q CLEAN UP Close PC Settings.
Finding Your Homegroup Password
363
Changing the Password of a Homegroup
You can change the password of a homegroup from any computer that joined it, but only
from Control Panel, not from PC Settings. If you change the password after other comput-
ers and devices have joined the homegroup, the password change will disconnect the other
computers and devices. After the password is changed, all the other computers and devices
must rejoin the homegroup by using the new password.
When changing the password, Windows generates a new random and secure password for
you, but you can type a password of your own. The only condition is that the password is at
least eight characters long; otherwise, Windows won't accept it as a valid password.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to change the password of an existing homegroup to one
you choose.
SET UP Start a computer that is part of the homegroup and then open the Network
And Sharing Center.
1 Click or tap the HomeGroup link.
The HomeGroup window opens.
2 Click or tap Change the password.
You are asked to confirm that you want to change the password.
364 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
*$
Horn eG roup
*} T f *% ^ Control Panel ► Network and Internet ► HomeGroup
Change homegroup settings
Libraries and devices you're sharing from this computer
g Pictures g Videos
,Jj Music Q Documents
Changewh at you're sharing with the homegroup
Allow all devices on this network such as TVs and game consoles to play my shared content
Other homegroup actions
!£§) Change the password
Leave"
Change advanced sharing settings...
Start the HomeGroup trcubleshcoter
Click or tap Change the password.
Windows generates a new random password.
*
G? Change Your Homegroup Password
Changing the homegroup password will disconnect everyone
_!_ Make sure all homegroup computers are on and are not asleep or hibernating when you
changethe password. After you changethe password, immediately go to each homegroup
computer and type the new password.
•> Change the password
■> Don't changethe password
Changing the Password of a Homegroup
365
4
5
Type a new password that is at least eight characters long in the field where the ran-
dom password is displayed.
Click or tap Next.
Windows 8 makes the necessary changes.
@ # Change Your Homegroup Password
Type a new password for your homegroup
Type your own password or use this one:
mynewpassworq
**
Next | Cancel |
6 Click or tap Finish.
Your homegroup password was successfully changed
Before you can access files and printers located on other computers, add those computers to your
homegroup. You'll need thefollowing password.
Write down this password:
mynewpas sword
Print password and instructions
If you ever forget your homegroup password, you can view or change it by opening HorneGroup in
Control Panel.
366 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
CLEAN UP Close the HomeGroup window. Rejoin all computers and devices that were
disconnected due to the password change.
The password for the homegroup is now changed.
Accessing Homegroup Computers and
Devices
After the homegroup is created and all computers and devices are joined, accessing their
shared content is simple. All it takes is a few clicks or taps. You no longer need to type any
user names and passwords to access what is being shared.
Just open File Explorer and click or tap the homegroup. You'll see a list of computers and
user accounts that are part of the homegroup and running at that moment. Double-click or
tap any of the shared folders and libraries to access their content.
1=1 ■— ■ Q9 Copy path >^ ^* *
Copy Paste _ Move Copy Delete Rename New
Clipboard Organize
T T Fn ► Homegroup ► Ciprian
New item T
■ f^ Easy access *
IJOpen - EH Select all
Properties X
* Favorites
r Desktop
^ Downloads.
£ri Recent places.
4& Sky Drive
J 'j^ Libraries
l> y| Documents.
Music
■@ Pictures
B videos
A i/fy Homegroup
l>P Ciprian
■ E Ciprian Rusen
> |5) Computer
t> *p Network
CIPRIAN-PC (4)
I Documents
Library
Pictures
Library
v 6
0Edit oSselect none
^i History ^ Invert selection
Open Select
Search Ciprian p
Music
Library
i
Videos
Library
Accessing Homegroup Computers and Devices 367
TIP By default, libraries and folders are shared with the other homegroup computers as
Read Only. Therefore, you can access them or copy their content to your computer, but you
can't delete them or change them unless the permissions are changed to Read/Write.
Leaving a Homegroup
Leaving a homegroup is as easy as joining one. If you leave a homegroup, you stop sharing
files, folders, and devices with other members of the group, and you won't be able to access
what is shared as part of that homegroup. You can create another homegroup or join the
existing one again at any time.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to leave a homegroup to which your computer is joined.
SET UP Open PC Settings.
1 Click or tap the HomeGroup section at the bottom of the PC Settings window.
2 Scroll down to the Membership section.
3 Click or tap Leave.
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
Windows Update
- :
Shaied
Printers anri rtevtre
Not shared
Media devices
Allow devices such as TVs and qame consoles to play my shared content
On ^SM
Membership
It someone else wants to pin your homeqraup, qive them this password:
niynewpawwoid
Ifyuulieave Ihe huineyruup, yuu wun'l be able lu yet Lu stiaied libraries ui devices.
368
Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
Q CLEAN UP Close PC Settings.
Your computer is no longer part of the homegroup.
Using the Sharing Wizard to Share with the
Homegroup
If you have set up a homegroup and you want to share something with other computers
that have joined it, the Sharing Wizard makes the procedure simple. The sharing options are
in the Share tab of File Explorer.
nfy Homegroup (view and edit) -
_■ Stop Advanced
sharing security
For any library or folder you select for sharing, you have the following options.
■ HOMEGROUP (VIEW) This option shares the selected item with the homegroup and
gives Read-Only permissions to all computers and devices in the homegroup. The
item will be shared only when you are connected to the homegroup, and others will
be able to view and read the shared item but not to modify it or delete it.
■ HOMEGROUP (VIEW AND EDIT) This shares the item with others in your home-
group and gives full permissions to modify it or delete it. The item will not be shared
when you disconnect from the homegroup or connect to another network.
■ USER ACCOUNTS NAMES You will see other user accounts you defined in Windows
8 in the list. If you select a user account name, you will share the item (with Read-
only permissions) with that user account.
■ SPECIFIC PEOPLE With this option, you can share the selected item with whomever
you want, including with computers that are not part of the homegroup or spe-
cific user accounts. This option is described in more detail in the next section of this
chapter.
Using the Sharing Wizard to Share with the Homegroup 369
In this exercise, you'll learn how to use the Sharing Wizard to share a folder with the
homegroup.
SET UP Open File Explorer and browse to the folder you want to share. Maximize the
ribbon, if it is minimized, with a double-click or double-tap.
1
2
Select the folder without opening it.
Click or tap the Share tab.
The list of sharing options opens.
Click or tap Homegroup (view) in the Share with section.
The File Sharing window opens.
® © T T *- * Computer ► Everything [F:] ► Downloads.
Name
J ,-v' Favorites
r Desktop
Q Downloads
-' Recent places
4& Sky Drive
^ ^ Libraries
i> [j) Documents
i> J} Music
»S Pictures
> H Videos
J #4 Homegroup
■ f^ Ciprian
■ C Ciprian Rusen
l> 0*P Computer
*p Network
|. Benchmarking
B o ota b I e_U SB_D ri ve_C reato r_To o I
Dropbox
. fifa12_demo_install_eu
HP
Microsoft Office 201 3 Consumer Preview
ProcessExplorer
SetupSrnartFilelcons
Start Shortcut
testing
Vodafone
|, WinUSB Maker
7z920-x64.msi
tq 12-4_mobility_vista_win7_64_dd_ccc.exe
El AdobeAIRIns.taller.exe
I | B o ota b I e_U SB_D ri ve_C reato r_To o I , ra r
tq catalyst_mobility_64-bit_util.exe
j^i ccsetup317.exe
ffi cdbxp_setup_4,4,0,2905,exe
Date modified
7/25/2012 12:07 PM
7/20/2012 10: 1SPM
8/5/20129:46 PM
6/11/20127:21 PM
7/17/20123:40 PM
7/21/20122:21 PM
7/21/20124:13 PM
3/15/2012 11:29 AM
3/15/2012 1243 PM
7/17/2012 3:43 PM
3/23/2012 5:11 PM
7/20/2012 10:27 PM
3/20/20127:40 PM
5/26/2012 10:35 PM
1/10/2012 3:27 AM
7/20/2012 10:13 PM
5/26/2012 10:34PM
4/19/20129:47 PM
1/10/2012 3:27 AM
Search Downloads
Type S
Filefolder
File folder
Filefolder
Filefolder
Filefolder
Filefolder
Filefolder
Filefolder
Filefolder
Filefolder
Filefolder
Filefolder
Windows. Installer ...
Application
Application
RARFile
Application
Application
Application
a
1,345 KB
156,395 KB
14,306 KB
302 KB
1,147 KB
3,561 KB
5,132 KB
4 Click or tap Yes, share the items.
370
Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
& File Sharing
Do you want to share the selected items?
To share these items, Windows requires your permission. If you click No, selected items won't be shared.
® Yes, share the items.
H> No, don't share the items.
IMPORTANT Depending on what you have shared, you might not see the File Sharing window.
In that case, you won't have to go through step 4, and the selected folder will be shared with the
homegroup without additional confirmation.
CLEAN UP Repeat the procedure for all the items you want to share. When you have
finished, close File Explorer.
The selected folder is now shared with the homegroup.
Using the Sharing Wizard to Share with
Specific People
If you have computers that are not running Windows 8 or Windows 7, you can use the
Sharing Wizard to share libraries and folders with them without using the homegroup.
However, the procedure takes slightly longer than sharing items with the homegroup.
During the sharing procedure, a drop-down menu appears that shows all the user accounts
defined on your computer, the homegroup you have joined, and a user account called
Using the Sharing Wizard to Share with Specific People 371
Everyone. The homegroup user account represents all the computers from your home-
group, whereas Everyone is a generic user account; this can be any user on the list. If you
want to share something with computers that have different operating systems installed, it
is best to share items by using the Everyone user account. The other operating systems will
have an easier time accessing what you have shared.
Choose people to sha re with
Type a name and then click Add, or click the arrow to find someone.
Child
Ciprian Rusen (ciprianru5en@gmail.c0m)
5eventutorial5@live.com (seventutorials@live.com)
Everyone
Homegroup
By default, all the user accounts with which you choose to share are granted Read permis-
sions to the shared item. If you want to change that, click the Permission Level assigned. A
list appears showing the available permission levels.
& File Sharinc
Choose people to share with
Type a name and then click Add, or click the arrow to find someone.
I'm having trouble sharing
vj Add
Name
Permission Level
^ Administrators
' Ciprian Rusen (ciprianrusen@gmail,com]
Owner
Read/Write ▼
| ^.Everyone
Read ▼
V Read
Read/Write
Remove
In this exercise, you'll learn how to use the Sharing Wizard to share a folder with everyone
and assign Read/Write permissions.
372 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
SET UP Open File Explorer and browse to the folder you want to share. Maximize the
ribbon, if it is minimized, with a double-click or double-tap.
1 Select the folder without opening it.
2
3
4
©
| Child
Send Share with
T t q ► Computer ► Everything [F:]
Stop
sharing
.■4 Favorites
C_ Desktop
$, Downloads
Jt] Recent places
A Sky Drive
9 Libraries
_£| Documents
J^ Music
Q Pictures
H Videos
*J Homegroup
fq Ciprian
&} Ciprian Rusen
;*" Computer
^ Network
Name
6 Search Everything (F:) P
Type Size
bg Ciprian
7/21/2012 2:22 PM F
lefolder
Diablo III
7/1 3/2012 6:13 PM F
lefolder
|jr Downloads
3/22/2012 5:24 PM F
lefolder
For Ralu
9/23/2011 3:35 PM F
lefolder
League of Legends
12/24/2011 3:27 PM F
lefolder
J> My Music
3/2^2012 3:34 PM F
lefolder
£j My Videos
3/5/201210:41 PM F
lefolder
e^Ralu
10/11/2011 4:34 PM F
lefolder
SkyDriveTemp
3/9/201211:11 AM F
lefolder
|€| msdiaBD.dll
treeinfo.wc
12H/2006 10:37 PM Application extens...
4/14/2012 10:37 AM WC File
SS4KB
570 KB
Click or tap the Share tab.
The list of sharing options opens.
Click or tap the arrow pointing down, found at the bottom of the Share with list of
options.
Click or tap Specific people.
*£i Homegroup (view)
#%f Homegroup (view and edit)
gj Child
n Specific people...
The File Sharing Wizard opens.
Using the Sharing Wizard to Share with Specific People 373
Q File Sharing
n |
Choose people to share with
Type a name and then click Add, or click the arrow to find someone
1
v | Add
Name
Permission Level
}& Administrators
Owner
A Ciprian Rusen (ciprianrusen@gmail.com)
Read/Write ▼
'm havina trouble sharinq
| Share |
Cancel
Click or tap the drop-down menu to open the list of user accounts with whom you
can share.
& File Sharing
n |
Choose people to share with
Type a name and then click Add, or click the arrow to find someone.
Add
1 |v
Child
Ciprian Rusen (ciprianrusen@gmail.com]
Everyone
Hcmegroup
Level
T
'm havina trouble sharing
Share Cancel
6 Select the user account named Everyone.
7 Click or tap Add.
The user account is added to the list below the drop-down menu.
374 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
8 Click or tap Permission Level for Everyone and select Read/Write.
i
& File Sharing
Choose people to share with
Type a name and then click Add, or click the arrow to find someone.
Name
^.Administrators
.*. Ciprian Rusen (ciprianrusen@gmail.com)
^Everyone
I'm having trouble sharing
Add
Permission Level
Owner
Read/Write ▼
Read '
0_
Read.AVrite
Share Cancel
Click or tap Share.
You are informed that the selected folder has been shared.
& File Sharing
Your folder is shared.
You can se-maij someone links to these shared items, or copy and paste the links into another program.
1
Individual Items
League of Legends
WWINSPRO-LAPTCPVLeague of Legends
}\ Shared items aren't accessible when your computer is asleep.
Show me all the network shares on this computer.
Using the Sharing Wizard to Share with Specific People 375
IMPORTANT Depending on what you have shared, you might not see the notification that the
folder has been shared. In that case, you won't have to go through step 10.
10 Click or tap Done.
Q CLEAN UP Close File Explorer.
The selected folder is now shared with everyone on your network.
Stop Sharing a Library or Folder
At some point in your networking experience, you might want to stop sharing a folder
or library. The procedure for this is the same as for sharing it. The only difference is
that you need to click or tap the Stop Sharing button on the Share tab.
*« ft n - i
rything (F:) - n KB
1 Home Share
i= ,i j @ Burn toe
"^ & Print
Email Zip
(=]pFax
View
- 6
' sc *^ Homegroup (view) /
*^ Homegroup (view and edit)[h
§j Child V
'3 N
. Stop
v sharing y
/Advanced
/ security
Send
Share with
® - t Q ► C
umputer ► Everything [F:]
v 6
Search Everything [F:]
Type Size
P
"%T Favorites
Name
Date modified
■ Desktop
9 Ciprian
7/21/20122:22 PM
File folder
|Jr Downloads
Diablo III
7/11/201 2 6:13 PM
Filefolder
'M Recent places
Jl Downloads
3/22/201 2 5:24 PM
Filefolder
A SkyDrive
-^ Libraries
J, ForRalu
9/23/2011 3:35 PM
Filefolder
, League of Legends
12/24/2011 3:27 PM
Filefolder
I
Jt My Music
3/2/2012 3:34 PM
Filefolder
[J Documents
3 My Videos
3/5/201210:41 PM
Filefolder
,J> Music
e^Ralu
10/11/2011 4:34 PM
Filefolder
B Pictures
SkyDriveTemp
8/9/201211:11 AM
Filefolder
H Videos
l^, msdia30.dll
12/1/2006 10:37PM
Application extens.,,
334 KB
treeinfo.wc
4/14/2012 10:37 AM
WC File
570 KB
#$ Homegroup
" Ciprian
k.? Ciprian Rusen
; a " Computer
*^ Network
Without any other prompts or windows, the item you selected is no longer shared
with the network to which you are connected.
376 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
Sharing a Printer with Computers on Your
Network
Installed devices such as printers and scanners are accessible in the Devices And Printers
panel; from here, you can configure everything, including sharing devices with the other
computers on your network.
(^) (^) t T f® « Hardware and Sound ► Devices and Printers
Add a device Add a printer
Devices (4)
Arc Touch External Mi c (IDT Independent Dua WIN3PR0-LAPT
Mouse High Definition I Headphones OP
Audio CODEC] (IDT High
Definition Audi,..
A Multimedia Devices (3)
ft$
Ciprian
(ciprian-pc]
Printers (5)
Raluca
(ciprian-pc]l
/
C Search Devices and Printers p
, / ,7
When sharing a printer, its default Share name is its model name. If you want to change it,
you can type a new name during the sharing procedure.
Sharing a Printer with Computers on Your Network 377
i MX410 series Printer WS Properties
General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Hi Maintenance
If you share this printer, only users on your network with a username
and password for this computer can print to it. The printer will not
be available when the computer sleeps. To changethese settings,
use the Network and Sharing Center.
Share this printer
Share name:
@ Render print jobs on client computers
Drivers
If this printer is shared with users running different versions of
Windows, you may want to install additional drivers, so that the
users do not have to find the print driver when they connect to the
shared printer.
Additional Drivers,..
Ad
o
Apply
Help
A shared printer on the network is shared with the entire network, including computers and
devices that are outside the homegroup. If you want to share a printer with only the home-
group, check the instructions in the next section.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to share a printer with your network. The exercise and illus-
trations were created using a Canon Pixma MX410 printer; however, the same steps apply
to almost any model of printer and should not vary much from what you see in this exer-
cise. Please keep in mind that the number of printers and devices you see mentioned in the
screenshots of this exercise will vary depending on your setup.
378 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
SET UP Connect the printer to your computer, start it, and install the latest drivers
for it.
1
2
Open Control Panel.
Click or tap View devices and printers beneath the Hardware and Sound section
title.
The Devices And Printers panel opens.
F
Control Panel
© t f 1^ Control Panel
Adjust your computer's settings
System and Security
Review your computer's status
Save backup copies of your files with File
History
Find and fix problems
Network and Internet
View network status and tasks
Cheese hemegrcup and sharing cptiens
%
&
Programs
Uninstall a program
v C |Search Control Panel fi
View by: Category T
User Accounts and Family Safety
(jgj! Change account type
^ Set up Family Safety for any user
Appearance and Personalization
Changethetheme
Change desktop background
Adjust screen resolution
Clock, Language, and Region
Add a language
Change input methods
Change date, time, or number formats
Ease of Access
Let Windows suggest settings
Optimize visual display
3 Scroll down to the Printers section to view the printers installed on your computer.
Sharing a Printer with Computers on Your Network 379
Arc Touch External Mic (IDT Independent Dua WINSPRO-LAPT
Mouse High Definition I Headphones OP
Audio CODEC] (IDT High
Definition Audi..,
J Multimedia Devices (3)
•"# =#
Ciprian Raluca
(ciprian-pc) (ciprian-pc]
Printers (5)
J
u /
/ .7
,7
4 Right-click or press and hold the printer you want to share.
A menu with contextual options relevant to your printer opens.
Printers (5)
Canon MX410
series Printer WS
7 *J
MicrosoftXPS Send To
Document Writer OneNote2013
Click or tap Printer properties.
The Printer Properties window opens.
380 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
Open
Open in new window
See what's printing
N
Set as default printer
Printing preferences
Printer properties
Start scan
Scan profiles,..
•
•
Scan properties
Create shortcut
Remove device
Troubleshoot
Properties
Click or tap the Sharing tab.
Canon MX410 series Printer WS Properties
General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Hi Maintenance
If you share this printer, only users on your network with a username
and password for this computer can print to it. The printer will not
;<= ■- ■-'*:?.. -= - : -f :: ■- : ■ .■:= ■ : ■=■= :;. To change these settings,
use the I
O Share this printer
Share name:
|V] Render printjobs on client computers
Drivers
If this printer is shared with users running different versions of
Windows, you may want to install additional drivers, so that the
users do not have to find the print driver when they connect to the
shared printer.
Additional Drivers.,.
Apply
Help
7 Select the Share this printer check box.
Sharing a Printer with Computers on Your Network
381
Canon MX410 series Printer WS Properties
General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Hi Maintenance
If you share this printer, only users on your network with a username
and password for this computer can print to it. The printer will not
be availablewhen the computer sleeps. To changethese settings,
use the Network and Sharing Center.
Share this printer
Share name:
@ Render printjobs on client computers
Drivers
If this printer is shared with users running different versions of
Windows, you may want to install additional drivers, so that the
users do not have to find the print driver when they connect to the
shared printer.
Additional Drivers.,.
Apply
Help
8 Click or tap OK.
^J CLEAN UP Close Devices And Printers.
The printer is now shared with the other computers on your network.
Sharing a Printer with Your Homegroup
Sharing a printer with your homegroup is very easy. However, the sharing procedure does
not offer control over the specific devices being shared. With one setting, you can share
with the homegroup all the printers and devices attached to your computer. If you want to
share only one of the devices attached to your computer, it is best to follow the procedure
detailed in the previous section.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to share all your connected printers and devices with others
on the homegroup.
^f SET UP Open PC Settings.
382 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
1 Click or tap HomeGroup at the bottom of the PC Settings window.
2 In Libraries And Devices, click or tap the Printers And Devices switch.
3 Change the position of the switch from Not Shared to Shared.
PC settings
Libraries and devices
When ynu share content,
Search A n.
iTher homegrnup mem hers ran see it, hut only ynii nan change
Share
Documents
Shared
M
General
Musk
Privacy
Shared
Pictures
™
Devices
Shared
^
Wireless
Videos
Shared
J
Ease of Access
0^ Prinff x\ anrt rtevire?;
Sync your settings
V. Shared
Media devices
Windows Update
Allow devices such as TVs
indl qame consoles to play my shared content
Q CLEAN UP Close PC Settings.
All your printers and devices are now shared with the homegroup.
Stop Sharing the Printer
If you want to discontinue sharing a printer, use the same steps you took to share. For
example, if you shared a printer with the network, to stop sharing it go through the
steps detailed in the "Sharing a Printer with Computers on Your Network" section and
clear the Share This Printer box at step 8. All the other steps are the same.
Sharing a Printer with Your Homegroup 383
i MX410 series Printer WS Properties
General Sharing Ports Advanced Color Management Security Hi Maintenance
If you share this printer, only users on your network with a username
and password for this computer can print to it. The printer will not
be available when the computer sleeps. To changethese settings,
use the Network and Sharing Center.
I I Share this printer
Share name
Canon MX410 series Printer WS
@ Render print jobs on client computers
Drivers
If this printer is shared with users running different versions of
Windows, you may want to install additional drivers, so that the
users do not have to find the print driver when they connect to the
shared printer.
Additional Drivers,..
Ad
o
Apply
Help
To stop sharing a printer with the homegroup, go through the same steps you took to
share it and turn the switch to Not Shared instead of to Shared. All the other steps are
identical.
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
Libraries and devices
When ynu share r nntent, nther homegroup mem hers can see if, hut only you ran change
L v :::ure;"ts
Shared
Pictures
Shared
Media devices
Allow devices such as TVs and game consoles to play my shared content
384 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
Enabling the Sharing Wizard
The Sharing Wizard in Windows 8 is designed so that you can easily share anything you
want with the other computers and devices on the network. By default, the wizard is
enabled in Windows 8. However, if it is disabled on your computer, the exercises included
in prior sections about sharing over the network won't work, and you will see a completely
different set of sharing options and buttons. Therefore, this section shows how to enable
the Sharing Wizard so that you can complete the previous exercises without problems and
have the easiest network sharing experience possible with Windows 8.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to enable the Sharing Wizard.
^3 SET UP Open File Explorer and maximize the ribbon by double-clicking it.
1 Click or tap the View tab.
2 Click or tap the Options button on the right side of the ribbon.
The Folder Options window opens.
* Libraries
i> [J Documents
Mu:ic
»S Pictures
^ *J Homegroup
,__, Ciprian
■ , , Ciprian Rusen
l> 0? Computer
o *V Network
Enabling the Sharing Wizard
385
3 Click or tap the View tab.
I _i (•) Open each folder in the same window
I — = 1 O Open each folder in its own window
Qick items as follows
O Single-click to open an item ;point to select)
Underline icon titles consistent with my browser
• Underline icon titles only when I point at them
® Double-click to open an item (single-click to select)
Navigation pane
Show favorites
1 I Show all folders
I I Automatically expand to current folder
How do I change folder options?
Restore Defaults
Apply
4
Scroll down the Advanced settings list and select the Use Sharing Wizard
(Recommended) check box.
Folder Options
General View Search
Folder views
You can apply the view (such as Details or Icons) that
you are using for this folderto all folders of this type.
Apply to Folders
n
Advanced settings:
I I Restore previous folder windows at logon
[Vl Show drive letters
[^1 Show encrypted or compressed NTFS files in color
[^1 Show pop-up description for folder and desktop items
Show preview handlers in preview pane
1 I Show status bar
I I Use check boxes to select items
When typing into list view
O Automatically type into the Search Box
* Select the typed item in the view
I
Restore Defaults
Apply
5 Click or tap OK.
You return to the File Explorer window.
386 Chapter 13 Sharing Files and Folders with My Network
Q CLEAN UP Close File Explorer.
The Sharing Wizard is now enabled and can be used to complete the exercises detailed in
this chapter.
Key Points
The appropriate network sharing settings are applied automatically to the network to
which you are connected, depending on whether you turned on sharing when first
connecting to it.
The homegroup works only on computers running Windows 7 and Windows 8. It
allows easy sharing of files, folders, libraries, and devices without having to type user
names and passwords each time you want to access something that is shared over the
network.
To join a homegroup, you need to type the homegroup password defined on the
computer on which it was created.
A computer can join only one homegroup at a time. To join another homegroup, the
computer must first leave the current one.
You can share your printer with both your homegroup and the computers that are
not in your homegroup but are part of the network to which you are connected.
The Sharing Wizard makes it easy for you to share libraries and folders with your
home network.
Key Points 387
Change
Change the UAC level, page 395
Choose when to be notified about changes to your computer
Usei ■-■:■:<::.. -: '.'. : -: ■: ■•= :: : e =-. : z:= -. -. !•■ harmful pro grams from making
Always notify
-□-
Notify me only when apps try to make changes t<
computer (default)
* Don't notify rnewhen I make changes to Wind
settings
Restore
Restore Windows Firewall settings to their
defaults, page 410
Restoring the default settings will delete all settings of Windows Firewall
that you have made since Windows was installed, This may cause some
apps to stop working
Do you want to continue?
Work
Work with Windows Firewall, page 404
1* ■* « System and Security ► Windows Firewall ► Allowed apps
Allow apps to communicate through Windows Firewall
To add, change, or remove allowed apps and ports, click Change settings.
What are the risks of allowing an appto communicate?
Allowed apps and features:
Name
0Bing
□ BranchCache
Content Retrieval (Uses HTTP]
□ BranchCache
Hosted Cache
Client (Uses HTTP S]
□ BranchCache
Hosted Cache
Server (Uses HTTPS)
nFlranrhfarhp
Pppr r}i«-rwpru fLkpt WSm
Use
Use Windows Defender to secure your
system, page 411
?
Windows Defender is monitoring your PC and helping to protect it.
I -time protection: On
sand spyware definitions: Up to date
Keeping Windows 8
Safe and Secure
14
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Work with the User Account Control (UAC).
■ Use Windows Firewall.
■ Use Windows Defender.
■ Enhance the security of your passwords.
Security is very important in the modern era of computers and devices. Microsoft has spent
quite a bit of effort to enhance the security provided by Windows 8. This operating sys-
tem offers improved versions of all its main security tools: User Account Control, Windows
Firewall, and Windows Defender.
In this chapter, you'll learn how the User Account Control (UAC) works, how to tweak it, and
why you should never disable it. In addition, you'll learn the basics of working with Windows
Firewall to secure your network and Internet traffic and about the new and much improved
Windows Defender and how to use it to keep your system safe from viruses and spyware.
Finally, you'll learn how to improve your passwords to make it more difficult for unwanted
people to access your Microsoft account, your email, and other important accounts you use
and the Internet.
PRACTICE FILES You don't need any practice files to complete the exercises in this chapter.
For more information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the
beginning of this book.
389
Understanding the User Account Control
(UAC)
User Account Control (UAC) is a security feature that was introduced in Windows Vista and
improved in all subsequent versions of Windows. It is present in Windows 8 as well, and it
helps prevent unauthorized changes to your computer. These changes can be initiated by
users, applications, viruses, or other types of malware. UAC makes sure these changes are
made only with approval from the administrator of the computer. If these changes are not
approved by the administrator, they will never be executed, and the system will remain
unchanged.
Unlike in Windows XP, applications in Windows 8 do not run with administrator permis-
sions and cannot make any changes to the operating system. When an application wants to
make system changes such as modifications that affect other user accounts, modifications
of system files and folders, or installation of new software, UAC prompts the user to ask for
permission.
User Account Control
•
Do you want to allow the following program to make
changes to this computer?
1 ^ \ Program name: UserAccountControl Settings
Verified publisher Microsoft Windows
©
>how details Yes No
Chanaewhen these notifications appear
If the user clicks No, the changes won't be performed. If the user clicks Yes, the applica-
tion receives administrator permissions and makes the system changes it is programmed to
make. These permissions will be granted until the application stops running or is closed by
the user. The next time it runs, it starts without receiving any administrator permissions.
To illustrate this process, the UAC algorithm is explained in the following diagram.
390
Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
How UAC Works
I
Application wants
to run & receive
administrator permissions
UAC initiates elevation
prompt to user
Application launches
as administrator
Application does
not run
Application is closed
and administrator
privileges are gone
Many changes require administrator privileges and, depending on how UAC is configured
on your computer, they can cause a UAC prompt to ask for permissions. These changes are
the following.
Running an application as an administrator
Changes to system-wide settings or to files in the Windows and Program Files folders
Installing and uninstalling drivers and applications
Installing ActiveX controls
Changing settings to Windows Firewall
Changing UAC (User Account Control) settings
Configuring Windows Update
Adding or removing user accounts
Changing a user's account type
Configuring parental controls
Understanding the User Account Control (UAC)
391
■ Running the Task Scheduler
■ Restoring backed-up system files
■ Viewing or changing the folders and files of another user account
■ Changing the system date and time
If UAC is turned off, any user and any application can make any of these changes without a
prompt for permissions. This would allow viruses and other forms of malware to infect and
take control of your system more easily than when UAC is turned on.
Windows 8 has four UAC levels from which to choose. The differences between them are
the following.
■ ALWAYS NOTIFY At this level, you are notified before applications make changes
that require administrator permissions or before you or another user changes
Windows settings. When a UAC prompt appears, your desktop is dimmed, and you
must choose Yes or No before you can do anything else on your computer. Security
Impact: This is the most secure setting but also the most annoying. If you do not like
the UAC implementation from Windows Vista, you won't like this level either.
■ NOTIFY ME ONLY WHEN APPS TRY TO MAKE CHANGES TO MY COMPUTER
(DEFAULT) This is the default level; it only notifies you before programs make
changes to your computer that require administrator permissions. If you manu-
ally make changes to Windows, UAC doesn't notify you. This level is less annoying
because it doesn't stop the user when making changes to the system; it only shows
prompts if an application wants to make changes. When a UAC prompt appears, the
desktop is dimmed, and you must choose Yes or No before you can do anything else
on your computer. Security Impact: This is less secure because malicious programs
can be created that simulate the keystrokes or mouse moves of a user and change
Windows settings. However, if you are using a good security solution, these scenarios
should never occur.
392 Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
NOTIFY ME ONLY WHEN APPS TRY TO MAKE CHANGES TO MY COMPUTER (DO
NOT DIM MY DESKTOP) This level is identical to the preceding one except that,
when a UAC prompt appears, the desktop is not dimmed, and other programs might
be able to interfere with the UAC dialog box. Security Impact: This level is even less
secure because it is easier for malicious programs to simulate keystrokes or mouse
moves that interfere with the UAC prompt. Again, a good security solution can com-
pensate for the slight decrease in security.
NEVER NOTIFY At this level, UAC is turned off and offers no protection against
unauthorized system changes. Any user or application can make system changes
without any prompts for permission. Security Impact: If you don't have a good secu-
rity solution, you are very likely to have security problems. With UAC turned off, it is
easier for malicious programs to infect your computer and take control of it and its
settings.
IMPORTANT Use either of the first two levels. The third level can be used when you have a
very good security solution in place. The fourth level should always be avoided because it has a
negative impact on the security of your system.
Changing the UAC Level
Now that you know what this feature does and how it works, you'll learn how to configure it
to offer the level of security you desire. In this exercise, you'll learn how to change the UAC
level.
IMPORTANT Before changing the UAC level, review the previous section in this chapter
"Understanding the User Account Control (UAC)." It is very important to understand the
differences among the levels before making any changes.
^^ SET UP Open Control Panel.
1 Click or tap System and Security.
The System And Security window opens.
2 In the Action Center section, click or tap Change User Account Control settings.
The User Account Control Settings window opens.
Changing the UAC Level
393
Control Panel Home
System and Security
Network and Internet
Hardware and Sound
Programs
User Accounts and Fan
Safety
Appearance and
Personalization
Clock, Language, and
Ease of Access
: '=:;':: -
ITCWCMI
C h eck f i rewa 1 1 statu s Al I ow an appthrcugh Wi n d ows Fi rewa 1 1
s v stem
"' View amount of RAM and processor speed '^' Allow remote access
Launch remote assistance Seethe name of this computer (§j! Device Manager
_- Windows Update
- J »V Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates Install optional updates
View update history
V^ Power Options
n$9 Change battery settings Require a pa ssword when the computer wakes
Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps
ngjl File History
trl") Save backup co-pies of your files with File History Restore your files with File History
%
BitLocker Drive Encryption
Manage BitLocker
Storage Spaces
Manage Storage Spaces
-I Add features to Windows 8
jr (§? G et m o re f eatu res with a n ew ed iti o n of Wi n d ows
■npX Administrative Tools
3 Move the slide to the UAC level you want to use.
4 Click or tap OK.
394
Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
User Account Control Settings
n |
Choose when to be notified about changes to your computer
User Account Contrc ie :: ire ent : -.:= itially harmful programs from making changes to
your computer,
■ -. : -:■.*
Always notify
— — i
k
1
Notify me only when apps try to make changes to my
computer (default)
• Don't notify me when 1 make changes to Windows
settings
01 Recommended if you use familiar apps and visit
familiar websites,
Never notify
®OK
Cancel
5 Depending on the UAC level set before making the change, you might receive a UAC
prompt. Click or tap Yes if you do.
^3 CLEAN UP Close the System And Security window.
The UAC is set to the level you selected and will provide you with the appropriate security
level according to the choice you made.
Changing the UAC Level
395
Should I Disable UAC When I Install My Applications
and Turn It On Afterward?
The biggest annoyance UAC causes is when you install all your daily applications. At
this time, you can receive many UAC prompts (one for each application you install).
You might be tempted to disable UAC temporarily while you install your applications
and enable it again when you're finished. In some scenarios, this can be a bad idea.
Certain applications, which make many system changes, can fail to work if you turn on
UAC after their installation even though they work if you install them with UAC turned
on. These failures happen because, when UAC is turned off, the virtualization tech-
niques UAC uses for all applications are inactive. This causes certain user settings and
files to be installed to a different place and no longer work when UAC is turned back
on. To avoid these problems, it is better to have UAC turned on at all times.
Using the Windows Firewal
Windows Firewall is a security application built into Windows 8 that helps block unauthor-
ized access to your computer while permitting authorized communications to and from
your computer. This application has been improved in each new version of Windows.
Windows 8 allows this tool to filter both inbound and outbound traffic or set rules and
exceptions, depending on the type of network to which you're connected. If you aren't
using a third-party security suite that includes a firewall, it is highly recommended that you
use Windows Firewall because it provides a good level of security.
Windows Firewall has a predefined set of rules that is applied as soon as it is turned on. By
default, it allows you to do many things: browse the Internet; use instant messaging appli-
cations; connect to a homegroup; share files, folders, and devices with other computers;
and so on. The rules are applied differently depending on the network profile set for your
active network connection.
TIP For more information about network profiles, see the "Changing the Network Profile of
a Network" section in Chapter 11, "Connecting to a Network and the Internet."
Most applications you install on your computer automatically add an exception to Windows
Firewall so that they receive network and Internet access as soon as you launch them.
However, if they don't add such an exception, Windows Firewall asks you to allow them
access to the network. At this point, you receive a security alert similar to the following
396 Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
one, in which you are asked to select the network profiles to which you allow access for the
application: private networks (such as home and work networks) or public networks (such as
those in airports, coffee shops, and so on).
Windows Security Alert
Windows Firewall has blocked some features of uTorrent on all public and private networks.
©
Name: uTorrent
^ Publisher: BitTorrent r Inc.
Path: C: 'program files (x36) V-itorrentV-itorrent.exe
Allow uTorrent to communicate on these networks:
Private networks , such as my home or work network
Q Public networks, such as those in airports and coffee shops [not recommended
because these networks often have little or no security)
What are the risks of allowing an app through a firewall?
By default, Windows Firewall selects the box relevant to the network you are currently
using. However, you can select either of the options or both, depending on what you want
to do. When you've decided, click Allow Access, and the application is allowed to communi-
cate on the selected type(s) of network. To block access, just click Cancel.
IMPORTANT If you do not have administrator access, you can't set any exceptions, and the
programs that do not comply with the standard set of rules are automatically blocked.
Windows Firewall is turned on by default in Windows 8, and it runs silently in the back-
ground as a service. It prompts you whenever you need to make a decision, and you don't
need to open this application unless you want to see its status or configure it to better meet
your needs.
To open Windows Firewall, type firewall at the Start screen and click or tap the Windows
Firewall search result. As an alternative, you can open Control Panel and click System And
Security to open the System and Security window, which has all tools and configuration
options available for this category.
Using the Windows Firewall
397
System and Securi
©
f wbf ► Control Panel ► System and Security
Control Panel Home
• System and Security
Network and Internet
Hardware and Sound
Programs
User Accounts and Family
Safety
Appearance and
Personalization
Clock,. Language, and Region
Ease of Access
V*
Action Center
Review your computer's status and resolve issues
^CJi
;t ccmmcn computer problems
View amount of RAM and processor speed (£§! Allow remote access
Launch remote assistance Seethe name of this computer (§j! Device Manager
_— Windows Update
^*r Turn automaticupdating on oroff Checkforupdates Install optional updates
View update history
V"^ Power Options
•<$& Change battery settings Require a password when the computer wakes
Changewhatthe power button s d o Change wh en th e com puter si eeps
PjTifl File History
-ii
Save backup copies of your files with File History Restore your files with File History
BitLocker Drive Encryption
Manage BitLocker
Storage Spaces
Manage Storage Spaces
Add features to Windows 8
(q? Get more features with a new edition of Windows
Administrative Tools
Click Windows Firewall to open the Windows Firewall application and its main window. In
the center of the window, you can see information about the status of your network con-
nections and how Windows Firewall is set for each type of connection.
398
Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
Windows Firewall
^ *f gf ► Control Panel ► System and Security ► Windows Firewall
Help protect your PC with Windows Firewall
Control Panel Home
Allow an app orfeature
through Windows Firewall
5$ Change notification settings
§' Turn Windows Firewall on or
off
9 Restore defaults
*y Advanced settings
Troubleshoot my network
See also
Action Center
Network and Sharing Center
Windows Firewall can help prevent hackers or malicious software from gaining access to your PC
through the Internet or a network.
1 <& Private networks
Connected ©
Networks at home or work where
you
know
and trust the people and devices on the network
Windows Firewall state:
On
Incoming connections:
Block all connectionsto appsthat are not on the
list of allowed apps
Active private networks:
S. C1pr1an
Notification state:
Notify mewhen Windows Firewall blocks a new
app
1 @ Guest or public networks
Not connected ®
In the left column are links to different configuration options for Windows Firewall and
other tools such as the Action Center.
Turning Windows Firewall Off or On
By default, Windows Firewall is turned on for both types of network profiles, private and
public. You can turn it on or off for one or both the network locations from the Customize
Settings window.
If you choose to install a third-party security application, such as a complete Internet secu-
rity suite or another firewall, it is best to disable Windows Firewall so that it doesn't create
conflicts and problems.
Turning Windows Firewall Off or On
399
Customize Settings
^ f" flf « Windowi Firewall ► Customize letting s
Search Control Panel
Customize settings for each type of network
You can modify the firewall settings for each type of network that you use.
Private network settings
„-.
$
■ijti'Tum on Windows Firewall
Q Block all incoming connections, including those in the list of allowed apps
Notify rnewhen Windows Firewall blocks a new app
QTurn off Windows Firewall (not recommended]
Public network settings
ijh) (#3 Tu rn o n Wi n d o ws Fi rewa 1 1
Q Block all incoming connections, including those in the list of allowed apps
Notify rnewhen Windows Firewall blocks a new app
rj^| O Tu rn off Wi n d ows Fi rewa 1 1 (n ot recom m en d ed]
Beneath the Turn On Windows Firewall option, there are two other settings you can choose.
The first is to block all incoming connections to your computer. Don't choose this unless
you want your computer to be unavailable to anyone or any application. The second is to
receive notifications when Windows Firewall blocks a new program. You should enable this;
otherwise, you won't know why an application doesn't access the network or the Internet
correctly.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to disable Windows Firewall.
^3 SET UP Log on with a user account that has administrator rights and open Windows
Firewall.
1 Click or tap Turn Windows Firewall on or off in the left-side column.
The Customize Settings window, which shows whether the application is turned on,
opens.
2 Select Turn off Windows Firewall (not recommended) for both Private network
settings and Public network settings.
400
Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
Customize Settings
^ f ff « Windows Firewall ► Customize Settings
v Cf Search Control Panel
Customize settings for each type of network
You can modify the firewall settings for each type of network that you use.
Private network settings
*]l QTum on Windows Firewall
d
[~| Block all incoming connections, including those in the list of allowed apps
@ Notify mewhen Windows Firewall blocks a new app
(•i'Turn off Windows Firewall (not recommended)
Public network settings
id»j QTum on Windows Firewall
d
[~| Block all incoming connections, including those in the list of allowed apps
|y] Notify mewhen Windows Firewall blocks a new app
•jTum off Windows Firewall (not recommended)
3 Click or tap OK.
You return to the Windows Firewall window.
CLEAN UP close
the Windows Firewall window.
IMPORTANT You can only turn Windows Firewall on or off if you are logged on as an
administrator. This setting will apply to all users defined on your computer. Also, if you disable
Windows Firewall, make sure your user account and others have proper security alternatives
installed.
To turn Windows Firewall on, perform the same steps. The only difference is that at step 2,
you select Turn On Windows Firewall for both Private Network Settings and Public Network
Settings.
Turning Windows Firewall Off or On
401
Customizing the List of Allowed Programs
The Allowed Apps window contains all the programs that are allowed to go through
Windows Firewall. By default, the list is editable; however, it can be dimmed and not edit-
able. If that's the case, click or tap the Change Settings button to edit the list of allowed
apps. The button will then be dimmed, and the list of allowed apps, programs, and features
will become editable.
Wowed apps
▼ 1* W « System and Security ► Windows. Firewall ► Allowed apps
Allow apps to communicate through Windows Firewall
To add,, change, or remove allowed apps and ports, click Change settings.
What are the risks of allowing an app to communicate?
Allowed apps and features:
Search Control Panel
^r Change settings
Name
Private
Public
a
□ uTorrent
D
□
□ Branch Cache - Content Retrieval (Uses HTTP]
□
□ BranchCache - Hosted Cache Client (Uses HTTPS]
□
□
□ BranchCache - Hosted Cache Server [Uses HTTPS]
□
□
□ BranchCache - Peer Discovery (Uses WSD]
□
□
□ Connect to a Network Projector
□
□
Core Networking
□ Distributed Transaction Coordinator
□
□
□ File and Printer Sharing
□
□
Finance
Games
V
Allow another app...
IMPORTANT Some apps have check marks before their names, indicating that the rules
defined for those apps are active and used by Windows Firewall. The apps with no check marks
before their names don't have any active rules used by Windows Firewall. There are also check
marks in the Private and Public columns. If a check mark exists in any of these columns, it means
that the rule defined for that app is applied to the network profile that is selected. Some apps
have rules for one network profile, whereas others have rules for both. The rules are active only
for the network profiles that are selected.
402
Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
Windows Firewall allows you to edit its communication rules so that you can permit or deny
network access for certain applications or services. In this exercise, you'll learn how to cus-
tomize the list of allowed apps.
SET UP Log on with a user account that has administrator rights and open Windows
Firewall.
1 Click or tap the Allow an app or feature through Windows Firewall.
The Allowed Apps window opens.
2 Find the program with permissions you want changed and select it.
# Allowed apps
(*0 T *f rir « System and Security ► Windows Firewall ► Allowed apps v £» Search Control Panel
Allow apps to communicate through Windows Firewall
To add, change, or remove allowed apps and ports, click Change settings,
What are the risks of allowing an app to communicate?
Allowed apps and features:
If Change settings
Name
Private
Public
A
0Bing
□ BranchCache - Content Retrieval (Uses HTTP]
□
□
1
□ BranchCache - Hosted Cache Client [Uses HTTPS]
□
□
□ BranchCache - Hosted Cache Server [Uses HTTPS]
□
□
□ BranchCache - Peer Discovery [Uses WSD]
□
□
□ Connect to a Network Projector
□
D
□ Distributed Transaction Coordinator
□
□
□ File and Printer Sharing
□
□
Finance
Games
□ HomeGroup
□
n
V
we
Allow another app, ..
Click or tap Details.
A window with its properties opens.
Customizing the List of Allowed Programs
403
© -
Allowed apps
1* ^« System and Security ► Windows Firewall ► Allowed apps
Allow apps to communicate through Windows Firewall
To add,, change, or remove allowed apps and ports, click Change settings.
What are the risks of allowing an appto communicate?
v O
Search Control Panel
"(^■'Change settings
Allowed apps and features:
Name
Private
Public A
0Bing
1
□ BranchCache - Content Retrieval (Uses HTTP]
□
□
□ BranchCache - Hosted Cache Client [Uses
HTTPS]
□
□
□ BranchCache - Hosted Cache Server (Uses
HTTPS)
□
□
□ BranchCache - Peer Discovery (Uses WSD)
□
□
□ Connect to a Network Projector
□
D
□ Distributed Transaction Coordinator
□
□
□ File and Printer Sharing
□
□
Finance
Games
□ HomeGroup
^ _ JZ1
D v
Allow another app.,,
4
Read the information to confirm that this is the program with permissions you want
changed and click or tap OK.
Core Networking Properties
Description:
The firewall rules that are part of Core Networking are required for
reliable IPv4 and IPv6 connectivity.
5 Clear the Private and Public check boxes for the program to block its access to both
network profiles.
6 Click or tap OK.
CLEAN UP Close the Windows Firewall window.
The changes you made for the selected program are now applied.
404 Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
Adding New Apps to the Allowed List
You can easily add new apps to the list of apps allowed through Windows Firewall. In this
exercise, you'll learn how to add new apps to the allowed list.
SET UP Log on as administrator and open Windows Firewall. In the Allowed Apps
window, make the list of allowed apps, programs, and features editable by clicking or
tapping the Change Settings button if necessary.
1 Click or tap Allow another app.
The Add An App window opens.
Select the app you want to add r or dick Browse to find one that is not
listed r and then dick OK,
Apps:
Q Calculator
*" 7 Character Map
^Command Prompt
[[^Digital Certificate for VBA Projects
fl| Excel 2013
■^Internet Explorer
-^ Magnifier
r^ Math Input Panel
(§)MozillaFirefox
i. Narrator
C : program Files tylierosoft Office 15 VoQt\offi Browse . .
What are the risks of unblocking an app?
You can choose which network types to add this app to,
Network types..
2 Select the app you want to add and click or tap Network types.
The Choose Network Types window opens.
IMPORTANT If you don't find the app you want to add in the Add An App list, click Browse and
browse to its location. Select it and then continue with the instructions in this exercise.
3 Select the network locations through which you want to allow the app to communi-
cate and click or tap OK.
Adding New Apps to the Allowed List
405
Choose Network Types
Allow this app or port to communicate through Windows
Firewall for the selected network type:
Private: Networks at home or work where you
know and trust the people and devices on the
network
Public: Networks in public places such as airports
or coffee shops
4 Click or tap Add.
You return to the Allowed Apps window, in which you can see the newly added app
on the list.
Allowed apps
©
Search Control Panel
^ f ^« System and Security ► Windows Firewall ► Allowed apps v £»
Allow apps to communicate through Windows Firewall
To add, change, or remove allowed apps and ports, click Change settings,
What are the risks of allowing an app to communicate? % Change settings
Allowed apps and features:
Name
Private
Public A
0Bing
□ BranchCache - Content Retrieval [Uses HTTP]
□
□
□ BranchCache - Hosted Cache Client [Uses
HTTPS]
□
□
□ BranchCache - Hosted Cache Server [Uses
HTTPS]
□
□
□ BranchCache - Peer Discovery [Uses WSD)
□
□
□ Connect to a Network Projector
□
□
Core Networking
□ Distributed Transaction Coordinator
□
□
□ File and Printer Sharing
□
□
Finance
Games
v
Click or tap OK.
Allow another app,..
406
Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
^3 CLEAN UP Repeat this procedure for all the apps you want to add and then close the
Windows Firewall window.
The change is now applied to the list of active rules Windows Firewall uses.
Removing Apps from the Allowed List
Removing apps from the list of allowed apps through Windows Firewall or disabling access
to certain types of networks is easy. Both tasks are done from the Allowed Apps window. If
you want to disable a rule allowing access to a certain app or feature, simply clear the box
on the left side of its name. Windows Firewall will no longer use it.
If you only want to disable network and Internet access for an app when connected to a
certain type of network profile, clear the box in the column of that network profile. For
example, if you want to prevent an app from receiving network and Internet access when
you are connected to a public network, clear the box in the Public column. If the Private
column is selected for that app, it will only have access to private networks.
When removing entries from the allowed list, keep in mind that you can remove only apps
and entries that were not included with Windows 8. For example, you cannot remove an
entry about Windows Media Player because it is part of Windows 8, although you can
remove an entry about a third-party app you installed, such as Steam or uTorrent. The
entries that are included in the default configuration of Windows Firewall can only be dis-
abled, not removed.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to remove an app from the allowed list.
SET UP Log on as administrator and open Windows Firewall. In the Allowed Apps win-
dow, make the list of allowed programs and features editable if necessary.
1 Select the app or feature you want to remove.
Removing Apps from the Allowed List 407
Allowed apps
t f* |f « System and Security ► Windows. Firewall ► Allowed apps
Allow apps to communicate through Windows Firewall
To add, change,, or remove allowed apps and ports, click Change settings,
What are the risks of allowing an appto communicate?
Allowed apps and features:
"r Change settings
Name
Private
Public
A
0Bing
□ BranchCache - Content Retrieval (Uses HTTP]
□
□
□ BranchCache - Hosted Cache Client (Uses HTTPS]
□
□
□ BranchCache - Hosted Cache Server (Uses HTTPS]
□
□
□ BranchCache - Peer Discovery [Uses WSD)
□
□
□ Connect to a Network Projector
□
□
Core Networking
□ Distributed Transaction Coordinator
□
□
□ File and Printer Sharing
□
□
Finance
Games
V
Allow another app...
2
To remove it from the list, click or tap Remove.
You are asked to confirm the removal.
Delete an app
If you remove Access 2.013" from the Exceptions list, it might stop
working properly. To disable it temporarily, clear its check box.
Do you still want to remove it?
3 Click or tap Yes.
You return to the Allowed Apps window.
4 Click or tap OK.
CLEAN UP Close the Windows Firewall window.
The change is now applied to the list of active rules Windows Firewall uses.
408
Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
Restoring the Windows Firewall Default
Settings
If you have used this tool for a long time and you have made many changes to its settings,
chances are some things might stop working. In such cases, it is best to reset all rules to the
default settings and values created by Microsoft. Then you can start from the beginning,
defining the rules that apply to your apps so that everything works as it should.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to restore the default settings of Windows Firewall.
SET UP Log on with a user account that has administrator rights and open Windows
Firewall.
1 Click or tap Restore defaults.
The Restore Defaults window opens.
Restore defaults
▼ "T W « Windows Firewall ► Restore defaults
Search Control Panel
"
Restore default settings
Restoring default settings will remove all Windows Firewall settings that you have configured for all network
locations. This might cause some appsto stop working.
Restore defaults
Restoring the Windows Firewall Default Settings
409
2
Read the information shown and click or tap Restore defaults.
You are asked to confirm your choice.
Restore Defaults G
Restoring the default settings will delete all settings of Windows Firewall
' \ that you have made since Windows was installed, This may cause some
appsto stop working
Do you want to continue?
3 Click or tap Yes.
You are returned to the Windows Firewall window.
CLEAN UP Close the Windows Firewall window.
All the Windows Firewall settings you created are deleted. Everything is now reset to the
initial settings and values existing when Windows 8 was installed on your computer.
Using Windows Defender
Windows Defender was originally a tool that provided protection only against spyware
threats. Then Microsoft launched Microsoft Security Essentials, a product that added anti-
virus protection to the Windows Defender protection. It quickly became one of the most
popular free anti-malware products among Windows users. With Windows 8, Microsoft has
decided to include the features initially released in Microsoft Security Essentials in the ear-
lier Windows Defender product.
In Windows 8, Windows Defender provides basic anti-malware protection that will keep
you safe from viruses, spyware, and other types of malware. It doesn't compare in number
of features and efficiency with most commercial security solutions, but it is one of the best
free security solutions you can find for Windows 8.
Windows Defender is enabled by default in Windows 8, and it can be launched by search-
ing for the word defender in the Start screen and clicking or tapping the appropriate search
result.
410
Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
Its interface is simple and easy to use. At the top of the Windows Defender window, four
tabs are available.
■ HOME This tab shows an overview of Windows Defender: whether any threats and
problems were detected, whether the real-time protection is turned on, and whether
the virus and spyware definitions are up to date. On the right side, you can start a
manual scan for malware; on the bottom, you can view when the last scan was made.
Green means no problems were detected.
Red means problems were found, while
orange means there are warnings to consider.
Options for starting
a manual scan.
Windows Defender
D
— ~t~
Windows Defender is monitoring your PC and helping to protect it. ^ can options:
® Quick
Full
O Custom
ft Real-time protection: On
ft Virus and spyware definitions: Uptodate
Q,
Scan details
Last scan: Today at 1:26 PM (Quick scan)
When the last scan was made
and what type of scan it was.
UPDATE This tab displays details about the latest update of definitions Windows
Defender made. You can also manually start an update if the definitions are more
than a day or two old.
Using Windows Defender 411
Definitions created on: 3/20/2012 at 1:37 AM
Definitions last updated: 3/20/2012 at 12:27 PM
Virus definition version: 1,131.2371.0
Spyware definition version: 1,131.2371.0
' * Did you know?
Virus, spyware, and other malware definitions are files that Windows Defender uses to identify malicious or potentially
unwanted software on your PC.
These definitions are updated automatically, but you can also click Update to get the latest versions whenever you want.
HISTORY This tab is for viewing details about the threats Windows Defender has
detected. You can view the items that were quarantined, the items that you allowed
to run despite the recommendations received from Windows Defender, and all the
items that were detected as malicious.
412
Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
SETTINGS On this tab, you can customize how Windows Defender runs. You can
enable or disable its real-time protection engine; exclude files, locations, or processes
from being scanned; tweak more advanced settings; choose whether you want to join
the Microsoft Active Protection Service; or completely disable Windows Defender.
Using Windows Defender 413
Windows Defender automatically scans all the files and folders through which you browse.
If a threat is identified, it is immediately quarantined and you are informed that action was
taken.
Removing Quarantined Files
Each time you see a warning similar to the following one, Windows Defender cleaned some
threats it detected.
Malware Detected
Windows Defender is taking action to clean
detected malware
414 Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
Detected threats are automatically isolated and placed into quarantine. You can only access
the items that were quarantined from Windows Defender and decide whether you want
to remove them completely from your system or keep them and set Windows Defender
to allow them. However, to remove them or keep them you need to have administrator
permissions.
Windows Defender
PC status: At risk
History
View the items Windows. Defender detected as potentially harmful and the actions that you took on them:
(_) Quarantined items
Items that were prevented from running but not removed from your PC.
(_) Allowed items
Items that you've allowed to run on your PC.
*AII detected items
Items that were detected on your PC.
Detected item Alert level
Date
Action taken
a
© Backdoor:Win32/Simda Severe
a/20/201 2 7:44 PM
Quarantined
© TrojanDownloader:Win32/Carberp.A Severe
3/20/20127:44 PM
Quarantined
© Trojan:Win32/Meredrop Severe
3/20/20127:44 PM
Quarantined
© PWS:Win32/Zbot.gen!Y Severe
3/20/20127:44 PM
Quarantined
V
Category: Backdoor
A
Description: This program provides remote access to the computer it is
nstalled on.
Recommended action: Remove this software immediately,
V
'.^ Rem o ve a 1 1 fg' Al I ow item
In this exercise, you'll learn how to access the items that were detected as malicious by
Windows Defender and remove them from your computer.
SET UP Log on with a user account that has administrator rights and open Windows
Defender.
1 Open the History tab.
2 Choose the All detected items button.
3 Click View details to view all the items that were detected as malware.
Removing Quarantined Files 415
Windows Defender
| History
View the items Windows Defender detected as potentially harmful and the actions that you took on them:
(_) Quarantined items
Items that were prevented from running but not removed from your PC.
O Allowed items
Items that you've allowed to run on your PC.
• All detected items
Items that were detected on your PC.
To help protect user privacy, these items are hidden,
Click View details to seethe items,
®View details
4 Select all the detected malware items you want to remove.
5 Click or tap Remove all.
The list of selected items is cleaned.
416 Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
m
Windows Defender
[^
E)| 22 |
PC status: Protected
I History
View the items. Windows Defender detected as potentially harmful and the actions that you took on them:
O Qu a ra nti n ed item s
Items that were prevented from running but not removed from your PC,
O Al I owed item s
Items that you've allowed to run on your PC,
• All detected items
Items that were detected on your PC,
CLEAN UP Close Windows Defender.
The items that were detected as threats have now been completely removed from your
computer.
Removing Quarantined Files 417
Don't Ignore the Warnings and Recommendations
from SmartScreen Filter
In Chapter 5, "Using Internet Explorer 10," the section "Understanding SmartScreen
Filter in Internet Explorer" covers in detail how the SmartScreen feature included in
Internet Explorer and Windows 8 can help prevent security problems with your com-
puter or device.
This chapter reinforces that recommendation to consider the warning messages from
SmartScreen Filter.
In Windows 8, File Explorer also uses this feature to scan the files you are running.
If you see a warning similar to the following one when trying to launch a file, make
sure to scan that file with Windows Defender or any other security product you have
installed prior to launching it.
Following this recommendation will help keep your Windows 8 system safe and
secure.
418
Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
improving Your Password Habits
No matter how good the security products you are using are, you are still vulnerable to
many security problems if your habits related to password use are poor. Many people tend
to use the same one-two-three passwords everywhere. This is a sure recipe for security
problems, including security problems with your Microsoft account (Windows Live ID), your
Facebook and Google accounts, and any other accounts. If you use the same password
everywhere, a malicious user might break into a forum or social website you are using and
steal your password from there. That user can then use the same password and the email
address with which you registered to access more of your personal data and information
from your Inbox, accounts on social networks, and so on.
To make sure it is much more difficult for unwanted parties to access your Windows 8-
based computer, your Microsoft account, your email inbox, and any online services you are
using, consider the following recommendations regarding password use.
■ Do not use passwords with fewer than six characters. They are especially easy to
break.
■ Ideally, your passwords should be at least eight characters long and include letters,
numbers, and special characters such as +, #, $, and so on.
■ Do not use the same password twice or more.
■ Having different passwords for different accounts can be difficult to manage, so using
password management solutions such as LastPass, KeePass, or Roboform is also rec-
ommended. You can find them easily with a search on Bing. These solutions help you
identify your duplicate passwords, change them to new random passwords, gener-
ate secure passwords automatically, and store them safely so that you can use them
whenever needed and not lose them again.
Reasons to Consider Commercial Security
Solutions
Windows Defender together with Windows Firewall and Internet Explorer can provide a
good level of security. If you are not willing or able to invest in security software, they are
the best free security tools available for Windows 8, and you won't need to install other free
products.
Reasons to Consider Commercial Security Solutions 419
However, if you want the maximum level of security possible and premium features such
as anti-spam ad blockers for your Internet browser, remote location of your computers and
devices if they are stolen, the possibility to command a remote wipe of your data (if your
computers and devices are stolen), and more advanced malware detection algorithms and
other features, it is best to consider purchasing and installing security products provided
by specialized vendors. The best way to be fully protected is to use a complete security
package, generally called an Internet Security Suite. These packages include antivirus, anti-
spyware, and firewall protection plus other security modules such as the ones previously
mentioned.
Before making a choice, it is best to understand which options are available. To make an
informed decision, it is recommend that you check the following Internet sources.
■ ANTIMALWARE APPS FOR WINDOWS 8 {http://www.microsoft.com/en-us/windows/
compatibility/en-US/CompatCenter/Home) This Microsoft page lists all the security
software providers that offer solutions compatible with Windows 8.
■ SECURITY FOR EVERYONE AT 7 TUTORIALS (http://www.7tutorials.com/security-
everyone) The 7 Tutorials website provides a series of reviews for Internet security
suites. The team from the website regularly tests the latest offerings from both a
security and a usability perspective. The aim of the team is to highlight solutions that
provide the best mix of effective security and user friendliness.
■ AV COMPARATIVES (http://av-comparatives.org) This is the website of an indepen-
dent security organization that regularly tests the quality of security provided by anti-
virus products. Its tests are very professional and evaluate all the important security
aspects for an antivirus solution. If you want to know which security company has the
best detection engine for viruses, this website is the place to visit.
■ AV TEST (http://www.av-test.org) This website is run by the AV-Test GmbH company,
which offers security testing and consulting services. It runs regular reviews of the
latest security products on the market and publishes the results of its evaluations. Just
like AV Comparatives, this website is a great destination for learning how effective the
latest security offerings are.
420 Chapter 14 Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure
Key Points
Never turn off User Account Control (UAC); it's a key feature that contributes to a
good level of security on your system.
Windows Firewall filters both inbound and outbound traffic depending on the type of
network to which you are connected. It is an important tool in securing your network
and Internet traffic.
Windows Defender now includes both antivirus and anti-spyware protection.
Improving your password habits is a key component of a secure computing
experience.
Key Points 421
Check
Check for Windows updates, page 427
Windows Update
You're s,el in automatically install updates
We'll install 1 irnpu-i Ljnt updaLe dulumalkally.
:': ::: ";::i :; ;j"'; ,o.'' "C :;;■'.:::'■■::: -r-:. -:;-:■'■:; "h :...;::::?': .,j; f :,.": ; to:i:V,
1 important update
Windows Defender
Definition Uuddle fur Windows Defender - KB2267602 (Definition 1....
Restore
Restore your system to a previous state with
System Restore, page 446
System Restore
Restore your computer to the state it was in before the selected event
Current time zone: GTB Daylight Time
Date and Time Description
8/21/20 12 6 : 57: 09 PM manual
Learn
Learn File History and how to use it,
page 432
Keep a history of your files
File History saves, copies of yourfiles so you can get them back if they're lost or da
File History is on
Copy files from: libraries, desktop, contacts, favorites and SkyDrive
. : : : ' ;; :c
My Passport (HO
c-^^ 929 G B free of 93 1 G B
Files last copied on 3/21/2012 6:10 PM.
Run now
Use
Use the Action Center to prevent problems,
page 450
Review recent messages and resolve problems
Action Center has detected one or more issues for you to review.
Security
Spywareand unwanted software protection (Important]
jffij Windows Defender is turned off,
Turn off messages about spyware and unwanted Find an app onlir
software protection
Virus protection [Important]
iSJ Windows Defender is turned off,
Turn off messages about virus protection
Find an app onlir
Preventing Problems
15
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
Keep your system up to date.
Check for Windows updates and install them.
Turn on File History.
Restore files with File History.
Use System Restore to revert Windows 8 to a previous state.
Use the Action Center to prevent problems.
Prevention is an important part of having a safe and pleasant computing experience.
Windows 8 offers a few tools to help you stay away from trouble for as long as possible
and, if you do have trouble, restore your lost user files.
The first and most important tool for preventing problems is Windows Update. In this
chapter, you'll learn about its role in keeping your computer running smoothly, how it
works, and how to use it to keep your system up to date. You'll learn how to use the new
File History feature in Windows 8 to make automated backups of your user folders, librar-
ies, and files and to restore files from those backups. In addition, you'll learn about System
Restore and how to use it to revert to an earlier and more stable state if you encounter
problems and how to use the Action Center to stay informed about the maintenance and
security of your system so you can spot problems before they have a major impact on your
system.
PRACTICE FILES You don't need any practice files to complete the exercises in this chapter.
For more information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the
beginning of this book.
423
Keeping Your System Up to Date with
Windows Update
Keeping your system up to date is important for keeping it as secure and trouble-free as
possible. Viruses and other forms of malware that exploit security problems in Windows
and other operating systems appear on a daily basis. Being up to date means having fewer
security issues and fewer chances for your computer to become infected and exploited by
unauthorized parties.
Windows Update also includes stability and compatibility fixes that solve problems you
might encounter with your system; other updates can add functionality. One good example
is service packs, which help maintain your security, add new features to Windows, and
keep your performance levels up to date. Another important type of update is drivers for
your computer's components. Windows Update automatically installs the newest versions
of signed drivers for your system's components, which keep your system's performance at
good levels.
All these are good reasons for you to have Windows Update turned on at all times and
configured to install the most important updates automatically. It is enabled by default in
Windows 8, and it should be active and working on your system. The only exceptions are
business computers and devices on which the updates and the update policy are handled
by the IT support staff.
You can find Windows Update in both PC Settings and Control Panel. In PC Settings, you
have a simplified version of the tool that shows information about available updates and
enables you to check for new updates manually and install those that are available.
424 Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
PC settings
Notifications
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
HomcGroup
Windows Update
You're set to automatically install updates
We'll iriitall 2 important updates, automatically.
They'll be installed during your PC's scheduled maintenance.
I hese updates were tound today. We'll continue to check tor newer updates daily.
Check for updates now
In Control Panel, open System And Security and then Windows Update.
Control Panel ► System and Security ►
Control Panel Home
System and Security
Network and Internet
Hardware and Sound
Programs
User Accounts and Fan-
Safety
Appearance and
Personalization
Clock, Language, and
Ease of Access
Region
^
Action Center
Review your computer's status and resolve issues
(§j' Change User Account Control settings Trcubleshcct common computer problems
Windows Firewall
Check firewall status Allow an app through Windows Firewall
|B System
W View amount of RAM and
nd processor speed ^ Allow remote access
nrh rprnntp a^kt-anrp W thp namp r.f t-hir. rrmm itpr tffil Dpvirp Mananpr
&
~N
— ktv Windows Update
-^^r Turn automatic updating on or off
Check for updates
Install optional
updates
View update history
c
— '
Power Options
Change b attery setti n g s Req u i re a pa ssword wh en th e com puter wa kes
Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps
[Yjl File History
Save ba cku p c o p i es of yo u r f i I es with Fi I e H i story Resto re yo ur files with Fi I e H i sto ry
r-Jfc BitLocker Drive Encryption
W^ Manage BitLocker
f.:^ Storage Spaces
c^P" Manage Storage Spaces
_g Add features to Windows 3
jr^ ^ Get more features with a new edition of Windows
j^^Administr^tiveJbols^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^
Keeping Your System Up to Date with Windows Update 425
From Control Panel, you can customize many aspects of how Windows Update works by
using the options found in the left-side column.
■ CHECK FOR UPDATES With this option, you can check for new updates manually.
■ CHANGE SETTINGS This option opens a list of all the Windows Update settings that
can be customized.
■ VIEW UPDATE HISTORY This option shows a list of all the updates that have been
installed on your system with complete information about what they do, when they
were installed, and so on.
■ RESTORE HIDDEN UPDATES With this option, you can restore updates that have
been hidden and marked as unavailable for your system.
m
Windows Update - n 1
© ▼ t & ► Control Panel
> System and Security ► Windows Update v ij Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
Windows Update
Check for updates
Change settings
View update history-
Restore hidden updates
1 Yo j ' re s et to a u to m at i ca 1 1 y i n sta 1 1 j p d a te s
-^ 1 important update is available
Most recent check for updates: Today at 2:20 PM
U p d ates were i n sta 1 1 ed : Yesterd ay at 1 2:27 P M .
You receive updates: For Windows only.
Get updates for other Microsoft products. Find cut more
See also
Installed Updates
!§j> Ad d f eatu res to Wi n d ows 3
426
Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
Checking for and Installing Available
Updates
Windows handles the installation of updates automatically. However, you can check for
updates manually and install them at any time. PC Settings only shows you the important
updates that are available, and you can install them at one time.
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
HomeGroup
Windows Update
You're set Id automatically Install updates
We'll install 1 impuiLdnl upddLe auLurnaikaSly.
:': ;:■: -;::l :; cj"-~ .■:■..- ~Z ;;;■-,: ::■., :;: to ■:.:-■:.■-.:.: "h; ..or.K ..j: f :--: ■ tocij,-
1 important update
Windows Defender
Definition Update fur Windows Defender - KB2^67602 (Definiliun 1....
However, you cannot select individual updates to be installed. This can be done only from
the Control Panel. There, you can clear the updates you don't want installed. From the
Control Panel you can also install optional updates that are available for Windows 8. These
updates are not shown in PC Settings.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to check for updates manually and install the available
updates from PC Settings.
SET UP Make sure you have a working Internet connection. Open PC Settings.
1 Click or tap Windows Update.
Checking for and Installing Available Updates 427
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
HomeGroup
Windows Update
You're set to automatically install updates
We'll install 1 important update automatically.
It'll be installed during your PC's scheduled maintenance. This update was found today.
We'll continue to check tor newer updates daily.
Check for updates now
2 Click or tap Check for updates now and wait a few seconds for the process to finish.
3 Click or tap the line summarizing the results to view a list of the updates found.
4 Click or tap Install.
PC settings
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
HomeGroup
Windows Update
You're set to automatically install updates
We'll install 1 important updaLe automatically.
:': ;:■: -;::i :: ;j"'; ,o,.- "C; ;.:■':::■..::: -<■:. -::-■:■•.:: "h : j;-dJtc was fc^nJ today.
1 important update
Windows Defender
Definition Update fur Windows Defender - KB2267602 (Definition 1....
428
Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
CLEAN UP Close PC Settings at anytime, even if the updates are still being down-
loaded and installed.
The download and installation process for all the available updates is handled in the back-
ground by Windows Update. Its window does not need to remain open. You can continue
your normal computing activities while the updates are installed.
Using File History in Windows 8
File History is a new feature introduced in Windows 8 that allows users to back up the files
in their libraries, contacts, favorites, and desktop. The backup is handled automatically by
Windows 8 after this feature is turned on and the backup location is available.
File History backs up only your users' libraries and the folders specified in the preceding
paragraph. If you want to have file copies made for other folders, you must include them in
one of your user libraries.
TIP To learn more about libraries and how to create a library and add folders to it, see
Chapter 4, "Saving, Browsing, and Organizing Files and Folders."
File History also stores the versions you create for any file, depending on how you set it, so
you can revert to a previous version of a file if you need to.
Using File History in Windows 8 429
File History
f '/£■) ► Control Panel ► System and Security ► File History
v (^ Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
Restore personal files
Select drive
Exclude folders
Advanced settings
See also
Recovery
Windows 7 File Recovery
Keep a history of your files
File History saves copies of your files so you can get them back if they're lost or damaged.
I File History is off
Copy files from: libraries, desktop, contacts, favorites and SkyDrive
Copyfilesto: tJ1 „ „, %
HJ _ My Passport (H:]
C^^ 930 GB free of 931 G B
File History works best with external drives such as hard disk drives or large USB memory
sticks that have sufficient space for the file copies. You can also make copies on network
locations such as folders from another computer or a home server if you have one available.
File copies can be restored at any time on the same computer or on other Windows devices
and computers. This can be useful if your system crashes or encounters problems with data
corruption. By using File History, you can make sure that your important data is always
backed up and available.
430
Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
The file copies are made on the target drive (or network location) by using the following
folder structure: File History>Your User Account Name>Your Computer Name. There you
will find two folders.
■ CONFIGURATION Files with File History settings
■ DATA The file copies
WIN8PRO-LAPTOP
D
Home Share View
*Cut
© Copy path
»» *■* SIS
Copy Paste Move Copy Delete Rename New
[U Paste shortcut to , to , , fo | der
Clipboard Organize
* t « FileHistory ► Ciprian ► WINflPRO- LAPTOP
New item T
■ f^ Easy access ™
New
p\ ||| Open -
^ 0Edit
roperties
'/Ej History
Open
-jT Favorites
Name
W Desktop
Configuration
$ Downloads
Data
£f| Recent places
■fli SkyDrive
v 6 Search WINSPRC
Date modified Type
3/21 /2012 6:10 PM File folder
fl/21 /2012 6:13 PM File folder
The File History window is organized simply.
■ On the left is a column that gives you access to different configuration options.
■ In the center you can view its status: on or off.
■ In the center you can also see where file copies are stored.
■ Beneath that you can view when the last file copies were made.
■ On the right is a button for turning File History on and off.
Using File History in Windows 8
431
Access to different
configuration options
®
Control Pan
''4£f ► Control Panel ► System and Security ► File Hi:tory
Home
v C Search Control Panel
*
Restore personal files
Select drive
Exclude folders
Advanced settings
See 3 ;c
Recovery
Windows 7 File Recovery
Keep a history of your files
File History saves copies of yourfiles so you can get them back if they're lost or damaged.
I File History is on
Copy files from: libraries, desktop, contacts, favorites and SkyDrive
Copy files to: . . „ „ , ,
K/ _. My Passport (HO
C^^ 929 GB free of 931 GB
Files last copied on 3/21/2012 6:10 PM.
Run now
The column on the left side of the File History window has the following links.
■ RESTORE PERSONAL FILES Starts the wizard for restoring files using the existing
copies. This will be covered in a step-by-step exercise later in this chapter.
■ SELECT DRIVE Enables you to change the drive on which file copies are made. You
can also add a network location if that suits your needs better.
432
Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
Select Drive
System and Security ► File History ► Select Drive
Select a File History drive
Choose a drive from thefollowing list, or enter a network location.
Available drives
Free space
This File History drive was already used.
Select an existing backup:
User name
Ciprian Rusen
Computer name
WIN8PR0- LAPTOP
Total space
Add network location
Last backup date
3/21 /2012 5:10 PM
EXCLUDE FOLDERS Enables you to exclude specific folders and libraries from backup
by File History.
Using File History in Windows 8 433
Exclude Foldei
System and Security ► File History ► Exclude Folders
Exclude from File History
If you don't want to save copies of specific folders or libraries, add them here.
Excluded folders and libraries:
D C:\Users\Ciprian\Desktop
J Pictures
Save changes
Advanced Settings Enables you to change the following settings.
■ SAVE COPIES OF FILES Sets how often file copies are made. The default is to save
copies of files every hour. The interval can be changed to almost anything from
every 10 minutes to daily.
■ SIZE OF OFFLINE CACHE Sets the percentage of disk space file copies can occupy
on the target drive. The default is 5 percent of disk space. It can be changed to
values ranging from 2 percent to 20 percent of disk space.
■ KEEP SAVED VERSIONS Sets how long you want to keep the different versions of
files. The default is to keep file versions forever. It can be set to keep versions until
space is needed on the target drive or for a set time ranging from one month to
two years.
434
Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
Advanced Settings
(*~) T T ^y w System and Security ► File History ► Advanced Settings v C Search Control Panel
Advanced settings
Choose how often you want to save copies of your files, and how long to keep saved versions,
Versions
Save copies of files:
Every hour (default]
5% of disk space (default]
Forever (default]
Clean up versions
Size of offline cache:
Keep saved versions:
Horn eG roup
If this PC is part of a homegroup, you can recommend this drive to other homegroup members.
\*/\ Recommend this drive
Event logs
'^p' Open File History event logs to view recent events or errors
Save changes
Turning On File History
After File History is turned on, it automatically starts creating copies of your files based on
its default schedule settings. When files are copied for the first time, you are informed in a
line of text just above the Turn Off button. If copies were created, you are shown the date
and time when they were last copied.
1 File History
is on
Copy files from:
libraries, desktop, contacts, favorites and SkyDrive
Copy files to:
;,
My Passport (H:]
930 GB free of 931 GB
File History
is saving copies of your files for the first time.
Stop
One important aspect to keep in mind is that File History is turned on only for your own
user account. If you want the files in other user accounts on the same Windows 8-based
computer or device to be backed up, turn on File History for each account.
Turning On File History 435
In this exercise, you'll learn how to turn on File History in Windows 8.
^3 SET U P Plug in an external hard disk or a USB memory stick. Wait for Windows 8 to
detect it and then open Control Panel.
1 Click or tap System and Security.
2 Click or tap File History to open the File History window.
®
File History
► Control Panel ► System and Security ► File History
v & Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
Restore personal files
Select drive
Exclude folders
Advanced settings
See also
Recovery
Windows 7 File Recovery
Keep a history of your files
File History saves copies of yourfiles so you can get them back if they're lost or damaged.
1 File History is off
Copyfilesfrom: libraries,, desktop, c o nta cts f f a vo rites a n d Sky D rive
Copyfilesto: bJ _
™ _ My Passport (HO
C-^^ 93 G B free of 931GB
Click or tap Turn on.
File History asks whether you want to recommend this drive to other members of
your homegroup.
Recommend a drive for File History
*
Do you want to recommend this d rive to
other members of your homegroup?
Yes No
4 Click or tap Yes.
436 Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
CLEAN UP Close the File History window and leave the external drive plugged into
your computer or device until the file copies are created.
File History is now turned on and will automatically save copies of your files according to its
default settings and when the external drive is available for making the copies. In addition,
Windows 8 will make the drive visible to other computers and devices on the homegroup
so that they can use it to back up their files, folders, and libraries with File History.
You can turn off File History by using the steps in the preceding exercise and clicking Turn
Off instead of Turn On.
Restoring Files with File History
Restoring files with File History is an easy process and can be done at any time. You can
restore complete folders and libraries as well as individual files. If you want to restore a
library, you select it. If you want to restore only one file, browse to its location and select it.
uments - File History
(£) t f MHomeXDocu merits
v O Search Documents p ft &
Tuesday, August 21, 2012 6:31 PM | 2of2
To select more than one item, press and hold the CTRL key on your keyboard while select-
ing each item with the mouse.
Restoring Files with File History 437
You can restore files to the location on your computer from which files were initially copied
or to a different location. If you want to restore a file to a different location, select it, click
the Options button, and then click or tap Restore To.
Options button
Documents - Hie Hi<
istory
(g) - f I lome\Document5
|o
v \ £r \ Search Documents
p fi
Tuesday, August 21, 2012 G:31 PM | 2of2
desktop, in i test.rtf testi.rtf tests.rtf
Set up File History
Help
About file History
Flit
1®
| Turn off
In this exercise, you'll learn how to restore folders and libraries previously backed up with
File History. Restore individual files by using the same steps but selecting files instead of
folders or libraries.
SET UP Plug in the drive on which your file history is stored. Wait for Windows 8 to
detect it and then open File History.
1 Click or tap Restore personal files.
The File History Wizard opens.
2 Select the libraries and folders you want restored.
3 Click or tap the Restore button to start the restoration procedure.
You are asked to confirm that you want to replace the existing files with the ones
from your backup.
438
Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
4
f
FileHistc,
t | Home
v \ & \ Search All
P ft #
Tuesday, August 21, 2012 6:32 PM | 5 of 5
- File folder (4)
Contacts Desktop Favorites SIcyDrive
^ Library (4)
A Jii
Documents Music Pictures Videos
Restore button
Click or tap Replace the files in the destination and wait for the files to be copied.
After the copying process completes, a File Explorer window opens, showing the files,
folders, and libraries you copied.
Replace or Skip Files
- n I
Copying 3 items from Documents to Public Documents
The destination has 3 files with the same names
*# Replace the files in the destination
^ Skip these files
R? Let me decide for each file
* Fewer details
%J CLEAN UP Close File Explorer and the File History window.
The selected folders and libraries are now restored to their original location.
Restoring Files with File History 439
Using System Restore
System Restore is an old and useful Windows application that can restore your system and
settings to a previous state. It can be used when you encounter problems and you need to
revert quickly to a previously working state without removing all your installed applications,
as is the case when using the Refresh feature introduced in Windows 8.
This feature is turned on by default in Windows 8 for the partition in which the operat-
ing system is installed. It automatically creates a new restore point each time you install a
new application or make important changes to your system such as installing a long list of
updates and drivers. These restore points can then be used to restore your system to an
earlier but stable state if you hit some stability or performance issues later.
System Propertie:
Computer Name Hardware Advanced System Protection Remote
fjfE) Use system protection to undo unwanted system changes.
m
System Restore
You can undo system changes by reve-. - g
your computer to a previous restore point.
System Restore...
Protection Settings
a My Passport (H:}
jAV-Testing (D:)
Protection
Off
Off
Configure restore settings, manage disk space,
and delete restore points.
Configure...
Create a restore point right now forthe drives that
have system protection turned on.
Apply
» Restore your system by using
a previous restore point
> Configure System Restore
^Create a manual restore point
440
Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
System Restore has one tab, System Protection, in the System Properties window. The tool is
straightforward and easy to use.
■ Use the System Restore button to start the wizard for restoring your system by using
a previous restore point.
■ The Protection Settings section contains a list of all the partitions available on your
computer or device. You can see whether the System Restore protection is turned on
or off in each partition.
■ When you select a partition, you can change its protection settings by using the
Configure button.
■ Use the Create button when you want to create a manual system restore point.
Having System Restore turned on is a good prevention practice. If you encounter issues, the
first and easiest step is to use this tool to restore your system to a previous and more stable
state.
Launching System Restore
In Windows 8, the System Restore tool is hidden behind menus and options, so it is not easy
to find. In this exercise, you'll learn how to launch System Restore.
SET UP Open the Control Panel.
1 Click or tap System and Security.
2 Click or tap System.
The System window, which contains information about your system's hardware and
software configuration, opens.
Launching System Restore 441
System and Security
\*~) T 1* * ► Control Panel ► System and Security ►
Control Panel Home
• System and Security
Network and Internet
Hardware and Sound
Programs
User Accounts and Family
Safety
Appearance and
Personalization
Clock, Language, and Region
Ease of Access
Action Center
Review your computer's status and resolve issues
!§j! Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems
Windows Firewall
1 1 System
* View amount of RAM and processor speed ^' Allow remote access
Launch remote assistance Seethe name of this computer (§j! Device Manager
^P_ ,
^** Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates Install optional updates
View update history
Vf^ Power Options
I
z^=
Change battery settings Require a password when the computer wakes
Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps
File History
Save ba cku p copi es of y ou r f i I es with File History Restoreyourfiles with File History
BitLocker Drive Encryption
Manage BitLocker
Storage Spaces
Manage Storage Spaces
Add features to Windows 3
^ Get more features with a new edition of Windows
Administrative Tools
Click or tap System protection in the left column.
The System Properties window, which contains System Restore, opens.
442 Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
Systei
©
T T D 1 ?* ► Control Panel ► System and Security ► System
v Cf Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
Device Manager
View basic information about your computer
Windows edition
Windows S Pro
© 2012 Microsoft Corporation,
All rights reserved.
Get mo re features with a new
edition of Windows
System
Rating:
Windows 8
tftJ Wind ows Experience Index
Processor: lntel(R] Core(TM)2Quad CPU Q900G @ 2.00GHz 2.00 GHz
Installed memory (RAM]: 6.00 GB
System type: 64- bit Operating System, x64- based processor
Pen and Touch: No Pen orTouch Input is availableforthis Display
See also
Action Center
Windows Update
Performance Information and
~cc ■:
Computer name, domain, and workgroup settings
Computer name: WinSPro-Laptop
Full computer name: WinSPro-Laptop
Computer description:
Workgroup: WORKGROUP
Windows activation
(^Change settings
.'-indc.'.: i: activated . ' = .. :■■-:.:■'■:'- , /indows Activation
^ ^^
CLEAN UP When done working with System Restore, close the System Properties
window.
The System Properties window is opened directly at the System Protection tab, where you
can find System Restore.
Restoring to a Previous State with System
Restore
If you have installed some new drivers that make your system unstable or you have some
performance issues, you can use System Restore to revert to an earlier and hopefully more
stable state.
Restoring to a Previous State with System Restore 443
Before starting the restoration process, you can click or tap Scan For Affected Programs.
Local Disk (C:) (System)
Scan far affected programs
This opens a new window in which you are shown a summary of the changes that will be
made to your system when the restoration process is complete. If you don't like the number
of changes that will be executed, you can select a more recent restore point (if available)
that makes fewer changes.
Description:
Date:
System Restore
manual
8/21/2012 6: 57:09 PM
Any programs that were added since the last restore point will be deleted and any
that were removed will be restored,
Programs and drivers that will be deleted:
Description
Type
CCleaner 3. 17
Program
FreeFileSync 5.5 5.5
Program
Programs and drivers that might be restored. These programs might not work correctly
after restore and might need to be reinstalled:
Description
Type
None detected,
After the restore process is started, it cannot be interrupted. It also involves a restart, so
before you go ahead with the process it is best to close any applications and current work.
444
Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
Once started, System Restore cannot be interrupted. Do you want
to continue?
System Restore cannot be undone until after it has completed, If System Restore is
being run in safe mode or from the System Recovery Options menu, it cannot be
undone.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to use System Restore to restore Windows 8 to a previous
state.
SET UP Open System Restore.
1 Click or tap System Restore.
The System Restore Wizard is opened.
2
3
jP System Restore
*
Restore system files and settings
System Restore can help fix problems that might be making your
computer run slowly or stop responding.
System Restore does not affect any of your documents,, pictures, or
other personal data. Recently installed programs and drivers might be
uninstalled.
< Back Next > Cancel
Click or tap Next.
You are asked to select the restore point to which you want to restore.
Select the restore point you want to use and click or tap Next.
You are informed of the changes that will be made.
Restoring to a Previous State with System Restore
445
l System Restore
Restore your computer to the state it was in before the selected event » ,
Current time zone: GTB Daylight Time
Date and Time Description Type
8/21/20 12 6 : 57: 09 PM manual Manual
Scan for affected programs
<Back | Next> Cancel
4 Click or tap Finish.
You are asked to confirm that you want to continue the process.
System Restore
Confirm your restore point
Your computer will be restored to the state it was in before the event
Mb /' . in the Description field below.
Time: 3/21/2012 6:57:09 PM (GTB Daylight Time)
Description: Manual: manual
Drives:
Local Disk (C:) (System)
If you have chan
that you create a
System Restore r
Before you proce
I:.-- ': :-"- - . : -
ged your Ulfridows password recently r we recommen
o-3s=-..ord reset disk.
eeds to restart your computer to apply these chang
edj save any open files and dose all programs.
i
< Back Finish Cancel
Click or tap Yes and wait for Windows 8 to restart and revert to the selected restore
point.
446 Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
I Once started, System Restore cannot be interrupted. Do you want
to continue?
System Restore cannot be undone until after it has completed. If System Restore is
being run in safe mode or from the System Recovery Options menu, it cannot be
undone.
%^ CLEAN UP Log on to Windows 8 and resume your computing activities.
Windows 8 is now restored to the selected restore point. Any changes made to your system
since that point are not available. Also, any applications that were installed after the restore
point was created are no longer available.
Using the Action Center
Windows 8 comes with a convenient way to help you review the state of your system and
find solutions to security and maintenance issues. The feature that facilitates this is called
Action Center, and it is built upon the foundation set by the Windows Security Center,
which was first introduced in Windows XP Service Pack 2 and then improved in Windows
Vista and Windows 7.
Action Center continuously monitors the state of your system. If it notices any kind of prob-
lem related to the security or good maintenance of your system, it immediately notifies
you so that you can take corrective action. Action Center monitors the following aspects of
Windows 8.
■ Whether Windows Update is turned on and working well.
■ Whether all Internet Security settings are set to their recommended levels.
■ Whether the network firewall is actively protecting your computer or device.
■ Whether your Microsoft account is working properly.
■ Whether you have an active tool providing spyware and related protection.
■ Whether User Account Control (UAC) is turned on.
■ Whether virus protection exists and is working well.
Using the Action Center 447
■ Whether the SmartScreen technology used in Internet Explorer and File Explorer is
turned on.
■ Whether Windows Backup is working well when Windows 8 users use this feature.
■ Whether automatic maintenance scheduled and performed automatically by
Windows 8 is active and working well. This maintenance includes checking for the lat-
est software updates, making a security scan of your system, and running some quick
system diagnostics to search for new problems.
■ Whether all your drives are working well.
■ Whether you need additional drivers and software installed for some of your com-
puter's hardware devices.
■ Whether there are any ongoing problems that can be fixed by using Windows
troubleshooting tools.
■ Whether a homegroup is available.
■ Whether File History is turned on and working well.
■ Whether Storage Space is working well when Windows 8 users use this more
advanced feature.
When a problem is detected, the user is notified and guided in what he or she could do to
fix it. As you can see, Action Center is an important tool for preventing problems with your
system.
On the Desktop, in the notification area of the Windows 8 taskbar, there's always a
little white flag icon. This is the icon of Action Center. When there are messages for the
user, it is overlaid by other icons: a red x or a black clock. The red x overlay means there
is at least one important message, so you need to pay attention. The black clock overlay
means a scheduled task is running in the background (for example, a scheduled Windows
Defender scan).
Hover over the flag icon to see a tooltip, giving you some brief information about what is
happening with your system.
I Solve PC issues: 3 important messages
I 4 total messages
448 Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
To see the list of messages you should read, click or tap the Action Center icon (the white
flag).
' 3 important messages
i 4 total messages
Turn on spyware protection (Important]
Turn on virus protection (Important]
jPTurn on Windows Firewall (Important]
^ Finish installing device software
To open Action Center and view more details, click or tap Open Action Center.
3 important messages
1 4 total messages
Turn on spyware protection (Important]
Turn on virus protection (Important]
?Turn on Windows Firewall (Important]
? Finish installing device software
As an alternative, you can search for the words action center in the Start screen and click or
tap the appropriate search result.
Reviewing the list of messages displayed by Action Center is simple. No complicated jar-
gon is involved, and you just see what the tool recommends to keep your computer in top
shape. Each message has a button that takes you directly to where you need to fix things.
For example, in the following screenshot, Action Center says Turn On Windows Firewall. A
click or tap of the Turn On Now button, visible for this warning, quickly turns on this secu-
rity feature of Windows 8.
Using the Action Center
449
Action Center
p' ► Control Panel ► System and Security ► Action Center
Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
Change Action Center settings
Change User Account Control
settings
Change Windows SrnartScreen
settings
View archived messages
View performance information
Review recent messages and resolve problems
Action Center has detected one or more issues for you to review.
Security
©
See also
File History
Windows Update
Windows Program
Compatibility Troubleshooter
I
Spywareand unwanted software protection (Important]
£&j Windows Defender is turned off.
Turn off messages about spyware and unwanted
software protection
Find an app onlineto help protect
my PC
Virus protection (Important]
i&j Windows Defender is turned off.
Turn off messages about virus protection
Find an app onlineto help protect
my PC
Network firewall (Important)
^ Windows Firewall is turned off or set up incorrectly.
Turn off messages about network firewall
Turn on n
Find an app onlineto help protect
my PC
Maintenance
©
Finish installing device software
One or more devices connected to your PC needs additional software to
Install
The same thing happens with the recommendation to install software for your devices.
Clicking or tapping Install automatically starts the download and installation process for
that missing software.
TIP All messages that Action Center displays have the following color coding: Red means a
very important message that you should not ignore; yellow means a recommendation that
can be ignored if you do not consider it important.
Configuring the Messages Action Center
Shows
Another great thing about Action Center is that it is very configurable. You can easily cus-
tomize which types of alerts and messages you want to receive, depending on how you
have configured your Windows 8 installation and the additional software you have installed.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to configure the list of messages Action Center shows you.
450
Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
C^ SET UP Open Action Center.
2
3
4
Click or tap Change Action Center settings on the upper-left side of the Action
Center window.
Select the boxes for the messages you want to receive.
Clear the boxes for the messages you do not want to receive.
Click or tap OK.
r
Change Action Center settings
©
^ f ^ « Action Center ► Change Action Center settings
v (J Search Control Panel
P
Turn messages on or off
*
: : ■:- : • :■: -. v.\: ■= ~ ■ ■ ■ : : : : ; : -:
problems and send you a message if problems are found,
Windows. Update
[Vl Spyware and unwanted software protection
Internet security settings
User Account Control
Network firewall
Virus protection
Microsoft account
[V] SmartScreen
\*7\ Windows activation
\*7\ Windows Backup
[V| Windows Troubleshooting
[V] Automatic Maintenance
[V] HomeGroup
Drive status
File History
[Vl Device software
[Vl Storage Spaces
</ Startup apps
V
OK | Cancel |
CLEAN UP Close Action Center.
Action Center will now show only messages for the items you allow it to check on a con-
tinuous basis.
IMPORTANT It's strongly recommended not to disable the messages from the Security
category If there are security issues with your computer, you would miss important alerts that
could help you fix them.
Configuring the Messages Action Center Shows 451
Key Points
Windows Update is a key feature for preventing problems and for securing your
system.
File History can be set to back up your important user folders, libraries, and files
automatically.
You can restore files with File History to the location where they were originally stored
or to a new, custom location.
You can use System Restore when you have stability or performance problems to
revert to an earlier and more stable system state.
Action Center keeps you informed of the status of your system's security and regular
maintenance tasks.
452 Chapter 15 Preventing Problems
Enable
Enable Family Safety, page 461
Set up how Child will use the PC
Family^
■:•:■ On, enforce current settings *
^OOff ^J
Activity reporting.
ijij On, collect information about PC usage
O off
Windows settings:
£J^ Web filtering
Control the website: Child can access online
rts Tii
\J Cc
me limits
Control when Child uses the PC
Define
Define restrictions for games and apps,
page 471
Rating Level
Allow or Block Games
Allow or block games and Windows Store aj
Set game and Windows Store ratings
Maximum allowed rating: EVERYONE 1C
Allow ^i-i^'- — ■ ~-™~ ■-"tv"' ir PC by nan
Always allowed: None
Set
Set time limits and application restrictions,
page 460
O Child can use the PC a
■:•:■ Child can only use the
Iday
PC during the
irne rar
: H e -
lal
ow
Set times when Child can't use PC at all
Midnight (AM] | Noon iPM]
12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 Z 3 4
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
|_| Allowed
I Blocked
Create
Create restrictions for websites and
downloads, page 475
Control Panel Home
Allow or block specific websites f
User Settings
Web Filtering
Web Restrictions
Allow or Block Websites
Enter a website to allow or block,
Allowed website;:
Supervising a Child's
Computer Use
16
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Enable Family Safety.
■ Set time limits and application restrictions.
■ Define restrictions for games.
■ Create restrictions for websites and downloads.
Children use computers and gadgets at a very young age for many purposes: to have fun,
to learn, to communicate, to socialize, and so on. In today's world, such devices are an inte-
gral part of their life. That's why, as a parent, it is important to educate children about how
to use these devices and how to stay safe, but also about the implications of using them for
long periods of time.
Windows 8 has a great feature, Family Safety, that can help parents educate children and
control their computing habits. This feature helps parents define when children can use the
computer, what games they are allowed to play, which apps they are allowed to use, and
what kinds of websites they can browse on the Internet.
In this chapter, you'll learn how to turn on Family Safety; how to define time limits; and how
to apply restrictions for games, applications, websites, and downloads.
PRACTICE FILES You don't need any practice files to complete the exercises in this chapter.
For more information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the
beginning of this book.
455
Turning on Family Safety
Before setting up Family Safety, you need to create a standard user account with no admin-
istrator permissions for your child. If your child's user account has administrator permissions,
he or she will have all the required rights to override any controls you apply.
TIP To learn more about user accounts and how to set them up, see Chapter 12, "Allowing
Others to Use the Computer."
After you have created a user account for your child, you can enable Family Safety and con-
figure all the limitations that can be defined (allowed websites, time limits, game, and apps
ratings). At the beginning, the setting for these limitations is Off, so even if Family Safety
is enabled no limitations are defined for your child's user account. He or she is free to do
anything on the computer, so configure the limitations you want applied one by one. You'll
learn how to do this throughout the sections of this chapter.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to enable Family Safety.
^^ SET UP Open Control Panel.
1 Click or tap User Accounts and Family Safety to access all the settings related to
administering user accounts.
2 Click or tap Family Safety to see a list of the user accounts for which Family Safety
can be set up.
456 Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
User Accounts and Family Safety
3&j ► Control Panel ► User Accounts and Family Safety ►
v c
Control Panel Home
System and Security
Network and Internet
Hardware and Sound
Programs.
• User Accou n 1 5 a n d F a m i I y
Safety
Appearance and
Personalization
Clock, Language, and Region
Ease of Access
jCja User Accounts
" J •■_! a j Change account type 'j^ 1 Remove user accounts
Family Safety
^J Set up Family Safety for any user
'-3
Credential Manager
Manage Web Credentials Manage Windows Credentials
Mail (Microsoft Outlook 15) (32-bit)
3 Select your child's user account (which, for the purposes of illustration in this exercise,
is named Child) to open User Settings.
Turning on Family Safety 457
© - t
Control Panel Home
Rating System:;
Family Safety
« User Accounts and Family Safety ► Family Safety
* 6
Search Control Panel
See also
User Accounts
Choose a user and set up Family Safety
Use Family Safety to get reports of your kids' PC activities, choose what they see
online, and set time limits, app restrictions, and more. You can managethese
settings on this PC, or on the Family Safety website.
Child
Standard user
Password protected
Ciprian Rusen
PC administrator
Password protected
If you want to apply Family Safety to someonewho isn't in this list, create a new
user account for them to use.
4 Select On, enforce current settings.
458
Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
«
User Settings
▼ T ^ « Family Safety ► User Settings
Control Panel Home
6 Search Control Panel fi
Set up how Child will use the PC
Accounts to Monitor
• User Settings
Current settings:
Activity n
(■) On, collect information about PC usage
Ootf
Windows settings:
£k Web filtering
r Control thewebsites Child can access online
Child
Standard user
Password protected
View activity reports
e limits
Control when Child uses the PC
<J Cc
W Windows Store and game restrictions
t* Control by rating or title
S t App restri cti c n s
\ Control the apps allowed on your PC
Web filtering: Allow all
Time limits: Off
Game restrictions: Off
App restrictions: Off
5 Select On, collect information about PC usage.
CLEAN UP Close the User Settings window.
Family Safety is now enabled using the default settings, which do not impose any
restrictions.
Setting Time Limits and Application
Restrictions
Now that Family Safety is enabled, define the restrictions you want. The easiest restrictions
you can define are related to the times when your child can use the computer and which
applications he or she is allowed to use.
Time restrictions can be defined for each day of the week and for the hours in a day. A sim-
ple table displays the hours you want to block. When selected, all the blocked hours appear
Setting Time Limits and Application Restrictions 459
blue. The hours that appear white represent hours when computer usage is allowed. You
can change a time slot from allowed to blocked and vice versa by clicking or tapping it.
rnrf
(*-J T 1* tffi « Family Safety ► User Settings ► Time Limits ► Curfew v <j Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home Tjpl _. .. . . ___
When can Child use the PC?
User Settings Q Child can use the PC all day
Time Limits ■:•:■ Child can only use the PC during thetime ranges I allow
Time Allowance Settimeswhen Child can't use PC at all
* Curfew
Midnight [AM] | Noon (PM]
12 1 2 3 4 5 5 7 3 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 9 10 11 12
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
| | Allowed
■ Blocked
You can also set restrictions on how many hours and minutes your child is allowed to use
the computer each day. The restrictions can be set independently for each day of the week
or for weekdays and the weekend.
460
Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
Time Allowance
©
- t
i« User Settings ► Time Limits ► Time Allowance
Control Panel Home
User Settings
Time Limits
* Time Allowance
Curfew
(a) Weekdays:
I 3
v hour:
1 30
v minutes
Monday
I 3
v hours
1 30
v minutes
Tuesday
I 3
v hours
1 30
v minutes
Wednesday
I 3
v hours
1 30
v minutes
Thursday
I 3
v hours
1 30
v minutes
Friday
I 3
v hours
1 30
v minutes
P) Weekend:
Sat - Sun
I 4
v hours
1 30
v minutes
Saturday
I 4
v hours
1 30
v minutes
Sunday
I 4
v hours
1 30
v minutes
Search Control Panel
Control how long Child can use the PC
O Child can use the PC all day
• •:■ Child can only use the PC forthe amount of time I allow
When you turn on Family Safety, no application restrictions are enforced; you need to cre-
ate such restrictions and manually select which applications your child is allowed to use. The
list of applications is split into two columns, File and Description, and into sections based on
their locations on the disk. In a list of the most common folders, you can find applications
and, for each folder, the executable files of each application. Based on all this information,
you can figure out which applications to allow and block. The applications that are not
selected are blocked by default.
Setting Time Limits and Application Restrictions 461
«
_ n
■
m
@ t f 9f « Family Safety
► User Settings ► App Restrictions
v <i Search Control Panel fi
Control Panel Home
User Settings
Which apps can Child use?
a
! This person can only run apps needec
by Windows.
• App Restrictions
■
( ) Child can use all apps
■:•:■ Child can only use the apps 1 allow
Check the apps that can be used:
File
Description
A
DIllBing
Microsoft Corporation
EH Camera
Microsoft Corporation
D iffi Finance
Microsoft Corporation
Games
Microsoft Corporation
Mail, Calendar, People,, and Messaging
Microsoft Corporation
D^Maps
Microsoft Corporation
EH Music
Microsoft Corporation
□ News
Microsoft Corporation
Dill Photos
Microsoft Corporation
□ Reader
Microsoft Corporation
D^-. Sky Drive
Microsoft Corporation
□ ^Sports
Microsoft Corporation
>
V
Add an app to this list: | Browse... |
Check all | Uncheckall
V
When defining restrictions for applications, keep in mind that all the new Windows 8 apps
have their own section, called Windows Store apps. It's at the top of the list of apps.
Checkthe appsthat can be used:
File Description
Windows Store apps
IZIIllBing Microsoft Corporation
Camera Microsoft Corporation
Finance Microsoft Corporation
Games Microsoft Corporation
Mail, Calendar, People, and Messaging Microsoft Corporation
d Maps Microsoft Corporation
I I Music Microsoft Corporation
d News Microsoft Corporation
p 'Photos Microsoft Corporation
Reader Microsoft Corporation
l~l SkyDrive Microsoft Corporation
Microsoft Corporation
462
Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
You might not find some apps included in this list. In that case, scroll to the bottom of the
window, click or tap Browse, navigate to the app you want to allow, and then select it.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to set restrictions for time limits and set allowed applica-
tions. The exercise will start by setting time limits to block computer usage for your child's
user account between 10 P.M. and 7 A.M. each day. Then you'll allow usage of specific sub-
set of all the apps available in Windows 8.
^3 SET UP Open Family Safety and select your child's user account.
1 In Windows Settings, click or tap Time Limits.
The Time Limits window opens.
2 Click or tap Set curfew.
The Curfew window opens.
Control when Child can use the PC
Set the number of hours Child can use the PC per day
Set time allowance
3 Click or tap the option that starts with your child's user name followed by can only
use the PC during the time ranges I allow.
Setting Time Limits and Application Restrictions 463
$& Curfew
T T <c& w Family Safety ► User Settings ► Time Limits ► Curfew
Control Panel Home
User Settings
Time Limits
TimeAllowance
• Curfew
v & Search Control Panel
Midnight (AM] | Noon (PM)
12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 S 9 10 11 12
Sunday
Monday
Tuesday
Wednesday
Thursday
Friday
Saturday
n Allowed
n Blocked
4 Highlight the squares in the table so that your child is not allowed to use the com-
puter each day between 10 P.M. and 7 A.M. The table should look similar to the pre-
ceding screenshot.
5 When you have finished setting the time slots, click or tap User Settings on the left-
side panel.
You return to the User Settings window.
6 To set app restrictions, click or tap App restrictions.
You are asked to choose whether your child can use all apps or only those you allow.
464 Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
«
User Settings
©
,« Family Safety ► User Settings.
Control Panel Home
Accounts to Monitor
User Settings
Set up how Child will use the PC
Family Safety:
■:•:■ On, enforce current setting:
OOff
Activity reporting:
(■) On, collect information about PC usage
OOff
Windows settings:
9
S2
Web filtering
Control thewebsites Child can access online
e limits
Control when Child uses the PC
W Windows Store and game restrictions
C o ntrol by rating or title
6 Search Control Panel fi
Current settings:
Child
Standard user
Password protected
View activity reports
Web filtering: Allow all
Time limits: On
Game restrictions: Off
App restrictions: Off
7 Select can only use the apps I allow appended to the name of the user account (in
this exercise, Child can only use the apps I allow).
A list of all the applications installed on your computer appears.
Setting Time Limits and Application Restrictions 465
App Restriction
(V) ▼ T $1 « Family Safety ► User Settings. ► App Restrictions
Control Panel Home
Search Control Panel
User Settings
• App Restrictions
Which apps can Child use?
Checkthe app: that can be used:
File
Description
A
*T- r setlang.exe
Microsoft Office 15 Language Preferences
msouoexe
Microsoft Office Upload Center
EHElonenote.exe
Microsoft OneNote
□ Efloutlook.exe
Microsoft Outlook
d Eu powerpnt.exe
Microsoft PowerPoint
r~lFIlmspub.exe
Microsoft Publisher
1 l^wi nword.exe
Microsoft Word
r ■■ n c\ mjw j i i
A
d Jjfl Joumal.exe
Windows Journal
A
*
frlwordpad.exe
Windows Wordpad Application
V
Add an app to this list:
8 For this exercise, select wordpad.exe in C:\Program Files\Windows NT\Accessories.
9 Scroll to Windows Store apps and view all the new Windows 8 apps.
466
Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
&
App Restrictions
□ 1
(£) t f ^ « Family Safety
► User Settings ► App Restrictions
v & Search Control Panel
»
Control Panel Home
Which apps can Child use?
User Settings
O Child can use all apps
• App Restrictions
■:•:■ Child can only use the apps 1 allow
Check the app: that can be used:
File
Description
a
1 1 Camera
Microsoft Corporation
Finance
Microsoft Corporation
Games
Microsoft Corporation
Mail, Calendar, People, and Messaging
Microsoft Corporation
Maps
Microsoft Corporation
Music
Microsoft Corporation
□ News
Microsoft Corporation
Dill Photos
Microsoft Corporation
Reader
Microsoft Corporation
Sky Drive
Microsoft Corporation
Sports
Microsoft Corporation
Dll Travel
Microsoft Corporation
□ Video
Microsoft Corporation
0O Weather
Microsoft Corporation
V
Add an app to this list: | Browse... |
| Check all |
Uncheckall
10 Select the following apps to allow your child to use them: Mail, Calendar, People and
Messaging, Maps, Music, Reader, and Weather.
Cj CLEAN UP Close the App Restrictions window.
IMPORTANT The tricky part about blocked apps is that Family Safety will allow some of the
Windows-specific apps to run even if they are not marked as allowed (such as Calculator and
Internet Explorer). However, any third-party apps that are installed on the computer won't be
allowed to run on your child's user account unless marked as allowed. In addition, when you
want to allow an application that uses more than one executable file while you run it, it is best to
allow all its executable files, not just the main one. This helps ensure that an application won't fail
because only some of its executable files are allowed to run.
Setting Time Limits and Application Restrictions 467
Setting Restrictions for Games and Windows
Store Apps
Another control feature that you might want to use sets up restrictions on the kinds of
games your child can play. This can be very important, especially if he or she is very young.
Family Safety makes it very easy to set such restrictions. All the options you need are in the
Game Controls window.
■ You can approve and block games based on their ESRB (Entertainment Software
Rating Board) rating: Early Childhood, Everyone, Everyone 10+, Teen, Mature, and
Adults Only. You have a detailed description of what each rating means so that you
can make an informed choice.
■ You can block games that are not rated by ESRB. This can be very useful if your child
plays games from smaller independent studios whose games are not rated by ESRB.
■ You can allow or block individual games. The individual overrides you choose overrule
other general restrictions you have set for games.
The restrictions you set for ratings are also applied to the apps that your child can install
from the Windows Store. Apps that don't conform to the rating you set won't be allowed.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to set restrictions for the games and apps your child is
allowed to play. You'll allow games and apps that have a rating of up to Everyone 10+ and
block games that have no rating. You'll also block your child from playing any of the games
installed on the computer.
^3 SET UP Open Family Safety and select your child's user account.
1 In Windows Settings, click or tap Windows Store and game restrictions.
You are asked to set the games and apps your child may use.
2 Select can only use games and Windows Store apps I allow appended to the name
of the user account (in this exercise, Child can only use games and Windows Store
apps I allow).
468 Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
$& Game and Windows Store Restrictions
T T <c& w User Settings ► Game and Windows Store Restrictions v ^
Control Panel Home
Search Control Panel
User Settings
* Gam e and Windows Store
Restrictions
Rating Level
Allow or Block Games
Control which games and Windows Store apps Child can use
.an pray aN games and view all winnow JL — —imi
■:•:■ Child can only use games and Windows Store apps I allow
Allow or block games and Windows Store apps by rating
Set game and Windows Store ratings
Maximum allowed rating: ADULTS ONLY, including unrated games
Allow or block any game on your PC by name
Allow or block specific games
Always blocked: None
Always allowed: None
3 Click Set game and Windows Store ratings.
The Rating Level window opens, displaying a list of restrictions you can define.
4 Select Block games with no rating.
Setting Restrictions for Games and Windows Store Apps
469
«
Rating Level
T <t& M Game and Windows Store Restrictions ► Rating Level
©
Control Panel Home
User Settings
Game and Windows Store
Restrictions
* Rating Level
Allow or Block Games
v & Search Control Panel
Control which games and Windows Store apps Child can use
If a game has no rating, can Child play it?
Which ratings are OKfor Child?
The Entertainment Software Rating Board defines these ratings.
(esrb)
fc l EARLY CHILDHOOD
/j^^lTitles rated EC - Early Childhood have content that may be L'.iiteble for age; Z and older.
I Titles in this category contain no material that parents would find inappropriate.
o
EVERYONE
Titles rated E - Everyone have content that may be suitable for persons ages 6 and older.
Titles in this category may contain minimal violence, some comic mischeif, and/or
mild language.
EVERYONE 10+
Titles rated E10+ - Everyone 10 and older have content that may be suitable for ages 10
and older. Titles in this category may contain more cartoon, fantasy or mild violence,
mild language and/or minimal suggestive themes.
tft
TEEN
Titles rated T - Teen have content that may be suitable for persons ages 1 3 and older.
Titles in this category may contain violent content, mild or strong language, and/or
strong language,
MATURE
Titles rated M - Mature have content that maybe suitable for persons ages 17 and older.
Titles in this category may contain mature sexual themes, more intense violence and/or
strong language,
5 Scroll down a bit and select EVERYONE 10+ to allow titles with this maximum rating.
6 Click or tap Game and Windows Store Restriction in the left-side column.
7 Click Allow or block specific games.
The Allow Or Block Games window opens.
470
Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
Game and Windows Store Restrictions
T T ^& « User Settings ► Game and Windows Store Restrictions
Control Panel Home
v 6
Search Control Panel
User Settings
* Gam e and Windows Store
Restrictions
Rating Level
Allow or Block Games
Control which games and Windows Store apps Child can use
O Child can play all games and view all Windows Store apps
(m;.< Child can only use games and Windows Store apps I allow
Allow or block games and Windows Store apps by rating
Set game and Windows Store ratings
Maximum allowed rating: EVERYONE 10+
Allow ^rj" 1 "^'- ~~y ~— "ny^ir PC by name
8 Select Always block for each game you want to block.
Setting Restrictions for Games and Windows Store Apps 471
Allow or Block Games
t f ^fi£ « Game and Windows Store Restricti... ► Allow or Block Games v £
Control Panel Home
User Settings
Game and Windows Store
Restrictions
Rating Level
* Allow or B lock Gam es
Control specific games Child can and can't play
Allowed ratings: Ec - EARLY CHILDHOOD, E - EVERYONE, E10+- - EVERYONE 10+
Title/Rating
FIFA 12 DEMO
No rating provided
Status
Can't play
User rating setti ng Al ways a 1 1 ow
o o
Always
block
CLEAN UP Close the Allow Or Block Games window.
The game and apps restrictions you have defined are now applied to your child's user
account. Before setting these restrictions, take the time to look through all the types of
content that can be blocked and select all those you consider appropriate. The preceding
exercise showed only the steps involved in this procedure and was not making recom-
mendations for the types of content that should be blocked for a child depending on his or
her age.
472
Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
Setting Restrictions for Websites and
Downloads
Another important feature in Family Safety is the ability to filter the websites to which
your child has access. Microsoft has a large database that can categorize websites and the
type of content found on them. By using just one setting, you can ensure that your child is
blocked from accessing websites that are not appropriate for his or her age. Turning on web
restrictions also turns on the SafeSearch settings found in all popular search engines such as
Bing and Google. The web searches your child initiates will be filtered to prevent access to
adult content of any kind.
You have five restriction levels from which to choose.
■ ALLOW LIST ONLY Your child can view only the websites you have added to the
Allow List. All other sites, including adult sites, are blocked.
■ CHILD-FRIENDLY Your child can view only websites you specifically marked as
allowed and those with child-friendly content. Adult sites are blocked.
■ GENERAL INTEREST Your child can view only websites you specifically marked as
allowed, those with child-friendly content, and those with content of general interest.
Adult sites are blocked.
■ ONLINE COMMUNICATION This setting applies the same restrictions as the previ-
ous level, but it also allows social networking sites, web chat, and webmail. Adult sites
are blocked.
■ WARN ON ADULT Your child is allowed to view all websites but receives a warning
when a site has adult content.
Setting Restrictions for Websites and Downloads 473
9
®
- T
Web Restrictions
. « User Settings ► Web Filtering ► Web Restrictions
v e
Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
User Settings
Web Filtering
• Web Restrictions
Allow or Block Websites
Which websites can Child visit?
Choose a web restriction level:
O Allow list only
The child can view websites on the Allow List. Adult sites are blocked.
Click hereto change Allow List.
O Designed for children
The child can view websites on the Allow list and websites designed for children, Adult sites are blocked,
O General interest
The child can view websites on the Allow list, websites designed for children, and websites from the
general interest category, Adult sites are blocked,
(•) Online communication
The child can view websites on the Allow list websites designed for children, and websites from the
general interest, social networking, web chat, and web mail categories, Adult sites are blocked.
O Warn on adult
The child can view all websites, but receives a warning when a site contains suspected adult content.
Q Block file downloads
Turning on web restrictions also turns, on SafeSearch settingsfor Bing, Google, Yahoo! and other popular
search engines. Adult images are also blocked.
You can also block file downloads by selecting Block File Downloads to make sure your child
can't view files you do not approve.
You can add specific websites to be allowed or blocked from the Allow Or Block Websites
window. As with games, these individual overrides overrule other general restrictions you
have set for websites.
474
Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
Allow or Block Websites
▼ t © ** User Settings ► Web Filtering ► Allow or Block Websites v 6 Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
User Settings
Web Filtering
Web Restrictions
* Allow or Block Websites
Allow or block specific websites for Child
Enter a website to allow or block,
Allow Block
Allowed websites:
iiiji.u.m.i].ui«..ui.
Blocked '.veb;ite;:
The restrictions you define are applied to all major browsers. For example, if your child is
using Mozilla Firefox or Google Chrome instead of Internet Explorer, the restrictions will be
working. Your child doesn't have to use Internet Explorer for the restrictions to work.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to block web content automatically and how to block file
downloads.
SET UP Open Family Safety and select your child's user account.
1 In Windows Settings, click or tap Web Filtering.
You are asked to set the websites your child can view.
2 Click or tap Child can only use the websites I allow.
Setting Restrictions for Websites and Downloads 475
Web Filtering
(£) ▼ 1* $£ « Family Safety ► User Settings ► Web Filtering
Control Panel Home
User Settings
• Web Filtering
Web Restrictions
Allow or Block ;'-e :; : te:
Which websites can Child view?
Allow or block websites by rating and content types
Set web filtering level
Allow or block all websites
Allow or block specific websites
3 Click or tap Set web filtering level to open the Web Restrictions window.
4 Choose General interest.
476
Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
$£ Web Restrictions
▼ t $$ « User Settings ► Web Filtering ► Web Restrictions
v <i Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
User Settings
Web Filtering
• Web Restrictions
Allow or Block Websites
Which websites can Child visit?
Choose a web restriction level:
O Allow list only
The child can view websites on the Allow List. Adult sites are blocked.
Click hereto change Allow List.
O Designed for children
The child can view websites on the Allow list and websites designed for children, Adult sites are blocked,
(i) General interest
The child can view websites on the Allow list, websites designed for children, and websites from the
general interest category, Adult sites are blocked,
O Online communication
The child can view websites on the Allow list websites designed for children, and websites from the
general interest, social networking, web chat, and web mail categories, Adult sites are blocked.
Q Warn on adult
The child can view all websites, but receives a warning when a site contains suspected adult content.
Block file downloads
Turning on web restrictions also turns on SafeSearch settingsfor Bing, Google, Yahoo! and other popular
search engines. Adult images are also blocked.
5 At the bottom of the Web Restrictions window, select Block file downloads.
CLEAN UP Close the Web Restrictions window.
The web restrictions you have set are now applied to your child's user account.
Setting Restrictions for Websites and Downloads 477
Understanding Messages Family Safety
Shows
When your child wants to log on to the computer during a time slot that is blocked, he or
she receives the following message: "Time's up! It's past the curfew time your parent set."
Time's up!
It's past the curfew time your parent set.
Come back at 12:00 AM on 6/12/2012, or ask a parent for more time. You have used the PC for
minutes today.
Get more time
Switch users or turn off PC
Your child cannot log on unless you set that specific time slot as allowed.
If your child tries to run a blocked app or game, a pop-up appears with the message,
"Blocked by Family Safety."
Blocked by Family Safety
Request permission to use FIFA 12 DEMO.
If your child tries to access a blocked website, that website will not be loaded and he or she
is notified that "This page is blocked."
Family Safety
Q This page is blocked.
Stuck on this page when a parent isn't home?
Check out some child-friendly websites
478 Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
When he or she tries to download a file and downloads have been blocked, a notification
says, "Family Safety has blocked this download." The download does not proceed.
Family Safety
Family Safety has blocked this download
To find out why this download is blocked, check your Family Safety settings. If you need access to this
download, ask permission from the person who set up Family Safety.
OK
Each time something is blocked, your child is given the chance to ask for permission and
receive access. Parents can review his or her permission requests approve them when
appropriate.
Managing Family Safety Settings and
Viewing Activity Reports
You can view your child's activity from both the computer he or she is using and a remote
computer through the Family Safety website.
In the User Settings window, after you select your child's user account, click View Activity
Reports on the right side of the window.
Managing Family Safety Settings and Viewing Activity Reports 479
9
User Settings
_ n|
© - t ®«
Family Safety
► User Settings
v Cf Search Control Panel p
Control Panel Home
Set up how Child will use the PC
©
Accounts. to Monitor
Family Safety:
Current settings:
* User Settings
# On, enforce current settings
Ooff
KS Child
v ■ . * Standard user
Activity reporting:
._ | Password protected
■:•:■ On, collect information about PC usage
Ooff
_______
( M View activity reports Ji
Windows settings:
Web filtering: General interest
£Jk Web filtering
^m Control thewebsites Child can access online
Time limits: On
¥f*t Time limits
'vl^ Control when Child uses the PC
Game restrictions:
Up to EVERYONE 10+
W Windows Store and game restrictions
"m Control by rating or title
App restrictions: On
<
Sj App restrictions
Control the apps allowed on your PC
The reports include much useful information, including the most popular websites your
child has visited, the latest pages that were blocked, how much time the PC was used
during the past week, and the apps and games he or she used the most.
480
Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
9
®
- T
User Activities
i« Family Safety ► User Setting! ► User Activities
*
Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
User Settings
User Activities
Websites visited
File downloads
Apps used
Games played
Childs PC activities, 3/15/2012 -3/21/2012
See a more comprehensive activity report for Child on the Family Safety website ,
Most popular websites
rad.msn.com 4 visits
api.live.net 2 visits
appeKtravelappupdate.blob.core.windows.net 2 visits
mobileads.msn.com
2 visits
www.7tuto ri a I s. c o m
2 visits
www.msn.com
2 visits
data.xboxlive.com
1 visits
tuners-ssl.zune.net
1 visits
Latest blocked pages
No activity
PC time used
Wednesday, 8/1 5/201 2
none
Thursday 3/16/2012
none
Friday 3/17/2012
none
Saturday 3/13/2012
none
Sunday 3/19/2012
none
Monday, 3/20/2012
none
Tuesday, 3/21/2012
2 minutes
Most used apps and games
Music
1 minute
Photos
1 minute
Travel
1 minute
Mail, Calendar, People, and Messaging
1 minute
IDT PC Audio
none
SvnaoticsTouchPad Enhancements
none
You can also manage the settings for Family Safety online. Click Manage Settings On The
Family Safety Website at the bottom of the Family Safety window or browse to https://
familysafety.microsoft.com and log on with your Microsoft account.
Managing Family Safety Settings and Viewing Activity Reports 481
8& Family Safety
T T <§& w User Accounts and Family Safety ► Family Safety
Control Panel Home
Rating Systems
v Cf Search Control Panel
See also
User Accounts
Choose a user and set up Family Safety
Use Family Safety to get reports of your kids' PC activities, choose what they see
online, and set time limits, app restrictions, and more. You can managethese
settings on this PC, or on the Family Safety website.
Child
Standard user - Family Safety on
Password protected
£
Ciprian Rusen
PC administrator
Password protected
If you want to apply Family Safety to someone who isn't in this list, create a new
user account for them to use,
9
Manage settings on the Family Safety website
You can managethis PC's Family Safety settings on the
website.
On the Family Safety website, you can view activity reports for your child, approve or deny
the requests he or she sends you, and change the settings for all the restrictions that can be
set in Family Safety.
482
Chapter 16 Supervising a Child's Computer Use
C * Windows Live" Hotmail i
Family Safety
Family summary
Messenger {
Sky Drive | MSN
■
Family member
Activity
Requests
rri] child
Cj) Edit settings
View activity report
No requests
1 a l] Ciprian Rusen
y|^U| Parent (primary)
Edit settings
View activity report
No requests
Add a new pa rent Ma ke a f a m i ly m em ber a par ent Manage th e I ist of f a m i ly m em bers
Your PCs
Family Safety settings work only on PCs that have the Family Safety Filter installed.
PC name Last reported activity
WINDOWSSLAPTOP 6/11/2012
Remove PCs from this list
Key Points
You can only turn on Family Safety if your child has a standard user account.
You can easily set time limits and restrictions on applications and games.
Restrictions for games and apps can be set by using their ESRB rating.
Setting restrictions on the types of websites that can be visited helps ensure that your
child doesn't visit websites with content that is inappropriate for his or her age.
Your child is notified each time he or she tries to log on at a restricted time or run a
blocked game or application.
You can view reports about your child's activity and approve his or her requests by
using the Family Safety website.
Key Points
483
Apply
Apply high contrast if you have a visual
disability, page 487
i^nr
Write
Write a letter using the on-screen keyboard,
page 502
S 1 H ^ - 1 Document - Wort
1 Home
View
p| Xcut
= QD Copy
Paste
Clipboard
|calibri -|11 t ||A' : a|
l*'*||iE-||
|b i | u Ia.I^Ix'H^.HA'I
Font
■ ■!■!■
Paragraph
^^^P^" . t ,..,... 2 ....... 3 ... ,
Dear Morn,
Use
Use the Magnifier, page 492
q
Quick access to common tools
You can use the tools in this section to help you get started.
Windows can read and scan this list automatically, Press the SP^
[~| Always read this section aloud Q Always scan thi
m
Start Magnifier
- s
-
Start On-Screen
Keyboard
ft s
:o make your c
Give
Give commands with Windows Speech
Recognition, page 505
j
SB
bsb^b
Making My Computer
Accessible
17
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Explore ease of access options.
■ Let Windows suggest ease of access settings.
■ Use the magnifier.
■ Use Narrator.
■ Use the on-screen keyboard.
■ Set up and use Windows Speech Recognition.
Windows 8 offers several options to help you use your computer if you have any kind of
impairment or disability. These are referred to cumulatively as ease of access features; there
are many ease of access features and options from which to choose.
If you have to wear reading glasses to see what's on the screen, you can make the text
larger; if you are blind, you can turn on Narrator to have what's on the screen read to
you. If you are hard of hearing, you can turn up the volume on your speakers or turn on
text captions for spoken dialogue; if you are deaf, you can enable visual notifications with
Sound Sentry. If you have difficulty using the mouse or keyboard, options exist to help you,
including Toggle Keys, Sticky Keys, Filter Keys, and so on. You can also enable and configure
Windows Speech Recognition so that you can talk to your computer to give commands and
perform tasks.
PRACTICE FILES You do not need any practice files to complete this chapter. For more
information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the beginning
of this book.
485
Accessing the Ease of Access Center
There are several ways to access and configure ease of access options. You can enable a
specific option by searching for it from the Start screen. For instance, you can type High
Contrast and, from the results in Settings, select Turn High Contrast On Or Off. You can use
the ease of access options from PC Settings; you've explored many of the options there
already, including personalizing the Lock screen with your favorite picture and adding
users. You can use the desktop app Ease Of Access Center, which offers access to all the
ease of access options in one place. You will find quick access to common features from PC
Settings.
PC settings
Ease of Access
Notifications
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Sync your settings
From here, you can turn on or configure the following.
High contrast
Off
■■
Make everything on your screen bigger
Off |
Your display doesn't support this setting.
Pressing Windows + Volume Up will turn on
Narrator
V
Shuw nuUriLdLiufii fui
5 seconds
V
Cursor thickness
m m
V |
HIGH CONTRAST When this is applied, the background is changed to black, the text
and dialog box outlines to white, and selected menus to purple. Other colors appear
as applicable.
486
Chapter 17 Making My Computer Accessible
IPJjB
ESI
Home 1
H^H
XJ9
^^2
Boil
Hi
^E^BP^S
1
^^^^■£SiZSL^^^^^
f^E^E
MAKE EVERYTHING ON YOUR SCREEN BIGGER When this option is enabled,
everything on the screen appears larger. This is not the Magnifier detailed later; this
is an option to make what's on the screen easier to see (perhaps to keep you from
needing to wear reading glasses while using your computer). Your display must be
able to support this setting. If it does not, increase the screen resolution.
PRESSING WINDOWS + VOLUME UP WILL TURN ON You can set what happens
when you press the Windows key and the Volume Up key at the same time. Choices
include Nothing, Magnifier, Narrator, or On-Screen Keyboard.
SHOW NOTIFICATIONS FOR You can set how long notifications remain on the
screen. You can choose from several options, the longest being five minutes. If notifi-
cations disappear before you've had a chance to read them, increase this setting.
CURSOR THICKNESS Use this setting to set how thick the cursor is on the screen.
Settings range from 1 to 20, and a preview is available.
Accessing the Ease of Access Center
487
Home Insert Page Layout References Mailings
Calibri (Body) -11 ~A*a' Aa~ ^> ■='*='
M — ' R^ I , ,
Clipboard ri Font ri
This is a cursor thickness set to 20.
TIP Many more accessibility settings are available than the five shown here. To see
everything that's available, open Control Panel and then click Ease Of Access. You can then
select Ease Of Access Center or Speech Recognition. You'll learn more about this later in the
chapter.
In this exercise, you'll view all the ease of access options available from the Start screen and
then open the PC Settings app and enable High Contrast.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need access to the Start
screen.
TIP When an instruction requires you to click something with a mouse, note that you can
generally tap the item on a compatible touch screen to achieve the same result.
1 From the Start screen, type Ease.
2 Click Settings.
488
Chapter 17 Making My Computer Accessible
SCttinQS Results for "Ease'
o
Ease of Access
©
Ease of Access Center
Turn high contrast on or off
Make everything on your screen bigger
Change what Windows + Volume Up does
Change how long notifications stay up
Change the width of blinking cursor
®
©
©
Let Windows suggest Ease of Access
settings
Change how your keyboard works
Change how your mouse works
View current accessibility settings
3 Click Ease of Access.
4 Click the slider next to High Contrast to change the setting to On.
^J CLEAN UP Change the High Contrast setting to Off.
Letting Windows Suggest Ease of Access
Settings
Because you can't access all the Ease of Access options from the PC Settings hub, and
because you might not even be sure what options to enable, it's often best to let Windows
suggest the settings it deems best for you based on a series of questions you answer. The
five questions are easy to understand, and after you answer them options to enable the
suggested accessibility options are presented. For example, if you work through the wizard
and state only that you are hard of hearing, Windows will suggest that you turn on Sound
Sentry and choose a visual warning. (If you state that "it is often difficult for me to concen-
trate," more options are presented.)
Letting Windows Suggest Ease of Access Settings
489
Recommended settings
anel ► Ease of Access ► Ease of Access Center ► Recommended settings
Reco mm ended settings
These settings can help you set up your computer to meet your needs. Review
below and select the options that you want to use,
QTum on visual notifications for sounds (Sound Sentry]
Choose visual warning
id} None
Flash active caption bar
Flash active window
O Flash desktop
["jTurn on text captionsfor spoken dialog (when available]
See also
Learn about additional assistive technologies online
There are several ways to access the wizard that helps you decide which options are best
for you, but the best way is to open Control Panel and then open Ease Of Access. You can
access Control Panel from the Start screen by typing Control and selecting Control Panel
from the results.
From Control Panel, under Ease Of Access Center, you can select Let Windows Suggest
Settings. The rest is simple; you just answer the questions as they pertain to you and let
Windows figure out what needs to be enabled.
Control Panel ► Ease of Access ►
Ease of Access Center
Let Windows suggest settings Optimize visual display
Change how your mouse works Change how your keyb
Speech Recognition
Start speech recognition Set up a microphone
490
Chapter 17 Making My Computer Accessible
Here are a few of the items (and a few related items) that you might be prompted to enable
based on the answers you give in the wizard.
■ NARRATOR Narrator reads aloud any text on the screen. You'll need speakers. (You
might also want to turn on audio descriptions to hear what's happening on the screen
when that feature is available for the items being viewed.)
■ MAGNIFIER Magnifier zooms in anywhere on the screen and makes everything in
that area larger. You can move the magnifier around on the screen just as you would
if you had a magnifying glass in your hand. (You might also want to turn on High
Contrast, change the thickness of the cursor, adjust the color and transparency of the
window borders, and so on.)
■ ON-SCREEN KEYBOARD Use the on-screen keyboard to type using the mouse, your
finger (on a touch screen), or another pointing device, such as a joystick, by selecting
keys that appear on the screen.
^ @« Ease of Access ► Ease of Access Center ► Use the computer without a mouse or keyboard
jd^
Search Control Pi
Use the computer without a mouse or keyboard
When you select these settings, they will automatically start each time you log on,
Type using a pointing device
[7] Use On -Screen Keyboard
Type using the mouse or another pointing device such as a joystick by selecting keys from a picture of
a keyboard.
SPEECH RECOGNITION Use speech recognition to speak into a microphone to con-
trol the computer, open programs, and dictate text.
MOUSE KEYS, STICKY KEYS, and FILTER KEYS With Mouse Keys, you use the
numeric keypad to move the mouse around the screen; with Sticky Keys, you press
keyboard shortcuts such as Ctrl+Alt+Del one key at a time instead of at once;
enabling Filter Keys causes Windows to ignore or slow down brief or repeated
keystrokes and adjust keyboard repeat rates. (You might also try Toggle Keys, which
sound a tone when you press specific keys such as Caps Lock, Num Lock, or others.)
Letting Windows Suggest Ease of Access Settings
491
VISUAL NOTIFICATIONS and TIME LIMITS Sound Sentry enables visual notifica-
tion for sounds, and you can enable visual warnings that flash on the screen when a
notification is active. You can also turn off time limits and flashing visuals if you find
it difficult to concentrate, or set how long Windows notification boxes should stay
open. (You might also want to turn off unnecessary animations, prevent windows
from being automatically arranged when you move them to the edges of the screen,
or turn on caret browsing.)
Using the Magnifier
You can turn on Magnifier from the Ease of Access Center in Control Panel. Start Magnifier
is an option from the landing page.
® @i T T © ► Control Panel ► Ease of Access ► Ease of Access Center
Control Panel Home
Change sign-in settings
Make your computer easier to use
Quick access to common tools
Q>
You can usethetools in this section to help you get started.
Windows can read and scan this list automatically, Press the SPACEBA
|~~| Always read this section aloud Q Always scan this secti
Q
Start Magnifier
** Start
-
Start On-Screen
Keyboard
r SetL
:c make your ccmpu
Use the compute
Optimize for blin
f start each time you
^ Make the compu
Make the mouse easier to use
Adjust settings for the mouse or other pointing devices
Make the keyboard easier to use
Adjust settings for the keyboard
492
Chapter 17 Making My Computer Accessible
You can also type Magnifier on the Start screen to access options to enable it. Whatever
you choose, when you turn on Magnifier a window appears for a second or two that con-
tains options to change the magnification level and how Magnifier shows its magnified
data.
~c Magnifier
^ ^ 200% Views ▼
If you don't immediately click any option from this window, it changes to a magnifying
glass. (You click or tap the magnifying glass to access this window when you need it.) With
the settings configured, you just move your cursor around the screen to use Magnifier. As
you can see here, the image degrades and pixelates at higher settings.
Start
Using the Magnifier 493
Many keyboard shortcuts are available for Magnifier, including those you can use to start
and exit it.
■ START MAGNIFIER Windows+Plus Sign
■ ZOOM OUT OR IN WHILE MAGNIFIER IS RUNNING Windows+Plus Sign or Minus
Sign
■ EXIT MAGNIFIER Windows+Esc
You'll want to explore each available view (under the Views tab) and the settings available
from the Settings icon in the Magnifier window if you decide to use Magnifier regularly.
One view is Full Screen. When you use it, the entire screen is magnified at the percentage
you select, and you move around the screen with your mouse or finger.
Docked view is another viewing option. In this view and while on the desktop, you'll see an
area at the top of the screen that shows what's being magnified (where you've placed your
cursor). Docked is not an option from the Start menu or while using an app. Docked is avail-
able only on the desktop.
If you aren't on the desktop but instead on the Start screen or in an app, you can choose
between Lens and Full Screen. You've seen Full Screen; Lens offers a rectangle on the screen
that holds the magnified data.
494 Chapter 17 Making My Computer Accessible
In this exercise, you'll enable Magnifier and use it at 200% and 300% in Full Screen view.
You'll then exit the Magnifier application.
^3 SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need access to the Start
screen.
Using the Magnifier 495
1 While at the Start screen, press Windows and the + key.
2 Move the cursor over the magnifying glass, click the right-facing double arrows, and
click the arrow by Views.
Verify that Full Screen is selected.
3 If it disappears, click the magnifying glass icon. Then click the + sign.
4 Using the keyboard, press Windows + - two times.
5 Press Windows+Esc to close Magnifier.
%p CLEAN UP No cleanup is required.
Using Narrator
You can start Narrator from Ease of Access Center in Control Panel. You can also start
Narrator from the Start screen. Just start typing the word Narrator and then click Narrator
when it appears.
You can use Narrator Touch, a new feature, if you have a touch screen that supports four-
finger input. Otherwise, you can control and use Narrator with a keyboard and mouse.
You'll be prompted either way. To get started, click Close in the prompt box that appears.
An introductory screen appears. Read this information before continuing.
496
Chapter 17 Making My Computer Accessible
Narrator Settings
Welcome to Narrator
I Press any key on the keyboard to hear the name of that key. Press Caps Lock + F1 to review the
| full set of Narrator commands. Press theTab key to navigate through the options. Press Caps
I Lock + Esc to exit Narrator.
General
Change how Narrator starts and other standard settings
Navigation
Change how you interact with your PC using Narrator
Voice
Changethe speed, pitch or volume of the current voice or choose a new voice
Commands
Create your own keyboard commands
Minimize
Minimize thiswindow and return to your app
Exit
Exit Narrator
As you'll learn, you can press any key on the keyboard to hear the name of the key. You can
press Caps Lock+Fl to review and have read to you a full set of Narrator commands. You can
also change the various settings, including the speed, pitch, and volume of the narrator and
how and when the program starts. Each time you click an option, you are prompted to save
or discard the changes before you can return to the previous screen. To use Narrator, use
the computer as you normally would, using the keyboard and mouse or the touch screen.
Understand that Narrator won't read all of the content you encounter; however, it will
always let you know what's happening on the screen itself. It might read what's on a web-
page, and it will read URLs, dialog boxes, text entry boxes, and so on. When you open a
program, it will announce that you've opened a window, available tool tips, and the name
of the program you've opened. It won't read the content of documents or tell you what's on
a Microsoft PowerPoint slide. It will state which key you press on the keyboard, such as Print
Screen (PrtSc), but it won't describe what you've copied. It won't read locations on maps (in
fact, it'll announce that Maps is not supported by screen readers), describe what's shown in
a photo, or tell you what's happening on a video. Instead, it tells you when those programs
and apps are opened and closed, the commands available under your cursor, the com-
mands you've selected, and other pertinent information.
Using Narrator 497
Narrator does work with some apps. This is an ever-expanding technology, so you can
expect more features and functionality as time goes by. As an example of what is available
now, however, you can open the Weather app and click the current temperature; Narrator
will read the temperature aloud to you if you place the cursor appropriately. In fact, when
you open the Weather app, Narrator will announce that there is "explorable text". If you
open Calendar and create an event, it will read some of the information, such as the month
you select, the number of hours you configure for the event, and so on.
Details
When
June v
17 Monday
v
v
Start
9 v
00 v
AM v
How long
1 hour
v
If you decide to use Narrator regularly, you'll need to spend some time exploring the fea-
tures, configuring the settings, and learning about keyboard, mouse, and touch screen
shortcuts.
TIP If you've started Narrator and want to stop it, return to the Narrator window and click
Exit. Click Yes to confirm.
Using the On-Screen Keyboard
The on-screen keyboard is an accessibility option in the Ease of Access Center. The on-
screen keyboard is available on all computers, even those that do not support touch, and
you can use the keyboard with a mouse or input device designed for people with disabili-
ties. Start On-Screen Keyboard is an option in Control Panel from the Ease Of Access Center.
An easier way to open the on-screen keyboard is to type Keyboard while on the Start
screen and click On-Screen Keyboard in the results. (You can also press Windows+Volume
Up on many keyboards, provided you have changed the defaults in PC Settings under Ease
Of Access.) The keyboard appears immediately when you do this and offers a Minimize but-
ton so you can easily hide it when you aren't using it.
498
Chapter 17 Making My Computer Accessible
TIP You can drag from the corners of the keyboard to make it larger and easier to use. It
can be configured to be quite large.
The keyboard is similar to most: you tap or click keys to use them, and there are specialty
keys such as Tab, Caps, and Shift; Alt, Ctrl, and Del; the Windows key; arrow keys; and PgUp,
PgDn, PrtScn, and so on. This keyboard has a few extra entries such as Nav, Mv Up, Mv Dn,
Dock, Fade, Help, ScrLk, and Options. To get the most from the on-screen keyboard, you
need to know how most of these extra entries are used.
TIP If you plan to use the on-screen keyboard regularly, start it and then right-click it on
the taskbar. Click Pin This Program To Taskbar.
The on-screen keyboard special keys include:
NAV To hide the full keyboard and show only the navigation options. Click General
to return to the full on-screen keyboard.
On -Screen Keyboard
Using the On-Screen Keyboard 499
■ MV UP To reposition the on-screen keyboard near the top of the screen.
■ MV DN To reposition the on-screen keyboard near the bottom of the screen.
■ DOCK To dock the on-screen keyboard to hide it, show it, or otherwise manage it.
This option is dimmed on PCs but might be available on tablets.
■ FADE To make the keyboard transparent. Click Fade again to show it.
HELP To get help using the on-screen keyboard.
SCRLK The Scroll Lock key you find on many keyboards. When the ScrLk key is
enabled, it is white.
OPTIONS To configure options for the on-screen keyboard. These include but are
not limited to setting a click sound when keys are pressed, enabling a numeric key-
pad, using text prediction, and enabling the option to hover over a key for a spe-
cific amount of time to use it (versus actually clicking the key with a mouse or other
device).
500 Chapter 17 Making My Computer Accessible
1 second
Options
Use click sound
Show keys to make it easier to move around the screen
l~l Turn on numeric key pad
To use the On-Screen Keyboard:
(5) Qick on keys
O Hover over keys
Hover duration:
Shorter [J Longer
O Scan through keys
Scanning speed:
Faster {J Slower
1 second
To select a key:
^ Use joystick, game pad or other gaming device
|V| Use keyboard key Space Bar Key
Use mouse click
Text prediction:
Use Text Prediction
Insert space after predicted words
Control whether the Qn-Screen Keyboard starts when I sign in
TIP To open the on-screen keyboard by using keyboard shortcuts, press Windows+R and, in
the Run dialog box, type osk and press Enter.
In this exercise, you'll open the on-screen keyboard from the Start screen and use it to type
a short note by using WordPad.
SET UP Open WordPad by using any method desired. Return to the Start screen.
1 From the Start screen, type Keyboard. From the results, click On-Screen Keyboard.
2 If desired, drag from any corner of the keyboard to enlarge it.
3 Position WordPad and the on-screen keyboard where you can access both easily.
4 Click inside WordPad to place your cursor there.
Using the On-Screen Keyboard
501
5
6
Use your mouse or another pointing device (such as your finger) to select keys on the
keyboard. Note that they appear on the screen in WordPad.
Use the Shift and Enter keys as required.
1 Home
View
n cut
= D^jCopy
Paste
Clipboard
Picture Paint Dai
drawing t
Insert
|calibri -|11 t ||A''a t |
l«i*||i=-IIJ-l
Font Paragraph
.....
On-Screen Keyboard
CLEAN UP Close WordPad and save the document if desired.
Set Up and Use Windows Speech
Recognition
Like Narrator, Windows Speech Recognition will take a little time to master. You have to set
it up, train it to understand your voice, and then learn the commands for using it. Then you
can use Windows Speech Recognition to start and close programs, open and select items
from menus, click buttons and objects, and even dictate text. Just about everything you can
do with a keyboard and mouse can be done with only your voice.
You must set up Speech Recognition. The wizard can take a while to get through, so
it's best to start when you have at least 30 minutes for the process. You open Speech
Recognition the same way you open any program, by typing related keywords at the Start
screen.
502
Chapter 17 Making My Computer Accessible
Setup is the only option you have the first time you open Windows Speech Recognition.
During the setup process, you'll be required to:
■ CONFIGURE A MICROPHONE You choose and test a microphone. This can be one
built into a headset, one that sits on the desk, or one built into your computer (or
device).
■ ENABLE DOCUMENT REVIEW Speech Recognition will work better if you let it
review the documents and email that have already been indexed for search by
Windows. The computer can learn words and phrases you use often and can under-
stand better when you speak.
Improve speech recognition accuracy
You can improve the computer's ability to recognize spoken words by allowing the computer to review
documents and e-mail in your search index. The computer will learn words and phrases to better
understand you when you speak.
Privacy statement
<■* Enable document review
Disable document review
CHOOSE HOW TO ACTIVATE AND DEACTIVATE THE PROGRAM Start Listening
and Stop Listening are the two commands you'll learn to use first. You can choose
what happens when you say these commands. You can configure it so that when you
Set Up and Use Windows Speech Recognition
503
say "Stop listening," Windows Speech Recognition closes (Manual), or you can config-
ure it so that when you say "Stop listening," it stays active and waits for you to use the
Start Listening command to reactivate it.
PRINT THE SPEECH REFERENCE CARD You can print the speech reference card
if you have a printer so that you will always have a quick reference of the available
commands. You can also view the reference sheet. If the sheet does not automatically
appear, search for Controlling Your PC With Speech Recognition.
© ©
Any time you reed to find out what commands to use,, say "what can I say?
Windows Help and Support
To do this
Say this
Select any item by its name
Click file. Start, View
Select any item or icon
Click Recycle Bin; Click: Computer, Click file name
Double-tap or double-click any item
Double-click Recycle Bin; Double-click Computer, Double-click file name
Switch to an open app
Switch to Paint; Switch to WortiPad; Switch to program name; Switch application
Scroll in one direction
Scroll up; Scroll down; Scroll left; Scroll right
Insert a new paragraph or new line in a document
New paragraph; New line
Select a word in a document
Select word
Select a word and start to correct it
Correct word
Select and delete specific words
Delete word
Show a list of applicable commands
What can 1 say?
Update the list of speech commands that ;
ire currently available
Refresh speech commands
Turn on listening mode
Start listening
Turn off listening mode
Stop listening
Move the Speech Recognition microphone bar
Move speech recognition
■ RUN SPEECH RECOGNITION AT STARTUP If you know you'll use Windows Speech
Recognition every time you use your computer, enable this feature; otherwise,
disable it.
■ WORK THROUGH THE TUTORIAL After Windows Speech Recognition is set up,
work through the tutorial. It teaches you how to use Windows Speech Recognition
and is well worth the time it takes to go through it.
After you've worked through the tutorial, you're ready to use Windows Speech Recognition.
You'll see the Speech Recognition window on the desktop and Start screen when it's run-
ning, and it will appear on top of any open windows (until you minimize it to the taskbar).
504
Chapter 17 Making My Computer Accessible
Start
[Hotmail] [https^/gfx5.hotmail.co...
86°
Garland
Hk Partly Cloudy
97777°
=
■
In this exercise, you'll start Windows Speech Recognition, use it to access the desktop, and
use it to open and close the Recycle Bin on the desktop.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need access to the Start
screen.
TIP If you did not print out the list of commands offered in the Windows Speech
Recognition tutorial, you can access commands from www.microsoft.com. Search for
Speech Recognition commands. You can also say, "What can I say?" while Windows Speech
Recognition is listening.
1 From the Start screen, type Speech.
2 Click Windows Speech Recognition to open it.
3 Say "Click Desktop."
4 Say "Double-click Recycle Bin."
5 Say "Close Recycle Bin."
6 Say "Stop listening."
^3 CLEAN UP No cleanup is required.
Set Up and Use Windows Speech Recognition
505
Finally, understand that there are multiple ways to configure Windows Speech Recognition.
You can access the options by right-clicking the Speech Recognition dialog box on the
screen, from which you can access many configuration options, including but not limited to:
■ Choosing how Windows Speech Recognition should start, stop, and listen.
■ Starting or restarting the Speech tutorial.
■ Getting help.
■ Performing steps to improve voice recognition.
On: Listen to everything I say
Sleep: Listen only for "start listening"
Off: Do not listen to anything I say
Open Speech Reference Card
Start Speech Tutorial
Help
Options
Configuration
Open the Speech Dictionary
Dictation Topic
Help improve Speech Recognition...
About Windows Speech Recognition
Open Speech Recognition
Exit
■ Opening the Speech Dictionary and adding a word.
■ Exiting Windows Speech Recognition.
TIP If you plan to use Windows Speech Recognition regularly, explore each option from the
contextual menu.
506
Chapter 17 Making My Computer Accessible
Key Points
You can configure basic accessibility options in the Ease of Access Center.
If you're unsure of which accessibility options are right for you, you can work through
the available wizard to let Windows make suggestions.
To access all accessibility options, open the Ease of Access Center from Control Panel;
this is the desktop version.
Magnifier can be used in various modes and views; you can choose the one that's
right for you.
Narrator can read what's happening on the screen and can inform you when a
program is opened or closed, name the URL of the website you're visiting, and read
what's under your cursor. It can sometimes read content, although that feature is
expected to become more robust in the future.
The on-screen keyboard can be used with alternative input devices, with a mouse,
and with touch (on compatible monitors).
By using Windows Speech Recognition, you can say commands such as, "Click
Desktop," "Double-click Recycle Bin," "Scroll up," "Scroll down," and so on.
Key Points 507
Learn
Learn to use the Windows Mobility Center,
page 510
t
Windows Mobility Center
HMute
Volume
"
Q
n
Fully charged
C100%]
Balanced
Battery Status
Encrypt
Encrypt the operating system drive with
BitLocker, page 524
p
BitLocker Drive Encryption (C:)
Are you ready to encrypt this drive?
This drive (CO has been encrypted for use with BitLocker and now just ne
a few seconds.
You can keep working while the drive is being encrypted, although your f
1^1 Run BitLocker system check
The system check ensures that BitLocker can read the recovery and er
encrypting the drive.
Turn on
Turn on presentation mode, page 514
Presentation Sei
ttings
I am currently giving a presentation
When giving a presentation,, your computler
notifications are turned off, and the foil
When I am giving a presentation:
0Turn off the screen saver
[^1 Set the volume to:
Low
stays aw
ng setting
Hioh
Secure
Secure removable data drives with BitLocker,
page 527
h 4# BitLocker Drive Encryption (HO
Choose how you want to unlock this drive
Use a password to unlock the drive
Passwords should contain uppercase and lowercase lett
Enter your password
Reenter your password
:rs, numbers, e
[~| Use my smart card to unlockthe drive
Using Windows 8 at
Work
18
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Learn to use the Windows Mobility Center.
■ Turn on presentation mode.
■ Use BitLocker to encrypt the operating system drive.
■ Use BitLocker to secure removable data drives.
Chances are you will also be using Windows 8 at your workplace. Although the tools cov-
ered in this book can be used both at home and at work, there are a few that you are likely
to use mostly at work and not at home.
The first is Windows Mobility Center, which is targeted at laptop or netbook users who
are mobile and need to connect to multiple devices and external displays. The second is
BitLocker, a feature by which you can encrypt your computer and make sure your data is
safe and accessed only by you and other authorized people.
In this chapter, you'll learn how to use the Windows Mobility Center, connect to external
displays, and use presentation mode to deliver presentations without any unwanted inter-
ruptions. Then you'll learn how to encrypt drives with BitLocker and make sure your data is
safe.
PRACTICE FILES You don't need any practice files to complete the exercises in this chapter.
For more information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the
beginning of this book.
509
Using the Windows Mobility Center
The Windows Mobility Center is a tool that works only on mobile computers and devices
such as laptops or netbooks. It is not available on desktop computers. Its role is to help
users be mobile and quickly take the following actions.
■ Changing the display brightness of the screen
■ Changing the sound volume of the computer or device
■ Changing the power plan
■ Connecting or disconnecting external displays
■ Setting sync partnerships with portable music players, USB memory sticks, or smart
phones that provide support for this feature
■ Turning presentation mode on or off
Brightness
No sync
partnerships
Sync settings
Sync Center
Vindows Mobility Centei
□ Mute
I
Although all the settings that you can manage through the Windows Mobility Center are
important, two will be especially appreciated during office hours: the ability to connect
external displays and to turn on presentation mode.
These settings are very useful when switching among different office rooms and connecting
the laptop to different kinds of external displays, from monitors to TVs and projectors.
The Connect Display button is the equivalent of pressing the Windows+P keys on your key-
board. It opens a window asking how you want to set the second screen.
■ PC SCREEN ONLY The second screen is ignored and no image is displayed on it.
■ DUPLICATE The image on your laptop's screen is duplicated on the external display.
510
Chapter 18 Using Windows 8 at Work
EXTEND The second screen extends your laptop's screen and can be used as an
additional desktop.
SECOND SCREEN ONLY The second screen becomes your main screen, and the
laptop's screen is turned off.
To launch the Windows Mobility Center, open Control Panel, choose Hardware and Sound,
and then select Windows Mobility Center.
Using the Windows Mobility Center 511
Hardware and Sound
►.•' T T «EI ► Control Panel ► Hardware and Sound ►
v <i Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
System and Security
Network and Internet
• Hardware and Sound
Programs
User Accounts and Family
Safety
Appearance and
Personalization
Clock, Language, and Region
Ease of Access
Devices and Printers
Addadevice Advancedprintersetup Mouse '"^"'DeviceManager
Change Windows To Go startup options
[j~7| Auto Play
' — V Change default settingsfcr media or de/ices Play CDs or other media automatically
dp sound
%Jf Adjust system volume Change system sounds Manage audio devices
Yi Power Options
^P Change battery settings Change what the power buttons do
Require a password when the computer wakes Change when the computer sleeps
Adjust screen brightness
M Display
Make text and other items larger or smaller Adjust screen resolution
How to correct monitor flicker (refresh rate]
Windows Mobility Center
Adjust commonly used mobility settings Adjust settings before giving a presentation
Location Settings
Change location settings
As an alternative, you can search for the word mobility on the Start screen and click or tap
the appropriate search result.
Turning On Presentation Mode
Presentation mode is very useful when delivering any kind of presentation. Take some
time to configure presentation mode exactly the way you want so your presentation runs
smoothly without unwanted hiccups and interruptions (such as the screen saver showing up
when you don't need it).
In this exercise, you'll learn how to turn on presentation mode and configure it.
SET U P Open Windows Mobility Center and connect the external display you want to
use with your computer.
1 Click or tap Connect display to set how you want to connect the second screen.
512 Chapter 18 Using Windows 8 at Work
2
Click or tap Extend.
The second external display now acts as a second desktop.
3 Click or tap the projector icon in Presentation Settings to open the Presentation
Settings window.
Turning On Presentation Mode 513
4
5
Select the boxes for I am currently giving a presentation and Turn off the screen
saver.
Set the volume and the background as you want them to be.
I am currently giving a presentation
When giving a presentation,, your computer stays awake, system
notifications are turned off, and thefollowing settings are applied.
When I am giving a presentation:
0Tum off the screen saver
Set the volume to:
Low High
Show this background:
EavatarZ
Ullavatar3
Position: | Fit to screen v|
6 Click or tap OK.
You return to the Windows Mobility Center window.
CLEAN UP After you have delivered your presentation, click or tap the Turn Off
button under Presentation Settings and close Windows Mobility Center.
Now you can move the documents and presentations you want to show to the second dis-
play and start your presentation. You won't have to worry about unwanted screen savers
turning on, distracting wallpapers being displayed, and so on.
514
Chapter 18 Using Windows 8 at Work
Using BitLocker to Encrypt Drives
Many companies use different encryption solutions to ensure the security of the data stored
on the companies' systems. If a business laptop is stolen or a USB memory stick with com-
pany data is lost, it's important for the stored data to be inaccessible to unwanted people.
In such scenarios, encryption is the only solution that ensures that the data is accessed only
by people who have the appropriate access keys and passwords. Some businesses also
have policies that forbid the distribution of company data on removable media such as USB
memory sticks. Be sure you comply with such policies. However, if you need to have impor-
tant business data on a mobile device when you're away from the office and you won't
break any company policies by doing so, use encryption. It is the only sensible solution to
make sure the data is protected.
BitLocker is available only for business editions of Windows 8 such as Windows 8 Pro and
Windows 8 Enterprise. That's why it is very likely that you will use it only on your work com-
puters. In addition, it works only on computers with TPM (Trusted Platform Module) chips.
These chips can store the cryptographic keys BitLocker and other encryption solutions use.
TPM chips are included in most business computers but not in computers sold to consum-
ers and home users.
BitLocker can be found by opening Control Panel, choosing System And Security, and then
selecting BitLocker Drive Encryption.
Using BitLocker to Encrypt Drives 515
System and Security
T t ^ ► Control Panel ► System and Security ►
Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
• System and Security
Network and Internet
Hardware and Sound
Programs
User Accounts and Family
Safety
Appearance and
Personalization
Clock, Language, and Region
Ease of Access
^rife Action Center
\ Review your computer's status and resolve issues
$$ Change User Account Control settings Troubleshoot common computer problems
^L Windows Firewall
^W Check firewall status Allow an app through Windows Firewall
jJH' System
15 View amount of RAM and processor speed ^ Allow remote access
Launch remote assistance Seethe name of this computer ^ Device Manager
_- Windows Update
-^3** Turn automatic updating on or off Check for updates Install optional updates
View update history
V"to Power Opt i on s
t^p Change battery settings Require a password when the computer wakes
Change what the power buttons do Change when the computer sleeps
rt|i File History
Save backup copies of your files with File History Restore your files with File History
f --A< BitLocker Drive Encryption
Ipi Manai
nage BitLocker
RlS Storage Spaces
*%&" Manage Storage Spaces
_— Add features to Windows 3
^^ (^ G et m ore f eatu res with a n ew ed iti o n of Wi n d ows
>: X\ AdministrativeTools
BitLocker's main window is well organized and easy to understand and use. First, you see
the drive on which Windows 8 is installed, then other fixed data drives that might exist on
your computer, and then the removable data drives that are plugged into your computer.
516
Chapter 18 Using Windows 8 at Work
*
BitLocker Drive Encryption - n 1
© - t %«
System and Security ► BitLocker Drive Encryption v <^ Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
See also
Q TPM Administration
BitLocker Drive Encryption
Help protect your files and folders from unauthorized access by protecting your drives with BitLocker,
Operating system drive
C: BitLocker off ©
■■^ 9 Turn on BitLocker
Fixed data drives
AV-Testing (D:) BitLocker off ©
Nothing 7 (E:) BitLocker off ©
Everything (R) BitLocker off ©
Removable data drives - BitLocker To Go
^' Disk Management
Privacy statement
My Passport (H:) BitLocker off ©
All these drives can be encrypted with BitLocker. After a drive is encrypted, its status
changes from BitLocker Off to BitLocker On. In addition, you can perform tasks such as:
■ Suspending the BitLocker protection for a time.
■ Backing up the recovery key again in case you lose it.
■ Changing the password used to access the encrypted drive.
■ Removing the existing password.
■ Turning off BitLocker and decrypting the drive.
Operating system drive
C: BitLocker on
©
ft' Suspend protection
^ Back up recovery key
Change password
iffl R.emove password
® Turn off BitLocker
Using BitLocker to Encrypt Drives 517
Encrypting the Operating System Drive with
BitLocker
The encryption process is rather lengthy and first involves setting a password that will be
used prior to launching Windows 8 and using any encrypted drive.
% BitLocker Drive Encryption (C)
Create a password to unlock this drive
You should create a strong password that uses uppercase and lowercase letters,, numbers, symbols,, and
spaces,
Enter your password
1 „„ 1
1 *•" 1
Reenter your password
Tips for creating a strong password.
Next Cancel |
It is important to remember this password. Without it, you won't be able to access the
encrypted drive. To prevent this from happening, the encryption process includes a step to
save a backup recovery key you can use if you forget the password and need to recover the
encrypted data. The recovery key can be saved automatically to your Microsoft account (if
you log on to Windows 8 with a Microsoft account), to a file on a USB flash drive, or on a
different drive, or it can be printed on a piece of paper.
518
Chapter 18 Using Windows 8 at Work
-&f BitLocker Drive Encryption (C:)
How do you want to back up your recovery key?
Some setting:, are managed by your system administrator,
A recovery key can be used to access yourfiles and folders if you're having problems unlocking your PC,
It's a good idea to have more than one and keep each in a safe place other than your PC,
*> Save to your Microsoft account
*> Save to a USB flash drive
-* Save to a file
-> Print the recovery key
What is a recovery key?
TIP When encrypting a drive other than the operating system drive, the text displayed will
be slightly different. However, the options you can choose remain the same.
Before the encryption process starts, you are asked whether you want to encrypt only the
used disk space or the entire drive. Both methods work well. If you have a newer computer
with a fresh installation of Windows 8, it is best to choose the first option. If your computer
has been used for quite some time, it is best to encrypt the entire drive. However, the sec-
ond option will make the encryption process take longer than the first.
Encrypting the Operating System Drive with BitLocker
519
;
% BitLocker Drive Encryption (C)
Choose how much of your drive to encrypt
If you're setting up BitLocker on a new drive or a new PC, you only need to encrypt the part of the drive
that's currently being used, BitLocker encrypts new data automatically as you add it.
If you're enabling BitLocker on a PC or drive that's already in use, consider encrypting the entire drive.
En c ry pti n g th e enti re d ri ve en su res th at a 1 1 d ata i s p rotected-even datathatyou deleted but that might s-till
contain retrievable info.
■:•> Encrypt used disk space only (faster and best for new PCs and drives]
( ) Encrypt entire drive (slower but best for PCs and drives already in use]
As soon as the encryption process starts, each time you start your computer you are asked
to enter the password you set earlier. Without it, you can't start Windows 8 or access the
encrypted drive.
520 Chapter 18 Using Windows 8 at Work
Prior to encrypting the drive, you are asked to restart the computer. When you log on
again, you see a small notification on the Desktop stating, "Encryption In Progress."
49 Encryption in progress ^ x
Encryption of C: by BitLocker Drive Encryption has
started. Click for more information.
If you click or tap the notification, you see a progress indicator for the encryption process.
Encrypting the Operating System Drive with BitLocker 521
% BitLocker Drive
Encryption
D
^St Encrypting.,.
Drive C: 16.2% Completed
^■^
Close |
Manage BitLocker
During the encryption process, you can use your computer normally. You can run applica-
tions, work on documents, and so on. You can restart your computer even if the encryption
is not yet finished, and it will resume automatically the next time you start Windows 8.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to encrypt your operating system drive with BitLocker.
SET U P Close any applications or work you have open and open the BitLocker Drive
Encryption window.
1 Click or tap Turn on BitLocker next to the operating system drive to start the
BitLocker Drive Encryption Wizard.
2 Enter the password you want to use twice.
3 Click or tap Next.
*
BitLocker Drive Encryption (C:)
Create a password to unlock this drive
You should create a strong password that uses uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, symbols, and
spaces.
Enter your password
Reenter your password
Tips for creating a strong password.
522 Chapter 18 Using Windows 8 at Work
4 Save the recovery key by using the method you prefer and click or tap Next.
You are asked to choose how much of your drive you want to encrypt.
How do you want to back up your recovery key?
Some settings are managed by your system administrator.
A recovery key can be used to access yourfiles and folders if you're having problems unlocking your PC,
It's a good idea to have more than one and keep each in a safe place other than your PC.
*> Save to your Microsoft account
-* Save to a USB flash drive
*> Save to a file
^ Print the recovery key
What is a recovery key?
Select the option that fits your needs best and click or tap Next.
BitLocker Drive Encryption (C)
Choose how much of your drive to encrypt
If you're setting up BitLocker on a new drive or a new PC, you only need to encrypt the part of the drive
that's currently being used. BitLocker encrypts new data automatically as you add it.
If you're enabling BitLocker on a PC or drive that's already in use, consider encrypting the entire drive.
Encrypting the entire drive ensures that all data is protected-even data that you deleted but that might still
contain retrievable info.
(•) Encrypt used disk space only (faster and best for new PCs and drives]
(_) Encrypt entire drive [slower but best for PCs and drives already in use]
Encrypting the Operating System Drive with BitLocker 523
Leave the Run BitLocker system check box selected and click or tap Continue.
You are informed that the encryption will be completed after the computer is
restarted.
h
«-) ^ BitLocker Drive Encryption (C:)
Are you ready to encrypt this drive?
This drive (CO has been encrypted for use with BitLocker and now just needs to be activated. This will take
a few seconds.
You can keep working while the drive is being encrypted, although your PC might run more slowly.
Run BitLocker system check
The system check ensures that BitLocker can read the recovery and encryption keys correctly before
encrypting the drive.
BitLocker will restart your computer before encrypting,
Note: This check might take a while, but is recommended to ensure that your selected unlock method
works without requiring the recovery key.
Continue Cancel
7 Restart the computer and enter the BitLocker password you set at step 2.
524 Chapter 18 Using Windows 8 at Work
8 Log on to Windows 8.
You are notified that the encryption is in progress.
%^ CLEAN UP Continue using your computer while the encryption process runs in the
background.
The time it takes for the operating system drive to be encrypted depends on its size and
how much data is stored. The performance of your computer's processor will also affect the
speed of encryption. The faster the processor is, the faster the encryption process. It can
take from 30 minutes to a few hours, so be patient.
Encrypting the Operating System Drive with BitLocker 525
Encrypting Removable Data Drives with
BitLocker
Encrypting a removable data drive such as a USB memory stick doesn't take long, and it
involves fewer steps than encrypting the operating system drive.
After the encryption process ends, each time you plug that drive into a Windows PC it will
be displayed in File Explorer using a lock icon, signaling that it is encrypted. To access its
content, you must enter the password that was set during the encryption process.
J Devices with Removable Storage (2)
j£5Jl DVD RW Drive [G :] || Rem ova b I e D i sk (H :)
In this exercise, you'll learn how to encrypt a USB memory stick with BitLocker. The process
is the same for other types of removable data drive, such as external hard disk drives.
SET UP Plug in the USB flash drive you want to encrypt and then open the BitLocker
Drive Encryption window.
1 Click or tap Turn on BitLocker next to the flash drive to start the BitLocker Drive
Encryption Wizard.
TIP Depending on the USB memory stick you are encrypting, you might see an additional
option on the screen, which says, "Automatically unlock this drive on this computer." If you
are storing very sensitive data, it is best not to select this option.
2 Select Use a password to unlock the drive.
3 Enter the password you want to use twice.
4 Click or tap Next.
526 Chapter 18 Using Windows 8 at Work
4*
BitLocker Drive Encryption (H:)
Choose how you want to unlock this drive
[Vl Use a password to unlock the drive
Passwords should contain uppercase and lowercase letters, numbers, spaces, and symbols.
Enter your password
Reenter your password
[~| Use my smart card to unlockthe drive
You'll need to insert your smart card. The smart card PIN will be required when you unlockthe drive.
Save the recovery key by using the method you prefer and click or tap Next.
You are asked to choose how much of your drive you want to encrypt.
fr
BitLocker Drive Encryption (H:)
How do you want to back up your recovery key?
If you forget your password or lose your smart card, you can use your recovery key to access your drive.
•> Save to your Microsoft account
+ Save to a file
«► Print the recovery key
What is a recovery key?
Select the option that fits your needs best and click or tap Next.
You are asked to confirm that you are ready to encrypt the drive.
Encrypting Removable Data Drives with BitLocker 527
7
.*
BitLocker Drive Encryption (H:)
Choose how much of your drive to encrypt
If you're setting up BitLocker on a new drive or a new PC, you only need to encrypt the part of the drive
that's currently being used. BitLocker encrypts new data automatically as you add it.
If you're enabling BitLocker on a PC or drive that's already in use, consider encrypting the entire drive.
Encrypting the entire drive ensures that all data is protected-even data that you deleted but that might still
contain retrievable info.
■:•:■ Encrypt used disk space only (faster and best for new PCs and drives]
( ) Encrypt entire drive (slower but best for PCs and drives already in use]
Click or tap Start encrypting.
A progress window appears.
fr
BitLocker Drive Encryption (H:)
Are you ready to encrypt this drive?
You'll be ableto unlockthis drive using a password.
Encryption might take a while depending on the size of the drive,
Until encryption is complete, yourfiles won't be protected.
Start encrypting | Cancel
8 Wait for the process to finish and then click or tap Close.
528 Chapter 18 Using Windows 8 at Work
BitLocker Drive Encryption
Encryption of H: is complete.
Manage BitLocker
CLEAN UP Close the BitLocker Drive Encryption window.
You can now use the USB memory stick as you normally would. All the data stored on it is
now encrypted and can be accessed only with the password you have set. You can encrypt
other removable drives, including external hard disk drives, by using the same procedure.
The steps will be the same, but some of the options will appear slightly different depending
on the device.
Accessing an Encrypted Removable Drive
Each time you plug the removable drive you have encrypted into any computer run-
ning Windows 8, including your own, a notification appears saying that the drive is
BitLocker-protected.
Unlock drive D:
it Lo c ker-protected.
Click or tap the notification, and you are asked to type the password you set during the
encryption process. Type the password and click or tap Unlock. If you click or tap More
Options, you can also set Windows to unlock this drive automatically each time you insert it.
Accessing an Encrypted Removable Drive
529
BitLocker (D:)
Enter password to unlock this drive.
More options
Only then can you view the data stored on it.
Decrypting a BitLocker- Protected Drive
The process for decrypting a BitLocker-protected drive is easy. Open the BitLocker Drive
Encryption window and click Turn Off BitLocker for the drive you want to decrypt.
Removable data drives - BitLocker To Go
H: BitLocker on
-4
Back up recovery key
Change password
Remove password
Add smart card
Turn off BitLocker
Confirm that you want to decrypt the drive and wait for the process to finish. BitLocker no
longer protects the drive.
530 Chapter 18 Using Windows 8 at Work
BitLocker Drive Encryption
f -:i9r Decrypting...
Drive H:6S. 7% Completed
■1\ Pause decryption before removing the drive orfiles on
the drive could be damaged.
Manage BitLocker
You can decrypt the drive only after you have unlocked it by providing the appropriate
encryption password.
Key Points
Windows Mobility Center is a helpful tool when you are mobile and you need to con-
nect your laptop to multiple devices and displays.
Turning on presentation mode is helpful when you need to deliver presentations at
work or anywhere else.
Encryption is a great solution for ensuring that your data is not accessed by unwanted
people.
With BitLocker, you can encrypt both your computer's drives and removable data
drives such as USB flash memory sticks.
Key Points 531
Calibrate
Calibrate your touchscreen, page 535
Swipe
Swipe slowly to show two apps at once,
page 539
August ?01?
Su Mo Tu We Th F"r Sal
29 30 31 1 2 J 4
S 6 7 8 9 10 11
12 13 14 15 16 | 17] 18
n ?a 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 20 29 30 31 1
l(][i<*y: Augufl 1 /
GARLAND, TX
BING WEATHER
^% 1
Flick
Flick to show charms, page 536
Write
Write an equation with the math input panel,
page 547
f^j History ^ Options ^ Help ▼
—ft ± Vft 2 - 4ac
2a
X =_"
b ±
b
1
2
J
Using Windows 8 on
Touch-Compatible Devices
19
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
Set up your screen and calibrate it.
Use general touch gestures.
Explore and use multi-touch gestures.
Change touch input settings.
Use the math input panel.
If you have a Windows 8 PC, laptop, tablet, or other compatible device that accepts touch
gestures, you can use the single-touch and multi-touch features available with Windows
8 in lieu of using a mouse or other pointing device. There are several features to explore
beyond touch gestures, however; you can use a pen (stylus) to draw on the screen and
use the on-screen keyboard to type (see Chapter 17, "Making My Computer Accessible").
You can use the Touch Keyboard on the Desktop. You can configure touch settings, too,
including how you want to use a double-tap or long press. You should also configure and
calibrate your display (even if it seems to work fine now). The touch and pen settings are
configurable, so they can be personalized to suit your needs exactly.
PRACTICE FILES You do not need any practice files to complete this chapter. For more
information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the beginning
of this book.
533
Setting Up Touch Hardware
If you've used touch before, you know you can touch app tiles to open their respective
apps, double-tap desktop apps and desktop items such as Recycle Bin to open them,
and use your finger to swipe and scroll while inside various apps and programs, including
Microsoft Internet Explorer. You know you can tap and hold some items and swipe up from
the bottom or down from the top to access an app's charms features. You might think that
because touch works, your hardware does not need to be set up, but it does. At the very
least, it should be calibrated.
During the calibration process, you'll be prompted to:
■ CHOOSE THE SCREEN TO USE If more than one screen is available (or if Windows
thinks there are multiple screens available), you choose which screen to use.
■ CALIBRATE THE SCREEN You'll touch the screen in various places to make sure
Windows 8 is calibrated properly.
■ CHOOSE A ROTATION OPTION If your screen rotates, you can configure how the
screen's orientation changes when you rotate it.
In this exercise, you'll access the touch options and work through the wizard to complete
the setup process.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need access to the Start
screen.
TIP In this book, if an instruction requires you to click something with a mouse, you can
generally touch or tap the item to achieve the same result. If a right-click is required, you
might need to touch and hold, swipe up from the bottom, or perform some other gesture.
1 At the Start screen, type Touch.
2 Click or touch Settings.
534 Chapter 19 Using Windows 8 on Touch-Compatible Devices
3 From the results, click or touch Calibrate the screen for pen or touch input.
4
5
6
In the Tablet PC Settings dialog box, click or tap Setup.
Tap the screen to choose a monitor if prompted.
Tap Calibrate.
Tablet PC Settings
Display [other"]
Configure
Configure your pen and touch
displays.
<S 5e tup„, ~1
Display optio
Display:
Details;
ns
, 1
1
Touch Input Available
C_
■=V Calibrate...
$ Reset..
1
Choose the order in which your screen rotates.
Go to Orientation
Apply
7 Work through the wizard as instructed. Tap Yes to save the calibration data.
8 If your screen rotates, tap Go to Orientation.
Setting Up Touch Hardware 535
Configure orientation options as desired and then tap OK and OK again to close al
dialog boxes.
Orientation Sequence Settings
yy
You can choose the order in which your screen rotates. This sequence occurs
when you use a tablet button to change your screen orientation.
1 : Primary landscape
3: Secondary landscape
2: I Secondary portrait
4: Primary portrait
10 Tap the middle of the right side of the screen and flick left.
11 From the results, tap Start to return to the Start screen.
TIP It might take some practice to learn how to swipe from the right side of the
screen to the left to access the charms. Keep trying; it will work!
^3 CLEAN UP No cleanup is required.
536 Chapter 19 Using Windows 8 on Touch-Compatible Devices
Learning General Touch Gestures
You might already be familiar with a few touch gestures; you can certainly tap a tile on the
Start screen to open an app. You can apply many more touch techniques, too.
Here are the general single-touch gestures you'll want to learn right away.
■ ONE TAP To open an app, to select a desktop icon, to apply a rating in the Store, to
open a link in Internet Explorer, to use a Back or Forward button, to install an app, to
select an email, or to perform any other task that can be applied with a single mouse
click.
■ A DOUBLE-TAP To open an item on the desktop, to zoom in on a webpage, or to
perform any other task that can be applied with a traditional double-click with the
mouse.
TIP Use a pinching motion with your thumb and forefinger to zoom in and out of the
screen. This works on the Start screen, too. Technically, this is a multi-touch gesture
and is outlined in the next section.
■ A LONG TOUCH (TOUCH AND HOLD) In some cases, to obtain results consistent
with a traditional right-click with the mouse. Long-touch a folder on the desktop to
access the contextual menu; long-touch a link in Internet Explorer to access options
to copy and open the link. Use a long touch on the Start screen to drag an app to a
new position.
A FAST SWIPE FROM THE LEFT EDGE INWARD When multiple apps and desktop
applications are open, this one-finger motion switches among them.
Learning General Touch Gestures 537
TROUBLESHOOTING If you have trouble getting the desired result when you swipe
from the edges of the screen with a finger, try swiping with your thumb instead.
A FAST SWIPE FROM RIGHT TO LEFT OR FROM LEFT TO RIGHT (WHILE NOT AT
THE EDGE OF THE SCREEN) To scroll quickly through a map with the Maps app;
to view additional information about the current weather from the Weather app; to
change months quickly in the Calendar; to scroll through pages in the Store, Music,
Video, and similar apps; to move among webpages you've visited in the Internet
Explorer app; or to perform tasks such as scrolling from right to left with a traditional
scroll bar and mouse.
A FAST SWIPE FROM THE RIGHT EDGE INWARD To show the charms (Search,
Share, Start, Devices, Settings).
TIP To access settings for any app quickly, while in the app swipe from the middle
right edge inward to show the charms and tap Settings.
A SLOW SWIPE FROM LEFT TO RIGHT (IN THE MIDDLE OF THE LEFT EDGE) If
you perform this gesture while using an app when multiple apps are open, you can
snap one app so that it takes up a third of the screen and another app takes up
the rest of it. This enables you to run two apps side by side (such as Calendar and
Weather) and interact with both.
TIP When you have two apps open at one time on the screen, use the bar that
appears between them to make the smaller one larger and the larger one smaller. In
this mode, you can still pinch to zoom and use other touch techniques.
538 Chapter 19 Using Windows 8 on Touch-Compatible Devices
August ?01?
Su
Mo
Tu
We
Th Fr
Sa
29
30
31
l
2 3
4
11
13
s
12
6
1S
7
14
e
is
9 10
ie | it]
19
26
20
27
21
2Q
22
29
23 24
30 31
25
"ijiiriy: Aiiytjf.1 1 1
IMPORTANT You won't be able to snap apps (and perform some other touch gestures) if your
resolution is set too low or your monitor doesn't support the required resolution (which, at the
current time, is 1366 * 768).
Learning General Touch Gestures
539
A FAST SWIPE OUT AND BACK FROM THE MIDDLE OF THE LEFT SIDE OF THE
SCREEN To show all running apps in a bar on the left side of the screen. (You can
then tap any app to open it.)
ust ;
1 Monday
30
6
13
^^^^^1
p —
PULL (FLICK) DOWN FROM TOP Depending on your display and resolution and the
app you have open, you might be able to pull down from the top of an app and drag
it off the screen to close it or to view additional features.
TIP Open the Internet Explorer app and pull down from the top to see additional
options.
PULL (FLICK) UP FROM THE BOTTOM While in an app, this gesture might display
the available charms for that app.
TAR HOLD, AND PULL SLIGHTLY DOWNWARD To select an item in an app such
as Photos or SkyDrive. This gesture selects the item and offers charms for managing
the selected item. If you swipe down farther, the selected element can sometimes be
moved to a new position.
540
Chapter 19 Using Windows 8 on Touch-Compatible Devices
TIP Try all these gestures before moving on.
Using Multi-Touch Gestures
In the previous section, you learned how to use the most common one-finger gestures. You
learned about tapping, double-tapping, long-touching, swiping, and others. There are also
a few multi-touch gestures you can use, and these require more than one finger to perform.
One of the most-used multi-touch gestures is the pinch. With two fingers, you can pinch
inward and outward to zoom. You can do this even on the Start screen. When you pinch
inward, all the icons on the Start screen become smaller; pinch outward, and they return to
their original size. You can also perform this task with four or five fingers if desired.
If you have compatible hardware, a screen set to the proper resolution, and if you are using
an app that supports it, you can use two fingers to rotate what's on the screen 90 degrees.
In addition, as newer releases, updates, and hardware improvements become available,
more multi-touch gestures will become available as well.
Using Multi-Touch Gestures 541
Changing Touch-Input Settings
Touch settings exist. If you use a tablet, you might have more settings than described in this
section if they are provided by the manufacturer. Here, you'll be concerned only with what's
available with Windows 8 and what is common to all Windows 8 computers, tablets, and
devices.
TIP The manufacturer of your device might include additional features for it, such as a
Windows button on the device itself (which returns you to the Start screen).
To see which touch features and configuration options are available, from the Start screen,
type Touch. From Settings, view the results.
Settii
ngS Results for "Touch"
/
Pen and Touch
I
Change multi -touch gestur
e settings
B
Change touch input settings
Calibrate the screen for pen or touch input
View devices and printers
■
Make text and other items larger or smaller
o
Device Manager
VMJ
Set up a dial-up connection
■
Update device drivers
■
Set up dialing rules
542
Chapter 19 Using Windows 8 on Touch-Compatible Devices
The settings you'll want to explore include but might not be limited to:
■ PEN AND TOUCH (OR CHANGE TOUCH INPUT SETTINGS) To configure options
that require you to use your finger to interact with items on the screen. You can
configure settings for Double-Tap and Press And Hold and settings to show visual
feedback when touching the screen and when using a projector or external monitor.
Ppn and Tnurh
Hi
Use your finger to interact with items on the screen. You can
adjust the settings for each touch action
Touch action
Equivalent mouse action
Press and hold
Right-dick
Settings...
Touch feedback
[^1 Show visual feedback when touching the screen
I — I Optimize visual feedback for projection to an external
I — ' nr
Apply
CALIBRATE THE SCREEN FOR PEN OR TOUCH INPUT To access the Tablet PC
Settings dialog box and its Display tab, introduced earlier in this chapter. You can
calibrate your screen and configure the screen orientation options when your screen
rotates (if it does). From the Other tab, you can access additional options to change
multi-touch gestures.
Changing Touch-Input Settings 543
CHANGE MULTI-TOUCH GESTURE SETTINGS Access the Tablet PC Settings dia-
log box and its Other tab, to change handedness settings. Click Go to Input Panel
Settings, to use gestures commonly used on handheld computers, the default, or use
gestures from the Simplified Chinese standard.
Handedness
Change where menus appear on the screen by indicating which
hand you write with.
■:•:■ Right-handed
Menus appear to the left of your hand.
O Left-handed
Menus appear to the right of your hand,
Pen and touch
/Configure your pen and touch settings in Pen and
Touch.
Go to Pen and Touch
Touch Keyboard and Handwriting Panel options
r— ~X Customize Touch Keyboard and Handwriting Panel
• - 1 features in Input Panel Settings,
jjotp.input Pane! Settings:
Apply
You can access these settings and more from the traditional Control Panel, too. From
Control Panel, Hardware And Sound, you have easy access to Mouse settings, Display set-
tings, Pen And Touch input settings, and Tablet PC Settings.
® T T ^ ► Control Panel ► Hardware and Sound
Hardware and Sound
v 6
Control Panel Home
System and Security
Network and Internet
• Hardware and Sound
Programs
User Accounts and Family
Safety-
Appearance and
Personalization
Clock, Language, and Region
Ease of Access
l / Devices and Printers
--. *■! Add a device Advanced printer setup Mouse
Change Windows To- Go startup options
l 1 Device Manager
fj~j| Auto Play
Change default settingsfcr media or devices Play CDs or other media automatically
Sound
Adjust system volume Change system sounds Manage audio devices
Power Options
Change power-saving settings Change what the power buttons do
Require a password when the computer wakes Change when the computer sleeps Choose a power plan
Display
Make text and other items larger or smaller Adjust screen resolution
How to correct monitor flicker (refresh rate]
Pen and Touch
Changetouch input settings
Tablet PC Settings
Calibrate the screen for pen or touch input Set tablet buttons to perform certain tasks
Choose the order of how your screen rotates Specify which hand you write with
Location Settings
Change location settings
544
Chapter 19 Using Windows 8 on Touch-Compatible Devices
In this exercise, you'll access Pen and Touch settings and configure how quickly you tap the
screen when you double-tap and the tolerance for the distance you can move between
taps.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need access to the Start
screen.
1 At the Start screen, type Pen. Tap Settings.
2 Touch Pen and Touch.
3 On the Touch tab, select Double-tap and touch Settings.
4 Move the slider for Speed to make the speed of the required double-tap faster or
slower.
5 Double-tap in Test Settings. If the door opens and you are happy with the set speed,
continue. Otherwise, repeat step 4 to change it.
6
7
Double-Tap Settings
Speed
You can adjust how quickly you tap the screen when you
double4ap.
Slow
Speed:
Spatial tolerance
You can adjust the distance the pointer can move between tapping
when you double4ap.
Spatial tolerance: Small
Test settings
To test your settings, double4ap the graphic.
The graphic changes when you double4ap
successfully.
Large
II
Repeat the process with Spatial Tolerance.
Tap OK and OK to close both dialog boxes.
TIP If you have a disability and find it difficult to use your hands effectively, increase
the spatial tolerance to Large. This will give you the most leeway possible if your
hands shake or you have other issues that keep you from tapping the screen the
same place twice in a row.
Changing Touch-Input Settings 545
CLEAN UP Return to the Start screen.
Using the Math Input Panel
If you've ever tried to type a mathematical equation, you know how difficult it is. It's
problematic to type something as simple as the Pythagorean theorem and almost
impossible to type something as complicated as the Fourier series.
2 .2 2 r/ \ ^f nnx , . nnx)
a +fc =cvf(x) = a =£ a n cos— + 6„sin—
n-l\ L L J
Some programs such as Microsoft Word and Excel offer options that enable you to type
common equations such as these, but other programs such as Mail don't. If you're creating
your own formula, it wouldn't matter that these options were available.
You can use the math input panel to write math equations yourself, and you can write them
with a stylus or your finger. After you've written the equation, you can insert it somewhere
else easily.
TIP When exploring new apps, look for ones that accept text input by touch, specifically
apps that enable you to "type" with your finger.
Learning to use the math input panel takes a little time, and it's important to know that
as you type (or draw), what is shown in the preview area might not be what you meant.
The math input panel is smart, and as you type, what appears might change automatically,
based on what follows it. So, as you experiment, remember to write as legibly as possible
and be patient. After you've typed the entire formula, you can use the eraser to remove
what hasn't been interpreted correctly and retype it. After the formula is correct, tap Insert
and then tap, hold, and paste your input into any other compatible program or app, such as
a word processing program.
In this exercise, you'll type a common formula into the math input panel.
546 Chapter 19 Using Windows 8 on Touch-Compatible Devices
^3 SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need access to the Start
screen.
1 At the Start screen, type Math. Touch Math Input Panel.
2 Note that Write is selected; use your finger to write the Pythagorean theorem.
jvffil History t Options t Help t
4
5
6
x =
—b ± y/b 2 — 4ac
2a
x=- k£ .
b 3
s
Oy CX
1c
3L
^x
If necessary, tap Erase and drag your finger over the part of the equation that is not
recognized. Tap Write and reenter the data.
TIP If you only want to replace a single character in an equation, tap Select And
Correct and circle the character. You can then reenter only that character.
If necessary, tap Select and Correct, select the entry to change, and choose from the
list of options.
Tap Insert.
The equation is now saved to the virtual clipboard.
If desired, open a program such as Microsoft Word, tap and hold, and select Paste
to insert the formula.
TIP Not all apps or applications currently support Paste in this scenario. Microsoft
Office and other programs do, however.
Using the Math Input Panel 547
%J CLEAN UP Leave the math input panel open while you read the rest of this section.
After you've used the math input panel for a while, you can explore the tabs. On the History
tab, you can access equations you've already created.
1 i?0 [History ▼
Options ^
Help -
-b ± yjb 2 - 4ac
2a
a 2 + b 2 = c 2
In Options, you can set preferences for using the math panel. For instance, by default, when
you click Insert, the equation in the Write Math Here area disappears. In Options, you can
disable this default feature. You can also change the side on which the buttons appear,
show an on-screen keyboard, and hide the grid.
TIP You can get help from the math input panel on the Help tab.
548
Chapter 19 Using Windows 8 on Touch-Compatible Devices
Key Points
You should calibrate your monitor even if it worked correctly right out of the box.
You can use many single-touch and single-finger gestures to navigate Windows 8.
A handful of multi-touch gestures, such as pinching, require more than one finger to
perform.
You can change many aspects of touch features, including how fast a double-tap
should be and how close or far apart from each other those taps must occur.
On the math input panel, you can write equations with your finger or a stylus and
then copy and paste them into the desired program or app.
Key Points 549
Add
Add the Shut Down, Restart, Sign Out,
and other shortcuts to the Start screen,
page 553
J
J
J)
J
Place
Place a Show Start shortcut to the desktop,
page 554
Name
Name groups of shortcuts on the Start
screen, page 556
Optimize
Optimize startup items with Task Manager,
page 594
1 J
J
JD
j
Task Manager
/iew
rmance
App
history
Startup
Users
De
tail:
Services
j-
Publisher
Status
udio
t SkyDrive
IDT, Inc.
Microsoft Corporation
Enabled
Enabled
Skype Technologies S.A.
Disablec
20 Tips for Improving Your
Windows 8 Computing Experience
20
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Add useful shortcuts for displaying the Windows 8 Start screen and Desktop.
■ Customize the Windows taskbar.
■ Use the hidden system menu.
■ Use Task Manager to optimize the Windows 8 startup.
The learning doesn't stop with the tips mentioned in the preceding list. This chapter aims to
teach you twenty useful tricks to optimize your Windows 8 experience.
Because the Start screen represents a major change from earlier versions of Windows, you'll
find quite a few tricks to help you be more organized and productive when using it. You'll
see some tips for the desktop and the Windows taskbar you've grown to love from earlier
versions of Windows.
Next, you'll learn how to log on to Windows 8 automatically, without typing your password
each time; run older apps as an administrator; add or remove features in Windows 8; turn
off notifications; and optimize your disks. You'll learn a few tricks about using SkyDrive and
the new Task Manager, too.
This chapter ends with tips on how to change the defaults for programs, file extensions, and
AutoPlay dialog boxes.
PRACTICE FILES Before you can complete the exercises in this chapter, you need to copy the
book's practice files to your computer. The practice files you'll use to complete the exercises
in this chapter are in the Chapter20 folder. A complete list of practice files is provided in
"Using the Practice Files" at the beginning of this book.
551
Adding Shut Down, Restart, Sign Out, and
Other Shortcuts to the Start Screen
In the folder with practice files for this chapter are quite a few shortcuts for handy com-
mands such as Shut Down, Restart, Sign Out, Sleep, Lock - Switch User, and Stop Shut
Down.
Lock - Switch
User
Restart
m
Sleep
r
m
Stop Shut Down
m
m
■■
\E
m
Show Start.exe
Shut Down
Sign out
Each shortcut does what its name says, and all shortcuts work on all editions of Windows 8.
There are a few things to keep in mind, though.
■ The Shut Down shortcut won't shut down your system immediately. It initiates the
shutdown procedure, which takes a few seconds to finish.
■ The Stop Shut Down shortcut works only if you have used the Shut Down shortcut to
shut down your system. If you have started the shutdown procedure by other means,
running this shortcut probably won't have any effect on your system.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to add each of these shortcuts to the Start screen.
SET UP To complete this exercise, you need the shortcut files in the Chapter20 practice
files folder. After these files are downloaded to your computer, open File Explorer and
browse to their location.
1 Right-click or press and hold one of the shortcuts you want to pin to the Start screen.
552 Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
2
3
4
Open
Open file location
f! Run as administrator
Pin to Taskbar
Cut
Copy
Paste
Create shortcut
Delete
Rename
Properties
Click or tap Pin to Start.
Repeat steps 1 and 2 for all the shortcuts you want pinned to the Start screen and
then open the Start screen.
J
J
J
J
J
X
Drag and drop the shortcuts on the Start screen so that they are in the same group
and placed in the order you want.
Q CLEAN UP Close File Explorer.
Make sure you don't delete the shortcuts from the location to which you downloaded them.
If you do, they will stop working because the Start screen will point to files that no longer
exist.
Adding Shut Down, Restart, Sign Out, and Other Shortcuts to the Start Screen
553
Adding a Show Start Shortcut to the
Desktop
The Windows 8 Start screen is so different from earlier versions of Windows that you cannot
create normal shortcuts to take you from the Desktop to the Start screen. There is no Show
Start shortcut on the Desktop that you can click or tap.
For this reason, the practice files contain a small executable file that opens the Start screen
when you run it with a double-click. The file is named Show Start.exe; it's in the Chapter 20
practice files folder. Download it to your Desktop, and you can use it as a Show Start short-
cut from the Desktop.
This shortcut will be useful especially while you are learning Windows 8 and all its new
features and changes. It is also useful to people who prefer to use shortcuts they can click
or tap instead of keyboard shortcuts. You can achieve the same effect as this shortcut by
pressing the Windows key on your keyboard. If you are fine with using the keyboard, then
you won't need this file.
If File Explorer is set so that it doesn't display file name extensions, you will see this file on
your Desktop without the .exe extension.
Its name will be just Show Start.
When you no longer want to use this file as a shortcut, just delete it from your Desktop.
Adding a Control Panel Shortcut to the Start
Screen
Another useful shortcut you might want to have on your Start screen is a shortcut for
Control Panel. In this exercise, you'll learn how to add this shortcut to the Start screen.
554 Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
SET UP Open the Start screen.
1 Type control and look for the Control Panel search result.
2 Right-click the Control Panel search result (or press and hold it while dragging slightly
downward).
3 Click or tap Pin to Start.
%J CLEAN UP Switch from the list of search results back to the Start screen.
A Control Panel shortcut is now pinned and visible on the Start screen.
Adding a Control Panel Shortcut to the Start Screen 555
Naming Groups of Shortcuts on the Start
Screen
On the Windows 8 Start screen you can drag and drop shortcuts into groups and name
groups with custom names.
Useful Shortcuts
— '
Im^I
3
J
J
X
If you like your Start screen well organized, you'll want to name each group of shortcuts. In
this exercise, you'll learn how to name these groups.
SET UP Open the Start screen.
1 Note the minus sign on the bottom-right corner of the Start screen.
2 Click or tap the minus sign and notice a zoom-out effect.
556 Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Right-click the group of shortcuts you want to name (or press and hold it while drag-
ging downward slightly).
Naming Groups of Shortcuts on the Start Screen
557
4 Click or tap Name group.
5 Type the name of the group and then click or tap Name.
^3 CLEAN UP Click or tap the empty space of the zoomed-out Start screen to return it to
normal.
The selected group of shortcuts now has the name you set.
558 Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Adding Clocks and Time Zones to the
Windows Taskbar
If you interact with people all over the world, it is useful to quickly access the time for more
than just your time zone. You can set Windows 8 to display up to two additional clocks
when you click or use the mouse to point to the clock shown in the taskbar.
Friday, August 10, 2012
* August 2012 ►
Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
29 30 31 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 8 9 QOJ 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 13
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 23 29 30 31 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 S
12:21 AM
Saturday
Change date and time settings.,.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to add two clocks to the Windows taskbar.
SET UP Open the Desktop.
1 Click or tap the area of the taskbar where the clock is displayed to open a window
with details about the current date and time.
2 Click or tap Change date and time settings to open the Date And Time window.
Friday, August 10, 2012
i August 2012 ►
Su Mo Tu We Th Fr Sa
29 30 31 1 2 3 4
5 6 7 3 9 [TO] 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 13
19 20 21 22 23 24 25
26 27 23 29 30 31 1
2 3 4 5 6 7 3
3 Click or tap the Additional Clocks tab.
Adding Clocks and Time Zones to the Windows Taskbar
559
Date and Time
Date and Time Additional Clocks Internet Time
Additional clocks can display the time in other time zones, You can view
them by clicking on or hovering over the taskbar clock,
l~l Show this clock
irne zone:
(UTC + 02: 00] Ath en s, B u c h a rest
Enter display name:
Clock 1
I I Show this clock
Select time zone:
(UTC + 02: 00] Athens, Bucharest
Enter display name:
Clock 2
Apply
4 Click or tap the Show this clock check box and select the time zone you want dis-
played for the first additional clock.
5 Type the name you want displayed for the first additional clock in the Enter display
name field.
Date and Time
Date and Time Additional Clocks internet Time
Additional clocks can display thetime in other time zones, You can view
them by clicking on or hovering over the taskbar clock,
Show this clock
Select time zone:
(UTC] Dublin, Edinburgh, Lisbon, London
Enter display name:
London
Show this clock
Select time zone:
(UTC+ 09:00] Osaka, Sapporo, Tokyo
Enter display name:
Tckyc|
Cancel Apply
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the second clock.
560 Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
7 Click or tap OK.
CLEAN UP No cleanup is required.
The additional clocks are now displayed each time you use the mouse to point to the clock
in the taskbar or when you click or tap the taskbar.
Adding the Recycle Bin to the Windows
Taskbar
If you are the type of user who likes to keep the desktop clean and without shortcuts, you
might be interested in using the taskbar to keep shortcuts to apps and Windows features
you use often.
ft?
In this exercise, you'll learn how to pin the Recycle Bin to the taskbar.
SET UP To complete this exercise, you need the Recycle Bin shortcut found in the
Chapter20 practice files folder. After you have downloaded this file, open File Explorer.
1 Browse to where you stored the Recycle Bin shortcut.
2 Right-click or press and hold the Recycle Bin shortcut to open the shortcut menu.
3 Click or tap Pin to Taskbar.
Open
Open file location
Pin to Start
f 1 Run as administrator
Pin to Taskbar
Cut
Copy
Create shortcut
Delete
Rename
Properties
Adding the Recycle Bin to the Windows Taskbar
561
Q CLEAN UP Close File Explorer.
The Recycle Bin is now pinned to your taskbar. You can use the same procedure to pin other
apps. You can use their shortcuts on the desktop or you can pin their main executable files
directly to open the apps. The pinned entry will then act as a shortcut.
Using the Hidden System Menu
Microsoft removed the classic Start menu from Windows 8. In its place is a hidden sys-
tem menu that provides quick and easy access to many useful tools such as Computer
Management, the command prompt, Task Manager, Control Panel, the Run window, and
many others. This is another feature Microsoft has added to make navigating Windows 8
easy for those who prefer using a keyboard and mouse.
Programs and Features
Mobility Center
Power Options
Event Viewer
System
Device Manager
Disk Management
Computer Management
Command Prompt
Command Prompt (Admin]
Task Manager
Control Panel
File Explorer
Search
Run
Desktop
The fastest way to open this menu is to press Windows+X on your keyboard.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to launch the hidden system menu by using the mouse or
touch gestures.
^^ SET UP Open the Desktop.
Using the mouse or your finger (if you have a screen with touch), point to the
bottom-left corner of the screen until a Start tile appears.
562 Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
v\
2 Right-click the tile or press and hold it while dragging slightly downward to open the
menu.
3 Click or tap the tool you want to launch.
^3 CLEAN UP No cleanup is required.
Don't hesitate to experiment with this procedure until you are comfortable launching and
using this hidden menu.
Logging On to Windows 8 Automatically,
Without Entering Your Password Each Time
If you are using only one user account on your Windows 8 PC or device, and you are using
it where it is safe from strangers gaining unwanted access to it, you might want to set
Windows 8 to log you on automatically, without entering your password each time. Even
though this isn't a best practice recommended by Microsoft because it can lead to some
complications detailed at the end of this section, it can make your life easier in certain
scenarios.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to set Windows 8 to log on to your user account
automatically.
^^ SET UP Open the Start screen.
1 Type netplwiz.
Logging On to Windows 8 Automatically, Without Entering Your Password Each Time
563
2
3
4
Click or tap the netplwiz search result to open the User Accounts window.
User Accounts
Users Advanced
«
Use the list below to grant or deny users access to your computer,
and to change passwords and other settings.
Users must enter a user name and password to use this computer.
Users for this computer:
User Name
Group
■& Child
Users
^ciprianrusen©gmai
.corn
Administrators
Properties
Password for ciprianrusen@gmail.com
To changeyour password, go to PC settings and select Users,
%
Reset Pa
Apply
Select your user account.
Clear the Users must enter a user name and password to use this computer check
box.
Click or tap OK.
You are asked to enter and confirm your password.
Automatically sign in
You can set up your computer so that users do not have to type a user
name and password to sign in. To do this., specify a user that will be
automatically signed in below:
User name:
Ciprian
Password: ••••••••
Confirm Password: • •••••••!
564
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
6 Type your user account password in the Password and Confirm Password fields.
7 Click or tap OK.
CLEAN UP No cleanup is required.
The next time you start Windows 8, you will be logged on automatically to the user account
you just selected. This user account will become the default logon user to Windows 8.
If you have multiple user accounts on your computer or device, setting this up might be an
inconvenience. Windows 8 will always log on automatically to the user account you selected
during this procedure. To log on with another user account, you need to wait for Windows
8 to start up and log on automatically. Then you must sign out and select the other user
account to which you want to log on. If you want to reverse this setting, follow the same
procedure and make sure you select Users Must Enter A User Name And Password To Use
This Computer at step 4 in the exercise.
If your Windows 8 PC or device is part of a network domain, such as a corporate network,
this procedure will not work. In network domains, the policies regarding the logon proce-
dure are set by the network administrator and cannot be overwritten by users.
Running an Application as Administrator
In Windows 8, applications run by default without administrator permissions. This is a secu-
rity feature that makes sure applications do not have the permission to make unwanted
system changes. However, earlier applications that don't run so well on newer versions of
Windows might need to be run with administrator permissions so that they function with-
out problems.
If the application has a shortcut on the Start screen, right-click its shortcut or press and hold
to select it. On the bottom menu, click or tap Run As Administrator.
Running an Application as Administrator 565
If you want to run the application from the desktop or File Explorer, right-click its shortcut
or main executable (or press and hold) and select Run As Administrator from the shortcut
menu.
Open
Pin to Start
Run as administrator
Troubleshoot compatibility
Share with
Pin to Taskbar
Send to
Cut
Copy
Create shortcut
Delete
Rename
Properties
In this exercise, you'll learn how to edit the properties of the application shortcut or main
executable and have it always run as administrator.
^^ SET UP Open File Explorer.
1 Browse to where the main executable file of the application or its shortcut is stored.
2 Right-click or press and hold it and select Properties from the shortcut menu to open
the Properties window.
3 Click or tap the Compatibility tab.
4 In Privilege Level, choose Run this program as an administrator.
566
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
ShowStart.exe Properties
General Compatibility Security Details
If this program isnt working correctly on this version of Windows,
try running the compatibility tnoubleshooter.
| Run com patibility troubl eshootef |
How do I choose compatibility settings manually?
Compatibility mode
l~l Run this program in compatibility mode for:
Windows XP [Service Pack 3}
Settings
l~l Reduced color mode
S-brt (25G) color
l~~l Run in G4Dx 4BD screen resolution
l~~l Disable display scaling on high DPI settings
Privilege level
Run this program as an administrator
% Change settings for all usera
Apply
5 Click or tap OK.
CLEAN UP Close File Explorer.
From now on, each time you run the selected application a User Account Control (UAC)
prompt appears asking for your permission to run the application as administrator. After
you approve, the application is allowed to run with administrator permissions.
IMPORTANT Remember that the new Windows 8 apps don't run with administrator
permissions and cannot be set to run with administrator permissions.
Adding or Removing Windows Features
Windows 8 comes with many features. Some of them are installed and enabled by default,
whereas others are not and need to be added manually. You add or remove Windows fea-
tures from the Windows Features window.
Adding or Removing Windows Features 567
If Windows Features - n
Turn Windows features on or off i
To turn a feature on, select its check box. To turn a feature off, clear its
check box. A filled box meansthat only part of thefeature isturned on.
□ . Telnet Client
Telnet Server
□ TFTP Client
j. Windows Identity Foundation 3.5
@ . Windows Location Provider
S@,, Windows PowerSh el I 2.0
\±\ O Windows Process Activation Service
. Windows Search
□ ,. Windows TIFF I Filter
0Jj XPS Services
, XPS Viewer
The features with a check mark near their name are turned on; those without a check mark
are turned off. Similar features are grouped into folders that can be expanded. Clicking or
tapping the plus sign near the folder name shows the individual features that are included.
You can enable or disable the entire set of features in that folder or just individual features.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to remove a Windows feature. To demonstrate the proce-
dure, you'll remove XPS Viewer, which you can add back after the exercise. However, for this
exercise you can remove any Windows feature you don't plan to use.
^J SET UP Open Control Panel.
1 Click or tap Programs and choose Programs and Features.
2 Click or tap Turn Windows features on or off to open the Windows Features
window.
568
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Programs and Features
▼ <f |5] ► Control Panel ► Programs ► Programs and Features
Control Panel Home
v <j Search Programs and Features p
Uninstall or change a program
To uninstall a program,, select it from the list and then click Uninstall, Change, or Repair.
Organize ▼ |
Name Publisher
f] Microsoft Office 365 Home Premium Preview - en-us Microsoft Corporation
^Microsoft SkyDrive Microsoft Corporation
S Sn a g it 1 1 Tech Sm ith C o rp o rati o n
QH Synaptics Pointing Device Driver Synaptics Incorporated
Installed On
S/7/2012
a/7/2012
3/7/2012
S/7/2012
@
Currently installed programs Total size: 135 MB
4 programs installed
Clear the check mark for XPS Viewer.
You are warned that this might affect other Windows features and programs.
Windows Features
Turn Windows features on or off
#
To turn a feature on, select its check box. To turn a feature off, clear its
check box. A filled box meansthat only part of thefeature isturned on.
□ , . Telnet Client
. Telnet Server
□ TFTP Client
, , Windows Identity Foundation 3.5
, Windows Location Provider
S @ j , Windows PowerShell 2.0
r±] Q Windows Pro cess Activation Service
. Windows Search
□ . Windows TIFF I Filter
0|, XPS Services
. XPS Viewer
4 Click or tap Yes and then OK. Wait for Windows to complete the requested changes.
Adding or Removing Windows Features
569
Windows Features
Turning off XPS Viewer might affect other
Windows features and programs
installed on your computer, including
default settings. Do you want to
continue?
Gc cnlinetc learn mere
5 Click or tap Close.
CLEAN UP Close Programs And Features.
To add a Windows feature, go through the same steps. At step 3, you just choose the fea-
ture you want added.
IMPORTANT Depending on the feature you are removing or adding, you might be asked to
restart your system or to provide the Windows 8 installation disc for files to be copied from it. For
most features, a disc won't be required.
Turning Off Notifications for Windows 8
Apps
Windows 8 has a new system for showing notifications that is more verbose than earlier
versions of Windows, which you will notice after you download and install a number of
apps.
You can customize in detail, at an app level, which notifications you receive. This customiza-
tion is done from the Notifications area in PC Settings.
570
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
PC settings
Personalize
Users
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
NoLificaLions
Shuw app nutifkatiuni
5h>.-. ipp ixoicot'ons on the kick screen
Play notification sounds
[^M
Show notifications from
Lhese apps
r^l Calendar
Oil
^V Gerries
On
Br?l InttrnnT Fyplflrrr
On
^ Mail
On
^^fl Messaging
On
At the top are three settings with switches that affect all app notifications.
■ SHOW APP NOTIFICATIONS When this is set to Off, you will stop receiving notifica-
tions from all apps.
■ SHOW APP NOTIFICATIONS ON THE LOCK SCREEN When set to Off, no notifica-
tions appear on the lock screen.
■ PLAY NOTIFICATION SOUNDS When set to Off, notifications will no longer be
accompanied by sounds.
You have individual switches for all Windows 8 apps, too. Setting the switch for an applica-
tion to Off stops notifications from that app. Keep in mind that the list of apps displayed
depends on the apps you install on your computer or device. On your Windows 8 installa-
tion, you won't see the same number of apps listed as in the screen shots included in this
section.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to disable notifications for a group of apps.
SET UP Open PC Settings.
1 Click or tap the Notifications area.
2 Browse through the list of notifications that can be turned on or off and identify
those you want to turn off.
Turning Off Notifications for Windows 8 Apps 571
PC settings
Personalize
Users
Search
Share
General
Privacy
Devices
Wireless
Ease of Access
Sync your settings
NoLificaLions
Shuw app nutifkaliuni.
5h>.-. ;;:; rcoi colons on the kck screen
Play notification sounds
I^H
Show notifications from
these apps
Ijjjsl Calendar
Oil
^V Games
On
B^5| Intrrnnt Fyplorrr
On
^ M *
On
^^fl Messaging
On
■HI Music
On
For the apps for which you no longer want to receive notifications, turn the switch
from On to Off.
Show notifications from these apps
Calendar
Games
On
Off
□
Internet Explorer
Val
Messaging
Music
S::-"e
V'de:
Off
On
On
Off
On
On
Xbox SmartGlass
On
572 Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Q CLEAN UP Close PC Settings.
Your notification settings are now applied.
Defragmenting a Disk Drive Manually
By default, Windows 8 automatically defragments all your disk drives once per week. The
defragmentation process includes all your internal disk drives (except solid-state drives
[SSD]) and all the external drives you have connected (such as USB memory sticks or
external hard disks). SSDs are not included in the process because, due to the technology
they use, defragmentation actually lowers their lifespan and doesn't provide any tangible
speed benefit.
There might be times when you want to do this defragmentation ahead of schedule for the
internal disk drives that make up your computer or for an external drive that you connected
to the computer.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to perform a manual defragmentation of a disk drive.
^^ SET UP Open the Start screen.
1 Type defrag and click or tap Settings to view the search results.
2 Click or tap Defragment and optimize your drives to open the Optimize Drives
window.
Defragmenting a Disk Drive Manually 573
3 Select the drive you want to defragment and click or tap Optimize.
*
Optimize Drives
_
You can optimize your drives to help your computer
optimized. Only drives on or connected to your com
run more efficiently, or analyze them to find out il
auter are shown.
they need to be
Drive Media type
Last run
Current status
&£C:) Hard disk drive
Never run
OK (0% fragmented)
^j AV-Testi n g (D :) Harddiskdrive
u Nothing 7 (E:) Harddiskdrive
lj Everything [F:) Hard disk drive
L i System Reserved Hard disk drive
Never run
Never run
Never run
Never run
OK (0% fragmented)
OK [0% fragmented)
OK [0% fragmented)
OK [0% fragmented)
($1 Analyze
®) Optimize
On
Drives are being optimized automatically.
Frequency: Weekly
Change setting:
Close
4 Wait for the process to finish.
^J CLEAN UP Close Optimize Drives.
574
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
The selected drive has been defragmented.
You can use the steps detailed in this exercise to start the Optimize Drives tool and change
its settings. Follow steps 1 and 2 and, at step 3, click or tap Change Settings.
Optimize Drives
r
Optimization schedule
Run on a schedule (recommended]
Frequency Weekly v|
Notify me if three consecutive scheduled runs are missed
Drives Choose
Cancel
You will be able to change the schedule of when the defragmentation process runs and
choose which drives are included in the process.
Freeing Up Disk Space with Disk Cleanup
When you are running out of space, a good solution to free up some space is to use the
Disk Cleanup tool. This tool scans a selected drive and looks for temporary files and log files
that are no longer needed, cache files used by different programs such as Internet Explorer,
file history data, and so on.
It's recommended to use this tool once every few months to make sure your disk doesn't
get overloaded with files that are not useful and to make more space available.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to use the Disk Cleanup tool to save space on your disk.
SET UP Open the Start screen.
1 Type cleanup and click or tap Settings to view the appropriate search results.
2 Click or tap Free up disk space by deleting unnecessary files to open the Disk
Cleanup window.
Freeing Up Disk Space with Disk Cleanup 575
56ttl nC| S Results for "cleanup"
Search
Settings
^H View app sizes
*b 1 Create and format hard disk partitions
#l Defragment and optimize your drives
j^H Fits 88
ri Swre
^ Clamei
«,-
^^ Internet Lxplorer
Q Mail
«?S Ma P s
^Z 2
If you have more than one drive in your computer, select the drive on which
Windows 8 is installed (by default, it's the C drive) and click or tap OK. Otherwise,
skip to the next step.
4 Wait for the tool to scan the selected drive and present its suggestions for files to
delete.
5 Select all the types of files that can be deleted.
576
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Disk Cleanup for (C:)
Disk Cleanup
o
- . You can use Disk Cleanup to free up to S.57 MB of disk
space on (C:).
r iles to delete:
R7I I^IBBBBHSinsIHIffiSBBra^
A
14 i=| Temporary Internet RIes
EH S3 Offline webpages
D £ Recycle Bin
EH , .Temporary files
764 KB
29.3 KB
bytes
bytes
V
Total amount of disk space you gain: B.34 MB
Description
Downloaded Program Files are ActiveX controls and Java applets
downloaded automatically from the Internet when you view certain
pages. They are temporarily stored in the Downloaded Program
RIes folder on your hand disk.
r Clean up system files
How does Disk Cleanup work?
Click or tap OK.
You are asked to confirm your choice.
Disk Cleanup
Are you sure you want to permanently delete
these files?
Delete Files Cancel
7 Click or tap Delete Files and wait for the cleanup process to finish.
CLEAN UP No cleanup is required.
The selected files are deleted, and now more space is available on the selected disk. You can
repeat the procedure on other disks in your Windows 8 PC or device.
Freeing Up Disk Space with Disk Cleanup 577
Changing the Location of the Downloads
Folder and Other User Folders
Windows 8 stores all your user files and folders in C:\Users, followed by your user name.
There you will find folders such as Desktop, Downloads, My Documents, My Music, My
Pictures, and so on.
k\ QB ? l
Home Share
Ciprian
a® x^ i&
Copy
to"
Delete Rename
*Cut
© Copy path
[U Paste shortcut
Clipboard Organize
▼ t ► Computer ► Local Disk [C:) ► Users ► Ciprian
Name
„■/' Favorites
f_ Desktop
^ Downloads
-■ Recent places
4&> Sky Drive
j-3 Libraries
I Documents
<Jl Music
^ Picture:
H Videos
#4 Homegroup
P Contacts
_ Desktop
$■ Downloads
l: Favorites
* Links
' My Documents
yi- My Music
^ My Pictures
j| My Videos
§f Saved Games
£ Searches
^k SkyDrive
©
New
folder
IQ New item -
t^ Easy access *
I \ [^Open- EH Select all
Properties
Date modified
8/7/2012 2:56 PM
8/7/20122:56 PM
3/1 1/201 2 12:42 PM
3/7/20122:56 PM
8/7/2012 3:00 PM
8/11/201212:41 PM
8/11/201212:41 PM
3/11/2012 12:42 PM
3/11/2012 12:42 PM
8/7/20122:56 PM
3/7/20122:56 PM
3/7/2012 3:00 PM
Q Edit °° Select none
'^History ^ Invert selection
Open Select
Search Ciprian p
ype
lefolder
lefolder
lefolder
lefolder
lefolder
lefolder
lefolder
lefolder
lefolder
lefolder
lefolder
lefolder
: Z-.
You might want to change the location of one or more of your user folders. For example,
you might want to move the Downloads folder to the Desktop. Or, if you have more than
one partition, you might want to move all your important user folders away from the parti-
tion on which Windows 8 is installed. This will help make sure your useful folders and their
contents are safe if Windows 8 fails and you need to reinstall it.
In Windows 8, you can easily change the location of your user folders. In this exercise, you'l
learn how to change the location of your Downloads folder.
SET UP Open File Explorer and navigate to where you user folders are stored (for
instance, C:\Users, followed by your user name).
578
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
1
2
Right-click or press and hold the Downloads folder to open the shortcut menu.
Click or tap Properties to open the Properties window for the Downloads folder.
Open
Open in new window
Pinto Start
Share with
Include in library
Send to
Cut
Copy
Create shortcut
Delete
Rename
Propertie
3 Click or tap the Location tab.
Downloads Properties
General Sharing Security Location Customize
1* Rles in the Downloads folder are stored in the target
W location below.
You can change where files in this folder are stored to
another place on this hard drive, another drive, or another
computer on your network.
Re
Restore Default
Rnd Target...
Apply
4 Click or tap Move and select the new location for the Downloads folder.
Changing the Location of the Downloads Folder and Other User Folders 579
(own loads Properties
General Sharing Security Location Customize
k Files in the Downloads folder ane stored in the target
location below.
You can change where files in this folder ane stored to
another place on this hard drive, another drive, or another
computer on your network.
Find Target...
Apply
Click or tap OK.
You are asked to confirm whether you want to move all the files from the old location
to the new location.
Click or tap Yes and wait for the process to finish.
Move Folder
.
Do you want to move all of thefilesfrorn the old location to the new location?
Old location: C:\Users\Ciprian\Downloads
New location: F:\Downloads
We recommend moving all of thefiles 5.0 that programs needing to access thefolder's
content can do so.
Yes No | Cancel |
Q CLEAN UP Close File Explorer.
The Downloads folder and all its content has been moved to the new location. You can
repeat the same procedure for other user folders you would like to move to a different
location. If you move them, make sure you don't select the same folder for more than one
user folder. For example, don't have your Downloads and Desktop folders point to the same
location. If you move two user folders to the same new folder, certain apps and Windows
features will start to malfunction.
580
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Burning a Disc with File Explorer
You can burn a disc directly from File Explorer without the need for a third-party solution.
Even though third-party solutions are more complex and offer more features, File Explorer
can do the job when you need to write a simple disc with files on it. When starting the
burning process, you are prompted to choose between two types of discs.
LIKE A USB FLASH DRIVE (LIVE FILE SYSTEM) Discs formatted with this method
work like a USB flash drive or floppy disk, meaning you can copy files to disc immedi-
ately. They are a good choice if you want to keep a disc in the burning drive and copy
files whenever you need to. These discs are compatible only with Windows XP and
later versions of Windows.
WITH A CD/DVD PLAYER (MASTERED) Discs formatted with this method don't
copy files immediately, meaning you need to select the entire collection of files that
you want to copy to the disc and then burn them all at once. They are convenient
when you want to burn a large collection of files at one time. These discs are compat-
ible with older computers and devices such as CD players and DVD players.
Burn a Disc
How do you want to use this disc?
Disc title:
>:•:• Like a USB flash drive
Save, edit, and delete files, on the disc anytime. The disc will
work on computers running Windows XP or later. (Live File
System)
C'With a CD/DVD player
Burn files in groups and individual files can't be edited or
removed after burning. The disc will also work on most
computers, (Mastered]
Which one should I choose?
D
1
In this exercise, you'll learn how to burn a disc like a USB flash drive by using the Live File
System.
Burning a Disc with File Explorer
581
SET UP Open File Explorer and insert an empty disc (CD or DVD) into the burning
drive. Wait for the disc to be detected.
1 Click or tap Computer.
2 Double-click or tap the DVR-RW Drive.
You are asked how you want to use the disc you are about to burn.
fl?
Computer View
* e
oa^».t s-
Properties Open Rename Access Map network Add a network Open Control
media- drive- location Panel 3" Manage
| . Uninstall or change a program
■■Hi System properties
Location
' t if ► Computer
System
v 6
Search Computer
*>
J ,.{ Favorites
r Desktop
^ Downloads
jki Recent places.
4& SkyDrive
* Libraries
> jj Documents
Music
t- Pictures
•■ £§ Videos
i> #i Homegroup
Hard Disk Drives (4)
mm Local Disk (CO
4.94 GB free of 26.1 GB
Nothing 7 [EO
( ^k^ 12.1 GB free of 67.7 GB
AV-Testing (DO
^mT 3.02 GB free of 23.8 GB
Everything [FO
q ^kT 75.5 GB free of 341 GB
* )>?•■.■ Yi? 1 -' 'A-'th RpTinv^n p Stnranp -A
l aaaa i
DVD RW Drive [GO
702 MB free of 702 MB
1 Network Locat'on {I)
&y Ciprian (ciprian-pc]
WWojw Media Server
Raluca (ciprian-pc)
Windows Media Server
'*- Computer
l>^ Network
3 Select Like a USB flash drive.
4 Type the title of the disc and press Next.
582
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Burn a Disc
How do you want to use this disc?
* Like a USE flash drive
Save, edit and delete files on the disc anytime, The disc will
work on computers running Windows XP or later. (Live File
System]
O With a CD/DVD player
Burn files in groups and individual files can't be edited or
removed after burning. The disc will also work on most
computers. (Mastered]
Which one should I choose?
Wait for the disc to become ready for writing.
When the disc is ready, use File Explorer to access the disc.
gMM JM liMSBH D rive To o I s
Home Share View Manage
41
Copy Paste
D
A Cut
(wTj Copy path
a m x ^ si !:::::. o
Move Copy Delete Rename New Properties
Qy Paste shortcut to T to T T folder - '^History ^ Invert selection
[^Open- ffl Select all
Select none
Organize
Open
▼ T ^ ► Computer ► DVD RW Drive [Gfl My Disc
Name
.-, Favorites
r Desktop
$ Downloads
-■ Recent places
4& SkyDrive
,_,-,} Libraries
1 Documents
Jp Music
Q Pictures
H Videos
#3r Homegroup
"*■ Computer
*Li Network
v 6 Search DVD RW Drive (G:] My ... p
Date modified Type Size
Drag files to this folder to add them to the disc,
6 Drag the files and folders you want to burn to the disc.
7 Wait for the burn process to end.
Burning a Disc with File Explorer
583
37% complete
Copying ISO item 5. from Sky Drive to DVD RW Drive (G:] My Disc
37% complete n x
(v) More details
8 Eject the disc and wait for the burning session to be closed so that the disc can be
used later.
Q CLEAN UP Close File Explorer.
You can continue to add content to the disc until it becomes full on the same computer on
other Windows 8-based computers.
Accessing SkyDrive from the Desktop and
File Explorer
By using the SkyDrive app that was covered in Chapter 6, "Using SkyDrive," you can access
SkyDrive and manage your files with ease. However, the Windows 8 SkyDrive app is acces-
sible only from the Start screen and not from the Desktop or File Explorer.
As an alternative, there is an official SkyDrive desktop application you can download, install,
and use independently of the SkyDrive app included with Windows 8.
You can find it at https://apps.live.com/skydrive. Download it to your computer and install it.
584
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Sky Drive apps
SkyDrive ► SkyD rive apps
** SkyDrive for Windows
Keep important files on your PC in sync with SkyDrive.com.
SkyDrive for phones
Windows Phone
Gettheapp
iPhone and iPad
SkyDrive for Mac
B
Add files to your SkyDrive and organize them
right from the Finder,
Gettheapp
If you are using a Microsoft account to log on to Windows 8, SkyDrive will use your account
details automatically to sign in to the SkyDrive service. If you use a local account, you will
have to enter the details of your Microsoft account manually.
Microsoft SkyDrive
Settings About
General
H Start SkyDrive automatically when I sign in to Windows
1^1 Make files on this PC available to me on my other devices
More info
r^i Use Office to sync files faster and work on files with other people at
' — 'the same time,
More info
Help improve SkyDrive
[^1 Automatically send log files to SkyDrive when I experience a problem
Unlink SkyDrive
This option is unavailable because you're signed in on this PC with a
Microsoft account. If you want to use a different account with SkyDrive,
sign in on this PC with a different Microsoft account or add an account on
this PC with the email address you want to use,
Unlink SkyDrive
After the application is set up, you can use its shortcut on the Desktop and access SkyDrive
by using the SkyDrive shortcut in your File Explorer list of Favorites. The most important
difference between the SkyDrive desktop application and the Windows 8 SkyDrive app is
that by using the desktop application, you can access SkyDrive from File Explorer and the
Desktop.
Accessing SkyDrive from the Desktop and File Explorer
585
a! r -
SkyDrive
□
1 Home Share View
©
i=l 1— 1 [ip Copy path
Copy Paste
|F| Paste shortcut
Move Copy Delete Rename New
folder
GQ New item -
tI Easy access T
p\ [jjopen^
^ [^Edit
Properties
'^3.) History
ffl Select all
oo Select none
^ Invert selection
Clipboard
Organize New
Open
Select
t &
Computer ► Everything (F:) ► Ciphan ► SkyDrive v
<i Search SkyDrive
P
Size
0— \
^ TJ' Favorites
Name Date modified
Type
■ Deslctop
0, Appendix B 3/3/20127:20 PM
Filefolder
$ Downloads
0. AppendixC 3/10/2012 12:01 PM Filefolder
''^1 Recent places
a
Appendix D 3/3/20127:33 PM Filefolder
Chapter 10 3/10/20124:02 PM Filefolder
Chapter 13 3/9/2012 11:11 AM Filefolder
A SkyDrive
v — - — J
J «■
o
* (3 Libraries
G. Chapter 20 3/11/2012 1:02 PM Filefolder
> |§f] Documents
©, Documents 3/7/2012 3:02 PM
Filefolder
Ji Music
^ Important 7/21/20122:22 PM Filefolder
t> S Pictures
j Mobile uploads 7/21/20122:22 PM Filefolder
> B Videos
0. practice files 3/10/20124:19 PM Filefolder
fl. SkyDrive camera roll 7/21/20122:22 PM Filefolder
I> *i^ Hornegroup
Q 3-7-2012 5-54-52 AM.png 3/7/2012 3:55 PM
PNG File
75 KB
@ Documentl.docx 3/7/2012 3:57 PM
Microsoft WordD.,,
4KB
\> !]■) Computer
4| EnvelopePDF.pdf 4/5/2012 3:54 PM
PDF File
15SKB
@ giveawayjext.doot 4/5/2012 3:54 PM
Microsoft WordD.,,
206 KB
[>% Network
E WP_201 20621 J pg 6/21 /201 21:16PM JPG File
1,963 KB
Any changes you make inside the SkyDrive folder listed in File Explorer will be automatically
synced with the SkyDrive service and vice versa.
Unlike the Windows 8 app, the desktop SkyDrive application cannot be used to share files
with others.
Using Shortened URLs When You Want to
Share Files from SkyDrive
You can share files and folders from SkyDrive by using the SkyDrive app in Windows 8 and
from the browser. When sharing a file from the browser, you have access to more options
for sharing, including using a shortened URL instead of a complete one.
586
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Send email
bet a link to "a- 14-zuv 4-^fa-bb HM.f
Post to B * BD
View only
Get a lank
Only people with this link can see the files you share.
\^SMSBSSM
View and edit
Only people with this link can see and edit the files you share.
Public
Anyone can search for and view your public files, even ff you don't share a link.
Make public
Help me choose how to share
When generating the link for the file, you can also set permissions for accessing the file.
The default is View Only permissions, but you can set them to View And Edit or to Public.
Setting these kinds of sharing permissions is not available in the Windows 8 SkyDrive app.
Therefore, if you want to share files and folders and set very specific permissions, it is best
to use the browser and visit the SkyDrive webpage.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to share a file from SkyDrive by using a shortened URL.
^3 SET UP Open Internet Explorer, browse to https://skydrive.live.com, and log on with
your Microsoft account.
1 Select the file you want to share.
Search SkyDrive &
Files a
Recent docs
Shared
Groups
PCs
Ciprian -Laptop
Ciprian-PC
WinSPro- Laptop
WindowsS- Laptop
□ *
□ *
□ *
□ ®
□ H
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Documents
Important
Mobile uploads
practice files
SkyDrive camera roll
EnvelopePDF
giveawaytext
Sitejdeas
8-20-2012 2-56-03 PM
8/23/2012
8/29/2012
7/28/2012
4/5/2012
6/14/2012
8/10/2012
6/14/2012
4/5/2012
4/5/2012
8/26/2012
42.2 MB
76.2 MB
109 KB
70.2 KB
bytes
8.31 MB
bytes
158 KB
206 KB
12.6 KB
Using Shortened URLs When You Want to Share Files from SkyDrive
587
2
3
4
5
In the top toolbar, click or tap the Share button.
This opens a pop-up window with options for sharing the file.
Click or tap Get a link.
In the View Only section, click or tap Create.
Click or tap Shorten.
Get a link to "8-14-2012 4-26-56 PM.png"
View only
Only people with this link can see the files you share.
View and edit
Only people with this link can see and edit the files you share.
Public
Anyone can search for and view your public files, even if you don't share a link.
Make public
6 Copy the short URL and use it to share the file with others.
Send email
Post to G *
Get a link
Get a link to "8-14-2012 4-26-56 PM.png"
Vew only
Only people with this link can see the files you share.
View and edit
Only people with this link can see and edit the files you share.
Public
Anyone can search for and view your public files, even if you don't share a link.
Make public
Help me choose he.', to ;har
CLEAN UP When you have shared the file by using the short URL, close the SkyDrive
tab in Internet Explorer.
588 Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Five Ways to Launch Task Manager in
Windows 8
The "Exploring Advanced Troubleshooting Tools" section in Chapter 21, "Troubleshooting
Problems," covers the basics of using the new Task Manager to manage running applica-
tions and services. However, it does not cover in detail the many ways you can access this
tool.
The first and best-known method to access Task Manager is not necessarily the fastest. It
involves pressing Ctrl+Alt+Del followed by clicking or tapping Task Manager.
Switch user
Sign out
Task Manager
If you prefer to use your keyboard, the fastest way to launch Task Manager is to press
Ctrl+Shift+Esc. That will open the tool without an additional click or tap.
2 Games
|1 Microsoft Word (32 bit]
111 MicrosoftWWAHost
Q SkyDrive
Snagit (32 bit]
Snagit Editor (32 bit]
(v) More details
Another rapid method is to use the hidden menu for power users, detailed in a previous tip
in this chapter. Press Windows+X and then click or tap Task Manager.
Five Ways to Launch Task Manager in Windows 8
589
Programs and Features
Mobility Center
Power Options
Event Viewer
System
Device Manager
Disk Management
Computer Management
Command Prompt
Command Prompt (Admin]
Task Manager
Control Panel
File Explorer
Search
Run
Desktop
You can also perform a search on the Start screen for the word task and click the search
result.
Last, you can use the All Apps list that can be launched from the Start screen. The Task
Manager shortcut is in the Windows System area of shortcuts.
590
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Optimizing Startup Items with Task Manager
When you open the new Task Manager for the first time, you might have the impression
that it can be used to manage only the apps that are currently running due to the simplicity
of the interface and the apparent lack of options.
Task Manager - n 1
2 Games
fll Microsoft Word (32 bit]
111 MicrosoftWWAHost
SkyDrive
.Q Snagit (32 bit]
,Qf Snagit Editor (32 bit]
(v) More details
End task
Optimizing Startup Items with Task Manager 591
Clicking or tapping More Details will make its window larger and display several tabs and
options. In the Startup tab, you can view the apps that run at the Windows 8 startup. For
each app, Task Manager shows its name, its publisher, its status (whether it is enabled or
disabled to run at startup), and its impact on the startup procedure.
File Options View
Task Manager
Processes Performance App history Startup Users Details Services
Name Publisher Status
II IDT PC Audio
A Microsoft Sky Drive
^J Skype
IDT, Inc. Enabled
Microsoft Corporation Enabled
SkypeTechnologies SA. Disabled
| Synaptics TouchPad Enhanc. Synaptics Incorporated Enabled
(/*) Fewer details
Startup impact
Not measured
High
Not measured
High
Based on this information, you can choose to disable some apps from running at startup so
that Windows 8 starts up more quickly.
592
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
In this exercise, you'll learn how to disable apps from running at startup by using Task
Manager.
SET UP Open Task Manager.
1
2
Click or tap More details.
Click or tap the Startup tab to view a list of all the applications running at startup.
Task Manager
File Options View ^^- ^a^
Processes Performance App histivy Startup ujers Details Services
Publisher
Status
| IDT PC Audio
i Microsoft SkyDrive
ISkype
IDT, Inc. Enabled
Microsoft Corporation Enabled
Skype Technologies SA. Enabled
| SynapticsTouchPad Enhanc... Synaptics Incorporated Enabled
(*) Fewer details
Startup impact
Not measured
High
Not measured
High
3 Select the app you want to disable from running at startup.
4 Click or tap Disable.
Optimizing Startup Items with Task Manager 593
Task Manager
File Options View
Processes Performance App history Startup Users Details Services
Name Publisher Status
| IDT PC Audio
, Microsoft Sky Drive
1 Skype
IDT, Inc. Enabled
Microsoft Corporation Enabled
Skype Technologies SA. Enabled
9J Synaptics ToucsPad Enhanc... Synaptics Incorporated Enabled
^J CLEAN UP Close Task Manager.
Startup impact
Not measured
High
Not measured
High
By using this method, you can disable all the items running at startup. However, when
disabling items, it's recommended that you disable only apps you don't need to run at
startup. Apps that are installed by the drivers of your hardware components (video card
drivers, keyboard and mouse drivers, sound card drivers, and so on) should not be disabled.
If you disable them, you might encounter issues with the functioning of your hardware
components.
594
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Changing the Defaults for Programs, File
Extensions, and AutoPlay Dialog Boxes
Windows 8 users can change the defaults for programs, file types, and AutoPlay settings.
The values can be changed from Control Panel by clicking or tapping Programs and choos-
ing Default Programs.
[§3 Default Programs
T T l§3 ► Control Panel ► Programs ► Default Program:
Search Control Panel
Control Panel Home
Choose the programs that Windows uses by default
|| j] Set your default programs
Make a program the default for all file types and protocols, it can open.
k— " Associate a file type or protocol with a program
Make a file type or protocol (such as ,mp3 or http://] always open in a specific program.
Lil Change AutoPlay settings
Play CDs or other media automatically
I— V Set program access and computer defaults
Control access to certain programs and set defaults for this computer,
See also
Programs and Features
<$ Family Safety
There you will find the following entries.
■ SET YOUR DEFAULT PROGRAMS This setting lists all the programs and apps you
have installed so you can choose the default files types and protocols that each pro-
gram will open.
Changing the Defaults for Programs, File Extensions, and AutoPlay Dialog Boxes
595
[§3 Set Def a u It P rog r a ms
T T [§3 M Programs ► Default Programs ► Set Default Programs
v ^ Search Control Panel
Set your default programs
To set a program asthe default for all filetypes and protocols it can open, click the program and then click Set as default.
, Internet Explorer
Microsoft Corporation
http://www. m i c ro soft, c o m/wi n d c ws
Windows Internet Explorer 10 provides an easier and more secure web browsing
experience. Perform quick searches right from the toolbar, custom print your
webpages, and discover, manage, and read RSS feeds,
This program has all its defaults
«■► Set this program as default
Use the selected program to open all filetypes and protocols it can open by-
default.
+ Choose defaults for this program
Choose which filetypes and protocolsthe selected program opens by default,
*
ASSOCIATE A FILE TYPE OR PROTOCOL WITH A PROGRAM This setting lists al
the file extensions registered on your Windows 8 computer or device so you can
change the default program or app used to open each file extension.
596
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
Set Associations
■* « Programs ► Default Programs ► Set Associations
v ^ Search Control Panel
*
Associate a file type or protocol with a specific program
Click on an extension to view the program that currently opens it by default. To changethe default program, click Change program.
©
Photos
Microsoft Corporation
Chang
Name
Description
Current Default
a
H.jfif
JFIF File
Photos
gjnt
Journal Document
WindowsJournal
□ job
Task Scheduler Task Object
Unknown application
D-jod
Microsoft.Jet.OLEDB.4.0
Unknown application
Hjpe
JPEFile
Photos
H'JP e 9
JPEG File
Photos
Hjpg
JPG File
Photos
I] J*
JavaScript File
Microsoft ® Windows Based Script Host
E-jse
JScript Encoded Script File
Microsoft ® Windows Based Script Host
Djtp
Journal Template
WindowsJournal
jtx
XPS Document
XPS Viewer
§.>r
JXRFile
Not selected
E.k25
K25File
Photos
.kci
KCI File
Unknown application
rri . .
„ njr . ,_.,
i-,i
<
>
CHANGE AUTOPLAY SETTINGS These settings determine the behavior of the
AutoPlay dialog boxes displayed for the following types of media and devices: remov-
able drives, video and photo storage, DVDs, Blu-ray discs, CDs, software, and games.
Changing the Defaults for Programs, File Extensions, and AutoPlay Dialog Boxes 597
[§3 Auto Play
T T [§3 ► Control Panel ► Hardware and Sound ► AutoPlay
v 6
Search Control Panel
Choose what happens when you insert each type of media or device
Use AutoPlay for all media and devices
Removable drives
, Removable drive
Take no action
|~1 Choose what to do with each type of media
^Pictures Choose a default
[Hj Videos Choose a default
lijj Music Choose a default
H\ Mixed content Choose a default
Camera storage
, '«A Memory card
Choose a default
$■ DVD movie
Choose a default
•1
V
4^j Enhanced DVD movie
I Choose a default
~T1
| Save
Cancel
SET PROGRAM ACCESS AND COMPUTER DEFAULTS This setting changes the
default programs and apps you use for the most common computing activities: web
browsing, email, playing multimedia, instant messaging, and the virtual machine
used for Java. You can change the default programs so that they are the Microsoft
Windows defaults, third-party programs and apps you installed, or you can choose a
different program for each type of activity.
598
Chapter 20 20 Tips for Improving Your Windows 8 Computing Experience
1=3
Set Program Access and Computer Defaults
A program configuration specifies, default programs for certain activities such as Web browsing or sending e-mail, a
which programs are accessiblefrom the Start menu, desktop, and other locations.
Choose a configuration:
nd
(§) Custom
A
A
Choose a d efau rt web browser :
■:•:■ Usemycurrent Web b rowser
O Internet Explorer
Enable access to this program
(_) Mozilla Firefox
@ Enable access to this program
Choose a default e-mail program :
>:'•) Use my current e-mail program
Choose a default media player :
(§) Usemycurrentmediaplayer
O Windows Media Player
Rl Enable access to this program
V
Help
These tools come in handy after you have installed many programs and apps on your
Windows 8 computer or device, which can cause your defaults to change in ways you don't
want. You can use these tools to customize default programs and have the computing
experience you want.
Key Points
To ease your adjustment to the new Start screen, don't hesitate to use the shortcuts
the first few tips suggest.
If you would like to have a shortcut for the Start screen on your desktop, download
and use the file provided near the beginning of this chapter.
Notifications for Windows 8 apps can be set on a per-app level.
You can use Task Manager not only to end programs that don't respond to your com-
mands but also to optimize the list of apps running at startup.
Key Points
599
Apply
Apply Advanced Startup options, page 604
Advanced startup
Start up from a device or disc (such as a USB drive or DVD], ch<
firmware settings, change Windows startup settings, or restore
system image. This will restart your PC
Restart now
Explore
Explore advanced tools, page 616
Use these tools to get additional perfo rmance information
Performance issues
j\ Performance can be improved by changing visual settings. View details,
View advanced information about your computer's performance
^ CI ear all Windows Experience Index scores and re-rate the system
?' Force a complete re-run of all Windows Experience Index tests.
f j. || '&' ' v ' ' e '' v P er ^ c rm a n c e d eta i I s i n Event I c g
View details of problems affecting Windows performance,
( \\ '6?' l - l P eri Performance Monitor
Troubleshoot
Troubleshoot hardware and sound problems,
page 608
* T T H ► Control Panel ► All Control Panel Items ► Troubles
Troubleshoot problems - Hardware and Sound
Sound
■ ™| Playing Audio
LLj^p Find and fix problemswith playing sound.
I *1 Recording Audio
Lj^ Find and fix problemswith recording sound.
Device
a
Hardware and Devices
Find and fix problems with devices and hardware.
Use
Use Task Manager, page 618
Startup | Users | Details Services
0%
CPU
17%
Memory
0%
Disk
0%
Network
0% 20.7 MB
0.1%
0%
7,3 MB
40,3 MB
MB/s
OMB/s
Mbps
0Mbps
Mbps
Troubleshooting
Problems
21
THIS CHAPTER, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
Resolve most problems with common solutions.
Let Windows fix problems for you.
Use Help and Support.
Ask for Remote Assistance.
Explore advanced troubleshooting tools.
Refresh your computer or device.
Reset your computer or device.
Your Windows 8 computer or device will likely run smoothly for quite some time. However,
as your computer or device ages and you install new apps, acquire Windows and software
updates, and save data and media to your computer's hard drive, problems might begin to
appear. Most problems can be fixed by applying common solutions such as restarting the
computer or uninstalling problematic apps, but others can take a little more effort.
In this chapter, you'll learn how to troubleshoot problems. In general, you should apply the
techniques in this chapter in the order in which they are presented. Try to apply the most
common solutions first and then see whether Windows can fix the problem for you. You
might be able to resolve the problem by using Advanced Startup. If that doesn't work, you
can look at Windows and Microsoft Help files, webpages, and forums. If you can't find a
solution on your own, you can ask for Remote Assistance, experiment with advanced trou-
bleshooting tools, and, finally, refresh or reset your computer or device.
PRACTICE FILES You do not need any practice files to complete this chapter. For more
information about practice file requirements, see "Using the Practice Files" at the beginning
of this book.
601
Resolve Most Problems with Common
Solutions
Most problems can be resolved (at least in the short term) with one of a few common solu-
tions. Restarting your computer is the first thing you should try. Restarting often resolves
a problem temporarily and might allow you to get back to work quickly. You'll need to
resolve the problem later and locate the root cause when you have more time.
Although there are several ways to restart your computer, the best way is to press the
Windows+i key combination, click Power, and choose Restart.
After you restart your computer, one of a few things will happen. Most likely, your computer
will restart without incident, and the problem will be resolved. However, Windows 8 should
run without incident, so whatever problem exists will still need to be resolved. If you've
restarted the computer and you can access the Start screen, and you find that the problem
persists, try these common fixes as they apply to your particular problem. (You'll try other
options if these don't work.)
NOTE If your computer won't start, your only option is to start with the Windows 8 DVD or
an available restore partition provided by the manufacturer and then run a repair option or
perform an upgrade.
■ RESET DEVICES Turn off, turn on, disconnect, and reconnect cables for problematic
sound devices, monitors, printers, scanners, routers, and USB or FireWire devices. Turn
off Bluetooth devices and resync or relink them.
■ RESTART YOUR NETWORK Restart a problematic network by turning everything
602
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Problems
off and then turning hardware back on in the following order, letting each piece of
hardware finish initializing before moving to the next one: modems first, then routers,
and then computers, one at a time.
CHECK FOR SOLUTIONS FROM THE ACTION CENTER Make sure Windows is
up to date from the Action Center and let the Action Center check for solutions to
problems it knows about already. See Chapter 15, "Preventing Problems," for more
information.
Action Center
^ ► Control Panel ► System and Security ► Action Center
Control Panel Home
Search Control Panel
»
Change Action Center settings
l Qt' Change User Account Control
settings
^' Change Windows SmartScreen
View archived messages
- =•/■.■ performance infcr-^aticn
Review recent messages and resolve problems
Mo issues have been detected by Action Center.
Security
G
e
If you don't see your problem listed, try one of these:
Troubleshooting
Find and fix problems
*
■ UNINSTALL AND REINSTALL A PROBLEMATIC DESKTOP APP If you are sure an
installed desktop app is causing the issue, uninstall and reinstall it (or run its repair
program). You can often click Help>Check For Updates in third-party programs to see
whether known problems have been resolved by updates.
■ UNINSTALL AND REINSTALL A PROBLEMATIC APP If you are sure an installed app
is causing the issue, uninstall it. If the problem resolves, you can try reinstalling the
app. If the problem reappears, uninstall the app permanently.
■ OPEN DEVICE MANAGER Open Device Manager (type Device at the Start screen)
and see whether specific hardware is the issue. If possible, install, reinstall, or roll back
the driver. If prompted, let Windows search for the appropriate driver.
t- <-KJ Monitors
[> -ly Network adapters
J-j£) Other devices
| j7, PCI Device
: Jjfo SM Bus Controller
D- -^ Print queues
n Processors
D- {M3 Sensors
•■___ Software devices
If your problem is not resolved, access the Advanced Settings. To start with advanced
startup settings, type Advanced at the Start screen and choose Advanced Startup Options
from the results available from Settings.
Resolve Most Problems with Common Solutions
603
Setti
ngs
Result!
>for
"Ad van*
ced"
Advanced printei
Configure ad van
j-y Advani
^w^ra^ffi
>ns
]
FT1
In PC Settings, scroll down to the bottom of the options on the General tab (which is
selected), locate the Advanced Startup area, and then click Restart Now.
TIP You no longer press F8 during startup to access advanced startup options because
many computers start too quickly to press F8 in time!
Advanced startup
Start up from a device or disc (such as a USB drive or DVD], change your PCs
firmware settings, change Windows startup settings, or restore Windows from a
system image. This will restart your PC
Restart now
When you click Restart Now, you'll have access to the following options after the computer
starts.
■ CONTINUE Select this option to continue the start process. The only thing that hap-
pens is that the computer restarts.
■ USE A DEVICE Select this option to start the computer with an alternate drive or
device such as a Windows recovery DVD or startable USB drive.
■ USE ANOTHER OPERATING SYSTEM If this option is available, you can select it to
start with another operating system that is installed on your computer.
■ TROUBLESHOOT Select this option to reset or refresh your PC or to use advanced
tools.
■ TURN OFF YOUR PC Turn off the PC and do nothing.
604
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Problems
IMPORTANT You will encounter problems if your computer's BIOS settings don't allow you to
(or aren't configured to) start to a DVD or startable USB drive and you choose Use A Device in
the advanced startup options. You might have to restart the computer again, enter BIOS settings
(often by pressing F2 or some other key during startup), and change the start options so that you
can start with the desired device.
In this exercise, you'll restart the computer, access the advanced options, and choose
Automatic Repair. This will not harm your computer.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need access to the Start
screen.
1 From the Start screen, type Advanced.
2 Click Settings in the right pane and then click Advanced startup options.
3 Under Advanced startup, click Restart now.
4 From the Start options, click Troubleshoot, Advanced options and then Automatic
Repair.
5 Wait while the computer restarts.
6 Follow the prompts to log on as required.
7 If problems are found, let Windows repair them. If not, click Advanced options when
prompted. Click Continue.
^3 CLEAN UP No cleanup is required.
TIP Read Chapter 14, "Keeping Windows 8 Safe and Secure," to learn how to use features
such as System Restore, the Action Center, and Windows Defender.
Letting Windows Fix Problems for You
In the previous section, you worked through the most common solutions to problems,
including restarting your computer or device, connected devices, and your network. In the
exercise, you let Windows fix problems for you during the start process. You also learned
that you can refer to Chapter 14 in this book to learn how to use System Restore, the Action
Center, and Windows Defender if you have not tried those solutions yet and think they
might work in your situation. However, if your computer starts properly, you've explored
Letting Windows Fix Problems for You
605
other options, and a problem persists, you'll need to try other solutions. (Sometimes a
problem involves an inability to access the Internet, a printer not being recognized, or a
program that is incompatible with Windows 8, which are situations System Restore, the
Action Center, Windows Defender, and other options probably can't fix.)
Your next step in resolving problems is to explore the available troubleshooting wizards. To
access the wizards, type Fix at the Start screen and, from the Settings results, choose Find
And Fix Problems.
The resulting screen shows four categories; when you click one of these categories, new
options appear.
■ PROGRAMS Choose this option to run programs (now called desktop apps) that
were made for previous versions of Windows on your Windows 8 computer or device.
This opens Program Compatibility Troubleshooter. Work through the wizard to select
the problematic program and choose the operating system for which it was designed.
This resolves almost all problems with earlier programs because it lets those programs
run in their native operating system space.
■ HARDWARE AND SOUND Click this option to access troubleshooting wizards that
relate to hardware and sound. You can choose from Sound, Device, Network, Printing,
and Media Player options. Continue to work your way through these wizards by
selecting the associated entry in this window.
606
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Problems
-* Hardware and Sou
T T H ► Control Panel ► All Control Panel Items ► Troubleshooting ► Hardware and Sound
Troubleshoot problems - Hardware and Sound
S Playing Audio
Find and fix problems with playing sound.
(Recording Audio
Find and fix problems with recording :cund.
I Hardware and Devices
j_ jjjyi Find and fix problems with devices and hardware,
mi Network Adapter
La Find and fix problems with wireless and other network adapters.
Printing
I Printer
I Find and fix problems with printing,
Media Player
I a Windows Media Player DVD
\>M Find
d and fix problems with playing DVDs in Windows Media Player.
NETWORK AND INTERNET Choose this option if you've restarted your network
as detailed earlier but are still having problems. You can let Windows troubleshoot
and fix advanced network problems, including those that deal with Internet connec-
tions, shared folders, homegroups, network adapters, incoming connections, and
DirectAccess connections. You can also troubleshoot network printer problems.
TIP If you receive an error announcing an IP address conflict or something similar,
the Network And Internet Wizard can fix it.
SYSTEM AND SECURITY Choose this option if you have problems with Internet
Explorer, system maintenance, power, search and indexing, or Windows Update. As
with the other options, when you open the desired wizard, it asks for input from you.
Often, Windows will suggest a fix for your problem, and the fix will resolve it.
Letting Windows Fix Problems for You 607
•*- System and Security
* H ► Control Panel ► All Control Panel Items ► Troubleshooting ► System and Security
Troubleshoot problems - System and Security
Web Browser
^1 Internet Explorer Safety
I Hr I Find and fix problems with security and
nd privacy features in Internet Explorer,
System
-^1 System Maintenance
r-7Jl Find and clean up unused files and shortcuts, and perform maintenancetasks.
Power
Find and fix problems with your computer's power settings to conserve power and extend battery life.
1 Search and Indexing
] Find and fix problems with Windows Search.
Windows Update
Resolve problems that prevent you from updating Windows.
Using Help and Support
Your Windows 8 operating system comes with built-in Help files for common problems and
issues. You can access these files by typing Help at the Start screen.
Apps
Help and Si
Results fo
When you click Help And Support, the Windows Help and Support Center appears. By
default, the Help and Support feature accesses online Help files so that the results you get
are the latest available. To get the most from Help and Support, you should be connected
to the Internet.
You search for information and solutions in the Help and Support Center the same way
you'd search for them on the Internet: type your keywords in the Search window and click
the Search icon. You can use the Back and Forward buttons and access web links to more
information. The Windows Help and Support Center offers access to both the Windows
website and the Microsoft Answers website.
608 Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Problems
©@
Windows Help and Support
Search
Help home | Browse helc | Contact support
■* Get started
m
Learn whaTs new, install apps, connect your devices, and more.
3
Set up a network, connect to the Internet, troubleshoot problems, and more,
Create strong passwords, run through our security checklist, protect your PC
from viruses, and more.
More to explore
Windows website
Check out the videos, articles,
and other content on the
Windows website.
Microsoft Answers website
•fglflfl Provide feedback and get
answers to questions from
Microsoft support
professionals and other
Windows users.
You can use Help and Support to troubleshoot hardware, network, and security issues, just
as you can with the wizards, although most people find the wizards easier to use. However,
the Help and Support pages also offer information related to more general problems.
Suppose your child keeps accessing your user account and you can't figure out how to
restrict such access. You can search Help and Support for information on how to create user
accounts and create stronger passwords that your kids can't easily guess. That's a form of
troubleshooting; it's resolving a problem!
In this exercise, you'll browse the Help and Support files to learn how to secure your com-
puter with a user account for every user and to create strong passwords.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need access to the Start
screen.
1 From the Start screen, type Help. Click Help and Support. Maximize the window if
desired.
2 Click Security, privacy, & accounts.
3 Click Create a user account. Read the data and click the Back button.
Using Help and Support
609
4 In the Search window, type Strong passwords. Click the Search icon.
ptrong passwords
Help home | Browse help | Contact support
Search results for "strong passwords" (60)
Show results from: Tips to create strong passwords and pass phrases
,„, Learn how to create a strong password or passphrase that's difficult for
Windows (GO) , "
hackers or malware [malicious software] to guess.
Change your password
Learn how to change the password you use to sign in to Windows, and
change the passwords of other people that use your PC.
5 Review the results as desired.
^j CLEAN UP Close the Help and Support window.
Asking for Remote Assistance
Remote Assistance is a feature available in Windows 8 (and previous operating systems)
by which you can ask a friend, relative, colleague, or support professional for assistance in
resolving a problem. After you ask for assistance and the other person agrees to give it,
the helper can view your computer screen to see the problem in action. (He or she does
this over the Internet.) By viewing your computer screen and the problem, he or she can
often help you figure out how to fix it. After you're connected with a helper by Remote
Assistance, you can also give him or her permission to take control of the screen and
resolve the problem directly. It's a technology that enables someone who is not physically
close to you to access your computer as if he or she were sitting in front of it.
Before you can use Remote Assistance, you must verify that Remote Assistance invitations
can be sent from your computer. You can check this from the System Properties window.
By default, this feature is enabled. If you click the Advanced button, you'll also see that the
ability to let the helper control the computer remotely is also enabled by default.
TIP To access the System Properties dialog box, type System at the Start screen, click
Settings, choose System from the results, and then click Advanced System Settings. Choose
the Remote tab.
610 Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Problems
When you're ready to send a Remote Assistance invitation, you must access the option
to send an invitation. You can do this by typing Invite at the Start screen. Click Settings,
and the option to Invite Someone To Connect To Your PC And Help You, Or Offer To Help
Someone Else appears.
i someone to connect to your PC and
you, or offer to help someone else
When the Windows Remote Assistance window opens, select Invite Someone You Trust To
Help You and then follow the rest of the prompts as required.
r& Windows Remote Assistance
Do you want to ask for or offer help?
Win clews Remote Assistance connects two computers sc that cne person can help troubleshoot or fix
problems, on the other person's computer.
«► Invite someone you trust to help you
Your helper can view your screen and share control of your computer.
-> Help someone who has invited you
Respond to a request for assistance from another person,
Privacy statement
There are three ways to send the required invitation to ask for help by using Remote
Assistance.
Asking for Remote Assistance 611
SAVE THIS INVITATION AS A FILE Choose this option to send your invitation as an
attachment when you use a web-based email account such as Google mail or Yahoo!.
USE EMAIL TO SEND AN INVITATION Choose this option if you use a compatible
email program on your computer, such as Microsoft Outlook or the Mail app, to send
the invitation as an attachment.
USE EASY CONNECT Choose this option if your helper also has access to Easy
Connect. When you choose this option, you'll receive an Easy Connect password,
which you'll relay to your helper by phone, email, fax, or text. (Try this option first and
then work through the exercise offered later if this option doesn't work.)
-& Windows Remote Assistance
Q Chat 4J Settings \M Troubleshoot % Help
Tell your helper the Easy Connect password
[3HX7JWQDCGWQ
If your helper can't use Easy Connect you can save this invitation as a file ,
(*) Waiting for incoming connection..
After your helper receives an invitation by email or as a message from you by another
means, he or she will open Remote Assistance on that computer and type the password
you've given him or her. You'll be prompted to accept his or her help through Remote
Assistance, a connection will be established, and the other user will be able to see your
screen.
During the session, the helper can see and take control of your screen by using his or her
own monitor and mouse. You can hold chats to relay the problem, stop sharing your screen
(if you are), pause the session, and so on. You're always in control and can stop the session
at any time by clicking the red X in the Remote Assistance window.
612
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Problems
1
S Window; Remote AwistanrR - Reing helped hy Jnli 1 ■=■ 1 ^ 1 &
A Stop sharinc Pause Chat Settings Help
**A Remote Assistance invitation has been opened,
**A Remote Assistance connection has been established.
**Contact information was successfully exchanged.
Joli Ballew: Can you help me? 1 can't seem to access shared files on my
network,
Joli: Yes, 1 can help you with that, What computer are you trying to access?
1 want to connect to my Windows Vista PC |
;
iend
•■0- Your helper can now see your desktop
In this exercise, you'll create a Remote Assistance invitation code and relay that code to your
helper by using your preferred method of communication.
^3 SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need access to the Start
screen.
1 At the Start screen, type Invite. Click Settings.
2 Click Invite someone to connect to your PC and help you, or offer to help some-
one else.
Asking for Remote Assistance
613
3 Click Invite someone you trust to help you.
4
TIP If you've received help from someone before by using Remote Assistance, that
person will appear as an option after you invite someone to help you.
Click Save this invitation as a file. In the Save As window, click Desktop and then
choose Save.
The invitation file and password opens.
Save As
f |j ► Libraries ► Documents v <J Search Documents
'
Organize ▼ New folder
,-•,' Favorites
f_ Desktop
$, Downloads
Recent places
i ii i
Health Remote Travel
Records Assistance Plans
j-j Libraries
[3 Documents
<J> Music
S Pictures
(□Q Sample Media M
El Videos
Filename: Invitation
Save as type: RA Invitations (*,msrclncident)
-*- Hide Folders
5 Relay the information to your helper as desired.
The helper inputs the 12-character password he or she receives, and a session begins.
6 Follow the helper's instructions to resolve your problem.
CLEAN UP If the helper responds with an offer to help, accept the offer. When
desired, close the Remote Assistance window to end the session.
614
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Problems
Exploring Advanced Troubleshooting Tools
Windows 8 comes with many more troubleshooting tools than can be detailed here.
You can access the tools from the Start screen by typing Troubleshooting, Diagnose,
Performance, Repair, or similar keywords. These options can be more complex than you
are ready for, such as using Task Manager to close processes or services or viewing and
drawing conclusions from what you see in event logs, Performance Monitor, Resource
Monitor, and similar programs. However, it's important to know at least some of the
advanced tools that are available in case your troubleshooting efforts continue to go unre-
solved or if a technician asks you to supply information you can get only by using these
tools.
TIP Although advanced tools are detailed here, it is probably best to try to refresh your PC
before you spend too much time working with these tools if you don't have professional
help.
Here are a few of the tools you can use to troubleshoot difficult-to-diagnose problems.
PERFORMANCE INFORMATION AND TOOLS To adjust visual effects, indexing
options, and power settings and to access advanced tools. You can also view and print
detailed performance and system information.
t ■ >
Control Panel ► All Control Panel Items
► Performance Information and Tools
v <i Search Control Panel fi
Control Panel Home
f
Rate and improve your computer's performance
?3f Adjust visual effects
The Windows Experience Index assesses key system components on a scale of 1 .0 to 9.9.
Adjurt indexing optio
Adjust power settings
Component
What is rated
Sub score
Base score
Open disk cleanup
Processor:
Calculations per second
" 1
Advanced tools
Memory (RAM):
Memory operations per second
7,
4.5
Graphics:
Desktop graphics performance
«
Gaming graphics:
3D business and gaming graphics
performance
« 1
letermined by
Primary hard disk:
Disk data transfer rate
lowest subscore
5.9
^j/ View and print detaile
^9©* system information
d performance and
Your scores are current
(jr^ 1 Re-run the assessment
Last jpdate: 8/16/2012 12:52:27 PM
ADVANCED TOOLS To view current known performance issues and to view informa-
tion in event logs, Performance Monitor, Resource Monitor, Task Manager, System
Information, and so on.
Exploring Advanced Troubleshooting Tools
615
Use these tools to get additional performance information
Performance issues
j\ Performance can be improved by changing visual settings. View details,
View advanced information about your computer's performance
fi j i 1 ■S' ( -' ear a " Windows Experience Index scores and re-rate the system
?' Force a complete re-run of all Windows Experience Index tests,
f" xjl 'l^p'View perfcrmance details in Event I c g
II View details of problems affecting Windows performance.
f\\ ^'Open Performance Monitor
>L- J View graphs of system performance and collect data logs,
/V^ ^'Open Resource Monitor
xj*- View real-time system resource usage and manage active services and applications.
Open Task Manager
Get information about the programs and processes that are currently running on your computer.
^^ View advanced system details in System Information
View details about the hardware and software compon
iponents on your computer.
* Ms i 'jjj ' Adj u st th e a p pea ra n ce a n d p erf o rm a n c e of Wi n d c we
y Select settingsto changevisual effects, processor and memory usage, and virtual memory.
na£ (J^pOpen Disk Def rag m enter
^55|l Modify the schedule used to automatically defragment your hard disk.
{ \V\ '^Generate a system health report
^Mfll View details about system health and performance.
EVENT VIEWER To view information about errors that have occurred on your com-
puter, warnings that have been generated, and critical events. Although the informa-
tion here is rather cryptic, a technical support professional (or a good web search)
might help you understand the information.
PERFORMANCE MONITOR To view performance information in logs by configuring
specific criteria detailing what you'd like to monitor. You can monitor memory, CPU,
and other components.
RESOURCE MONITOR To view live information about how resources are currently
being used along with other data regarding those resources.
616 Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Problems
One other tool with which you'll want to become familiar is Task Manager. If you've used a
computer running Windows before, you're probably already familiar with it. After you open
Task Manager, click More Details. Task Manager offers seven tabs, and each performs spe-
cific functions.
TIP You can open Task Manager by using the Ctrl+Alt+Del key combination. When it
opens, click More Details.
PROCESSES To see which apps, background processes, and Windows processes are
currently running. If an app is frozen, you can right-click it from this tab and end the
task (close the app). You can also view how much of your computer's resources the
app is using. Likewise, if you know that a particular process is unresponsive, you can
exit that process.
Exploring Advanced Troubleshooting Tools 617
-v
Task Manager
File Options View
Processes Performance App history Startup Users Details Services
0%
CPU
17%
Memory
0%
Disk
0%
Network
Apps (3)
Microsoft Upln anH ^iinnnrt
> jg) Task Mar
> ^ Windows
Background
111 COM Sur
^ Commur
[■1 Device As
Expand
End task
Resource values
Create dump file
Go to details
Open file location
Search online
Properties
Mbps
0.1%
7.3 MB
OMB/s
Mbps
0%
40.3 MB
OMB/s
0Mbps
0%
0.9 MB
OMB/s
0Mbps
0%
4.5 MB
OMB/s
0Mbps
0%
3.2 MB
OMB/s
Mbps
0%
2.5 MB
OMB/s
0Mbps
r " H o st P ro c es s f o r Wi n d owe Ta s ks
PERFORMANCE To see how your computer's resources are currently being allocated.
You have options for CPU, Memory, Disk, and likely Wi-Fi and Ethernet, although you
might see others. You can use this information to find out which resource is being
overworked or overwhelmed.
Task Mar
File Options View
Processes | Performance | App history | Startup | Users | Details | Services]
Disk (C)
CPU
20% 1.60 GHz
Memory
1.2/6.0 GB [20%]
SA^S DiskOfC:)
94%
Wi-Fi
Not connected
Ethernet
Not connected
Wi-Fi
S: 35.3 R: 29.1 Kbps
Active t
me
p
Percentage of time the disk is
processing read or write requests 1
60 seconds
Disk transfer rate
618
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Problems
TIP There are some general rules for deciding whether a resource is overwhelmed.
For instance, average CPU usage when the computer is idle or only running a word
processing program should be around 10 percent, and when average usage hits 90
percent or higher, the CPU is working hard to keep up with the demands placed on it.
You can expect spikes for components at any time, however; spikes are normal.
APP HISTORY To view the total resources that your installed apps have used for the
past month. You can use this tab to discover resource-intensive apps and uninstall
them if you feel one app might be causing performance problems.
STARTUP To see which applications start when your computer starts (and thus run in
the background all the time). The more enabled apps you see here, the longer it will
take the computer to start. You can right-click to disable any app so that it does not
start when your computer starts to improve start time and computer performance.
File Options View
Processes Performance
App history
Startup Users Details
Services |
Name
Publisher
Status
Startup impact
* ^ IPoint.exe [2]
($fc dpupdchlc.exe
(^ IPoint.exe
Microsoft Corporation
Microsoft Corporation
Microsoft Corporation
Enabled
High
Low
High
USERS To view the users who are currently logged on and how many resources they
are using.
DETAILS To view details about running apps and programs, including how much CPU
and memory they use, their status, and their descriptions. You probably won't make
too many changes here; you'll use other tabs to troubleshoot.
SERVICES To view the services that are currently running. Services run so that
Windows features can work, including Plug and Play, Themes, Task Scheduler, and
more. Programs and apps need services to run, so stopping a service could cause
problems for the computer. Sometimes you can use this option to troubleshoot a
nonworking service and start (or restart) the service if it's inadvertently been stopped
or is not working properly.
Exploring Advanced Troubleshooting Tools 619
File Options View
| Processes | Performance | App history | Startup | Users | Details | Services
Name
PID Description
•S^ Power
J7Z Power
PlugPlay
Start
Cfe LSM
anager
, Devicelnstall
Stop
rvice
'.,.. DcomLaunch
Restart
xess Launcher
,. Brokerlnfra structure
defragsvc
% gpwc
:w;vmicheartbeat
Open Services
Search online
Go to details
ture
ent
iat Service
^stisvc
1572 Windows Image
Acquisition [WIA]
■r-': , J( - , ... m. , ^
-lu ill' I i-i-i-r^ 11. I r
m. . r^- j
In this exercise, you'll explore Task Manager and view CPU usage as you perform
calculations.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need access to the Start
screen.
1 From the Start screen, type Calculator. Click Calculator in the results to open it.
2 Press Ctrl+Alt+Del and then click Task Manager; click the Performance tab.
3 Position Calculator on top of the Task Manager window.
4 Perform several complex computations and note the change (if any) in the CPU's per-
formance graph.
620
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Problems
Processes | Performance | App history | Startup | Users | Details | Services]
CPU
1% 1.60GHz
Memory
1.1/6.0 GB(1B%)
Disk (C:)
o%
Wi-Fi
Not connected
Ethernet
Not connected
Wi-Fi
S: R: 2.4 Kbps
CPU
% Utilization
60 seconds
Utilization Speed
1% 1.60 GHz
Processes Threads Handles
B0 757 20832
Up time
0:23:16:27
Intel(R) Cor
^j CLEAN UP Close Calculator and Task Manager.
J CPU activity over the last 60 seconds \
J Calculator L
View Edit Help
sqrt(899523)
948.4318636570579
MC MR MS M+
0BS0
0000
0000
To view additional resources, type keywords on the Start screen. Troubleshooting is a great
keyword to try. Try Performance and Identify, too, as time allows.
Exploring Advanced Troubleshooting Tools
621
Settings Results **■
"Trouble"
3^ Refresh your PC
mrm Troubleshooting
>^ Remove everything and reinstall Windows
mm** Troubleshooting History
E2
>^ Turn high contrast on or off
tap Review your computer's status and i
\ issues
r esolve
3^ Make everything on your screen bigger
\\^ Fixproblemswithyourcomputer
J-C Change what Windows + Volume Up does
r^i Calibrate display color
3^ Change how long notifications stay up
■T*» Find and fix problems
3^ Change the width of blinking cursor
ta Save backup copies of your files witl
Wt& History
s~m Create a recovery drive
h File
Refreshing Your PC
If your PC just isn't running well, or if you have problems that you think are related to miss-
ing operating system files, third-party programs, malware, or some hard-to-fix Windows-
related issue, you can refresh your PC.
Refresh will revert Windows 8 to its system defaults. This option also preserves user settings,
user data, and applications bought through the Windows Store. It keeps all your photos,
music, documents, and videos. It keeps your personal settings, too. However, everything
else is removed, and the computer is restored to its defaults. Programs you've installed will
be removed. Toolbars for Internet Explorer will be uninstalled. Third-party software, such as
software you might acquire with a new printer or scanner, will be removed.
This is a good option if you've tried everything else and nothing seems to work. It isn't a
new install; it's just a refresh of the operating system and a removal of potentially problem-
atic third-party applications and add-ons.
622
Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Problems
In this exercise, you'll refresh your PC. Do not perform this exercise unless you have tried
other troubleshooting techniques and you are sure this is the only option remaining.
SET UP Start your computer and unlock the Lock screen. You need access to the Start
screen.
1 From the Start screen, type Refresh.
2 Click Settings and choose Refresh your PC.
3 Read the information and click Next.
4 Wait while the computer is prepared for the refresh and then follow any additional
prompts.
5 When the process completes, enter your password on the Lock screen.
CLEAN UP Reinstall third-party programs as applicable.
Resetting Your PC
You reset your PC by using the same method you used to refresh it. Resetting is a good
option if you've already tried all the other troubleshooting tips in this chapter and others, if
you've refreshed your PC, and if you've been told by a professional that resetting is the only
option (or if you plan to sell or give away your PC).
When you reset your PC, all your personal files, apps, and third-party programs are
removed. All your personalization settings will be reset. Your network settings, Internet set-
tings, installed hardware, and any other personalization you've made are erased, and all
your PC settings are changed to their defaults. This option restores your computer to a like-
new state.
Resetting Your PC 623
Key Points
Restarting your computer will resolve many problems in the short term without
further troubleshooting. However, you'll need to get to the root of the problem to
resolve it permanently.
Resetting devices or your network can easily resolve many related problems.
Advanced startup options are no longer available by pressing F8 during startup;
instead, you restart the PC with Advanced settings enabled from Windows 8.
Troubleshooting wizards are available that can help you fix all kinds of problems,
including those that are related to program, hardware, network, Internet, security, and
so on.
The Windows Help and Support Center offers resources you can use to diagnose and
resolve many types of issues.
With Remote Assistance, you can easily ask a friend, colleague, relative, or other per-
son for help.
When all else fails, there are myriad advanced troubleshooting tools to try.
Refresh and Reset are options to return your PC to a previous state.
624 Chapter 21 Troubleshooting Problems
Using Keyboard Shortcuts and
Touch Gestures in Windows 8
A
THIS APPENDIX, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Use the keyboard shortcuts for Windows 8.
■ Explore touch keyboard shortcuts.
■ Use touch gestures in Windows 8.
As long as there have been Windows operating systems, there have been keyboard short-
cuts. You might know some already You might even know that you can press the Windows
key to return to the Start screen from anywhere in Windows 8, for instance, or that
Windows+C displays the default charms. There are many more shortcuts; you will likely be
surprised at just how many there are and the extent to which they can be used.
In this appendix, you'll first learn all the keyboard shortcuts that work in Windows 8 and
how to experiment with touch keyboard shortcuts. Then, you'll see the touch gestures you
can use in Windows 8 when running it on a computer or device with touch capabilities.
PRACTICE FILES You do not need any practice files for this Appendix. A complete list of
practice files is provided in the "Using the Practice Files" section at the beginning of this
book.
Learning Keyboard Shortcuts for Windows 8
Some keyboard shortcuts are unique to Windows 8, such as pressing the Windows key to
return to the Windows 8 Start screen, mentioned earlier. Some keyboard shortcuts are tra-
ditional, such as using Ctrl+x to delete selected text, Ctrl+z to undo what you've just done
(perhaps restoring text you've just deleted), and so on, and have been around for decades
and almost always produce the same results.
Learning Keyboard Shortcuts for Windows 8 627
TIP See Chapter 17, "Making My Computer Accessible," for more information about
personalizing the keyboard to use Sticky Keys, Toggle Keys, Filter Keys, Mouse Keys, and
so on.
The following list contains a few keyboard shortcuts that are extremely useful in Windows
8, and you can use them no matter where you are (in an app, on the desktop, using Internet
Explorer, and so on) on the computer.
TIP If you prefer the on-screen keyboard to a traditional keyboard, you can use these
shortcuts there. However, because you can't hold down two keys at once, click the first
required key (such as Windows) and then the second (such as D or C) when using the
on-screen keyboard.
■ ACCESS THE START SCREEN Press the Windows key
■ ACCESS THE DESKTOP Windows+D
■ SHOW THE CHARMS Windows+C. Shortcuts for charms are:
■ SEARCH Windows+Q or just start typing when you are on the Start menu
■ SHARE Windows+H
■ START Windows
■ DEVICES Windows+K
■ SETTINGS Windows+I
TIP When you're ready to shut down your computer, use Windows+I and then click
or tap the Power button, found on the bottom right.
■ SHOW THE APP BAR WHILE IN ANY APP Windows+Z
■ CYCLE THROUGH OPEN APPS Windows+Tab or Alt+Tab
■ ZOOM IN AND OUT Ctrl + - to zoom out and Ctrl + + to zoom in
■ SNAP AN APP TO ONE SIDE OF THE SCREEN Windows+period.
TIP You'll find that many of the traditional shortcuts you've always used still exist, such as
Windows+L to lock and Windows+P to project to another display.
628 Appendix A Using Keyboard Shortcuts and Touch Gestures in Windows 8
The complete list of keyboard shortcuts that you can use in Windows 8 follows.
WINDOWS Opens the Start screen.
RIGHT SHIFT KEY If you press it for eight seconds, it turns on Filter Keys. If you press
it five times in a row, it turns on Sticky Keys.
CTRL+MOUSE WHEEL When used on the desktop, it changes the size of your desk-
top icons. When used on the Start screen, it zooms in and out.
CTRL+A Select all.
WIN+C Open the charms.
CTRL+C Copy.
WIN + D Show the desktop.
ALT+D Select the address bar in Internet Explorer.
CTRL+ALT+D Enable the Docked mode in the Magnifier tool.
WIN + E Open File Explorer.
CTRL+E Select the search box in File Explorer.
WIN + F Show Files in the Search charm.
WIN+CTRL+F Open the Find Computers window, which can find computers on a
network (used mostly in business networks).
WIN+G Cycle through desktop gadgets.
WIN + H Open the Share charm.
WIN + I Open the Settings charm.
CTRL+ALT+I Invert colors in the Magnifier tool.
WIN+J Switch the focus between snapped apps and larger apps.
WIN + K Open the Devices charm.
WIN + L Lock the computer and display the Lock screen.
CTRL+ALT+L Enable Lens mode in the Magnifier tool.
WIN + M Minimize all the windows on the desktop.
Learning Keyboard Shortcuts for Windows 8 629
CTRL+N Open a new File Explorer window.
CTRL+SHIFT+N Create a new folder in File Explorer.
WIN+O Change the Lock screen orientation.
WIN + P Open the project options for a second screen.
WIN+Q Open the Search charm.
WIN + R Open the Run window.
CTRL+R Refresh.
WIN+T Set the focus on the taskbar and cycle through the running desktop apps.
WIN + U Launch the Ease of Access Center.
WIN+V Cycle through notifications.
WIN+SHIFT+V Cycle through notifications in backward order.
CTRL+V Paste.
WIN+W Open Settings in the search charm.
CTRL+W Close the current window. It works only in desktop apps.
WIN+X Open the hidden system menu.
CTRL+X Cut.
CTRL+Y Redo.
WIN+Z Opens the app bar. It works only in Windows 8 apps.
CTRL+Z Undo.
WIN + KEYS FROM 1 TO 9 Display the app at the given position on the taskbar.
WIN + + (PLUS SIGN) Zoom in while using the Magnifier tool.
WIN + - (MINUS SIGN) Zoom out while using the Magnifier tool.
WIN +, (COMMA) Peek at the desktop.
WIN+. (PERIOD) Snap a Windows 8 app to the right.
WIN+SHIFT+. (PERIOD) Snap a Windows 8 app to the left.
WIN + ENTER Launch Narrator.
WIN+ALT+ENTER Launch Windows Media Center if installed.
630 Appendix A Using Keyboard Shortcuts and Touch Gestures in Windows 8
ALT + ENTER Open the Properties window for the item selected in File Explorer.
SPACE Select or clear an active check box.
WIN+SPACE Switch the input language and keyboard layout.
ALT+SPACE Open a shortcut menu in desktop applications.
TAB Move forward through options.
WIN+TAB Cycle through Windows 8 app history.
WIN+CTRL+TAB+ARROW KEYS Cycle through Windows 8 app history in the direc-
tion you specify by using the arrow keys.
CTRL+TAB Cycle through Windows 8 app history (identical to Win+Tab).
ALT+TAB Switch between opened apps (including desktop apps).
SHIFT+TAB Move backward through options.
CTRL+ALT+TAB+ARROW KEYS Switch between opened apps (including desktop
apps) in the direction you specify by using the arrow keys.
ESC Cancel.
WIN + ESC Exit the Magnifier tool.
CTRL+ESC Show the Start screen.
CTRL+SHIFT+ESC Launch Task Manager.
PRTSCN Copy an image of your screen to the Clipboard.
LEFT ALT+LEFT SHIFT+ PRTSCN Turn on High Contrast
NUMLOCK Press for five seconds to turn on Toggle Keys.
CTRL+INSERT Copy (alternative to Ctrl+C).
SHIFT+INSERT Paste (alternative to Ctrl+V).
WIN + HOME Minimize inactive desktop windows.
WIN + PAGEUP Move the Start screen to the left monitor.
WIN + PAGEDOWN Move the Start screen to the right monitor.
WIN + BREAK Open the System Properties window.
LEFT ARROW Open the previous menu or close the current submenu.
WIN + LEFT ARROW Snap the active desktop window to the left.
Learning Keyboard Shortcuts for Windows 8 631
WIN+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW Snap the active desktop window to the left monitor.
CTRL+LEFT ARROW Show the previous word or element.
ALT+LEFT ARROW Show the previous folder in File Explorer.
CTRL+SHIFT+LEFT ARROW Select a block of text from the current cursor position
to the left.
RIGHT ARROW Open the next menu or submenu.
WIN + RIGHT ARROW Snap the active desktop window to the right.
WIN+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW Snap the active desktop window to the right monitor.
CTRL+ RIGHT ARROW Show the next word or element.
CTRL+SHIFT+RIGHT ARROW Select a block of text from the current cursor position
to the right.
WIN + UP ARROW Maximize the active desktop window.
WIN+SHIFT+UP ARROW Maximize the active desktop window and keep the cur-
rent width.
CTRL+UP ARROW Show the previous paragraph.
ALT+UP ARROW Advance up one level in File Explorer.
CTRL+SHIFT+UP ARROW Select a block of text.
WIN + DOWN ARROW Minimize the active desktop window.
WIN+SHIFT+DOWN ARROW Minimize the active desktop window and keep the
current width.
CTRL+DOWN ARROW Advance to the next paragraph.
CTRL+SHIFT+DOWN ARROW Select a block of text.
Fl Display Help if available.
WIN + F1 Launch Windows Help and Support.
F2 Rename the selected item.
F3 Search for a file or folder.
F4 Display items in the active list (works only for desktop apps).
632 Appendix A Using Keyboard Shortcuts and Touch Gestures in Windows 8
■ CTRL+F4 Close the active document.
■ ALT+F4 Close the active item or app.
■ F5 Refresh.
Exploring Touch Keyboard Shortcuts
If you have a touch-based device, you can use the touch keyboard. It's available on the
desktop taskbar. Tap or click the keyboard icon located there to show the touch keyboard
on the screen. You can then use it to type in any compatible program.
You can configure the keyboard to display in different ways. The keyboard icon located on
the touch keyboard offers access to the options. Below, a traditional keyboard is selected,
but it's easy to see the others. If you don't like the traditional keyboard, you can select the
split keyboard. You can also write with a pen in the designated writing area and hide the
keyboard when you no longer need it.
You can also configure how you want the touch keyboard to work. From the Start screen,
type keyboard. From the results, select Settings and then choose General.
Exploring Touch Keyboard Shortcuts
633
In the General options, located in the PC Settings window, you can configure the touch key-
board settings.
Touch keyboard
Show text suggestions as I type
Add a space after I choose a text suggestion
On |^S
Add a period after I double-tap the Spacebar
On |^S
Capitalize the first letter of each sentence
On l^fii
Use all uppercase letters when I double-tap Shift key
On l^Bi
Play key sounds as I type
Make the standard keyboard layout available
Off ■
634 Appendix A Using Keyboard Shortcuts and Touch Gestures in Windows 8
You might want to make note of the following particular options.
■ Add A Period After I Double-Tap The Spacebar
■ Capitalize The First Letter Of Each Sentence
■ Make The Standard Keyboard Layout Available
Using Touch Gestures in Windows 8
You can use Windows 8 on a multitude of touch-based input devices such as tablets, com-
patible monitors, laptops with trackpad gesture support, and so on. Before using Windows
8 on such devices on a daily basis, becoming thoroughly familiar with the touch gestures
and their mouse equivalents will quickly make you more productive.
The touch gestures you can use in Windows 8 are the following.
■ Swipe from the right edge for system commands. Swiping from the right edge of
the screen reveals the charms with system commands. Swiping from the left displays
previously used apps.
Mouse equivalent Place the mouse pointer in the lower-right or upper-right corner
of the screen and move your mouse on the right edge.
Swipe in from the left to switch apps. Swiping in from the left reveals thumbnails of
your open apps so you can switch to them quickly.
Using Touch Gestures in Windows 8
635
Mouse equivalent Place the mouse pointer in the upper-left corner of the screen
and click to cycle through apps or in the lower-left corner of the screen to see the
Start screen.
Swipe in and out on the left. Swiping in and back out on the left displays the most
recently used apps, and you can select an app from that list.
Mouse equivalent Place the mouse in the upper-left corner and slide down the left
side of the screen to see the most recently used apps.
Swipe from the bottom or top edge. App commands are revealed by swiping from
the bottom or top edge.
Mouse equivalent Right-click the app to see the app commands.
Drag an app down from the top to close it. You don't have to close apps. They won't
slow down your computer or device, and they'll close on their own if you don't use
them for a while. If you want to close an app, drag the app to the bottom of the
screen.
1
i
Mouse equivalent Click the top of the app and drag it to the bottom of the screen.
636 Appendix A Using Keyboard Shortcuts and Touch Gestures in Windows 8
Press and hold to learn. You can see details when you press and hold an item. In some
cases, pressing and holding opens a menu with more options.
Mouse equivalent Point to an item to see more options. In some applications (for
instance, File Explorer), it is the equivalent of right-clicking an item.
Tap to perform an action. Tapping an item causes an action such as launching an app
or following a link.
Mouse equivalent Click an item to perform an action.
Slide to drag. This is used mostly to pan or scroll through lists and pages, but you can
use it for other interactions, such as moving an object or drawing and writing.
Mouse equivalent Click, hold, and drag to pan or scroll. In addition, when you use
a mouse and keyboard, a scroll bar appears at the bottom of the screen so you can
scroll horizontally.
Pinch or stretch to zoom. Zooming provides a way to jump to the beginning, the end,
or a specific location within a list. You can start zooming by pinching or stretching
two fingers on the screen.
Using Touch Gestures in Windows 8 637
Mouse and keyboard equivalent Hold down the Control key on the keyboard
while using the mouse wheel to expand or shrink an item or tile on the screen.
Rotate to turn. Rotating two or more fingers turns an object. You can turn the whole
screen 90 degrees when you rotate your device, too.
Mouse equivalent Support for rotating an object depends on whether the specific
app supports it.
Key Points
You can use keyboard shortcuts to navigate in Windows 8 just as you could in previ-
ous versions of Windows.
If you have a touch screen, you can use the touch keyboard to type text, including
keyboard shortcuts you would use on a physical keyboard.
Learn the touch gestures Windows 8 supports if you plan to use it and be productive
on a device with touch input.
638
Appendix A Using Keyboard Shortcuts and Touch Gestures in Windows 8
Enhancements for Using
Multiple Displays in Windows 8
B
THIS APPENDIX, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Use Windows 8 with multiple monitors.
■ Customize the way the image is displayed on multiple monitors.
One of the subtle but important changes to Windows 8 is that it can work with more display
types than any other version of Windows. For example, it can be used on all the traditional
displays that work with Windows 7 and earlier versions of Windows. In addition, it can work
on touch displays with small sizes (such as the 10.6-inch display of the Microsoft Surface) on
huge displays as large as 82 inches.
Windows 8 provides better support for dual or multiple-monitor setups than any previous
version of Windows. For example, on a dual-monitor setup, you can display the Start screen
on the main monitor and the Desktop on the second. You can also display the Desktop on
both monitors, and unlike Windows 7, the taskbar can be visible on both.
In this appendix, you'll learn in detail how to use Windows 8 with a dual-monitor setup and
how to customize how each display is used.
PRACTICE FILES You do not need any practice files for this Appendix. A complete list of
practice files is provided in the "Using the Practice Files" section at the beginning of this
book.
641
Using Windows 8 with a Dual-Monitor
Setup
When using Windows 8 with a dual-monitor setup, the Start screen is displayed on the main
monitor, and the Desktop is displayed on the second monitor.
With the Windows+P keyboard shortcut, you can open the projection options for the sec-
ond display. You can choose to use only the main monitor, duplicate the image from the
main monitor on the second monitor, extend the image from the main monitor to the sec-
ond monitor, or use only the secondary monitor.
642 Appendix B Enhancements for Using Multiple Displays in Windows 8
To customize in detail how the image is displayed on each monitor, right-click or press and
hold the Desktop. Click or tap Screen Resolution.
Using Windows 8 with a Dual-Monitor Setup 643
View
Sort by
Refresh
Paste
Paste shortcut
Next desktop background
New
Screen resolution
This displays the Screen Resolution window, in which both monitors and their relative posi-
tions are displayed as identified by Windows 8.
You can drag and drop each monitor to a different position or switch between them.
I
Screen Resolution
n |
f 19 « Display ► Screen Resolution
v <i Search Control Pan
el p
Change the appearance of your displays
Delect |
-Gill ©
Identify
Display:
Resolution:
Orientation:
Multiple displays:
This is currently yo
Advanced settings
1. Mobile PC Display v
1 1230x768 v|
Landscape v
Extend these displays v
ur main display.
Project to a second screen (or press the Windows logo key ■* + P]
Vlaketext and other items larger or smaller
k'Vhat display settings should 1 cheese?
Ufl
K | Cancel | Apply
644 Appendix B Enhancements for Using Multiple Displays in Windows 8
When selecting each monitor, you can also customize the following parameters.
■ Display The display you want to customize
■ Resolution The resolution of the selected display
■ Orientation The orientation of the selected display
■ Multiple displays How to use the available displays
After you make your changes, press or tap OK to apply them. Don't hesitate to experiment
until you find the setup that works best for you.
Key Points
Windows 8 provides support for more display types than any earlier version of
Windows.
Windows 8 can also work with touch screens with different sizes and aspect ratios.
You can customize the available display options when using a dual-monitor setup so
that everything is displayed the way you want it to be.
Using Windows 8 with a Dual-Monitor Setup 645
Installing and Upgrading
to Windows 8
c
THIS APPENDIX, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Make a clean installation of Windows 8.
■ Dual-boot Windows 8 with earlier versions of Windows.
■ Upgrade to Windows 8 from earlier versions of Windows.
If you are the type of person who likes to configure your own computers and devices, you'll
want to learn how to install Windows 8. In this appendix, you'll learn how to perform a
clean installation of Windows 8 when you have a new computer or device on which you
would like to install it. If you want to use Windows 8 alongside other operating systems
that's entirely possible, and this appendix will show the basics you need to know about how
to create a dual-boot setup.
In addition, you'll learn how to perform an upgrade to Windows 8 from an earlier version of
Windows.
PRACTICE FILES You do not need any practice files for this Appendix. A complete list of
practice files is provided in the "Using the Practice Files" section at the beginning of this
book.
Installing Windows 8
Installing Windows 8 is not a complicated procedure. As long as your system meets at least
the minimum Windows 8 hardware requirements to run, you can install it yourself.
TIP If you want to learn more about the hardware requirements of Windows 8, read
Chapter 1, "Introducing Windows 8."
Installing Windows 8 647
Before you start the installation procedure, look for the activation code (also called the
product key) that is required for the whole process to start. Without it, you cannot install
Windows 8. The code is distributed with your retail copy of Windows 8.
Ua, P
Enter the product key to activate Windows
It should be on the back of the box that Windows came in or in a rnessagethat shows you bought
Windows,
The product key looks like this: XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX
Dashes will be added automatically.
Privacy statement
Next
Insert the installation disc into your computer or device and boot your computer or device
from it. Depending on how it is configured, you might need to edit the basic input-output
system (BIOS) and change the boot order so that your system starts first from your DVD or
Blu-ray drive.
Early in the installation process, you are asked to select the partition on which you want to
install Windows 8. If you are installing it on a new computer or device, you'll see your hard
disk drive as one chunk of unallocated space. You must create a new partition for it. When
creating the partition, keep in mind that it is best to allocate at least 25 GB for Windows 8
to make sure you have space for it and the apps that you will install while using it. If you
plan to install many apps and games, allocate even more space.
648
Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
£ Windows S
Where do you want to install Windows?
i — r
Name
Total size |
Free space | Type
. ~-^. Drive Unallocated Space
25.0 GB
25.0 GB
^t Refresh
^ Lo^ad driver
^Delete
^Brfend
^^ Format New
Size 1 25600
MB
Agp'y
When creating this partition, Windows Setup automatically creates another partition named
System Reserved, about 350 MB in size. Leave this partition untouched and don't delete it. It
stores recovery tools that are necessary when encountering failures and problems.
If you have partitions, all you need to do is select the one on which you want to install
Windows 8. It is best to format that partition so that there is no data on it, and Windows 8
can use all the space on it.
After the installation process is complete, start customizing your Windows 8 installation.
You will be asked to select whether you want to use the express settings (the default set-
tings) or customize things in detail.
Installing Windows 8
649
To make sure Windows 8 will work the way you want it to, select Customize and go through
a few additional steps.
Prior to the first logon, you will be asked to enter the details of your Microsoft account
(email address and password). If you do not have a Microsoft account, it is best to create
one on a computer or device with an Internet connection prior to the installation process.
650 Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
TIP If you want to learn more about the Microsoft account, see the "Introducing the
Microsoft Account (Windows Live ID)" section in Chapter 12, "Allowing Others to Use the
Computer."
In this exercise, you'll learn how to install Windows 8 from the beginning on a new com-
puter or device.
SET UP Insert the Windows 8 installation disc into your DVD or Blu-ray reader. Start
from the disc. Depending on how your system is set up, you might need to enter your
computer's BIOS and set it to boot from the DVD or Blu-ray reader.
1 Press a key on your keyboard when asked to do so, to start the Windows 8 setup
process.
2 Select the language you want to install, the time and currency format you want to
use, and the keyboard or input method.
Installing Windows 8 651
3 Click or tap Next.
4 Click or tap Install now.
You are asked to enter the product key.
652 Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
It should be on the back of the box that Windows came in or in a message that shows you bought
Windows,
The product key looks like this: XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX-XXXXX
Dashes will be added automatically.
"IEE2JJ
Privacy statement
Type the product key for your Windows 8 installation and click or tap Next.
You are asked to accept the license terms.
Your use of this software is subject to the terms and conditions of the license agreement by
which you acquired this software. If you are a volume license customer, use of this
software is subject to your volume license agreement. You may not use this software if you
have not validly acquired a license for the software from Microsoft or its licensed
distributors.
EU LAI D : Wf n_RM_1 _P S_V_e n -u s
p' p accept the license terms;
6 Read the license terms and select I accept the license terms.
7 Click or tap Next.
Installing Windows 8 653
You are asked to select the type of installation you want to perform.
Which type of installation do you want?
Upgrade: Install Windows and keep files, settings, and applications
The files, settings and applications are moved to- Windows with this option. This option is only
available when a supported version of Windows is already running on the computer.
r.
Custom: Install Windows only (advanced)
The files, settings,, and applications aren't moved to Windows with this option. If you want to
make changes to partitions and drives, start the computer using the installation disc, We
recommend backing up your files before you continue.
Help me decide
Select Custom: Install Windows only (advanced).
You are asked where you want to install Windows.
.~P Drive Unallocated Space
^f Refresh
%* Load driver
654 Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
9 Select where you want to install Windows 8.
IMPORTANT If your computer or device has formatted partitions, select the partition on which
you want to install Windows 8 and skip to Step 16.
10
li
12
Click or tap Drive options (advanced) to open a list of options for managing the
available disk space.
Click or tap New and specify the size of the partition that will be created for
Windows 8.
Where do you want to install Windows?
Name
Total size | Free space | Type
V
Drive Unallocated Space
25.0 GB 25.0 GB
*t Refresh
ty Load driver
^Delete
^jl Extend
m^f Format
Size H 1 25600 Tj ME [ Agply 1 )1 ] Cancel
Click or tap Apply.
You are informed that Windows might create additional partitions for system files.
Installing Windows 8 655
Where do you want to install Windows?
| Name Total size | Free space] Type
-p Drive Unallocated Space 25.0 GB 25.0 GB
Refi
Wi n d ows Setu p I '
L To ensure that all Windows features work correctly, Windows might create
•^U^ additional partitionsfor system files.
| *Loa
| OK | | Cancel |
Next
13 Click or tap OK.
14 Select the partition you just created and click or tap Format.
You are informed that all the data on this partition will be lost.
. ^ Windows Setup
Where do you want to install Windows?
Name Total size |
Free space | Type
£Z& Drive Partition 1: System Reserved 350.0 MB
320.0 MB System
** Refresh XS elete II ^Format 1
New
12* Load driver ^"^ Extend
r
Next
656 Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
15
16
17
Where do you want to install Windows?
Name Total size | Free space | Type
c^^, DriveO Partition 1: System Reserved 350.0 MB 320.0 MB System
V
**.Refi
Windows Setup ■ — — — ■
This partition might contain important files or applications from your
computer manufacturer. If you format this partition,, any data stored on it will
be lost.
Lea
| OK | | Cancel |
Click or tap OK to confirm that you want the partition to be formatted.
Click or tap Next to start the installation process.
Installing Windows
Your computer will restart several times. This might take a while.
J Copying Windows files
Getting files ready for installation (22%]
Installing features
Installing updates
Finishing up
Wait for the installation process to finish and for your system to restart.
The customization process for your Windows 8 installation begins.
Installing Windows 8 657
Select the color you want to use for your Windows 8 installation and type the name
you want set for the computer or device.
IMPORTANT If you are installing Windows 8 on a laptop or device with a wireless network
card, you are asked to select a wireless network to which to connect and introduce the
appropriate connection details.
19 Click or tap Next to start configuring other important settings.
658 Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
20 Click or tap Customize to customize Windows 8 settings in detail.
Installing Windows 8 659
21 Select whether you want file sharing turned on.
22 Select how you want Windows 8 to protect and update your computer or device by
turning the switches On or Off.
23 Click or tap Next.
660
Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
24 Select what kind of information you want to send to Microsoft while using
Windows 8 and the apps you install by turning the switches On or Off.
25 Click or tap Next.
Installing Windows 8
661
© Settings
Send Microsoft info to help make \
Help improve Windows Store by sending URLs for web con
off W^M
k
Help Microsoft respond to malicious apps and ma 1 ware by
Off |
Help improve Microsoft services by sending some location
A/indows and apps better
tent that apps use
joining Microsoft Active Protection Sen/ice
data when location -aware apps are used
off W^M
Participate in the Customer Experience Improvement Pragr
file will periodically download to collect better info.)
off B^3
am to help improve Microsoft software and sen/ices. (A
Off |
26 Select whether you want Windows 8 to check online for solutions to the problems
you might encounter while using it and whether you want to let apps use your
name, account picture, or location data. Turn the switches On or Off for each setting
according to your preference.
27 Click or tap Next.
You are asked for a Microsoft account to sign in.
662
Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
28 Type the email address for your Microsoft account and click or tap Next.
You are asked to enter your Microsoft account password.
Installing Windows 8 663
© Sign in to your PC
Use your favorite email address as a Microsoft account to sign in to Windows. We wor
Vt send you spam.
1 seventutorials@live.com ^ X H
When you sign in to Windows with a Microsoft account, you can:
Down loadappsfromWin dows Store.
Get your online content in Microsoft apps automatically.
■ Sync settings online to make PCs look and feel the same — like your browser histor
y, account picture, and color.
Privacy statement
Sign up for a new email address
Sign in without a Microsoft account
&
, ,
IMPORTANT If Windows 8 doesn't detect an active Internet connection (for example, when it
is installed on a laptop not yet connected to a wireless network), it will ask you to connect to the
network and then use your Microsoft account to sign in.
29 Type your password in the appropriate field and click or tap Next.
You are asked to enter some security verification information that is used if you need
to recover your account.
664
Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
30 Enter the requested details and click or tap Next. Windows 8 takes a while to finalize
all the required preparations.
Installing Windows 8 665
31 While you wait for the preparations to complete, watch the tutorial about how to
navigate Windows 8.
You are logged on to Windows 8 for the first time.
666
Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
CLEAN UP When you are logged on, don't forget to eject the installation disc and
store it safely.
You can now use Windows 8 and all the available features. You will also receive an email
or SMS message asking you to confirm this computer or device as a trusted PC. This is im-
portant because without this confirmation you can't use all the synchronization features in
Windows 8.
If you have used Windows 8 on another computer or device with the same Microsoft
account you used to log on, your settings from the other device are automatically migrated
to this installation.
TIP To learn more about synchronizing your Windows 8 settings and how to configure this
feature, see Chapter 6, "Using SkyDrive."
After you have installed Windows 8, don't forget to activate it. You won't be able to cus-
tomize it fully until the activation is performed from PC Settings.
Installing Windows 8 667
Dual-booting Windows 8 and Other
Windows Versions
You can create a dual- or multi-boot setup on your computer or device. For example, you
can run Windows 8 alongside Windows 7 and switch between operating systems as you
see fit.
Installing Windows 8 in a dual-boot configuration is not much different from the procedure
for making a clean installation.
You have to have a separate partition just for Windows 8. After you create that, follow the
steps detailed in the installation guide from the previous section. At step 9, you select the
partition created just for Windows 8 and continue with the installation.
Windows 8 automatically detects the other Windows operating systems you have installed
and creates the appropriate boot entries for them. When you start your computer or device,
you can select the operating system you want to boot into.
When creating a multi-boot setup with multiple versions of Windows, it is best to install
Windows 8 last. Earlier Windows versions cannot set the boot entry for Windows 8 correctly
because it is a newer operating system using different technologies. However, Windows 8
can manage the boot entries for earlier versions of Windows correctly.
Upgrading to Windows 8
You can upgrade to Windows 8 from Windows XP, Windows Vista, and Windows 7. The pro-
cess is similar for these operating systems, but there differences when it comes to the set-
tings, files, and apps that can be migrated to Windows 8. You can upgrade from Windows
XP and Windows Vista retail editions to Windows 8 Pro. Also, you can upgrade all retail
editions of Windows 7 to Windows 8 Pro and upgrade only Windows 7 Home Basic, Home
Premium and Starter to the basic edition of Windows 8.
During the upgrade process, the Windows 8 setup will evaluate your system and ask you to
choose what you would like to keep.
■ KEEP WINDOWS SETTINGS, PERSONAL FILES, AND APPS Available only when
upgrading from Windows 7 to Windows 8
668 Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
KEEP WINDOWS SETTINGS AND PERSONAL FILES Available only when upgrading
from Windows Vista to Windows 8
KEEP PERSONAL FILES ONLY Available when upgrading from Windows XR
Windows Vista, and Windows 7 to Windows 8
NOTHING Available when upgrading from Windows XR Windows Vista, and
Windows 7 to Windows 8
Ei Windows 8 Setup
© gg
To upgrade from an earlier version of Windows to Windows 8, just insert the Windows 8
installation disc into your DVD or Blu-ray drive and run the setup.exe file. The Windows 8
Setup Wizard starts and guides you through all the steps. The upgrade process involves
fewer steps than when installing from scratch, but more requirements must be met. For
example, on the partition on which your current operating system is installed, you must
have at least 20 GB of free space available for Windows 8 to install itself and preserve the
old operating system until the installation is done. The 20 GB are in addition to what the
current operating system is using.
A great feature of the Upgrade Wizard is that it automatically checks to see whether all
the prerequisites are met for the upgrade to continue. If they are not, you are shown a
summary of the problems that were found and you are asked to take action prior to the
upgrade procedure.
Upgrading to Windows 8
669
The old operating system is preserved so that if there are any problems with the upgrade
you can revert to the previous Windows installation.
The earlier version of Windows is removed only after the upgrade has finished successfully.
IMPORTANT One very important requirement is that you cannot upgrade from a 32-bit
version of Windows to a 64-bit version of Windows 8 (or vice versa). If you have purchased a
different version, you must perform a clean installation and move your files, settings, and apps
manually.
In this exercise, you'll learn how to upgrade from Windows 7 to Windows 8. The process for
upgrading from Windows XP or Windows Vista to Windows 8 is similar, and you can follow
almost the same steps, although some options might be different.
670 Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
SET UP Insert the Windows 8 installation disc into your DVD or Blu-ray reader. Open
Windows Explorer and run the setup.exe file found on the disc. Make sure you close all
active programs before performing the upgrade. Also, make sure you have the Windows
8 product key available.
1 Wait for the setup files to be prepared.
You are asked whether you want to get the latest updates during the upgrade
process.
2 Leave Go online to install updates now selected and click or tap Next.
3 Type the Windows 8 product key and click or tap Next.
You are asked to accept the license terms.
Upgrading to Windows 8 671
^ Windows 8 Setup
S a 1ST
4 Read the license terms and select I accept the license terms. Click or tap Accept.
672 Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
Choose what you want to keep during the upgrade process and click or tap Next.
You are shown a summary of what the upgrade process will do.
IMPORTANT If any of the prerequisites for the upgrade process are not met, you will be shown
a summary of the things that need to be changed at this point. You won't be able to continue the
upgrade process until you resolve those issues.
If you are ready to go ahead with the upgrade, click Install.
Upgrading to Windows 8 673
:> < Windows 8 Setup
r^i i jfi^a
7
Wait for the installation process to finish.
If any problems are encountered, the previous Windows installation will be restored
automatically. After several restarts, the personalization process starts.
Windows 8
□httake awhile
674 Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
8 Select the color you want to use for your Windows 8 installation.
9 Click or tap Next to start configuring other important settings.
10 Click or tap Customize to customize Windows 8 settings in detail.
Upgrading to Windows 8 675
11 Select whether you want file sharing turned on.
676 Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
12 Select how you want Windows 8 to protect and update your computer or device by
turning the switches On or Off.
13 Click or tap Next.
Upgrading to Windows 8 677
14 Select what kind of information you want to send to Microsoft while using Windows
8 and the apps you install by turning the switches On or Off.
15 Click or tap Next.
678
Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
© Settings
Send Microsoft info to help make \
Help improve Windows Store by sending URLs for web con
off W^M
k
Help Microsoft respond to malicious apps and ma 1 ware by
Off |
Help improve Microsoft services by sending some location
A/indows and apps better
tent that apps use
joining Microsoft Active Protection Sen/ice
data when location -aware apps are used
off W^M
Participate in the Customer Experience Improvement Pragr
file will periodically download to collect better info.)
off B^3
am to help improve Microsoft software and sen/ices. (A
Off |
16 Select whether you want Windows 8 to check online for solutions to the problems
you might encounter while using it and whether you want to let apps use your name,
account picture, or your location data. Turn the switches On or Off for each setting
according to your preference.
Upgrading to Windows 8 679
17 Click or tap Next.
To sign in, you are asked to enter the password of the user account you used in the
previous version of Windows.
18 Type the password and click or tap Next.
You are asked to type your Microsoft account address.
680
Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
19 Type the email address for your Microsoft account and click or tap Next.
You are asked to type your Microsoft account password.
Upgrading to Windows 8 681
20 Type your password in the appropriate field and click or tap Next.
You are asked to enter some security verification information that is used if you need
to recover your account.
682
Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
21 Enter the requested details and click or tap Next. Windows 8 takes a while to finalize
all the required preparations.
Upgrading to Windows 8 683
22 While you wait for the preparations to complete, watch the tutorial about how to
navigate Windows 8.
You are logged on to Windows 8 for the first time.
684
Appendix C Installing and Upgrading to Windows 8
%^ CLEAN UP When you are logged on, don't forget to eject the installation disc and
store it safely.
The upgrade has been performed, and your files, settings, and apps have been migrated
according to your settings.
Key Points
Prior to installing Windows 8, make sure you are aware of its system requirements and
that you have a valid product key
When creating a dual-boot setup with another version of Windows, install Windows 8 last.
You can upgrade from Windows XR Windows Vista, and Windows 7 to Windows 8.
Key Points 685
Moving Your Data and
Settings to Windows 8
D
THIS APPENDIX, YOU WILL LEARN HOW TO
■ Transfer your data and current settings from an old computer to a new computer
with Windows 8.
■ Use Easy Transfer.
If you bought a new Windows 8-based computer or device, you might be interested in
moving your data and settings from your older computer. If you have used an earlier ver-
sion of Windows on your previous computer, you can use one of many tools to do this job.
One of the best available tools is the free Windows Easy Transfer tool Microsoft has pro-
vided since Windows XP. You make a backup of your data and settings and then restore
that backup on your new Windows 8-based computer or device.
In this appendix, you'll learn how to use Windows Easy Transfer to restore your backed-up
data and settings on your new Windows 8-based computer or device.
PRACTICE FILES You do not need any practice files for this Appendix. A complete list of
practice files is provided in "Using the Practice Files" section at the beginning of this book.
Transferring Your Data to Windows 8 with
Windows Easy Transfer
Windows Easy Transfer is a tool that was first introduced with Windows XP; it enables users
to switch files and settings between Windows-based computers or devices. You can use this
tool to migrate your files and settings to Windows 8 from previous versions of Windows or
from other Windows 8 installations.
Transferring Your Data to Windows 8 with Windows Easy Transfer
687
If you have upgraded to Windows 8 from an earlier version of Windows on the same com-
puter or device, you don't need to use this tool because your data and settings have been
migrated.
If you purchased a new computer or device with Windows 8 and you want to transfer files
and settings from your old computer to the new one, Windows Easy Transfer is the tool for
the job.
The tool can transfer items by using an Easy Transfer cable (a USB-to-USB connection
cable), a network connection, or an external hard disk drive or USB flash drive. The external
hard disk drive is the most useful device for making such transfers. Not only are external
hard disks affordable, but they also have plenty of space and can be used to migrate items
between computers that are not in the same network or in the same physical location.
@ & Windows Easy Transfer
What do you want to use to transfer items to your new PC?
An Easy Transfer cable
f^^^J 1 already have an Easy Transfer cable to transfer files from one PC to another.
j. A network
As* Transfer files from one PC to another using a network connection.
<-*
An external hard disk or USB flash drive
Create an Easy Transfer file. Choose this if you are using Windows Easy Transfer
^^^j? to upgrade this PC to Windows 8.
How dc 1 choose?
First, back up your data by using Windows Easy Transfer on the old computer or device. This
data is stored in a file with the .mig extension (for migration). The file is password protected
to make sure unauthorized people cannot use it.
On the computer or device to which you want to transfer your data, select the same file and
type the password you have set.
688
Appendix D Moving Your Data and Settings to Windows 8
41 Open an Easy Transfer File
@ t t 4t ► Com,.. ► Wizard's Backup Dri... v <j Search Wizard's Backup Drive ... p
Organize ▼ New folder
^ Downloads A Name
Ml Recent places
fjk SkyDrive
EH #
Type
,-j Libraries
-I Documents
Tv1 u ^ i c
Q Pictures
| Videos
*& Homegroup
O^ Computer
Extra:
Locale
My Passport Apps for Mac
User Manuals
j. WD Apps for Windows
mb Windows Easy Transfer - Items from old .,
4/27/201211
4/27/201211
4/27/201211
4/27/201211
4/27/201211
:00 AM
:00 AM
:00 AM
:00 AM
:00 AM
7/3/201 2 3:23 PM
le folder
le folder
le folder
lefolder
le folder
EasyTransfe
Filename: Windows Easy Transfer - Items from vj Easy Transfer File
Open
Before transferring your data to the new computer or device, you can customize the items
that will be migrated. By default, Windows Easy Transfer will transfer all the data included in
the migration file. If you click or tap Customize, you can select the type of items you want
transferred. Clicking or tapping Advanced gives you even more precise control over the
items to be transferred.
£?■ WindowsEasyTransfer
Choose what to transfer to this PC
You can transfer files and settings in these user accounts from your old PC. To choose how you want
the user accounts on your old PC to get transferred to user accounts on your new PC,, click Advanced
options.
Ciprian fSl Ciprian
Custon
m
App Settings 373 KB
J Windows S ettings 3 01 .1 M B
531.3 MB
Advanced
Easy Tran
Transferring Your Data to Windows 8 with Windows Easy Transfer
689
Clicking or tapping Advanced Options opens a new window, in which you can set how you
want to map user accounts between computers or how you want to map drives.
Advanced Options
Map user accounts Map drives
Map user accounts
Choose how you want the user accounts on your old PC to get transferred to user accounts on
your new PC,
To create a new user account select Create User from the drop down menu below.
User account on the old PC: User accou nt on the new PC:
GJ Ciprian
At the end of the transfer, you can close the Windows Easy Transfer window, or you can
access two reports.
■ See What Was Transferred Shows a summary of the items that were transferred to the
new computer or device.
■ See A List Of Apps You Might Want To Install On Your New PC Shows a list of
applications installed on the old computer that are not installed on the new computer
or device. You can use this list as a guide for which apps to install on your new
Windows 8-based computer or device.
690
Appendix D Moving Your Data and Settings to Windows 8
(\r) (^ Windows Easy Transfer
Your transfer is complete
Use these Windows Easy Transfer Reports to help you see what was transferred and to see what apps
you might want to install on your new PC.
To see this information later,, click the Start button and search for Windows Easy Transfer Reports,
-^ See what was transferred
See a list of apps you might want to install on your new PC
In this exercise, you'll learn how to migrate your files and settings to Windows 8 by using
Windows Easy Transfer. The exercise shows the transfer from an external hard disk drive.
Such drives have plenty of space and are one of the most effective media for transferring
large sets of data between computers.
SET UP First, back up your data by using Windows Easy Transfer on the old computer.
Then, on your new Windows 8-based computer or device, on the Start screen, search for
windows transfer. Click or tap the Windows Easy Transfer search result to open Windows
Easy Transfer. Plug the external hard disk drive into where the Windows Easy Transfer file
is stored.
1 Click or tap Next.
You are asked what you want to use to transfer items to your new Windows 8-based
computer or device.
2 Click or tap An external hard disk or USB flash drive.
You are asked which PC you are using now.
Transferring Your Data to Windows 8 with Windows Easy Transfer
691
CSp «■ Windows Easy Transfer
What do you want to use to transfer items to your new PC?
An Easy Transfer cable
C^^^ 1 already have an Easy Transfer cable to transfer files from one PC to another.
A network
Agfl Transfer files from one PC to another using a network connection.
An external hard disk or USB flash drive
Create an Easy Transfer file. Choose this if you are using Windows Easy Transfer
^^^Jp to upgrade this PC to Windows S.
How do 1 choose?
Click or tap This is my new PC.
You are asked whether Windows Easy Transfer has already saved your files from your
old PC to an external hard disk drive or USB flash drive.
iSi Windows Easy Transfer
Which PC are you using now?
<> This is my new PC
I want to transfer files and settings to this PC.
•^ This is my old PC
I want to transfer files and settings from this PC.
692 Appendix D Moving Your Data and Settings to Windows 8
4 Click or tap Yes.
You are asked to browse and select the Windows Easy Transfer file in which the data
from the old computer is stored.
4Qp @ Windows Easy Transfer
Has Windows Easy Transfer already saved your files from your old PC to an
external hard disk or USB flash drive?
•> Yes
Plug in your external hard disk or USB flash drive. After you click Yes, you'll
browse to the location where Windows Easy Transfer saved your files.
-> No
Select the appropriate transfer file (with the .mig file extension).
You are asked to enter the password you used to protect the transfer file.
Type the password and click or tap Next.
You are asked to choose what to transfer to the new PC.
Transferring Your Data to Windows 8 with Windows Easy Transfer
693
fi| Wi n d o ws Ea sy Tr a n sf er
Enter the password you used to help protect your transfer file and start the
transfer
7 Click or tap Customize and clear the items you do not want transferred, if any.
8
^ WindowsEasyTransfer
Choose what to transfer to this PC
You can transfer files and settings in these user accounts from your old PC, To choose how you want
the user accounts on your old PC to get transferred to user accounts on your new PC, click Advanced
options.
Easy Transfer file size: &S3.2 MB
Advanced Options
Click or tap Transfer and wait for the transfer to finish.
You are informed that your transfer is complete.
694
Appendix D Moving Your Data and Settings to Windows 8
'ij mb Windows Easy Transfer
Your transfer is complete
Use these Windows Easy Transfer Reports to help you see what was transferred and to see what apps
you might want to install on your new PC.
To see this information later, click the Start button and search for Windows Easy Transfer Reports,
-J» Seewhatwastran sf erred
See a list of apps you might want to install on your new PC
9 Click or tap Close.
CLEAN UP Eject and then unplug the external hard disk drive in which the Windows
Easy Transfer data is stored.
The selected data and settings have been transferred to your new Windows 8 computer or
device.
Key Points
You can use Windows Easy Transfer to transfer settings and apps from an older
Windows-based computer to your new Windows 8-based computer or device.
Before making the transfer, back up your data and settings.
For large transfers, it is best to use an external hard disk drive.
Key Points
695
Glossary
Action Center A feature in Windows 8 by which to view and fix problems and run automated trouble-
shooters, among other things.
Activation The process you must complete to verify that you have a valid copy of Windows 8, which
includes a Product ID. You usually activate Windows 8 online the first time you turn on your com-
puter or device, but there are other activation options. Activation is mandatory.
Active window The window that is in the foreground and currently in use.
ActiveX control A reusable software component that performs a specific function or set of functions in
the Windows operating system, in a program that runs on Windows, or in the Internet Explorer
environment.
Address bar In Internet Explorer or any web browser, the area in which you type Internet addresses,
also known as URLs (uniform resource locators). Often, an Internet address takes the form of
http://www.companyname.com.
Administrator account A type of Windows user account with access to all system files and settings and
with permission to perform all operations. Every computer must have at least one administrator
account. This account type is not recommended for daily use. See also standard user account.
App An application available from the Start screen (and the Store) that is created to use the entire
screen and is tailored to work well on desktop computers, laptops, tablets, and Windows Phones.
Some apps have desktop counterparts, including Internet Explorer 10. The app has fewer features
than its desktop counterpart but is more streamlined and often easier to use.
App bar A toolbar (available in almost all apps) that is typically hidden until needed. The App bar holds
commands that might enable the user to configure the app, input a location, add an event, delete
an item, view properties, and more.
Application Software that you or the computer's manufacturer install or have installed on your com-
puter or device other than the operating system (Windows 8). Some applications come prein-
stalled on Windows 8, such as Paint, Notepad, Snipping Tool, and Windows Defender, whereas
others can be third-party applications or software you purchase separately and install yourself,
such as Adobe Photoshop. Applications differ from apps in several ways; most notably, they run
on the desktop and in a window, as traditional programs have always run, and not in full-screen
mode as the new apps do.
Attachment Data you add to an email such as a photograph, a short video, a sound recording, a docu-
ment, or other data. Attachments can be dangerous to open because they can contain viruses.
Autorun file A file that automatically starts an installation program when you insert a disc in a drive or
browse to the autorun file in a folder.
Bandwidth The transmission capacity of an electronic communications device or its rate of data trans-
fer, usually expressed in bits per second.
Glossary 697
BCC If you want to send an email to someone and you don't want other recipients to know you
included that person in the email, add them to the Bcc line. Bcc stands for blind carbon copy and is
a secret copy.
BitLocker Drive Encryption BitLocker combines drive encryption and integrity checking to keep the
hard disk from becoming accessible by thieves. Even if a thief steals the hard disk out of a com-
puter and installs it in another computer, its data cannot be accessed.
Bitmap (.bmp) A patent-free digital image file format. A bitmap image consists of pixels in a grid. Each
pixel is a specific color; the colors within the color palette are governed by the specific bitmap
format. Common formats include monochrome bitmap, 16-color bitmap, 256-color bitmap, and
24-bit bitmap. The bitmap file format does not support transparency.
Blog Short for weblog. An online journal or news/opinion column. Contributors post entries consisting
of text, graphics, or video clips. When permitted by the blog owner, readers can post comments
responding to the entries or to other people's comments. Blogs are often used to publish personal
or company information in an informal way.
Browse Browsing for a file, folder, picture, video, song, or program (among other things) is the process
of navigating into the operating system's folder structure to locate the desired item. Browse can
also describe the act of surfing the Internet.
Burn A term that describes the process of copying music from a computer to a CD or DVD. The term
originated because data is actually burned onto this media with a laser. In many cases, music is
burned to CDs because CDs can be played in cars and generic DVD players, and videos are burned
to DVDs because videos require much more space and DVDs can be played on DVD players.
Byte A unit of measurement for data; a byte typically holds a single character, such as a letter, digit, or
punctuation mark. Some single characters can take up more than one byte.
Central processing unit (CPU) The main circuit chip in a computer. It performs most of the calculations
necessary to run the computer. Also called a processor.
CC If you want to send an email to someone and you don't need that person to respond, you can put
that person in the CC line. CC stands for carbon copy (BCC is a blind carbon copy; other recipients
cannot see the BCC field address.)
Charm The default charms are a set of five icons that appear when you swipe from the right side of the
screen to the left. These icons are Search, Share, Start, Devices, and Settings. Apps have their own
charms, generally available from the app bar found there.
Click To point to an interface element and then press the primary mouse button one time, usually for
the purpose of selecting an item or positioning a cursor.
Command An instruction you give to a computer program.
Command bar In Internet Explorer, a toolbar located above the Content pane that provides buttons for
common tasks associated with the home page, Web Slices and RSS feeds, printing, web content
display, and safety, as well as tools for managing Internet Explorer.
698 Glossary
Compatibility view An Internet Explorer feature that displays a website as though you were using
an earlier version of the web browser. Compatibility view was first introduced with Internet
Explorer 8.
Compress To reduce the size of a set of data, such as a file or group of files, inside a compressed folder
that can be stored in less space or transmitted with less bandwidth.
Compressed folder A folder containing a file or files whose contents have been compressed.
Computer (Windows System) Computer, in this sense, is the computer window that offers access
to installed hard disk drives, CD and DVD drives, connected external drives, network locations
(drives), network media servers, and similar connected media and locations.
Connected Standby A new power management mode for ARM-based versions of Windows 8 (often
installed on high-end tablet devices) that allows the device to sleep or hibernate efficiently for
long periods of time. This enables tablets and similar devices to remain turned on when not in use
without draining the battery quickly.
Content pane In File Explorer, the pane that displays files and folders stored in the currently selected
folder or storage device.
Control Panel The window from which you can change computer settings related to system and main-
tenance, networks, and the Internet; user accounts; appearance; security; hardware; and sounds,
among others. Control Panel opens on the desktop and is not an app.
Cookies Small text files that include data that identify your preferences when you visit particular web-
sites. Cookies are generally harmless and enable websites such as Amazon.com to greet you by
name when you navigate there.
Copy Copies data to a virtual clipboard, which is a temporary holding area for data. You generally copy
data so that you can paste it somewhere else.
Credentials Information that provides proof of identification that is used to gain access to local and
network resources. Examples of credentials are user names and passwords, smart cards, and
certificates.
Cursor The point at which text or graphics will be inserted. The cursor usually appears on screen as a
blinking vertical line.
Cut To remove the selected text, picture, or object and place it on the Clipboard. After it's pasted, the
item is deleted from its original location.
Desktop Where programs and applications run; where windows open; where you browse File Explorer;
and where you work with desktop programs to write letters, create spreadsheets, manage files
and folders, install and uninstall programs, and do everything else you're used to doing on
Windows 7, Windows Vista, and other earlier operating systems.
Desktop folder Contains icons that represent what's on your desktop. You can access this folder from
File Explorer.
Glossary 699
Desktop computer A computer designed for use at one location. A typical desktop computer system
includes the computer case containing the actual computer components, a monitor, a keyboard, a
mouse, and speakers.
Desktop Gadget Gallery A gallery from which you can choose gadgets that display a variety of
dynamic information directly on your desktop. The Desktop Gadget Gallery was first introduced in
Windows 7 as a replacement for the Windows Sidebar.
Details pane In File Explorer, the pane at the bottom of a folder window that displays details about the
folder or selected items.
Dialog box A box from which to make changes to default settings in an application, make decisions
when installing programs, set print options for a selected printer, configure sharing options for a
file or folder, and perform similar tasks. A dialog box is not a window and does not include mini-
mize and maximize buttons.
Digital signature An electronic signature that is composed of a secret code and a private key. Digital
signatures are used to help verify file authenticity. Also called a digital ID.
Digital subscriber line (DSL) A type of high-speed Internet connection that uses standard telephone
wires.
Disk Cleanup An application included with Windows 8 that offers a safe and effective way to remove
unwanted and unnecessary data. You can remove temporary files, downloaded program files, and
offline webpages; empty the Recycle Bin; and more, all in a single process.
Disk Defragmenter An application included with Windows 8 that improves performance by analyzing
the data stored on your hard disk drive and consolidating files that are not stored together. Disk
Defragmenter runs automatically on a schedule, so you should (theoretically) never have to invoke
it manually.
Domain In Windows, a logical (rather than physical) group of resources — computers, servers, and other
hardware devices — on a network, which is centrally administered through Windows Server. On
the Internet, a name used as the base of website addresses and email addresses that identifies the
entity owning the address.
Domain Name System (DNS) A technology that translates Internet address names into numerical
addresses (IP addresses) so that the address can be found over the Internet. For example, if you
type www.microsoft.com into a web browser, the name is translated into a numerical address
and that address is used to connect you to the server hosting the Microsoft website.
Double-click To point to an interface element and press the primary mouse button two times in rapid
succession, usually for the purpose of starting a program or opening a window, folder, or file.
Drag To move an item to another location on the screen by pointing to it, holding down the primary
mouse button, and then moving the mouse.
Drafts A folder that holds email messages you've started and saved but not yet completed and sent.
700 Glossary
Driver A program that enables Windows to communicate with a software program or hardware device
(such as a printer, mouse, or keyboard) that is attached to your computer. Every device needs a
driver for it to work. Many drivers, such as the keyboard driver, are built into Windows.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) server A server that manages a pool of IP addresses and
client confirmation parameters and assigns IP addresses to computers and devices on a network.
dynamic-link library (DLL) An operating system feature that allows executable routines (each generally
serving a specific function or set of functions) to be stored separately as files with .dll extensions.
These routines are loaded only when needed by the program that calls them.
Early Load Antimalware A new security feature that loads integrated antimalware functionality each
time the computer starts. This prevents malware from being loaded into the operating system
when the computer is turned on.
EdgeUI Ul stands for user interface, and EdgeUI stands for the user options you see at the edges of the
Windows 8 screen. Charms are part of the EdgeUI, for example.
Ethernet A technology that uses Ethernet cables to connect computers to routers and similar hardware
to transmit data and connect multiple computers to form a network.
Executable file A computer file that starts a program, such as a word processor, game, or Windows util-
ity. Executable files can often be identified by the file name extension .exe.
Expansion card A printed circuit board that, when inserted into an expansion slot of a computer, pro-
vides additional functionality. There are many types of expansion cards, including audio cards,
modems, network cards, security device cards, TV tuner cards, video cards, and video processing
expansion cards.
Expansion slot A socket on a computer's motherboard designed to establish the electrical contact
between the electronics on an expansion card and on the motherboard. Many form factors (phys-
ical dimensions) and standards for expansion slots are available, including AGP, PC Card, PCI, and
PCI Express. An expansion slot accepts only expansion cards of the same form factor.
Extensible Markup Language (XML) A text markup language, similar to HTML, used to define the
structure of data independently of its formatting so that the data can be used for multiple pur-
poses and by multiple programs.
External peripheral A peripheral device installed by connecting it to a port from outside the computer.
Examples are a monitor, keyboard, mouse, and speakers.
Favorite A webpage for which you've created a shortcut in Internet Explorer. You can click a favorite
instead of typing the web address to visit a website quickly.
Favorites bar In Internet Explorer, a toolbar located below the Address bar that provides buttons for
storing web locations for easy future access, obtaining add-ons, and accessing sites that match
your browsing history.
Favorites Center In Internet Explorer, a pane with three tabs: Favorites, on which you can save and
organize links to websites and webpages; Feeds, on which you can save and organize RSS feeds;
and History, on which you can view your browsing history.
Glossary 701
Feed An information stream that contains frequently updated content published by a website. Feeds
are often associated with news sites and blogs but are also used for distributing other types of
digital content, including photos, music, and video. See also Really Simple Syndication.
File A distinct piece of data. A file can be a single Word document, a spreadsheet, a song, a movie, a
picture, or even a very large single backup.
File Explorer A window that enables you to browse all the data stored on your computer and your
network. You use File Explorer to access your data libraries, personal and public folders, and net-
worked computers.
File name extension Characters appended to the name of a file by the program that created it and
separated from the file name by a period. Some file name extensions identify the program that
can open the file, such as .xlsx for Microsoft Office Excel 2007 files, and some represent formats
that more than one program can work with, such as jpg graphics files.
File recovery The backup feature included with Windows 8 with which you can perform backups and, in
the case of a computer failure, restore the backed-up data.
Filter To display only items that match specified criteria.
FireWire port FireWire is the brand name given to the IEEE 1394 port by Apple, Inc., one of the patent
holders of IEEE 1394 technology. See also IEEE 1394 port.
Flash drive See USB flash drive.
Flick A gesture performed with a single finger by swiping quickly left, right, up, or down.
Flip and Flip 3D A way to move through open windows, open applications, and run apps graphically
instead of clicking the item on the desktop or flicking to it. You invoke these with the Alt+Tab and
Windows+Tab keys.
Folder A data unit (similar to a folder in a filing cabinet) that holds files and subfolders. You use folders
to organize data. Some folders come with Windows 8, including but not limited to My Documents,
Public Pictures, My Videos, Downloads, Contacts, Favorites, and Searches.
Form data In Internet Explorer, this is personal data, such as your name and address, that's been saved
using the Internet Explorer autocomplete form data functionality. If you don't want forms to be
filled out automatically, disable this.
Gadget An icon you can add to the desktop that often contains up-to-date information about the
weather, the time, and the news.
Gesture A movement you make with your finger to perform a task. Flick, swipe, tap, double-tap, and
others are considered gestures. See also multi-touch gesture.
Gigabyte (GB) 1,024 megabytes of data storage; often interpreted as approximately 1 billion bytes.
Glyph An icon that appears on the new Windows 8 Lock screen. You might see information about the
network status, power, unread emails, and so on. You can decide which glyphs appear on the Lock
screen from PC Settings.
702 Glossary
Graphical user interface (GUI) A user interface that incorporates visual elements such as a desktop,
icons, and menus, so that you can perform operations by interacting with the visual interface
rather than by typing commands.
Graphics Interchange Format (.gif) A digital image file format developed by CompuServe that is used
for transmitting raster images on the Internet. An image in this format may contain up to 256 col-
ors, including a transparent color. The size of the file depends on the number of colors used.
Guest account A built-in Windows user account that allows limited use of the computer. When logged
on to a computer with the Guest account, a user can't install software or hardware, change set-
tings, or create a password. The Guest account is turned off (unavailable) by default; you can turn
it on from the User Accounts window of Control Panel.
Hardware Physical computing devices you connect externally to the computer and the physical items
inside it. Common hardware includes printers, external USB drives, network interface cards, CPUs,
RAM, and more.
Hibernate A power option by which the computer is still powered on but is using very little power.
History In Internet Explorer, this is the list of websites you've visited or typed in the address bar. Anyone
who has access to your computer or device and to your user account can look at your History list
to see where you've been, and often it's advisable to clear your History list if you share a computer
and do not have separate user accounts.
Homegroup A group of computers running Windows 7 and Windows 8 that have been configured to
join the homegroup. Homegroups make sharing easier because the most common sharing set-
tings are already configured. After a homegroup is set up, one only needs the proper operating
system, access to the local network, and the homegroup password to join.
Home page The webpage that opens when you open Internet Explorer 10. You can set the home page
and configure additional pages to open as well.
Hotspot A Wi-Fi location where you can connect to the Internet without being tethered to an Ethernet
cable. Sometimes access to Wi-Fi hotspot service is free, provided you have the required wireless
hardware and are at a location with an open connection. You'll find Wi-Fi hotspots in libraries,
coffee shops, hotels, bars, and so on.
Hub A device used to connect multiple devices of one type. See also network hub and USB hub.
Hyperlink A link from a text, graphic, audio, or video element to a target location in the same docu-
ment, another document, or a webpage.
Hypertext See hyperlink.
Hypertext Markup Language (HTML) A text markup language used to create documents for the
web. HTML defines the structure and layout of a web document by using a variety of tags and
attributes.
Icon A visual representation of a file, folder, or program that you can click or double-click as applicable,
and which then opens the item the icon represents. Icon is a term generally associated with the
Glossary 703
desktop and items you find in folders, whereas tile is a term generally used to represent the items
available from the Start screen.
Information technology (IT) The development, installation, and implementation of computer systems
and applications.
InPrivate Browsing A browsing mode that opens a separate Internet Explorer window in which the
places you visit are not tracked. The pages and sites do not appear on the History tab, and tempo-
rary files and cookies are not saved on your computer.
Input device A piece of hardware that enables you to type, select, open, or otherwise interact with the
computer. Common input devices include mice and keyboards. However, your finger can be an
input device, and there are several specialty input devices for people with disabilities.
Instant messaging A way to communicate that is similar to email but is instantaneous — the recipi-
ent gets the message right after you send it. It is a real-time electronic communication system
that you can use to "chat" and interact in other ways with other people by typing in a window on
your computer screen. Instant messaging is the term generally reserved for text communications
between two or more computers; text messaging is a term generally referring to communication
between two cell phones. You can send instant messages with the Messaging app.
Integrated services digital network (ISDN) A high-speed digital technology that uses existing tele-
phone lines to provide Internet access.
Interface What you see on the screen when working in a window. In the WordPad interface, you see
the ribbon, tabs, and the page itself, for instance.
Internal peripheral A device installed inside the computer's case, such as an expansion card, a hard disk
drive, or a DVD drive. See also external peripheral and peripheral device.
Internet Explorer 10 The newest version of the Microsoft web browser. It's available as an app and as a
traditional desktop version.
Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) A method computers use to send and receive email mes-
sages. It allows you to access email without downloading it to your computer.
Internet Protocol (IP) address An address that identifies a computer that is connected to the Internet
or to a network. There are two types of IP addresses: IP version 4 (IPv4) and IP version 6 (IPv6).
An IPv4 address usually consists of four groups of numbers separated by periods, such as
192.200.44.69. An IPv6 address has eight groups of hexadecimal characters (the numbers 0-9 and
the letters A-H) separated by colons— for example, 3ffe:ffff:0000:2f3b: 02aa:00ff:fe28:9c5a.
Internet server A computer that stores data offsite, such as one that might store your email before
you download it or hold backups you store in the cloud. Through Internet servers, you can access
information from any computer that can access the Internet.
Internet service provider (ISP) A company that provides Internet access to individuals or companies.
An ISP provides the connection information necessary for users to access the Internet through the
ISP's computers. An ISP typically charges a monthly or hourly connection fee.
704 Glossary
JPEG (jpg) file format A digital image file format designed for compressing either full-color or gray-
scale still images. It works well on photographs, naturalistic artwork, and similar material. Images
saved in this format have jpg or jpeg file extensions.
Jump list In the recently opened programs list or pinned items area of the Start menu, an efficient
method of accessing the features and files you are most likely to use with a program. Pointing to
a right-pointing arrow associated with the program in either location displays a list of tasks and
recently opened files.
Kbps Kilobits per second; a unit of data transfer equal to 1,000 bits per second or 125 bytes per second.
Keyword A word or phrase assigned to a file or webpage so that it can be located in searches for that
word or phrase.
Kilobyte (KB) 1,024 bytes of data storage. In reference to data transfer rates, 1,000 bytes.
Laptop An outdated term for a portable computer, referring to the fact that portable computers are
small enough to set on your lap. See also netbook, notebook, and portable computer.
Library A virtual data unit that offers access to both the related private and public folders. As an exam-
ple, the Documents library offers access to the My Documents and Public Documents folders, and
the data is grouped to appear as a unit. You can separate the data if desired.
Link A shortcut to a webpage. It might be contained in an email, document, or webpage and offers
access to a site without actually typing the site's name.
Local area network (LAN) A computer network covering a small physical area, like a home or office,
with a central connection point such as a network router and a shared Internet connection.
Local printer A printer that is directly connected to one of the ports on a computer. See also remote
printer.
Lock To make your Windows computing session unavailable to other people. Locking is most effective
when your user account is protected by a password.
Lock screen The Windows 8 welcome screen, which appears when the computer first starts. It features
the time, date, and a series of notification glyphs; the screen can be personalized with your own
background picture and the glyphs shown.
Log off To stop your computing session without affecting other users' sessions.
Log on To start a computing session.
Magnifier A tool in the Ease of Access suite of applications. You use Magnifier to increase the size of
the information shown on the screen; three options are available for doing so. By default, you
use your mouse to enlarge what's under it, and you can choose to what degree the material is
magnified.
Mail server A computer that your ISP configures to transmit email. It often includes a POP3 incoming
mail server and an SMTP outgoing mail server. You'll need to know the names of these servers if
you use an ISP to configure Mail. Often, the server names look similar to pop.yourispnamehere.
com and smtp.yourispnamehere.com.
Glossary 705
Malware Malicious software. Malware includes viruses, worms, spyware, and so on.
Mbps Megabits per second; a unit of data transfer equal to 1,000 Kbps (kilobits per second).
Media Materials on which data is recorded or stored, such as CDs, DVDs, floppy disks, or USB flash
drives.
Megabyte (MB) 1,024 kilobytes or 1,048,576 bytes of data storage; often interpreted as approximately
1 million bytes. In reference to data transfer rates, 1,000 kilobytes.
Menu A title on a menu bar (such as File, Edit, View). Clicking a menu name opens a drop-down list
with additional choices (Open, Save, Print). Menus are being phased out by the ribbon in many
applications, including those included with Windows 8, such as WordPad and Paint, among others.
Menu bar A toolbar from which you can access menus of commands.
Metadata Descriptive information, including keywords and properties, about a file or webpage. Title,
subject, author, and size are examples of a file's metadata.
Modem A device that allows computer information to be transmitted and received over a telephone
line or through a broadband service such as cable or DSL.
Multi-monitor A term used when more than one monitor is configured on a Windows 8-based com-
puter. There are multi-monitor capabilities that are new to Windows 8, for both the Start screen
and the classic Windows desktop.
Multi-touch gestures Gestures that require two (or more) fingers to perform, such as pinching to zoom
in and out of the computer screen.
Narrator A basic screen reader included with Windows 8 and part of the Ease of Access suite of appli-
cations. This application will read aloud text that appears on the screen while you navigate using
the keyboard and mouse.
Navigate A term used to describe surfing the Internet by browsing webpages. It is the process of mov-
ing from one webpage to another or viewing items on a single webpage.
Navigation pane In Windows Explorer, the left pane of a folder window. It displays favorite links, librar-
ies, and an expandable list of drives and folders.
NET Passport See Windows Live ID.
Netbook A small, lightweight portable computer designed primarily for web browsing and simple com-
puting. Most netbooks have a 1.6 GHz processor and a screen size of less than 11 inches.
Network A group of computers, printers, and other devices that communicate wirelessly or through
wired connections, often for the purpose of sharing both data and physical resources (such as
printers). Networks often contain routers, cable modems, hubs, switches, or similar hardware to
connect the computers and offer them all access to the Internet.
Network adapter A piece of hardware that connects your computer to a network such as the Internet
or a local network. Network adapters can offer wired capabilities, wireless capabilities, or both.
706 Glossary
Network and Sharing Center A place in Windows 8 where you can view your basic network informa-
tion and set up connections. You can also diagnose problems here, change adapter settings, and
change advanced sharing settings.
Network discovery A feature that must be enabled so computers can find other computers on the net-
work. When connected to public networks, this feature is disabled by default.
Network domain A network whose security and settings are centrally administered through Windows
Server computer and user accounts.
Network drive A shared folder or drive on your network to which you assign a drive letter so that it
appears in the Computer window as a named drive.
Network hub A device used to connect computers on a network. The computers are connected to the
hub with cables. The hub sends information received from one computer to all other computers
on the network.
Network printer A printer that is connected directly to a network through a wired (Ethernet) or wireless
network connection or through a print server or printer hub.
Network profile Information about a specific network connection, such as the network name, type, and
settings.
Network router A hardware device connecting computers on a network or connecting multiple net-
works (for example, connecting a LAN to an ISP).
Network share A shared folder on a computer on your network (not your local computer).
Notebook A standard portable computer designed for all types of computing. Notebooks have tech-
nical specifications that are comparable to those of desktop computers. Most notebooks have a
screen size ranging from 11 to 17 inches.
Notification area The area at the right end of the Windows Taskbar. It contains shortcuts to programs
and important status information.
Newsgroup An online forum in which people participate (anonymously or not) to share ideas and opin-
ions, get help, and meet other people with interests similar to theirs.
Notification area The rightmost area of the taskbar. It includes the clock, network status, battery status,
and volume icon and holds icons for applications that are running in the background.
Online Connected to a network or to the Internet. Also used to describe time that you will be working
on your computer.
On-Screen Keyboard A feature that is available as part of Windows 8 that enables you to input text and
interact with the computer by using a virtual keyboard.
Operating system The underlying programs that tell your computer what to do and how to do it. The
operating system coordinates interactions among the computer system components, acts as the
interface between you and your computer, enables your computer to communicate with other
computers and peripheral devices, and interacts with programs installed on your computer.
Option One of a group of mutually exclusive values for a setting, usually in a dialog box.
Glossary 707
Option button A standard Windows control that you use to select one from a set of options.
Original equipment manufacturer (OEM) A company that assembles a computer from components,
brands the computer, and then sells the computer to the public. The OEM might also preinstall an
operating system and other software on the computer.
Parallel port The input/output connector for a parallel interface device. Some types of printers connect
to the computer through a parallel port.
Partition A hard drive has a certain amount of space to store data. That can be 120 GB, 500 GB, or 1 or
2 TB. Sometimes people or computer manufacturers separate this space into two or three distinct
spaces called partitions (or drives or volumes). The purpose is to separate system files, data files,
and application files, among other reasons. Windows 8 creates a small partition at the beginning
of the hard disk to hold files needed to repair the computer if something goes wrong.
Password A security feature in which the user is required to input a personal password to access the
computer, specific files, websites, and other data.
Password hint An entry you record when you create or change your password to remind you what the
password is. Windows displays the password hint if you enter an incorrect password.
Password reset disk A file you create on a flash drive or floppy disk to enable you to reset your pass-
word if you forget it.
Path A sequence of names of drives, directories, or folders, separated by backslashes (\), that leads to a
specific file or folder.
Paste To place previously copied or cut data in a new location. You can cut, copy, and paste a single
word, sentence, paragraph, or page; a file; a folder; a web link; and more.
PC Settings A pared-down Control Panel that offers access to the most-configured settings, including
changing the picture on the Lock screen, adding users, viewing installed devices, and configuring
Windows Update.
Peek To see what's on the desktop behind open windows and applications. To use Peek, you position
your mouse in the bottom-right corner. Peek must be enabled to work.
Peer-to-peer A network, such as a workgroup, where computers and resources are connected directly
and are not centrally managed by a server.
Peripheral device A device, such as a disk drive, printer, modem, or joystick, that is connected to a com-
puter and is controlled by the computer's microprocessor but is not necessary to the computer's
operation. See also external peripheral and internal peripheral.
Permissions Rules associated with a shared resource, such as a folder, file, or printer, that define who
can use it and what he or she can do after he or she has access to it. You can set permissions to
allow a user to print to a printer only during certain hours, for instance.
Personal folder In Windows, a storage folder created by Windows for each user account and containing
subfolders and information that is specific to the user profile, such as Documents and Pictures. The
personal folder is labeled with the name used to log on to the computer.
708 Glossary
Phishing A hacking technique to entice you to divulge personal information such as bank account
numbers. Internet Explorer 10 has a phishing filter to warn you of potential phishing websites.
Picture password A new method of logging on to Windows 8. Instead of typing a password or PIN, you
can use a series of touch gestures on a particular part of a photo that you select.
PIN password A new method of logging on to Windows 8. The PIN is similar to what you type in an
ATM machine and is a four-digit numeric password.
Pinned taskbar button A button representing a program, which appears permanently at the left end of
the taskbar. A button that is not pinned appears only when its program is running.
Pinning Attaching a program, folder, or file shortcut to a user interface element such as the taskbar.
Playlist A group of songs that you can save and then listen to as a group. You can also burn a playlist to
a CD, copy a playlist to a portable music player, and more.
Plug and play A technology that enables the computer to automatically discover and configure settings
for a device connected to the computer through a USB or IEEE 1394 connection.
Podcast An online audio or video broadcast. Podcasts are generally free and can be synced to many
types of portable music devices.
Pointer The onscreen image that moves around the screen when you move your mouse. Depending on
the current action, the pointer might resemble an arrow, a hand, an I-beam, or another shape.
Pointing device A device such as a mouse that controls a pointer with which you can interact with items
displayed on the screen.
POP3 A standard method that computers use to send and receive email messages. POP3 messages are
typically held on an email server until you download them to your computer, and then they are
deleted from the server. With other email protocols, such as IMAP, email messages are held on the
server until you delete them.
POP3 server name The name of the mail server you use to receive your email from your ISP. You must
type this server name when configuring email accounts if the email program doesn't know them
already.
Pop-up window (pop-up) A small web browser window that opens on top of (or sometimes below) the
web browser window when you display a website or click an advertising link.
Port An interface through which data is transferred between a computer and other devices, a network,
or a direct connection to another computer.
Portable computer A computer, such as a notebook or netbook, with a built-in monitor, keyboard, and
pointing device, designed to be used in multiple locations. See also desktop computer.
Portable Network Graphic Cpng) A digital image file format that uses lossless compression (compres-
sion that doesn't lose data) and was created as a patent-free alternative to the .gif file format.
Power button The button in the lower-right corner of the Windows Start menu that carries out the
default shut-down option. Clicking the Shut-down Options button (the arrow to the right of the
Glossary 709
Power button) displays a menu from which you can choose a nondefault shut-down action. See
also shut-down options.
Power plan A group of settings that denote when and whether to turn off the computer monitor or
display and when or whether to put the computer to sleep. You can create your own power plan if
desired.
Preview pane In Windows Explorer, a pane used to show a preview of a file selected in the Content
pane. See also Content pane, Details pane, and Navigation pane.
Primary display In a multiple-monitor system, the monitor that displays the Welcome screen and task-
bar. Most program windows appear on the primary display when they first open. See also second-
ary display.
Product key A unique registration code issued by the manufacturer of a program. The key must be
supplied during the setup process to verify that you have a valid license to install and use the
program.
Progress ring The new Windows 8 progress indicator that informs the user that a task is in progress.
Public folder Folders from which you can easily share data with other users. Anyone with an account on
the computer can access the data here.
Quick Access toolbar The small, thin toolbar that appears across the top of the ribbon in many applica-
tions and that enables you to quickly access common commands (such as Save). You can personal-
ize this toolbar by adding your most-used commands and by repositioning it below the ribbon if
desired.
RAM Acronym for random access memory. It is the hardware inside your computer that temporarily
stores data the operating system or programs are using. Theoretically, the more RAM you have,
the faster your computer will run. Temporary data can include a document you have written but
not saved and have subsequently sent to the printer, or calculations required when resizing or
otherwise editing a photo.
ReadyBoost A technology that enables you to improve the performance of your computer by adding
additional paging file space. ReadyBoost increases performance in a way that is similar to adding
internal RAM, but ReadyBoost is not RAM. Often, you use an external USB flash drive or a secure
digital memory card for this.
Really Simple Syndication (RSS) A method of distributing information from a website or blog to sub-
scribers for display in an RSS reader or aggregator.
Recycle Bin The Recycle Bin holds deleted files until you manually empty it. The Recycle Bin is a safe-
guard and enables you to recover items you've accidentally deleted or items you thought you no
longer wanted but later decide you need. Note that after you empty the Recycle Bin, the items in
it are gone forever.
Refresh Your PC This is a new service in Windows 8 that, when invoked, automatically backs up all your
photos, music, videos, and other personal files, reinstalls your PC with new operating system files,
and then puts your data back on it for you. It also backs up and restores your customizations,
710 Glossary
changes you've made to apps, and more. It enables you to completely reinstall Windows and then
easily put your data back on your machine. This process takes only four to five minutes.
Registry A repository for information about the computer's configuration. The registry stores settings
related to the hardware and software installed on the computer. Registry settings are typically
updated through the proper install and uninstall procedures and programs. You can manually
update the registry, but only experienced users should undertake this task because mistakes can
be disastrous.
Relative path A path that defines the position of a file or folder in relation to the current location. For
example, ..\lmages\MyPicture.png defines a path up one level to the parent folder of the current
location, down one level into the Images folder, to the MyPicture image. Relative paths are fre-
quently used in website navigational code.
Remote Desktop Connection A program included in Windows 8 by which you can access your com-
puter from somewhere else, such as an office or hotel room.
Remote printer A printer that is not connected directly to your computer.
Reset Your PC A new service in Windows 8 that returns your PC to its factory settings. It does this by
wiping all the data from it and reinstalling Windows, after which the computer will appear as it did
the first time you turned it on, right out of the box.
Resolution How many pixels are shown on a computer screen. A pixel is a very small square unit of dis-
play. Choosing 1280 x 768 pixels means that the desktop is shown to you with 1280 pixels across
and 768 pixels down. When you increase the resolution, you increase the number of pixels on the
screen, making images sharper and making everything on the screen appear smaller.
Restore point A snapshot of your computer system settings taken by Windows at a scheduled time
as well as before any major change, such as installing a program or updating system files. If you
experience problems with your system, you can restore it to any saved restore point without
undoing changes to your personal files.
Ribbon A feature that appeared in Microsoft Office programs a few years ago and is now part of the
Windows 8 graphical user interface. The ribbon contains tabs that, when selected, show a related
set of tools and features underneath. The ribbon replaces the older menu bar, menus, and drop-
down menu lists.
Right-click To point to an interface element and press the secondary mouse button one time.
Rip A term that describes the process of copying files from a physical CD to your hard drive. Generally,
the term is used to describe the process of copying music CDs to the music library on your
computer.
Router A piece of equipment that connects two dissimilar networks and sends data from computer to
computer on a local area network. A router routes the data to the correct PC and rejects data that
is deemed harmful.
Screen resolution The fineness or coarseness of detail attained by a monitor in producing an image,
measured in pixels, expressed as the number of pixels wide by the number of pixels high. For
example, 1024 x 768. See also pixel.
Glossary 711
Screen saver A screen saver is a picture or animation that covers your screen and appears after your
computer has been idle for a specific amount of time that you set. You can configure your screen
saver to require a password on waking up for extra security.
ScreenTip Information that appears when you point to an item.
Scroll bar A scroll bar appears when what is available to show on the screen is more than can be viewed
on it. You'll see a scroll bar on the Start screen, on webpages, in long documents, and in other
places.
Scroll up and scroll down A process of using the mouse, the arrow keys on a keyboard, or a flick of your
finger to scroll when a scroll bar is available.
Search A Windows 8 feature that provides searching capabilities. You can use this feature to search
through apps, settings, files, emails, and more. Search is available as a charm, available from the
right side of the screen when called on.
Search provider A company that provides a search engine, which you can use to find information on
the web.
Search term The term you type in the Search box of the Start menu or any folder window. Windows
then filters the contents of the available storage locations or of the folder window's Content pane
to include only the items that contain the search term.
Secondary display In a multiple-monitor system, the monitor onto which you can expand programs so
that you can increase your work area. See also primary display
Secondary tile A special kind of Start screen tile that is created from inside an app capable of produc-
ing one. For example, a contacts app can have its own tile, but you can also create a tile for your
favorite contact on the Start screen.
Semantic zoom The technical term for the technology that enables you to pinch with two fingers to
zoom in and out of the screen.
Shared component A component, such as a DLL file, that is used by multiple programs. When uninstall-
ing a program that uses a shared component, Windows requests confirmation before removing
the component.
Shared drive A drive that has been made available for other people on a network to access.
Shared folder A folder that has been made available for other people on a network to access.
Shared printer A printer connected to a computer and made available from that computer for use by
other computers on a network.
Share A charm that is available from the right side of the screen that enables you to share information
in one app with another app and, possibly, with other people (by Mail, for instance). This charm
can also make local files or resources available to other users of the same computer or other com-
puters on a network.
712 Glossary
Shortcut An icon with an arrow on it that offers access to a particular item on the hard disk drive. You
can put shortcuts on your desktop, for instance, that, when double-clicked, open programs, files,
and folders stored in places other than the desktop.
Shortcut menu A menu displayed when you right-click an object, showing a list of commands relevant
to that object.
Shut down To initiate the process that closes all your open programs and files, ends your computing
session, closes network connections, stops system processes, stops the hard disk, and turns off the
computer.
Shut-down options Ways in which you can disconnect from the current computing session. You can
shut down the computer, switch to a different user account, log off from the computer, lock the
computer, restart the computer, or put the computer into Sleep mode or Hibernate mode.
Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP) A protocol for sending messages from one computer to another
on a network. This protocol is used on the Internet to route email.
SkyDrive A location in the cloud offered by Microsoft where you can store data, including documents
and pictures, among other things. Data you save are saved on Internet servers, enabling you to
access the data from an Internet-enabled compatible device.
SMTP server name The name of the computer that you use to send email using your ISP. You will be
required to enter this information manually when setting up your email address if Windows can't
find the information on its own.
SmartScreen A Windows 8 security technology that prevents malware from infecting your system.
Snap The process by which two apps can be displayed side by side in Windows 8. One app takes up
about a third of the screen, and the other takes up the rest. This enables you to work with two
apps at one time.
Snipping tool A feature in Windows 8 by which you can drag your cursor around any area on the screen
to copy and capture it. You can then save the captured data to edit it or attach it to an email.
Software Programs that you use to do things with hardware.
Software piracy The illegal reproduction and distribution of software applications.
Sound card Hardware that enables audio information and music to be recorded, played back, and
heard on a computer.
Sound recorder A tool included with Windows 8 that offers three options: Start Recording, Stop
Recording, and Resume Recording. You can save recorded clips for use with other programs.
Spam Unwanted email; junk email.
Speech Recognition A program included with Windows 8 by which you control your computer with
your voice. Speech Recognition provides a wizard to help you set up your microphone and use the
program.
Spyware Software that can display advertisements (such as pop-up ads), collect information about you,
or change settings on your computer, generally without appropriately obtaining your consent.
Glossary 713
Standard toolbar A toolbar that is often underneath a menu bar in applications that do not offer a rib-
bon, which contains icons or pictures of common commands. You might already be familiar with
the graphic icons for Save, Print, Cut, Copy, Paste, Undo, and others. These toolbars are being
phased out and are being replaced by the ribbon.
Standard user account A type of Windows user account that allows the user to install software and
change system settings that do not affect other users or the security of the computer. This
account type is recommended for daily use.
Start screen The new Windows 8 graphical user experience that offers access to apps, desktop pro-
grams, the desktop itself, and more. You can type while at the Start screen to locate something on
it or elsewhere on your computer.
Status bar A toolbar that often appears at the bottom of an application window (such as the desktop
version of Internet Explorer 10) and offers information about what is happening at the moment.
Sticky Keys A setting by which you can configure the keyboard so that you never have to press three
keys at once (such as when you must press the Ctrl, Alt, and Delete keys together to access Task
Manager).
Store See Windows Store.
Subfolder A folder inside another folder. You often create subfolders to further organize data that is
stored in folders.
Sync To compare data in one location to the data in another. Syncing is the act of performing the tasks
required to match up the data. When data is synced, the data in both places matches.
System cache An area in the computer memory where Windows stores information it might need to
access quickly for the duration of the current computing session.
Ssystem disk The hard disk on which the operating system is installed.
System folder A folder created on the system disk that contains files required by the Windows operat-
ing system.
System Restore If enabled, this features creates and stores restore points on your computer or device's
hard disk drive. If something goes wrong, you can run System Restore and revert to a pre-problem
date by selecting the desired point in time. System Restore deals with system data only, so none of
your personal data will be changed when you run the program.
Tab In a dialog box, tabs indicate separate pages of settings within the dialog box window; the tab
title indicates the nature of the group. You can display the settings by clicking the tab. In Internet
Explorer, when tabbed browsing is turned on, tabs indicate separate webpages displayed within
one browser window. You can display a page by clicking its tab or display a shortcut menu of
options for working with a page by right-clicking its tab.
Tabbed browsing An Internet Explorer feature that enables you to open and view multiple webpages or
files by displaying them on different tabs. You can easily switch among pages or files by clicking
the tabs.
714 Glossary
Tags Metadata included with a file, such as the date a photo was taken or the artist who sang a particu-
lar song. You can create your own tags in compatible programs and then sort data by using those
tags.
Tap (Touch) A gesture you perform with your finger or a pen or stylus. A tap or touch is often the
equivalent of a single left-click with a mouse.
Taskbar The bar that runs horizontally across the bottom of the Windows 8 desktop. It contains icons
for running programs, your user folder, and Internet Explorer, and offers the Notification area,
among other things. You can access open files, folders, and applications from the taskbar, too.
Taskbar button A button on the taskbar representing an open window, file, or program. See also
pinned taskbar button.
Task Manager A way to access, manage, stop, or start running applications, processes, and services.
You often use Task Manager to close something that has stopped working and is unresponsive,
such as a program or process.
Task pane A fixed pane that appears on one side of a program window, which contains options related
to the completion of a specific task.
Theme A set of visual elements and sounds that applies a unified look to the computer user interface. A
theme can include a desktop background, screen saver, window colors, and sounds. Some themes
might also include icons and mouse pointers.
Tiles Graphical user interface elements on the Windows 8 Start screen. Tiles can be small (square) or
large (rectangular). Some can offer live information, such as the news headlines or the number of
unread emails. Tiles are said to be pinned to the Start screen.
Title bar The horizontal area at the top of a window that displays the title of the program or file dis-
played in the window and buttons for controlling the display of the window.
Toolbar A horizontal or vertical bar that displays buttons representing commands that can be used
with the content of the current window. When more commands are available than can fit on the
toolbar, a chevron (») appears at the right end of the toolbar; clicking the chevron displays the
additional commands.
Transition A segue you can configure to appear when moving from one picture to another in a
slide show, such as fading in or out. Transitions can be applied in other places, too, such as in
PowerPoint presentations.
Uniform Resource Locator (URL) An address that uniquely identifies the location of a website or web-
page. A URL is usually preceded by http://, as in http://www.microsoft.com. URLs are used by web
browsers to locate Internet resources.
Universal Naming Convention (UNC) A system for identifying the location on a network of
shared resources such as computers, drives, and folders. A UNC address is in the form of
\\ComputerName\SharedFolder.
Universal Serial Bus (USB) A connection that provides data transfer capabilities and power to a periph-
eral device. See also USB hub and USB port.
Glossary 715
Upgrade To replace older hardware with newer hardware or an earlier version of a program with the
current version.
USB flash drive A portable flash memory card that plugs into a computer's USB port. You can store
data on a USB flash drive or, if the USB flash drive supports ReadyBoost, use all or part of the
available drive space to increase the operating system speed. See also ReadyBoost.
USB hub A device used to connect multiple USB devices to a single USB port or to connect one or more
USB devices to USB ports on multiple computers. The latter type of USB hub, called a sharing hub,
operates as a switch box to give control of the hub-connected devices to one computer at a time.
USB port A connection that provides both power and data transfer capabilities to a hardware device.
User account On a Windows computer, a uniquely named account that allows an individual to gain
access to the system and to specific resources and settings. Each user account includes a collec-
tion of information that describes the way the computer environment looks and operates for that
particular user, as well as a private folder not accessible by other people using the computer, in
which personal documents, pictures, media, and other files can be stored. See also administrator
account and standard user account.
User Account Control (UAC) A Windows security feature that allows or restricts actions by the user and
the system to prevent malicious programs from damaging the computer.
User account name A unique name identifying a user account to Windows.
User account picture An image representing a user account. User account pictures are available only
for computer-specific user accounts and not on computers that are members of a network
domain.
User interface (Ul) The portion of a program with which a user interacts. Types of user interfaces
include command-line interfaces, menu-driven interfaces, and graphical user interfaces.
Video projector A device that projects a video signal from a computer onto a projection screen by
using a lens system.
Virtual A software system that acts as if it were a hardware system. Examples are virtual folders (called
libraries) and virtual printers.
Virtual printer A program that "prints" content to a file rather than on paper. When viewed in the file,
the content looks as it would if it were printed.
Virus A self-replicating program that infects computers with intent to do harm. Viruses can come as an
attachment in an email, from a USB stick, from a macro in a Microsoft Office program, through a
network connection, and even in instant messages.
Visualizations Designs produced by Windows Media Player that are graphical representations of the
music you play.
Wallpaper The picture that appears on the desktop. Windows 8 comes with several options, but you
can use your own picture(s) or graphics if desired.
716 Glossary
Web An abbreviation of World Wide Web. A worldwide network consisting of millions of smaller net-
works that exchange data.
Web browser A software program that displays webpage content and enables you to interact with
webpage content and navigate the Internet. Internet Explorer is a web browser.
Webcam A camera that can send live images over the Internet. Windows 8 comes with a camera app
that should be able to find and use your camera without any setup.
Website A webpage or a group of webpages that contain related information. The Microsoft website
contains information about Microsoft products, for instance.
Window Programs, documents, pictures, videos, folders, and so on open a window of their own.
Window, as it is used here, has nothing to do with the name of the operating system Windows 8; it
is a generic term. Windows have minimize, restore, and maximize buttons so you can resize them.
Windows Defender A built-in tool that provides antivirus and antimalware functionality.
Windows Experience Index A Windows utility that assesses a computer system and assigns a base score
that reflects the lowest of a set of subscores for the processor, memory, graphics card, and hard
disk.
Windows Live ID An email address, registered with the Windows Live ID authentication service, that
identifies you to sites and services that use Windows Live ID authentication.
Windows Firewall If enabled, the firewall should lessen the ability of unauthorized users to access your
computer or device and its data. The firewall blocks the programs that can be a threat. You can
allow programs through the firewall or create exceptions if the need arises.
Windows Media Center A full-fledged media and media management application. You can view and
manage photos, music, videos, and even television here. This is not included with Windows 8 by
default; it is an add-on.
Windows Store The Microsoft online store for Windows 8 apps. You can also shop for music, videos,
and more.
Windows To Go A way to run Windows 8 from a USB key (or something similar) rather than from a tra-
ditional hard disk drive. This enables you to take Windows anywhere.
Windows Update When set to use the recommended settings, Windows 8 checks for security updates
automatically and installs them. You can choose which optional updates to install.
Wizard A tool that walks you through the steps necessary to accomplish a particular task.
Workgroup A peer-to-peer computer network through which computers can share resources, such as
files, printers, and Internet connections.
XML Paper Specification (XPS) A digital file format for saving documents. XPS is based on XML, pre-
serves document formatting, and enables file sharing. XPS was developed by Microsoft but is
platform-independent and royalty-free.
Glossary 717
Index
A
.aac file extension, 113
accessibility. See ease-of-access features
accessories, 100-103
displaying all, 98
Action Center, 447-450
Change Action Center settings, 451
checking for solutions from, 603
color coding for messages, 450
configuring messages, 450-451
Action Center flag, 22
activating Windows 8, 667
activation code, 648
active window, , 27
Add An App window, 405
Add A User Wizard, 313
Add option, in SkyDrive, 182
Address bar, in Internet Explorer, 156, 157, 163
administrative permissions
applications and, 390
for quarantined files management, 415
user account with, 339
user account without, 456
for Windows Firewall exceptions, 397
Administrator account, 304
running applications as, 565-567
for Windows Firewall, 405
administrator, running app as, 99
Adobe Flash Player, 152
Adobe Reader, 115
adult content, preventing child's access to, 473
Advanced Settings, 68
in File History, 434
in troubleshooting, 603
Aerial View for map, 91
Allowed Apps window
adding new apps, 405-407
customizing, 402-404
removing apps, 407-408
Allow Internet Access To Home Media option, 258
Allow list only restriction level for websites, 473
Allow Or Block Games window, 470
Allow Or Block Websites window, 474
Allow Remote Control Of My Player option, 258
Always Notify UAC level, 392
animations, turning off, 492
Antimalware apps for Windows 8, 420
anti-malware protection, Windows Defender for, 410
app bar, opening, 630
Appearance And Personalize window, 69
app history, cycling through, 631
App History tab in Task Manager, 619
application Properties window, Compatibility tab,
566
applications
app version and desktop version, 22
changing defaults for, 595-599
computer resources for open, 30
desktop for, 20-25
impact of Refresh, 622
installing, UAC and, 396
list on old computer, not installed on new, 690
opening, 6
pinning icons, 21
restrictions on children's computer use, 459-467
running as administrator, 565-567
running those for previous Windows versions, 606
application-specific password, for Google mail, 200
apps. See also social apps
adding to Allowed Apps window, 405-407
applying rating, 244
disabling from running at startup, 592
displaying all, 98
dragging to close, 636
listing page in Store, 238-239
managing for long term, 98-100
obtaining and installing, 239-241
opening, 537
reaquiring, 243
Index
719
removing from Allowed list, 407-408
removing from Start screen, 6
running as administrator, 99
running side by side, 538
swipe to show running, 540
switching between, 631
turning off notifications for, 570-573
uninstalling, 99, 243
uninstalling and reinstalling problematic, 603
updating, 242-245
using, 241-242
working with multiple, 25-35
writing reviews, 243-245
app thumbnail, troubleshooting missing Snap left/
right options, 32
App updates page, 242
.asi file extension, 114
Associate A File Type Or Protocol With A Program
setting, 596
.asx file extension, 113
attachment to email, sending, 137
audio. See sound
audio files, 184
auto-hiding taskbar, 63
Automatically Allow Devices To Play My Media
option, 258
"Automatically unlock this drive on this computer."
option, 526
automatic logon to Windows 8 without password
entry, 563-565
automatic maintenance, 448
auto playlist, 256
AutoPlay settings, changing defaults for, 595-599
auto scroll, 7
AV Comparatives, 420
.avi file extension, 114, 184
AVTest, 420
B
Back button
in File Explorer, 121
in Internet Explorer, 156, 163
in SkyDrive, 181
tap to use, 537
in Windows Media Player, 249
background
for desktop, 60
High Contrast, 486
background color
setting for, 2
of Start screen, 48
backup
File History for, 429-435
Windows Easy Transfer for, 688
backup recovery key, 518
Balanced power scheme, ,43
base score, 269
battery, displaying status, 3
Bing search engine, 155, 156, 163
SafeSearch settings, 473
Bing Travel, 95
BitLocker, 509, 515-517
decrypting drive, 530-531
operating system drive encryption with, 518-525
removable data drives encryption with, 526-529
BitLocker Drive Encryption Wizard, 522, 530
blank password, for local account, 312
blocked apps, in Family Safety, 467
"Blocked by Family Safety." message, 478
Block games with no rating option, 469
blocking all incoming connections, 400
block of text, selecting, 632
.bmp file extension, 114, 183
Books & reference category in Store, 234
booting, from installation disc, 648
browsing
SkyDrive from SkyDrive app, 179-183
Store by category, 235
burning
disks with File Explorer, 581
playlists, 255-257
Burn tab in Windows Media Player, 250
720
Index
Burn To Disc command, 136, 137
Business category in Store, 234
C
cable for Easy Transfer, 688
cache files, cleaning up, 575
Calculator, pinning to taskbar, 24
Calendar app, , 95, 5
adding event, 217-221
Narrator and, 498
Calibrate The Screen For Pen Or Touch Input option,
543
calibration of touch hardware, 534
Camera app, 97, 226-228
CD
burning with File Explorer, 136, 137, 581
ripping collection, 253-254
CD/DVD Player, burning disk for, 581
certification of apps, 238
Change Account Type window, 340
Change An Account window, 337, 340
deleting account in, 343
Change AutoPlay Settings settings, 597
Change Multi-Touch Gesture Settings option, 544
Change Your Password Wizard, 321
charms, 8, 10, 12-16
opening, 286
in Photos app, 78
swiping, 536, 538
chat, 221. See also Messaging app
for Remote Assistance, 612
check boxes, selecting or clearing, 631
Child can only use games and Windows Store apps I
allow option, 468
Child-friendly restriction level for websites, 473
children's computer use, 455-483
report on, 479
setting game and Store app restrictions, 468-472
setting limitation, 456
time limits and application restrictions, 459-467
children, user accounts for, 305
Choose how to activate and deactivate the program
option, for Speech Recognition, 503
Choose Network Types window, 405
classic Start menu, 562-563
Clear option, in SkyDrive, 182
clipboard
equation saved to, 547
screen image to, 631
clocks, adding to taskbar, 559
closing
current window, 630
documents, 633
inactive Internet Explorer tabs, 159
color coding, for Action Center messages, 450
color, for Windows 8 install, 658, 675
commercial security solutions, 419-420
compatibility mode, loading web page in, 163
compressing files, 136, 137
computers
access on HomeGroup, 367-368
confirming as trusted PC, 667
locking, 43
name for, 2, 658
refreshing, 622-623
resetting, 623
restoring to previous state, 443-447
transferring files between old and new, 688
use by multiple people. See user accounts
user account accessible on multiple, 56
computing session, ending, 43-44
Connect Automatically option, for network
connection, 285
Connect Display button, 510
Connected To notice, 222
connections. See Internet connections; network
connections
blocking all incoming, 400
to external screen display, 510-512
Windows 8 to Xbox, 272-275
contacts
backup of files, 429
information about, 93
in People app, 205-207
adding, 212-213
editing or deleting, 214
content, Narrator and, 497
Index
721
contextual menu. See also right-click
forSkyDrive, 182
contiguous files, selecting, 132
Continue option, for restart, 604
Control Panel, , 35-42
adding shortcut to Start screen, 554-555
Appearance and Personalization, 68-69
changing defaults for programs, file types and
AutoPlay, 595
Ease Of Access, 488,490
Hardware and Sound
View devices and printers, 379
Windows Mobility Center, 511
Hardware And Sound, 544
Network and Internet, Network and Sharing
Center, 282
Power Options, 70-71
Programs
Programs and Features, 568
Settings charm to access, 14
System and Security
File History, 436
System, 271,441
Windows Update, 424, 425
User Accounts and Family Safety, , 309, 3
conversation, starting in Messaging app, 223-226
copy and paste operation, in File Explorer, 128
cost of apps, 239
CPU
Task Manager information on usage, 620
usage in idle computer, 619
Create A Picture Password Wizard, 326
Create A PIN Wizard, 332
Create Playlist command in Windows Media Player,
252
Ctrl+Alt+Del, for Task Manager, 589, 617
Ctrl key, for selecting noncontiguous files, 132
Ctrl+Shift+Esc, to launch Task Manager, 589
Curfew window, 463
currency format, for Windows 8 install, 651
Current Profile statement, 351
Cursor Thickness option, 487
Customize your lock screen and notifications option,
37
customizing
Advanced settings, 68-69
desktop, 60-62
libraries, 142-147
Lock screen, 52-55
Start screen, 48-51
with live tiles, 10-12
user account settings, 57-59
cut operation, in File Explorer, 128
cycling through open apps, 628
D
Date And Time window, 559
decrypting drive encrypted with BitLocker, 530-531
default libraries, viewing personal folders in, 125
default logon user, 565
default network sharing settings, 350-355
default power scheme, 43
default save location, 147
default settings
changing for programs, file extensions, and
autoplay dialog boxes, 595-599
restoring Windows Firewall to, 409-410
Default sound scheme, 67
default user account, 305
default version of Internet Explorer, setting, 170-173
defragmenting
disk drives, 573-575
Delete Account window, 343
deleted files, and Recycle Bin, 147-149
deleting
active messaging thread, 222
Calendar event, 216
contacts in People app, 214
email message, 197
file in File Explorer, 130
files with Disk Cleanup, 577
items from SkyDrive, 182
libraries, 146
picture, 81
shortcuts, 553
user accounts, 342-346
722
Index
desktop
accessing traditional, 19-20
adding Show Start shortcut, 554
applications open from, 20-25
backup of files, 429
changing taskbar position, 65
customizing, 60-62
icon size, 629
multiple open windows, sizing to manage, 27
selecting icon, 537
SkyDrive access from, 584-586
synchronizing, 190
desktop apps, 6
running those for previous Windows versions, 606
shortcut menu in, 631
uninstall and reinstall problematic, 603
desktop computer, unlocking, 4
Desktop Gadget Gallery, 60
desktop Internet Explorer, 152
Desktop tile, , 19
Details option, in SkyDrive, 182
Details pane in File Explorer, 137, 139
Details tab in Task Manager, 619
device drivers
Action Center monitoring, 448
for network adapters, 278
Device Manager, 603
devices, access on HomeGroup, 367-368
Devices And Printers panel, 377, 379
Devices charm, , 12, 14
directions, in Maps app, 91
disabling live tiles, 50
Disk Cleanup, 575-577
disk drives
defragmenting manually, 573-575
Disk Cleanup to free up space, 575-577
file transfer from external, 691
for operating system, encryption with BitLocker,
518-525
options for managing available space, 655
space for Windows 8 install, 648
dividers on taskbar, 63
.doc file extension, 113
Docked view, 494
Dock key, on on-screen keyboard, 500
documents, closing, 633
Documents library, 110
.docx file extension, 113
Domain Network profile, 298
Do Not Track signal, 154
double-tap action, 537
speed, 545
downloading files
Family Safety restrictions for, 473-477
in SkyDrive, 182, 186-188
in Internet Explorer, 168-170
for Windows Updates, 429
Download option, in SkyDrive, 182, 186
Downloads folder, changing location, 578-599
dragging and dropping files, 132
song to playlist, troubleshooting, 257
dragging app to close, 636
drivers. See device drivers
dual-monitor setup, 641-645
duration of Calendar event, 217
DVD
burning with File Explorer, 136, 137, 581
Windows Media Center to play, 262
.dvr-ms file extension, 114
Ease of Access Center, 630
ease-of-access features, 485-507
Magnifier, 492-496
Narrator, 496-498
Windows Speech Recognition, 502-506
Windows suggestions for, 489
East of Access Center
accessing, 486-489
Easy Connect, 612
editing contacts in People app, 214
Education category in Store, 234
email accounts, adding to Mail app, 196
email message
attachment, 137
from SkyDrive, 202-204
creating, 197
Index
723
emptying Recycle Bin, 148
empty password, for local account, 312
Enable document review option, for Speech
Recognition, 503
encryption. See BitLocker; See also BitLocker
by network, 294
setting for file sharing, 355
"Encryption in Progress" notification, 521
ending computing session, 43-44
Entertainment category in Store, 233
Entertainment Software Rating Board (ESRB),
blocking games based on, 468
errors, information about, 616
event in Calendar
adding, 217-221
deleting, 216
opening, 216
Event Viewer, 616
Everyone user account, 371, 374
executable files, blocking or allowing, 467
.exe file extension, 115
Express Settings, 3
external displays
connecting to, 510-512
dual-monitor setup, 641-645
external hard disk drive, file transfer from, 691
Facebook
offline messages and, 224
People app to access, 205, 207-212
viewing pictures on, 76
Fade key, on on-screen keyboard, 500
Family Safety, 455
blocked apps, 467
default settings, 459
managing settings and viewing reports, 479-483
messages, 478
online management, 481
restrictions for websites and downloads, 473-477
turning on, 456-459
website, 479
"Family Safety has blocked this download." message,
479
favorites, backup of files, 429
favorite websites, menu for managing, 164
Fax command, 136, 137
File And Printer Sharing Is Turned Off setting, 353
File And Printer Sharing Is Turned On setting, 352
File Explorer, 108
burning disks with, 581
deleted files and Recycle Bin, 147-149
files, deleting, 130
homegroup, 367
libraries, 124-126
lock icon, 526
navigating ribbon interface, 126-131
Navigation pane, 109
Libraries, 125
Network, 119
viewing, 110
opening, 6, 23
after copy process completion, 439
Windows+E for, 118
Run As Administrator option for application, 566
search in, 141, 629
Sharing tab, 369
showing file extensions in, 113
SkyDrive access from, 584-586
User folders, 120-122
user folders access, 117-120
View tab, 385
to customize, 137-140
file extensions, 112
changing defaults for, 595-599
File Explorer display of, 113, 140
File History, 429-435
Action Center monitoring, 448
Advanced Settings, 434
excluding folders and libraries from backup, 433
restoring files from, 432, 437-439
turning on, 435-437
window organization, 431
files, 108. See also sharing files and folders
compressing, 136, 137
deleting
in File Explorer, 130
downloading from Internet, 168-170
dragging and dropping to move, 132
724
Index
names for, 122
changing, 134
opening, 121
organizing, 131-134
permission levels for shared, 372
retaining in Windows upgrade, 668-669
saving, 122-124
for deleted user account, 346
search for, 17
selecting multiple, 132
in SkyDrive, 179
shortened URLs for sharing, 586-588
taskbar to access opened, 21
Files browsing window, 335
File Sharing Connections setting, 355
File Sharing Wizard, 370, 373
files types
defaults for programs, 595
File tab in File Explorer ribbon, 127
file types, 112-117
options when saving, 124
Filter Keys, 491, 629
Finance app, 96
Finance category in Store, 234
Find Computers window, 629
finding
games, 266-268
password for homegroup, 363
firewall
Action Center monitoring, 447
firmware on wireless router, upgrading, 286
flag icon on taskbar, 448
flick action, to move around Start screen, 7
flick down from top action, 540
Flickr, viewing pictures on, 76
Flick up from the bottom action, 540
Flip Ahead feature, in Internet Explorer app, 161
flipping through open programs, 29
FM radio, Windows Media Center to access, 262
Folder Options window, View tab, 385
folders, 108. See also sharing files and folders
adding to library, 145
changing name, 132
excluding from backup by File History, 433
for media, adding to libraries, 251
organizing, 131-134
Read Only permissions for shared, 368
restoring, 437
saving data files in, 122
selecting from Navigation pane, 130
in SkyDrive, 179
taskbar to access opened, 21
View tab layout options, 120
Food & dining category in Store, 234
formatting partition for Windows 8 install, 649
Forward button
in Internet Explorer, 157, 163
tap to use, 537
in Windows Media Player, 249
frequency of File History copies, 434
Full Screen option for Magnifier, 494
G
gadgets, 60
game marketplace, 95
games, 265-275
connecting Windows 8 to Xbox, 272-275
finding, 266-268
requirements for, 265-266
setting restrictions for children, 468-472
Games app, 267
Games category in Store, 233
Gaming Graphics subscore, 270
General interest restriction level for websites, 473
Get App For This Site option, 160
.gif file extension, 114,183
Google mail account
adding to Mail app, 200-201
sending Remote Assistance invitation with, 612
Google, SafeSearch settings, 473
Government category in Store, 234
graphical user interface, for File Explorer, 126
Group By option in File Explorer, 140
grouping taskbar buttons, 63
groups of shortcuts, naming on Start screen,
556-558
Guest account, 304, 305
default settings, 353
Index
725
H
hard disk drives. See disk drives
hardware
resetting, 602
troubleshooting wizards for, 606
Health & fitness category in Store, 234
Help and Support, 632
Remote Assistance, 610-614
Security, privacy, & accounts, 609
Help and Support Center, 608
Help key, on on-screen keyboard, 500
hidden buttons on taskbar, showing, 65
hidden items, displaying in File Explorer, 140
hidden System menu, 562-563, 630
hidden wireless network, network connection to,
290-296
Hide Selected Items option in File Explorer, 140
High Contrast background, 486, 489
High Performance power plan, 70
hint for computer password, 3
History tab in Windows Defender, 412, 415
HomeGroup
Action Center monitoring, 448
computers and devices access, 367-368
configuring, 41
joining, 361-362
leaving, 368-369
password for
changing, 364-367
finding, 363
setting up, 355-361
sharing printers with, 382-384
Sharing Wizard and, 369-371
stopping sharing printer with, 384
synchronizing sign-in information, 190
Windows management of connections, 352
HomeGroup category of settings, 41
Homegroup (view and edit) option, for sharing
library or folder, 369
Homegroup (view) option, for sharing library or
folder, 369
homepage in Internet Explorer, 155
button for, 164
setting, 166
Home tab
in File Explorer ribbon, 128, 129
Move To, 132, 133
New Folder icon, 132
in Windows Defender, 411
for Recycle Bin, 149
home wireless network, 284
hot corner, 12
Hotmail
adding account to Mail app, 198-201
Microsoft account for, 307
synchronizing contacts with Facebook, 207
icons
for libraries, 147
for network connection, 285
on desktop, size of, 629
on taskbar
moving, 63
repositioning, 23
troubleshooting display in Photo app, 77
for wireless networks, 287
importing photos, 82
in-app purchases from Store, 245
Inbox column in Mail app, 196
incoming connections, blocking all, 400
infected files, Internet Explorer detection, 169
InPrivate mode, in Internet Explorer, 159, 166-168
installation disc, booting from, 648
installed printers, viewing, 379
installing
applications, UAC and, 396
apps, 239-241
Windows 8, 647-667
customization process, 657
protection and update settings, 660
Windows Update, 427-429
Internet
storing user profile on, 56
troubleshooting wizards for, 607
Internet connections, 278
for adding user with Microsoft account, 312
for app access to information, 238
726
Index
for live tiles, 12
mobile modem for, 296-297
for Windows install, 664
Internet Explorer, , 96, 22
app version, 152,155-162
navigating, 161
desktop application, 153,162-164
starting, 155
downloading files, 168-170
impact of Refresh on toolbars, 622
InPrivate mode, 166-168
launching, 154-155
new features in version 10, 152-154
opening link, 537
pinning websites to Start screen, 164-166
setting default version, 170-173
SmartScreen Filter, 169
versions, 151
Internet Options window, Programs tab, 170, 171
Internet Security, settings, Action Center monitoring,
447
Internet Security Suite, 420
Internet Service Provider (ISP), 278
invitations
to calendar event, 219
for Remote Assistance, 610
Invite option, in Messaging app, 222
IP address conflict, error from, 607
Item check boxes for selecting item in File Explorer,
140
joining HomeGroup, 361-362
jpeg file extension, 114, 183
jpg file extension, 114, 183
jump lists, 64
K
KeePass, 419
keyboard
adjusting repeated keystrokes, 491
on-screen, 491
synchronizing, 190
Windows key, 627
keyboard shortcuts, 627-638
Alt+Tab, for application thumbnails, 29
Caps Lock+Fl, to read Narrator commands, 497
Ctrl+Alt+Del, for Task Manager, 589, 617
Ctrl+Shift+Esc, to launch Task Manager, 589
for Magnifier, 494
for on-screen keyboard, 628
for touch keyboard, 633-635
Windows+C, for charms, , 12, 15
Windows+D, for desktop, , 19, 25
Windows+E, for File Explorer, 110, 118
Windows+F, to search files, 17
Windows+I, for power off, 43
Windows+i, to restart, 602
Windows key, for Show Start shortcut, 554
Windows+L, for Lock option, 43
Windows+P, for second screen settings, 510, 642
Windows+Q, for list of installed applications, 15
Windows+Volume Up, for on-screen keyboard,
498
Windows+W, to search Windows settings, 17
Windows+X, for hidden system menu, 562
Windows+X, for Task Manager, 589
L
landing page of Windows Store, 232-234
language, 631, 651
synchronizing preferences, 190
laptop
duplicating screen image on external display, 510
installing Windows 8 on, 658
mobile modem for, 296
stolen, preventing access to, 515
unlocking, 4
wireless network adapter, 278
LastPass, 419
launching Internet Explorer, 154-155
Layout group options in File Explorer, 139
leaving HomeGroup, 368-369
Lens option for Magnifier, 494, 629
libraries, 107, 109, 124-126
adding folders to, 145
adding media folders, 251
Index
727
backup of files, 429
creating, 142
customizing, 142-147
deleting, 146
excluding from backup by File History, 433
homegroup for sharing, 357
Read Only permissions for shared, 368
restoring, 437
selecting from Navigation pane, 130
LibreOffice, files for, 115
license terms, 653
for upgrade, 671
Lifestyle category in Store, 234
Linkedln, People app to access, 205
Live File System, as CD burn option, 581
live tiles
information on, 50
Internet connection for, 12
Start screen customization with, 10-12
turning off, 99
Live TV, 262
local user accounts, 55, 56, 3
adding, 312,315-319
vs. Microsoft account
and Start screen appearance, 49
location services
enabling, 90
lock icon in File Explorer, 526
locking computer, 43
Lock screen (Windows 8), , 630, 1, 3-4
background, 38
information for app on, 54
personalizing, 52-55
log files
cleaning up, 575
logon process, choosing, 3
logs, performance information in, 616
long touch action, 537
M
.mlv file extension, 114
.m3u file extension, 113
.m4v file extension, 114
Magnifier, 491, 492-496, 630
exiting, 631
Lens mode in, 494, 629
setting keystroke for, 487
synchronizing settings, 190
Mail app, 93, 196-198
adding Google mail account, 200-201
adding Hotmail account, 198-201
sending Remote Assistance invitation with, 612
sending SkyDrive attachment, 202-204
Mail column, email accounts display in, 196
Make Everything On Your Screen Bigger option, 487
ma I ware, 424
UAC to prevent, 392
Windows Defender for protecting against, 410
Manage tab in File Explorer, 129
Library Tools, Manage Library, 146
Optimize A Library, 147
Recycle Bin, 148
Set A Save Location, 147
mapping drives for Easy Transfer, 690
Maps app, 90-92
Mark unread option, in Mail app, 197
Math Input panel, 546-548
History tab, 548
Options, 548
maximizing window, 27
maximum hours of computer use, setting for child,
460
media, 247-263
indicating location, 249
playlist creation and burn, 255-257
ripping CD collection, 253-254
sharing, 248, 258-259
Windows Media Player interface, 248-253
media controls
for music, 87
for video, 89
Media Streaming setting, 354
menu
of Internet Explorer tabs, 159
opening, 632
Message field, for Calendar event, 218
messages
in Family Safety, 478
in Action Center, configuring, 450-451
728
Index
Messaging app, 94, 221-223
integrating with Facebook, 207
starting conversation, 223-226
microphone, configuring for Speech Recognition,
503
Microsoft
certification of apps, 238
control over apps in Windows Store, 231
sending information to, 661, 678
Microsoft account, , 56, 304, 3
Action Center monitoring, 447
BitLocker recovery key saved with, 518
contacts in People app and, 205
creating, 318-319
fo logon after upgrade, 680
for synchronizing settings, 191
for Windows 8 install, 650
Internet connection for adding user, 312
vs. local user account, and Start screen appear-
ance, 49
password for, 324
security verification information for recovery, 664
for SkyDrive, 178, 585
for Windows install, 663
for Xbox LIVE gamer tag, 273
Microsoft Active Protection Service, 413
Microsoft Answers website, 608
Microsoft Bing search engine, 155, 156, 163
SafeSearch settings, 473
Microsoft Messaging service, 224
Microsoft Office
equations in, 546
file types, 113, 183
Web apps, 189
Microsoft Outlook, sending Remote Assistance
invitation with, 612
Microsoft Security Essentials, 410
Microsoft servers, file storage on, 177
.mig file extension, 688, 693
minimizing windows, , 28
minus sign, on Start screen, 556
mobile computers. See also laptop; tablets
wireless network adapter, 278
modem
Internet connection with mobile, 296-297
.mod file extension, 114
monitoring by Action Center, 447-450
most popular music, accessing available, 83
mouse
equivalent action for touch gestures, 635
numeric keypad to move, 491
for on-screen keyboard, 491
Switch list access with, 34
synchronizing settings, 190
wheel to scroll pictures, 76
Mouse Keys, 491
Move option, for Mail app, 197
.mov file extension, 114
movies, Windows Media Center to access, 262
moving
data to Windows 8, 687
drag and drop files for, 132
icons on taskbar, 63
in Start screen, 7-8
tiles on Start screen, 9
.mp2 file extension, 114
.mp3 file extension, 113, 184
ripping songs as, 253
.mp4 file extension, 114
.mpe file extension, 114
.mpeg file extension, 114
.mpg file extension, 114
.mpv2 file extension, 114
multimedia. See media
multi-touch gestures, 541
music
adding to existing playlist, 255
file types, 113
in Windows Media Player Navigation pane, 252
Windows Media Center to access, 261
Music app, 82-88
music marketplace, 87
Music & video category in Store, 233
Mv Dn key, on on-screen keyboard, 500
Mv Up key, on on-screen keyboard, 500
My Documents folder, 107, 109, 120, 142
My Location, on maps, 91
My Music folder, 83
Media Player and, 248
My Videos, 89
Index
729
N
names
for computer, 2, 658
for folders, 132
for files, 122
changing, 134
for networks, 280
for shared printer, 377
for Start screen shortcut groups, 556-558
for user accounts, 337-339
for wireless network, 293
Narrator, 491, 496-498, 630
limitations, 497
setting keystroke for, 487
synchronizing settings, 190
native operating system space, 606
Nature theme, 61
Navigation pane in File Explorer, 109, 138
Network, 119
viewing, 110
Navigation pane in Windows Media Player, 252
Nav key, on on-screen keyboard, 499
netbooks
mobile modem for, 296
wireless network adapter, 278
network. See also HomeGroup
configuring, 2
files accessible from, 122
information about, 14
resetting, 602
sharing media with, 258-259
sharing printers on, 377-382
troubleshooting wizards for, 607
network adapter. See Network Interface Card (NIC)
Network and Sharing Center, 279-282
Change Advanced Sharing Settings, 350
network connections, 277-300
security key, 289
to hidden wireless network, 290-296
troubleshooting nondetection of, 285
wireless, 282-290
Network Discovery Is Turned Off setting, 353
Network Discovery Is Turned On setting, 352
Network icon, on taskbar, 22
Network ID, 290
Network Interface Card (NIC), 278
network profile, 280
changing, 297-300
disabling network and Internet access for app,
407
and network-sharing settings, 351
Networks panel, 283
opening, 286, 287
Turn sharing on or off, 299
Never notify UAC level, 393
New button, in Calendar app, 215
News app, 95
News & weather category in Store, 234
new tab in Internet Explorer, opening, 163
noncontiguous files, selecting, 132
Notepad
closing, 124
creating and saving file, 123-124
Notepad.txt file, search for, 17
notification area of taskbar, 21
customizing, 64
white flag icon, 448
notifications
cycling through, 630
"Encryption in Progress", 521
length of time displayed, 487
of Windows Firewall blocks on programs, 400
turning off for Windows 8 apps, 570-573
Notifications category of settings, 40
Notify me only when apps try to make changes UAC
level, 392
now playing in Music app, 83
numeric keypad, to move mouse, 491
O
ODF (Open Document Format), 183
.odm file extension, 115
.odt file extension, 115
offline messages, 224
Online communication restriction level for websites,
473
on-screen keyboard, 491
keyboard shortcuts, 628
opening, 501
730
Index
setting keystroke for, 487
special keys, 499
open applications
computer resources for, 30
flipping through thumbnails of, 29
taskbar to access, 21
open apps, cycling through, 628
Open Document Format (ODF), 183
opening
applications, 6
Calendar event, 216
new tab in Internet Explorer, 163
OpenOffice, files for, 115
open with
on SkyDrive app, 182
operating system
alternate as startup option, 604
drive encryption with BitLocker, 518-525
Optimize A Library in File Explorer, 147
Optimize Drives window, 573
Options key, on on-screen keyboard, 500
Organize command in Windows Media Player, 251
orientation options for touch screen, 536
.oth file extension, 115
.ott file extension, 115
Page Tools button, in Internet Explorer, 157
Paint, 101
parent supervision of child's computer use, 455-483
partition
for system files, 655
for Windows 8 install, 648
password
automatic logon to Windows 8 without entering,
563-565
for decrypting drive, 531
for Easy Connect, 612
for Easy Transfer file, 688, 693
for encryption, 518, 522
for encrypted drive, 520, 526, 529
for wireless security, 279
for Google mail, 200
for homegroup, 357, 361
changing, 364-367
finding, 363
improving habits, 419
for local account, blank, 312
for Remote Assistance, 614
strong, 321
Help files for, 609-610
for unlocking computer, 3,43
for user accounts, , 39, 320
after upgrade, 680
changing, 321
picture, 325-331,334
removing, 324
for wireless network, 291,294
Password Hint field, 323
Password Protected Sharing setting, 355
Paste And Go option, in Internet Explorer, 160
PC Settings, 35-42
Ease of Access, 486
General tab
Advanced Startup, Restart Now, 604
touch keyboard settings, 634
HomeGroup, 359, 361, 368, 383
Notifications area, 570
Personalize, 335
Sync, 57
Users section, 310
trust, 57
Windows Update, 424, 427
PDF documents, 115, 183
Windows Reader for, 180
Peek feature, , 30
enabling or disabling, 64
testing, 65
Pen and Touch settings, 543, 545
People app, 93, 205-207
adding Facebook, 207-212
adding new contact, 212-214
editing or deleting contact, 214
performance
encryption process and, 525
of games, 266
of Internet Explorer, 154
Performance Information And Tools, 271, 615
Performance Monitor, 616
Performance tab in Task Manager, 618, 620
Index
731
permissions
applications and, 390
app request for, 241
for shared files, 372
Read Only, for shared libraries and folders, 368
UAC prompt for, 391
Personalization window, 61
Personalize category of settings, 38
personalizing. See customizing
Photo category in Store, 233
Photos app, 76-82
picture password for user accounts, 325-331
changing, 334
pictures
deleting, 81
file types, 114
for Lock screen, 54
in Media Player Navigation pane, 252
scrolling with mouse wheel, 76
slide show as desktop background, 60
for user accounts, 57
changing, 334-336
Windows Media Center to access, 261
Pictures library, 79, 111
adding pictures, 77
browsing, 76
options accessible with right-click, 81
Picture Tools tab in File Explorer ribbon, 130
PIN (personal identification number), 59
for user accounts, 331-334
changing, 334
pinch action, , 537, 541, 7
pinning
folder to Start screen, 7
icons to taskbar, , 21
Calculator, 24
Recycle Bin to taskbar, 561-562
shortcuts to Start screen, 552
websites to Start screen, 164-166
Pin To Start dialog box, 165
Pin To Start option, 24
in Internet Explorer, 157
in Mail app, 197
for user, 119
playing music, 85
in Windows Media Player, 257
playlists, 252
adding song to existing, 255
creating and burning, 255-257
troubleshooting dragging song to, 257
Play tab in Windows Media Player, 250
.png file extension, 114, 183
power for computer, turning off, 43
Power Options window, 70-71
Power Saver power plan, 70
power-saving features, in Internet Explorer, 154
power scheme
changing, 70-71
default, 43
.ppt file extension, 113
.pptx file extension, 113
practice files, , 2
Presentation mode, 510
turning on, 512-514
Presentation Settings window, 513
Preshare Key field for WPA-PSK security, 291
Pressing Windows + Volume Up Will Turn On option,
487
prevention, 423
Preview mode, in Photos app, 76
Preview pane in File Explorer, 137, 138
Print command, 137
Printer Properties window, Sharing tab, 380
printers
sharing
on network, 377-382
stopping, 383, 384
with HomeGroup, 382-384
viewing installed, 379
printing, speech reference card, 504
privacy, Internet Explorer protection of, 154
Private option, for calendar event, 218
Private profile, 298
default settings, 352
problem solving. See troubleshooting
Processes tab in Task Manager, 617
Productivity category in Store, 234
product key, 648, 652, 671
Program Compatibility Troubleshooter, 606
programs. See applications; apps
732
Index
progress bar for file downloads, 169
Properties dialog box
for file, 115
for text document, 116
opening, 631
.pub file extension, 113
Public Documents folder, 107, 109, 142, 354
Public Downloads subfolder, 354
Public Folder Sharing setting, 354
Public Music folder, 354
Media Player and, 248
Public Pictures subfolder, 354
Public profile, 298
default settings, 353
Public Videos subfolder, 354
Public wireless networks, 284
.pubx file extension, 113
Pull (flick) down from top action, 540
purchasing
music, 87
Q
.qt file extension, 114
quarantined files
removing, 414-418
in Windows Defender, 412
R
rating apps, 244
Rating Level window, 469
.raw file extension, 114
Read Only permissions, for shared libraries and
folders, 368
Read permissions, for shared files, 372
Read/Write permissions, for shared folder, 372
Recent Documents area, in SkyDrive, 181
recommendations, from SmartScreen Filter, 418
recovery key, for encryption, 523
recurring event, editing, 216
Recycle Bin
adding to taskbar, 561-562
deleted files and, 147-149
emptying, 148
Redo, 630
Refresh, 622-623,630
in Internet Explorer, 157, 163
in SkyDrive, 182
Reminder for Calendar event, 218
Remote Assistance, 610-614
remote control, of Windows Media Player, 258
removable data drives
accessing encrypted, 529-530
business policies on data distribution, 515
encryption with BitLocker, 526-529
removing
apps from Start screen, 6
tiles from Start screen, 50
Rename Account window, 338
repeated keystrokes, adjusting, 491
reports
from Family Safety, 479-483
reports from Windows Easy Transfer, 690
resetting
computer, 623
hardware, 602
resizing window, 28
resolution
and touch gestures, 539
Resource Monitor, 616
resources
allocation of, 618
decision on overwhelmed, 619
for process, 617
restarting computer
before drive encryption, 521
for problem resolution, 602
in restore process, 444
Restore Defaults window (Windows Firewall), 409
restore partition, 602
restore point, 440
restoring
computer to previous state, 443-447
files with File History, 432, 437-439
Reverse Route option, in Maps app, 91
Index
733
reviews of apps, 238, 239
writing, 243-245
ribbon in File Explorer
navigating, 126-131
troubleshooting lack of display, 128
right-click
for Calendar app options, 215
Internet Explorer menu for, 158
for Mail app options, 197
for Messaging app, 222, 224
for Notepad Text Document contextual menu,
116
for People app contextual menu, 212
Pictures library options, 81
on Start screen, 7
touch screen alternative, 99, 534
Rip CD command in Windows Media Player, 252
ripping CD collection, 253-254
Road View for map, 91
roaming user account, 56. See also Microsoft
account
Roboform, 419
rotate option for touch screen, 534, 541, 638
router, 278
Wireless Configuration menu, 291
Run As Administrator option, for application, 565
Run Speech Recognition at startup option, 504
Run window, 630
S
SafeSearch settings, 473
saving files, 122-124
choosing file type when, 112
default location, 147
for deleted user account, 346
Scan For Affected Programs, 444
schemes, changing for sounds, 67-68
screen display
connecting to external, 510-512
dual-monitor setup, 641-645
image to Clipboard, 631
increasing size of items on, 487
Magnifier to zoom, 491
Presentation mode, 510
turning on, 512-514
remote user view of, 610
text, Narrator for, 491
screen resolution, 643
and touch gestures, 539
screen saver, turning off for presentation, 514
ScrLk key, on on-screen keyboard, 500
Scroll bar for Start screen, 7
scrolling pictures with mouse wheel, 76
search, 632
in File Explorer, 141
in Internet Explorer, 156, 158
of Store, 235
of Windows Store, 236-238
Search charm, , 630, 12, 15, 16-18
security, 389
commercial solutions, 419-420
homegroup management of, 355
password management, 419
removing quarantined files, 414-418
User Account Control (UAC), 390-393
Windows Defender, 410-414
Windows Firewall, 396-399
of wireless networks, 279,283
Security category in Store, 234
Security for Everyone at 7 Tutorials, 420
security key, for network connection, 289
security verification information, for Microsoft
account recovery, 664
selecting
all pictures in folder, 82
block of text, 632
multiple files, 132
multiple items for restore, 437
selections of apps, clearing, 99
sending information to Microsoft, 661, 678
sending SkyDrive attachment, 202-204
Service Set Identifier (SSI D), 290
Services tab in Task Manager, 619
settings
Calibrate the screen for pen or touch input, 534
customizing during install, 675
Find And Fix Problems, 606
Refresh your PC, 623
touch gestures, 542-546
734
Index
Settings charm, , 12, 14
Accounts, Add an account, 208
Change power-saving settings, 71
Customize your lock screen and notifications, 52,
54
Customize your start screen, 48
Power, Shut down, 44
Settings tab in Windows Defender, 413
Settings (Xbox), System, Console Settings, Xbox
Companion, 273
Set Up A Connection Or Network window, 293
setup tasks, prompt at first startup, 1, 2-3
shaking window, 28
Share charm, , 12, 15
Shared area, in SkyDrive, 181
shared files and folders
media, 119
shared libraries and folders
Read Only permissions for, 368
stopping, 376
Share tab in File Explorer ribbon, 128, 131, 136-137
sharing
devices on network, 284
printers on network, 377-382
stopping, 383, 384
with HomeGroup, 382-384
sharing files and folders, 349-387
default network sharing settings, 350-355
HomeGroup setup, 355-361
media, 248
with network, 258-259
permissions, 372
with Share tab, 136-137
SkyDrive for, 202-204
turning on, 660, 676
Sharing Wizard
enabling, 385-387
to share with Homegroup, 369-371
to share with specific people, 371-376
Shift key, for selecting contiguous files, 132
Shopping category in Store, 234
shortcuts. See also keyboard shortcuts
adding Show Start to desktop, 554
adding to Start screen, 552-553
deleting, 553
for Control Panel, adding to Start screen, 554-555
naming groups on Start screen, 556-558
Show Notifications For option, 487
Show Start shortcut, adding to desktop, 554
Shuffle in Windows Media Player, 250
shuffling songs, 87
shut down, 43
shortcut for, 552
Windows+I for, 628
signing out of computer, 43
SIM cards on tablets, 296
size of tiles, changing, 99
sizing windows, 27, 28
SkyDrive, 97, 177-193
accessing
from desktop and File Explorer, 584-586
from web browser, 188-189
app vs. desktop application, 585
basic service, 177
browsing from app, 179-183
desktop application, 584
downloading file with, 186-188
file types officially supported, 183
Microsoft account for, 178
sending attachment, 202-204
shortened URLs for file sharing, 586-588
synchronizing Windows 8 settings with, 190-193
uploading files to, 183-186
viewing pictures on, 76
sleep, 43
settings to define, 70
slide as touch gesture, 637
slide show
as desktop background, 60
watching, 81
SmartScreen Filter, 169
warnings and recommendations from, 418
SmartScreen technology, Action Center monitoring,
448
Snap left/right options, troubleshooting missing, 32
snapping window, 28
Snipping Tool, 101
social apps, 195-229
Calendar app, 214-217
adding event, 217-221
Camera app, 226-228
Mail app, 196-198
adding Gmail account, 200-201
Index
735
adding Hotmail account, 198-201
sending SkyDrive attachment, 202-204
Messaging app, 221-223
starting conversaion, 223-226
People app, 205-207
adding Facebook, 207-212
adding new contact, 212-214
editing or deleting contact, 214
Social category in Store, 233
software. See applications; apps
solid-state drives (SSD), defragmentation impact,
573
songs. See music
Sort By option in File Explorer, 139
sorting
in Windows Store, 236
music, 87
sound
changing scheme, 67-68
for notifications, 571
personalizing, 60
troubleshooting wizards for, 606
visual notification, 492
sound icon, on taskbar, 22
Sound Sentry, 489, 492
Spatial Tolerance, 545
Speech Recognition, 491
access commands, 505
speech reference card, printing, 504
speed of double-tap, 545
split keyboard, 633
Sports app, 95
Sports category in Store, 233
Spotlight category in Store, 233
spyware protection
Action Center monitoring, 447
Windows Defender for, 410
SSID (Service Set Identifier), 290
Start charm, 12, 15
Start Listening command, for Speech Recognition,
503
Start menu, classic, 562-563
Start screen, , 1, 5-7
accessing desktop from, 19-20
adding shortcuts, 552-553
for Control Panel, 554-555
adding tiles, 7
for Windows Media Player, 51
All Apps list, 590
apps management from, 98-100
background color, changing, 48
customizing with live tiles, 10-12
Internet Explorer tile, 154
minus sign on, 556
moving around in, 7-8
moving tiles on, 9
moving to second monitor, 631
Music, 85
naming groups of shortcuts, 556-558
opening app from, 241
opening PC Settings from, 37
personalizing, 48-51
Photos, 79
pinning websites to, 164-166
removing tiles from, 50
returning to, 7, 10, 18
search from, 16-18
Store icon, 232
zoom-out effect for, 556
Start tile, displaying, 562
startup
listing running applications, 593
optimzing with Task Manager, 591-594
Run Speech Recognition at, 504
Startup tab in Task Manager, 619
state of system, review, 447-450
Status field
for Calendar event, 218
in Messaging app, 222
Sticky Keys, 491, 629
Stop Listening command, for Speech Recognition,
503
stopping
shared libraries and folders, 376
sharing printers, 383
Stop Shut Down shortcut, 552
Storage Space, Action Center monitoring, 448
Store. See Windows Store
streaming in Windows Media Player, 252, 258
strong passwords, 321
Help files for, 609-610
736
Index
subfolders, 107
creating, 132
opening, 121
in User folder, 120
subscriptions from Store, 245
swipe, 534, 537, 635
to access charms, 536
to show running apps, 540
switching between user accounts, 319-321
Switch list, 30
mouse to access, 34
synchronization
trust PC confirmation and, 667
Windows 8 settings, SkyDrive for, 190-193
Sync option in Mail app, 197
Sync tab in Windows Media Player, 251
System and Security, 393
for troubleshooting wizards, 607
system defaults, reverting to, 622
system files, partition for, 655
system folders, vs. user folders, 120
System menu, hidden, 562-563, 630
System Properties window, 443, 631
Advanced System Settings, Remote tab, 610
System Protection tab, 441
system requirements for games, 266
System Reserved partition, 649
System Restore, 440-441
launching, 441-443
restoring to previous state, 443-447
system tools, 100-103
System window, 441
system rating display, 271
T
Tablet PC Settings dialog box, 544
tablets
connectivity options, 296
selecting files, 133
touch gestures, 635
unlocking, 4
wireless network adapter, 278
tabs in Internet Explorer, 159, 163
tap action, 537, 637
tap and hold action, 534
Tap, hold, and pull action, 540
taskbar, , 20-25
adding clocks and time zones, 559
adding Recycle Bin, 561-562
changing appearance, 62-67
minimizing window to, 28
pinning program applications, 24
unpinning item from, 25
Taskbar Properties dialog box, 66-67
Task Manager, 617-622, 631
CPU usage, 620-622
launch options, 589-591
More Details, 592
opening, 617
optimzing startup items with, 591-594
temporary files, cleaning up, 575
Terms of Use, for apps in Store, 238
text on screen, Narrator for, 491
themes, 60
third-party software, refresh impact, 622
"This page is blocked." message, 478
thumbnails of open applications, flipping through,
29
Thumbnails option, in SkyDrive, 182
.tiff file extension, 114, 183
.tif file extension, 114, 183
tiles on Start screen, 5
adding, 7
for Windows Media Player, 51
changing size, 99
Internet Explorer, 154
live
information on, 50
Internet connection for, 12
Start screen customization with, 10-12
moving, 9
removing, 50
time and date, on taskbar, 23
time format, for Windows 8 install, 651
time limits
for children's computer use, 459-467
for notification display, 492
Time Limits window, 463
Index
737
time requirements, for encryption process, 525
Timer, for Camera app, 227
"Time's up! It's past the curfew time" message, 478
time zones, adding to taskbar, 559
Today button, in Calendar app, 215
Toggle Keys, 491, 631
toolbar, 12
for Internet Explorer, 156
showing or hiding, 64
Tools category in Store, 234
Tools menu
in Internet Explorer, 164
Internet options, 171
Top free apps in Store, 235
touch and hold action, 537
touch gestures, 635-638
general, 537-541
multi-touch, 541
resolution and, 539
settings, 542-546
touch keyboard
displaying or hiding, 22
shortcuts, 633-635
touch screen, 533-549
Internet Explorer optimized for, 152
Narrator and, 496
orientation options for, 536
right-click alternative, 534
setup, 534-536
TPM (Trusted Platform Module) chips, 515
Track List view, for music, 85
traffic, displaying in maps, 90
transferring data to Windows 8, 687-695
Travel app, 95
Travel category in Store, 234
troubleshooting, 601-625
advanced tools, 615-622
dragging song to playlist, 257
File Explorer ribbon display, 129
Help and support for, 608-610
HomeGroup settings, 359
icon display in Photo app, 77
lack of ribbon display in File Explorer, 128
letting Windows fix problems, 605-608
missing Snap left/right options, 32
nondetection of network connections, 285
problems with common solutions, 602-605
Store landing page, 233
swipe, 538
troubleshooting wizards, 606-608
trust, 57
trusted PC, confirming computer as, 667
Trusted Platform Module (TPM) chips, 515
turning off computer, 43
Turn Off Your PC option, 604
tutorials
on security, 420
tutorials, for Speech Recognition, 504
Twitter, People app to access, 205
.txt file extension, 115
U
UAC. See User Account Control (UAC)
uninstalling apps, 99, 243
unlocking computer, 1, 4
password for, 3
Unpin From Start option, 50, 6
unpinning
app from Start screen, 99, 243
item from taskbar, 25
unsafe file, SmartScreen Filter note of, 169
updates
apps, 242-245
to social networks, 205
to system, Windows Update for, 424-426
Update tab in Windows Defender, 411
upgrading to Windows 8, 668-685
prerequisites, 669, 673
upgrading wireless router firmware, 286
uploading files to SkyDrive, 183-186
URLs, shortened for SkyDrive file sharing, 586-588
USB drive
burning CD like, 581-584
encryption with BitLocker, 526-529
for startup, 604
stolen, preventing access to, 515
USB-to-USB connection cable, 688
Use A Device option, for restart, 604
738
Index
Use Another Operating System option, for startup,
604
User Account Control Settings window, 393
User Account Control (UAC), 308, 390-393
Action Center monitoring, 447
changing level, 393-396
installing applications and, 396
user accounts, 303
adding new, 311-319
basics, 304-305
changing type, 55-57, 339-342
customizing settings, 57-59
default, 305
deleting, 342-346
Everyone, 371, 374
File History based on, 435
Help files for, 609-610
mapping between computers for Easy Transfer,
690
Microsoft account, 306-307. See also Microsoft
account
names
change, 337-339
for homegroup shared files, 369
password for, 39. See also password
picture change, 334-336
picture password for, 325-331
changing, 334
PIN for, 331-334
settings, 307-311
for auto logon, 563
switching between, 319-321
without administrative permissions, 456
User Accounts and Family Safety, 309
User Accounts panel, 309
Manage another account, 337
User Accounts window
opening, 564
User folders, 120-122
changing location, 578-599
File Explorer for accessing, 117-120
system folders vs., 120
Users category of settings, 39
User Settings window
View Activity Reports, 479
users, sharing files with specific, 371-376
Users tab in Task Manager, 619
User tile, picture for, 38
V
Video app, 89-90
Video mode, for Camera app, 227
videos
file types, 114
in Media Player Navigation pane, 252
Windows Media Center to access, 261
Videos library, 111
Video Tools tab in File Explorer ribbon, 130
View Options command in Windows Media Player,
252
View tab in File Explorer ribbon, 128, 131, 137-140
viruses, 424
virus protection
Action Center monitoring, 447
UAC for, 392
Windows Defender for, 410
Visual Notifications option, 492
.vob file extension, 114
voice. See Speech Recognition
W
warnings from SmartScreen Filter, 418
Warn on adult restriction level for websites, 473
.wav file extension, 113, 184
Weather app, , 5
customizing, 10
Narrator and, 498
web browsers
accessing SkyDrive from, 188-189
Family Safety restrictions, 475
for Microsoft account creation, 319
webcam, 226-228
web search, 158
websites
Family Safety restrictions for, 473-477
menu for managing favorite, 164
pinning to Start screen, 164-166
viewing list of child visits, 480
WEP security, WEP Key field for wireless connection,
291
What's New section, in People app, 206
Index
739
white flag icon on taskbar, 448
windows
closing current, 630
maximizing, 27
minimizing, 629, 631
multiple, 25-35
sizing on desktop, 27
taskbar to access opened, 21
Windows 7, upgrading to Windows 8, 670-685
Windows 8
activating, 667
adding or removing features, 567-570
automatic logon without password entry,
563-565
business editions with BitLocker, 515
connecting to Xbox, 272-275
dual setup with other versions, 668
Help and Support, 102
installing, 647-667
color, 658
customization process, 657
location for, 654
protection and update settings, 660
moving data to, 687
online checking for problem solutions, 662
problems fixed by, 605-608
SkyDrive for synchronizing settings, 190-193
touch gestures, 635-638
upgrading to, 668-685
prerequisites, 669, 673
Windows 8 Compatibility Center, 286
Windows 8 Lock screen, 1
Windows 8 setup, 2-3
Windows 8 Setup Wizard, 669
Windows Backup
Action Center monitoring, 448
Windows Defender, 284, 410-414
History tab, 415
removing quarantined files, 414-418
Windows Easy Transfer tool, 687-695
Windows Experience Index, 268-272
Windows Firewall, 284, 396-399
Allowed Apps window, 402-404
adding new apps, 405-407
removing apps, 407-408
opening, 397
restoring default settings, 409-410
turning off or on, 399-401
Windows Is Allowed To Manage Homegroup
Connections setting, 352
Windows key, 627
for Show Start shortcut, 554
Windows Live Essentials, 307
Windows Live ID, 205, 304. See also Microsoft
account
Windows Live Messenger, 224
integrating with Facebook, 207
Microsoft account for, 307
Windows Media Audio format, 253
Windows Media Center, 247, 630
features, 261-262
obtaining, 259-261
setup process, 260
Windows Media files, 114
Windows Media Player, 247, 354
adding tile to Start screen, 51
interface, 248-253
remote control of, 258
Windows Mobility Center, 509, 510-512
Presentation mode, turning on, 512-514
Windows phones, Microsoft account for, 307
Windows recovery DVD, for startup, 604
Windows Security Center, 447
Windows Settings
Time Limits, 463
Windows Store and game restrictions, 468
Windows Speech Recognition, 502-506
Windows Store, 96, 231-245
app listing page, 238-239
browsing by category, 235
defining restrictions for app use, 462
for games, 266
getting app from, 160
landing page, 232-234
Microsoft control over available apps, 231
obtaining and installing app, 239-241
reacquiring app from, 243
search of, 236-238
setting children's restrictions for apps, 468
subscriptions and in-app purchases, 245
740
Index
Windows Update, 424-426
Action Center monitoring, 447
checking for and installing, 427-429
Windows website, 608
wireless networks
connecting to, 282-290
icon for, 287
network connection to hidden, 290-296
wireless router firmware, upgrading, 286
wizards, troubleshooting with, 606-608
.wma file extension, 113
.wm file extension, 113, 114
.wmv file extension, 114, 184
.wmx file extension, 113
working state, reverting to previous, 440
WPA-PSK security, Preshare Key field for, 291
wrench icon, in Internet Explorer, 159
.wtv file extension, 114
Y
Yahoo!, sending Remote Assistance invitation with,
612
Z
Zip command, 136, 137
zoom, 537, 628
Magnifier for, 491, 492-496
pinch for, 541
for Start screen, 556
touch gesture for, 637
Zune media players, Microsoft account for, 307
X
Xbox
connecting Windows 8 to, 272-275
Microsoft account for, 307
Xbox games, 267
Xbox LIVE gamer tag, 273
Xbox LIVE Games, 95
Xbox Live, Microsoft account for, 307
Xbox SmartGlass app, 267, 272
connection to console, 274
.xls file extension, 113
.xlsx file extension, 113
XPS Viewer, removing, 568-570
Index
741
About the Authors
CIPRIAN ADRIAN RUSEN is a technology aficionado and former IT
project manager for a major consumer goods corporation. In his spare
time, he likes to experiment with the latest technologies, learning how
to use them and sharing his knowledge with others. He coordinates
the team of bloggers at 7 Tutorials, writing tutorials for Windows users
and helping them achieve the best possible computing experience. He
is also the author of Network Your Computers and Devices Step by
Step from Microsoft Press.
JOLI BALLEW is a Microsoft MVP for Windows and holds many
Microsoft certifications, including MCSE, MCTS, MCDST, and MCT. She
is an award-winning, best-selling technical author of almost 50 books.
Joli has been working with computers, gadgets, and all things media
since her freshman year in college in 1982, where, even then, she was
aware of her interests and strengths and majored in computer science
and systems analysis. Joli is the Microsoft IT Academic Coordinator at
Brookhaven College in Dallas, Texas, where she also teaches. Among
the many titles Joli has written for Microsoft Press, she is the co-author
of MCTS Self-Paced Training Kit (Exam 70-632): Managing Projects
with Microsoft Office Project 2007.
TVNews
OpenLibrary